Fusion CAC User Guide

Dolbey Logo Dolbey Logo

Welcome to the Fusion CAC Web Application Product Documentation site.

This site is intended for reference by coders, CDS, supervisors, and technical users who need to understand CAC functionality and workflow. This document will explain how to use Fusion CAC, describe the functionality of each CAC feature, identify best practices, and illustrate the benefits provided by the application.

The various chapters within this guide can be navigated using the < (previous) and > (next) buttons at the top-right of your screen, the navigation list on the left, or the search box above the navigation.

Getting Connected

Fusion CAC is a browser-based program, meaning it works entirely within your preffered web browser. This eliminates the need for downloads and installations to offer real-time collaboration for teams.

Supported Browsers

Fusion CAC works on recent versions of the following web browsers:

Google Chrome
Microsoft Edge
Mozilla Firefox

Accessing the Fusion CAC Coding Application

To launch the CAC application:

  1. Desktop shortcut - Some facilities will put an icon on your desktop or in another location based on how you connect to the hospital network. Click this icon to launch the Fusion CAC application
  2. Using the URL - open your prefered web browser and enter your site’s Fusion CAC server address into the address bar. The server address will be provided by your site administrator or manager. It will usually look something like this: https://dolbeyfusion.test.com/cac2

Login Screen Login Screen

Once the Fusion CAC application has loaded in your browser, enter the username and password provided to you by your facility, and then press the Login button.

Account Lock-Out

Five consecutive failed logins will cause your account to be locked out of the application. If you are locked out, contact your supervisor.

Two-Factor Authentication (Optional)

Your organization may not have Two-Factor Authentication configured

Two-factor authentication must be configured for your site by the Dolbey Support team. If your site is not using two-factor authentication, this section will not apply to your login process.

If your site is configured for two-factor authentication, after your first login, you will be taken to a screen showing a QR code to scan or a key to enter into an authenticator app on your smartphone.

Once you have scanned or saved the code to your authenticator app, the temporary code for Fusion CAC will appear in your authenticator app with a title similar to this:

Fusion CAC Dolbey Health Production: heminger

At this point, your authenticator app has been configured and will now give you time-based codes to log in to the Fusion CAC coding application.

To view the time-based code when logging into the app, select the entry in your authenticator app. You should see a long sequence of characters that will change every minute. When you login to the Fusion CAC application, you will need to view and enter this key from your authenticator app into the field beneath the password field.

What if I get a new phone?

Your site administrator or supervisor can reset your two-factor authentication setup if you have replaced or reset your phone and no longer have access to the “Fusion CAC” entry in your authenticator application.

Subsections of Fusion CAC User Guide

Account Navigation

Account Action Bar

Account Action Bar Account Action Bar

The blue bar across the top of the screen is the Account Action Bar. This bar displays specific account information such as the account status,the account number, and the dates of service. Additonally, the Account Action Bar houses buttons allowing the user to compute, cancel, save, or submit the account as needed.

ButtonFunction
ComputeLaunches the encoder. This button should be used to COMPUTE the DRG or view encoder Edits.
CancelThis button will CANCEL any changes made to the account and return to the Assigned Accounts Listing for selection of a new account.
SaveThis button will SAVE any changes made to the account during the current session and return to the Assigned Accounts Listing for selection of a new account.
SubmitThe SUBMIT button will save and send any changes made to the account downstream based on facility requirements (usually billing or abstraction).

Below the Accounts Action Bar is the Banner Bar.

Banner Bar Banner Bar

Patient Information

Information in the banner bar may include:

  • Admit details
  • Discharge details
  • Patient Name – Last Name, First Name & Middle Initial
  • Gender
  • Patinet Age and date of birth
  • Medical Record Number (MRN)
Banner Bar Collapse/Expand

Clicking the patient’s name will collapse the banner bar to provide more vertical screen space. Clicking the patient’s name again will expand the banner bar and the information displayed.

DRG/APC

From the Banner Bar, you can toggle between demographic information and Primary DRG information by clicking on the Primary DRG hyperlink.

Primary Grouper Primary Grouper

The DRG view displays information available from the encoder for the computed DRG. The DRG or APC information will appear on the Banner Bar after codes have been assigned and DRG or APC computed and returned from the encoder.

Banner Bar - DRG/APC Banner Bar - DRG/APC

The Navigation tree sits above the Documents tree on the left-hand side of the Account Screen. The Navigation tree includes hyperlinks, or viewers, to pages within the chart providing summary views of coding information, demographic information, as well as clinical documentation, workflow, and worksheets.

Any Navigation link highlighted in RED indicates action items required to finalize the chart or additional information available for review and reference.

+Add

Click on the +Add Document button to add a document configured based on a user’s role.

Add Document Button Add Document Button

Available document types are configured with the operational/management team per organization.

Documents Tree

Document Tree Document Tree

The Documents tree includes a listing of all documents in a patient chart categorized by document type, as configured by the organization. It frames the Documents tree and is located on the left-hand side of the Account Screen. Icons next to document names in the Documents tree indicate document types. Each document in the Documents tree uses an icon or bolding to give information about the document.

IconMeaning
Pop Out Pop OutOpen document in new tab/window to allow continued access to the document while working in other areas of the chart.
Camera CameraImage/scanned document
Text Document Text DocumentText document
Bold Text Bold TextBold document titles indicate the document has not been viewed by the current user
Expand Code Suggestions Expand Code SuggestionsDocument with engine code suggestions
Black Bar White Text Black Bar White TextArchived documents that contain codes assigned by coders. This document will appear in the Documents tree with white text against a black background. Bookmarks on those documents will also be retained. Doing a Ctrl Click on the document header in the viewer will now show the archive date and time.

For convenience, users may want to pop out the document into a separate window to continue viewing it while accessing other areas of the chart.

Pop Out Pop Out

On the Documents tree users will see a backward and a forward arrow. This will allow the user to move up and down through the documents listed in the tree.

Document Tree Arrows Document Tree Arrows

Document Codes

If the document has a plus sign to the left of the document name, there are codes within the document for review and validation. Click on the + next to a document to expand and show all codes found on the selected document.

Documented Codes Documented Codes

Clicking on a document will load the document in the Documents viewer. Clicking on a suggested code listed underneath the document will take the user to highlighted text within the document that triggered the engine to make that code suggestion.

Suggested Document Code Suggested Document Code

Sort Documents

Sorting documents within the Documents tree is done by right-clicking on a document within the tree and selecting Sort, then Default, A-Z, Z-A, Date Ascending, or Date Descending.

Document Sort Menu Document Sort Menu

Users can reorganize the Document tree by right clicking on the documents. Clicking on sort will allow users to sort the documents within the folders alphabetically or date. Documents can also be sorted chronologically which removes all folders and will organize all documents in chronological order.

Text Document Visual Differences

For text only documents, users can view the differences between two documents. Attempting to use images or manual documents will result in a red toast message advising the user to use a different document.

To see differences, the user must first open a document. Next, they will right click on another document in the document tree and select View Diff from the menu.

View Diff Right Click Menu View Diff Right Click Menu

This will bring up a new tab. The left side of the tab will show the older document, and the right side will show the newer document. The older document will show red highlights wherever something was changed, and the right side will show blue highlights for anything that was added.

New Tab For View Diff New Tab For View Diff

Document Differences Document Differences

Search Button

The Documents tree includes a Search button.

Document Search Document Search

Click on the Search button to open and enter the specific terms or phrase to be found within the documents in the chart. Upon clicking the Search button, a floating window will now open and will fill with all results for the search word. Each result will display the name and date of the document along with a short portion of the sentence containing the word. The arrows allow you to move up and down through the list. This window stays active when using auto-load and will update with each account’s search results. The window can be minimized to a ‘Restore’ button on the Document tree. Clicking on the Restore button will re-open the search window and will display the results.

Document Search Results Document Search Results

After pressing the Enter key, documents that include the searched term or phrase will be highlighted in RED.

Documents Highlighted Red Documents Highlighted Red

Click on the document highlighted in RED to view the searched term/phrase within the document. Each occurrence of the searched term/phrase will be highlighted in yellow.

Yellow Highlighted Search Term Yellow Highlighted Search Term

Expand Documents

Right-click on a document within the Documents tree and select “Expand” to visualize all documents within a documents folder or all suggested codes within each document. The default view is “Expand Documents”, with options to “Collapse All”. This allows the user to see the whole folder structure to see what options they have before they open a folder to view specific documents.

Expand Documents Expand Documents

The right click zoom will not be available for photo documents or pdf documents, since they have their own. Zoom will also not be available on worksheets. This feature is not compatible for Firefox users because Firefox does not support the style.

Read/Unread

When returning to a chart after new documents have been added, documents that have not previously been reviewed by the current user will appear in BOLD text. Documents that have been previously viewed will appear in normal text.

Document Tree

Document Tree Document Tree

The Document viewer is in the middle of the screen to display the document, or viewer, clicked on within the document tree or Navigation tree.

On the left hand side of main header are backward and forward arrows. These arrows will allow users to move back and forth through documents that have been opened in the document the viewer screen.

When a user arrows back and forth, then clicks on another document, the user starts a new history for that option.

If there is a physician on a document, the name will show in the document viewer header, on the popout, and in the Ctrl+ click of the header.

Click on the pop out icon to open the selected document in a new window. The document opens in a new window for continued viewing while other areas of the chart are accessed during the current coding session.

Pop Out Pop Out

Zoom Documents

To adjust the level of zoom on a document, right-click within the document and click “Zoom”. This feature is available both on the main page and in popped out documents. When a user selects a zoom level, that level will be retained for all documents. The last zoom level used before sign out is the zoom level the user will get when they sign back in.

Document Zoom Document Zoom

Code Trees

Upon opening the account for initial coding review, all the engine suggested codes will be listed in the Unassigned tree on the right-hand side under the Assigned Codes tree. This allows the user to view each code with a link to the documentation and context of words and phrases which prompted the code suggestion. If the code has a + to the left of the code, there are codes within the document for review and validation.

Unassigned Codes

Unassigned Code Tree Unassigned Code Tree

There are two (2) different symbols that may display next to the code(s). If there is not an icon next to the code, then the engine suggested these codes.

Code IconMeaning
Person Icon Person IconThe Person icon indicates a user manually entered this code and the system did not suggest it. Hovering over this icon will display the user who manually added it.
Exclamation Icon Exclamation IconThe exclamation mark icon indicates a user manually entered this code and the system suggested it. Clicking on the + next to the code then hovering over the person icon will display the user whom manually added it.

Codes are categorized by Diagnosis Codes, Procedure Codes, and then CPT® Codes.

Categorized Codes Categorized Codes

Alternatively, users can toggle between showing All Codes or just the Unassigned Codes. Click on the Show All button to toggle between showing All Codes suggested by the engine on this account or Show Unassigned to view just the suggested codes pending validation to be moved to the Assigned Codes tree. If there is a code that appears on multiple document types and one of those is assigned, it will appear as BOLD in the Show All codes tree.

Show All Code Button Show All Code Button

Bold Code in Show All Bold Code in Show All

Users can right-click on a code, then either Assign or Edit the selected code.

Right Click Code Menu Right Click Code Menu

Selecting Edit will open a window to review the code, code description, set the POA indicator, and designate the code status as Admit, Principal or Secondary.

Code Edit Box Code Edit Box

Clicking OK after making these selections will then move the selected code to the Assigned Codes tree.

Assigned Code Tree Assigned Code Tree

Left-clicking on an Unassigned Code will open the relevant document in the center document viewer and highlight instances of the suggested code in yellow.

Left Click Unassigned Code Left Click Unassigned Code

Yellow Highlighted Code Yellow Highlighted Code

Continue reviewing all Unassigned Codes until all Assigned Codes have been validated with POA indicator and status.

Procedure Codes

Under Unassigned Diagnosis Codes are listed all unassigned Procedure Codes that have been suggested by the engine for validation. Left-clicking on the procedure code will take the user to the location within the document that prompted the code suggestion.

CPT Codes

Under Unassigned Procedure Codes are listed all unassigned CPT® Codes that have been suggested by the engine for validation. Left-clicking on the CPT® code will take you to the location within the document that prompted the code suggestion.

Hide CDI Added Codes

If a CDI adds codes to a document, they can be hidden by the Coder. When the Coder opens the account, a box in the Unassigned Codes tree will be viewable. When checked, any code added to a document by a CDS will be hidden from the list.

Hide CDI Codes Check Box Hide CDI Codes Check Box

Code Comments

A comment can be added to a code on the document tree, or the Unassigned/Show All code tree.

Add/Edit Code Comment Add/Edit Code Comment

Add/Edit Code Comment Add/Edit Code Comment

Comments will show as a green flag in the code trees and on the code in the document tree. The comment is readable via a hover over; in the document itself, the flag can be clicked to open the comment. The comment can be added to or deleted by erasing the text. The comment will show in its own section in the Notes and Bookmarks viewer, and can be edited or deleted there.

Code Comment Flag Code Comment Flag

Code Comment Notes & Bookmarks Code Comment Notes & Bookmarks

Assigned Codes

The Assigned tree sits above the Unassigned tree on the right-hand side of the Account Screen. The Assigned tree includes Admit Diagnosis, Principal and/or Visit Reasons Assigned Diagnoses, Principal and Secondary ICD-10 Procedures and Assigned CPT® Codes. Once a Coder validates a code from the document or right clicks and assigned a code from the unassigned codes menu, they will appear in the assigned codes tree. All codes on submit within this tree will go outbound to the abstraction or billing system. Codes can be removed from here by right-clicking and selecting unassign.

Codes falling below the 25th position will display within a light purple color.

Assigned Code Tree Assigned Code Tree

Admit Diagnosis

Listed first in the Assigned tree is the Admit Diagnosis. Users can right-click on any assigned diagnosis code and select Assign as Admit Diagnosis to add the code as the Admit Diagnosis. This right click menu will change depending on if you click on diagnosis or procedures and if the user is in an inpatient vs outpatient chart.

Right Click Admit Diagnosis Right Click Admit Diagnosis

Assigned Diagnoses

Under Admit Diagnosis are all Assigned Diagnoses as they are validated and added via direct entry or using the encoder. There is no designation for principal, the code will display as the first listed under assigned diagnosis and will appear in bold text. Users will need to right click on desired code to add as an assigned principal code to see the bold text.

Assigned ICD-10 Procedures

Listed beneath Assigned Diagnoses are all Assigned ICD-10 Procedures as they are validated and added using the encoder.

Assigned CPT® Codes

Following the listed Assigned ICD-10 Procedures are the Assigned CPT® Codes.

Code Editor

An additional, quicker, way to open the Code Editor dialog via the right-click menu right from the assigned code tree. When clicking on the code from the assigned code tree, user will edit only the code along with the position they have clicked on. However, if using the hot key from the unassigned code tree will open a full code editor, since no action has been assigned yet to that code.

Right Click Edit Code Right Click Edit Code

Add Code Set Button

Users have the option of adding codes from a code set for standard procedures based on facility settings.

Add Code Set Add Code Set

Click on the Add Set button to open the Add code from code set window then click on the down arrow to review a menu of code sets.

Add Code From Code Set Add Code From Code Set

Click on the Code Set to view a listing of the codes for this code set.

Code Set Codes List Code Set Codes List

Click OK to simultaneously add all codes from this code set to the chart.

Subsections of Account Navigation

Subsections of Navigation Tree

Account Information

    Account Info Viewer Account Info Viewer

    The Account Information tree summarizes patient demographic information (based on custom system configuration) with data captured for purposes of state and/or registry reporting. To update data fields in the Account Information tree, click on the blue button and select the appropriate selection from the drop-down menu.

    Account Information Viewer Account Information Viewer

    Users can expand the width of the Code Summary tree by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the viewer.

    Account Information Banner Account Information Banner

    Unspecified Code Edit Flag

    On April 1, 2022 CMS made the Unspecified Code Edit effective. This new edit is triggered when a code from the unspecified code list is assigned by a coder. It is the provider’s responsibility to determine if a more specific code from that subcategory is available in the medical record documentation by a clinical provider.

    If additional information to identify the laterality from the available medical record documentation by any other clinical provider is unable to be obtained, or there is documentation in the record indicating that the physician is clinically unable to determine the laterality because of the nature of the disease/condition, then the provider must enter that information into the remarks section. Specifically, the provider may enter “UNABLE TO DET LAT 1” to identify that they are unable to obtain additional information to specify laterality or they may enter “UNABLE TO DET LAT 2” to identify that the physician is clinically unable to determine laterality. If not entered, the claim will be returned.

    Fusion CAC/CDI can support the addition of this field to your account information viewer and send the necessary information, known as the billing note, downstream if required. If this is something that you need, please reach out to the Dolbey SME Team at smeteam@dolbey.com.

    Add-On Modules and Viewers

    Optional Viewers

    The following viewers are part of optional add-on modules and may not be used at all organizations. If you are unsure if a module is relevant to your organization, please contact your supervisor. Organizations looking for more information on these modules should reach out to the Dolbey SME team via email (smeteam@dolbey.com).

      Audit Module

      Audit Viewer Audit Viewer

      The Audit Worksheet displays when the account is opened by a user in the role of Auditor. The Audit Worksheet can be popped out onto a separate screen, allowing the Auditor to have a screen for reviewing the chart. By selecting “Show All” codes in the Unassigned code tree, the Auditor is taken to the documents/documentation supporting that code. This will help streamline the audit process.

      An account can have one or more audits added to it. By clicking +Add Audit a new, blank audit worksheet will be created. These worksheets are numbered and displayed at the top of the audit viewer, along with a date stamp indicating when each worksheet was opened. The worksheet currently being viewed will be highlighted with a green background.

      Data in the audit viewer is only intended for coder education and administrative staff to score how the Coder is doing in a report card. The Auditor will need to add the Coder of Record so that the Coder of Record, any Auditor, or other user role that has been given access can view the audit worksheets.

      Aduit Worksheet Permissions

      If needed, the Audit Worksheet can be seen by a CDI Specialist. The CDI Specialist would only have the option to view and print. All editing, routing, and deleting abilities are not available. Please contact the CAC Support Team to opt-in to this permission at cacsupport@dolbey.com

      The audit module allows for the role of an Auditor within the application. The role of an “Auditor” has the same privileges as a “Coder” when it comes to account editing. More details on audit functionality can be found in the Audit Worksheet.

      Discrete Values (Viewer)

      This feature may not be supported by your organization’s EHR vendor. The Discrete Values viewer show trending data or data that has values. The most common examples of discrete values are lab values and vital signs. The viewer can be popped out into another window by clicking on a little square with an arrow pointing to the right in the navigation tree next to the viewer name.

      Discrecte Values Viewer Discrecte Values Viewer

      An older style of discrete data can be displayed in a Discrete Values viewer. Tabs across the top of the screen display the categories of data. This displays each of the types of discrete data elements, which may vary by organization.

      The Discrete Values viewer has a Filter by Month box, listing the months that contain values. Selecting a month will highlight all the corresponding dates in the Filter by Date box. The resulting values will show in the viewer. The Normal and Abnormal tabs both have this functionality and are filtered separately.

      Discrete Values with a grey header are within normal limits. Each organization sends what is the reference point to determine what is normal and what is abnormal. If a header is display in red, it is considered abnormal by the organization. In addition to the header color, users can tell if the value is out of normal limits as there is a flag that indicates if the value is low vs. high.

      Flowsheet (Viewer)

      Flowsheet Viewer Flowsheet Viewer

      This feature may not be supported by your organization’s EHR vendor. The Flowsheet viewer shows information found in nursing documentation such as nursing or respiratory assessments, skin assessments, intake and outake data, etc. The viewer can be popped out into another window by clicking on a little square with an arrow pointing to the right in the navigation tree next to the viewer name.

      The Flowsheet viewer is the most recent style of discrete data viewer. This viewer is organized much like a spreadsheet. Depending on configuration, users may see major categories on the left-hand side of the spreadsheet (there are many different options as each site is a little different.). Upon clicking on one of these items users will be presented with a grid to the right. That grid will have multiple columns, the first column being name. Hovering over the column name will display three little lines. Clicking on them, will allow the user to filter in order to narrow down the data. If any of those names appear in red that means that at least one of the data elements are outside of the normal limits if there is a range.

      Flowsheet Data Flowsheet Data

      To the right of the name, if applicable, is a reference column. This reference column will indicate if the value is within normal limits. This is data that the EHR system has sent to Fusion CAC. If the reference column is available, then to the right of that is a flag column. A checkmark in that field also means the value is out of the normal range. This column can also be filtered if the user wants to look at everything outside of the normal limits. Next to that field is a date and time column. The user may see multiple dates and times depending on how the data is organized and how frequently it is documented. If a discrete value on the Flowsheet viewer has a specimen, it will show as a beaker symbol in the Results column. Hovering over the symbol will provide the name and site of the specimen.

      Flowsheet Beaker Flowsheet Beaker

      Right clicking in the Major Category column will show a menu allowing the user to expand or collapse all categories. That configuration will be saved for all accounts that have the Flowsheet Viewer, per user role. Note that if a user collapses/uncollapses a major category in the pop-out, it will not be seen on the main page until the user moves to a different viewer and back.

      Right Click Expand or Collapse Right Click Expand or Collapse

      ER E/M Module

      ER E/M Coding Viewer ER E/M Coding Viewer

      The ER E/M viewer is part of an add-on module for any chart with a “Is Emergency” flag within the account properties. If this module is turned on, any “Is Emergency” chart will have the “E/M Coding Worksheet” in the Navigation menu. There are several sections to the E/M Coding worksheet including: E/M No Charge, E/M Level, Trauma, Critical Care, Medications, and Additional Charging. More details on ER E/M functionality can be found in the Administrative User Guide.

      Completing the ER E/M Worksheet

      ER Date and Provider

      The first step in completing this worksheet is filling in the ER Date and the ER Physician fields. Once these are completed, the rest of the worksheet will populate.

      ER Date and Provider Fields ER Date and Provider Fields

      No Charge

      If a patient fits the criteria for “no charges” (for example, a registration error), all other fields in the worksheet go away because there is nothing else to be done from an ER charging perspective. However, other selections from the list will populate the fields accordingly.

      No Charge Dropdown No Charge Dropdown

      Critical Care

      Select appropriate answers to “Is Criteria Met” and “Is Time Determined.” To enter the duration, click on the clock icon.

      Critical Care Fields Critical Care Fields

      Enter start date/time and click on the Update button for the minutes to display.

      Duration Helper Duration Helper

      If there were multiple spans of time for critical care, click on +Add and enter any additional durations of time. The system will add up on the minutes and display once “Update” has been selected.

      Duration Helper +Add Time Duration Helper +Add Time

      E/M Levels Matrix

      The E/M Levels martix is configured per organization. This matirx will allow the user to check what interventions were completed during the ER visit. Once an intervention is selected from one of the columns, that becomes the minimal level and all columns before that will gray out. As the remaining sections are completed, users may see the level advance.

      E/M Levels E/M Levels

      Trauma

      If the case was a trauma, make the appropriate selection from the dropdown menu (pre-hospital notification, post-hospital notification, consult).

      E/M Trauma Options E/M Trauma Options

      Medication Administration Qty

      Based on the selection, additional fields or boxes will populate. Complete the quantities, add modifiers, and any notes. Modifier fields are available in the appropriate sections of the worksheet. The user can add up to four (4) modifiers unless they are using the Solventum CRS encoder, then they will be able to add up to five (5) modifiers. The “Notes” field is available for the coder to track things such as medications.

      Medication Administration Qty Medication Administration Qty

      Medication Administration Time/Modifier

      Update this section with the duration of each medication as needed, any modifier(s), and notes. The user can add up to four (4) modifiers unless they are using the Solventum CRS encoder, then they will be able to add up to five (5) modifiers.

      Medication Administration Time/Modifier Medication Administration Time/Modifier

      If there are multiple infusions (for example, one infusion started in left arm and one infusion stated in the right arm), click on the Action button to create another row to be completed including appropriate modifiers for each infusion.

      Action Button Action Button

      Additional Charges

      Add any additional charges. Much like the matrix, the additional charges section will be configured per each organization to include the necessary charges each organization captures.

      Add Additional Charges Add Additional Charges

      Charges for Assigned CPT Codes

      If the Coder adds a CPT code (otherwise referred to as “soft code”), the codes will appear in this section of the E/M Coding worksheet. It must then be determined by the Coder, or Charger, if the procedure added by the Coder occurred in the ER and should be charged. If so, the fields should be completed. If the procedure is determined to have occurred elsewhere, leave the 0 in the field.

      Charges for Assigned CPT Codes Charges for Assigned CPT Codes

      Note

      When there is a CPT coded added that has no CDM charge, it won’t appear in this section; only those that have a CDM.

      E/M Summary

      Once the Additional Charges section is complete, users will see the Summary which details the E/M level and other charges with the corresponding CDM Code.

      E/M Summary E/M Summary

      When all charging is complete and the charges are ready to be submitted, check the “Send Charges Outbound” checkbox and click on the Save button in the banner bar. This action sends charges out and the account will automatically route to a coder worklist so the rest of the coding that is not charge-related can be completed.

      If the charges cannot be completed for some reason (missing trauma documentation), the box should NOT be checked, and instead, a pending reason should be assigned on the Code Summary. Once a pending reason has been added, click on the Save button in the banner bar.

      Banner Bar Action Buttons Banner Bar Action Buttons

      If the “Send Charges Outbound” checkbox is NOT checked, the Coder will get a warning that ER charges are missing and will not be able to submit the account upon completion of coding. The Coder, in this case, would attach a pending reason to send the account back to the user applying charges to check the box. The account then goes back to the Coder to submit the account for final billing. This workflow ensures that the Coder does not submit an account unless all ER charges have been completed.

      E/M History

      This section displays the history of charges submitted. Click to expand for details.

      E/M History E/M History

      Physician Coding/Single Path

      Physician Coders differ from hospital coders in that they will usually work for a doctor who specializes in a specific type of medicine. As a result, they typically code for just that specialty. These coders will only deal with a subset of the ICD10 code set. Within the CAC system, functionality is built to allow a Physician Coder to code charts just like hospital coding staff. The Single Path coding role allows the user to code an account as a final coder and a physician coder simultaneously. When a Single Path user opens up the detail on a CPT code, they will see two separate fields for modifiers, and they can enter modifiers for both.

      A Single Path role can also be modified from the Profile drop-down menu under the user name at the top of the Account Detail screen, provided that another changeable profile role, such as CDI, Coder, or Physician Coder, is available on the User Profile. When adding or editing modifiers in the Charges viewer, the Single Path user sees the Coder’s version of the viewer, so what is added will be viewable to both a Coder and a Single Path user. The Physician Coder charges viewers are different and viewable only to them.

      Charges or Transactions

        Charges or Transactions Viewer Charges or Transactions Viewer

        If an interface for account charges or transactions is set up during configuration, the Charges viewer shows a listing of charges on the account.

        There are activity buttons to “Save Layout” or expand the Charges viewer. Users can expand the width of the Charges viewer to view more available columns by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the viewer. This viewer also provides information on CPT Codes, Descriptions, Modifiers, Quantity, Service Date, Revenue Code, and Total Price.

        Open Charges Viewer Open Charges Viewer

        Column Settings

        Each column within the Charges grid has menu options to Pin Column, Autosize, and Reset Columns. Click on the Menu icon to view the drop-down listing. After making column setting selections, click on the button to retain column settings for future coding sessions.

        Three Line Column Settings Three Line Column Settings

        Column SettingDefinition
        Pin ColumnAllows users to select the column and then pin it to the RIGHT or LEFT side of the assigned accounts grid. This function works similarly to freezing columns in Excel.
        Autosize This ColumnSelect this option to change the column width to automatically size the width of the column for contents of the cells in this column.
        Autosize All ColumnsTo quickly autosize all columns in the assigned accounts grid, click the Autosize All Columns button.
        Reset ColumnsClick on this option to Reset Columns to their default column width.

        Adding Modifiers to Charges

        Click on the BLUE PENCIL button to open the Modifiers window. Start entering the digits for the modifier to bring up the drop-down listing of available modifiers and their descriptions to select the appropriate modifier. After the modifier is in the window, click on the OK button to save the selected modifier. Continue this process to add all applicable modifiers to charges in the Charges viewer. The user can add up to four (4) modifiers unless they are using the Solventum CRS encoder, then they will be able to add up to five (5) modifiers.

        Charge Modifier Charge Modifier

        Editing Hard Charge Details (Physician Coder)

        A user with the role of a Physician Coder can now add assigned diagnosis codes along with physicians and CPT Modifier codes to hard charges listed in the Charges viewer. When a Physician Coder opens the Charges viewer, new columns with edit buttons will be seen.

        Physician Coder Role Physician Coder Role

        Physician Coder Edit Charge Options Physician Coder Edit Charge Options

        Clicking on the BLUE PENCIL button in the Diagnosis column will open a code field, which when dropped down, will list all assigned diagnosis codes on the account. The Physician Coder can then select which diagnosis code(s) to attach to the hard charge. The top most diagnosis code of a charge is designated the “principal” diagnosis. If you add or remove codes, whatever code is listed first is the principal – the principal code on a charge can be different than the principal code on the account. If a user moves the codes around, the top code will always become the primary code.

        Physician Coder Add Dx Box Physician Coder Add Dx Box

        Clicking on the BLUE PENCIL button in the Physician column will open a physician field to allow the selection of a physician. This is the same for the Physician Modifiers column which will open a modifier window allowing modifiers to be selected. When launching the encoder, the physician coder’s modifiers will be sent instead of the final modifiers in the Charges viewer.

        Physician Coder Add Phsyician Box Physician Coder Add Phsyician Box

        Clicking on the BLUE PENCIL button in the Quantity column will open a field to allow the end user to enter a new value for the quantity of the charge. The dialog will perform validation so that invalid quantities are not recorded such as letters, blanks, and/or a zero quantity. Negative quantities are permitted. Decimal quantities are permitted.

        Note

        The organization must have physician coding enabled to use this feature, if you do not have physician coding please contact your account representative for more information.

        Assigning a Pending Reason per Charge (Single Path & Physician Coder)

        Users that have a Physician Coder or Single Path Coder role will have the ability to place a pending reason per charge on the physician charges.

        • If a charge is removed, then the pending reason would be removed.
        • If a charge is updated, then the pending reason would not change.

        Caution Column (TruCode)

        A Caution Column is avaialble for sites that use the TruCode Encoder to the Charges and Transactions viewers. This column will indicate a flag if TruCode reports an edit on a charge on an outpatient account.

        TruCode Caution Column TruCode Caution Column

        Code Summary

        Code Summary Code Summary

        The Code Summary is the last viewer to be reviewed prior to chart submission. This screen shows a summary of activity on the account and provides activity buttons to Claim Ownership, Show History, and Print Summary (if a printer is configured). This viewer also provides information on Current Owner, First Coder, Last Saver, and Last Submitter. Users can expand the width of the Code Summary viewer by clicking on the arrow in the top right of the viewer.

        Code Summary Viewer Code Summary Viewer

        Show History

        The Show History button provides a timeline view of activity on the account along with an audit trail of account activity from point of admission to the current date. It includes a visual timeline and below the timeline there will be an audit trail of account activity.

        Show History View Show History View

        Upon opening Show History, users will see the entire history from a birds-eye view. The user has the option of using the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to expand or collapse the timeline. The Zoom Fit will bring the visual timeline back to its original collapsed grid. Hover over any of the event boxes and the contents will be displayed.

        The legend can be found by clicking Show Legend to let the user know what the colors represent without having to hover over them. When clicked, it will open the Legend and the button name will change to “Hide Legend”. Click again to close.

        Show History Legend Show History Legend

        Click on an entry by date to view the changes that were made to the account on the date and time indicated.

        Audit Trail Audit Trail

        Admit Diagnosis

        The Admit Diagnosis code and description are displayed below any Validation Results and/or Pending Reasons.

        Admit Diagnosis Admit Diagnosis

        Visit Reasons

        Listed beneath Admit Diagnosis are the Visit Reason codes in code sequence order. The list includes the Visit Reason code and description.

        Visit Reasons Visit Reasons

        Assigned Diagnosis Codes

        The Assigned Diagnosis Codes are listed in code sequence order below Visit Reasons. The listing includes the diagnosis code, description, and POA assignment (Y/N).

        Assigned Diagnoses Codes Assigned Diagnoses Codes

        Assigned Procedure Codes

        Listed beneath Assigned Diagnosis Codes are the Assigned Procedure Codes in code sequence order. The list includes the procedure code, description, Service Date, and Physician.

        Assigned Procedure Code Assigned Procedure Code

        Assigned CPT Codes

        Listed beneath Assigned Procedure Codes are the Assigned CPT Codes in code sequence order. The list includes the CPT code, Modifiers, Code Description, Service Date, Physician, APC and Servier Indicator.

        Assigned CPT Code Assigned CPT Code

        If a printer is configured for the computer, click on this button to print a copy of the abstract for this account.

        Claim Ownership

        Use the Claim Ownership feature based on the organization’s requirements and procedures. Consult your manager for more information on claiming ownership of a chart.

        Final Code Summary

        Final Code Summary Viewer Final Code Summary Viewer

        The Final Code Summary will only be available once the facility Coder clicks the Submit button. This provides transparency between CDI and physician coding teams (if also using Fusion CAC) as to what was coded. When a submitted chart is open again, users will see a new viewer under the navigation menu called the Final Code Summary. This will display what the coders coded along with code status details and sequencing. This data is viewable only for the role of ‘CDI’.

        Final Code Summary Final Code Summary

        Clicking on the header will expand the selection to display the codes that were coded and DRG/APC, if applicable. Any codes with a plus (+) sign indicates the code has not been added to the account. The plus (+) sign does not indicate that the code needs to be added. It is for the user to quickly add the code if they determine it is needed using coding judgment and supporting documentation. If applicable, the code’s HCC designation will show the HCC number and its version.

        Physician Coding Summary

        The Physician Code Summary will display if the Physician Coders are also coding within Fusion CAC, and they submit the chart. This provides transparency between the facility and physician coding teams as to what was coded.

        Physician Coding Summary Physician Coding Summary

        Clicking on the header will expand the selection to display the codes that were coded. Any codes with a plus (+) sign indicates the code has not been added to the account. The plus (+) sign does not indicate that the code needs to be added. It is for the user to quickly add the code if they determine it is needed using coding judgment and supporting documentation.

        Subsections of Code Summary

        Pending Reasons

        Pending Reasons

        A list of Pending Reasons assigned to the account can be found within the Code Summary viewer below Validation Results.

        Pending Reasons Pending Reasons

        Pending reasons are used when a chart cannot be completed or routed to another Workgroup. The number of pending reasons selected is unlimited. Pending reasons will be different for each facility based on system configuration specifications. Please contact your manager for definition and use of available pending reasons.

        Pending Reasons can be added to the account by clicking on the drop-down menu and selecting the applicable Pending Reason. If the organization has selected to allow a physician to be tied to a pending reason, the user will be prompted to assign a physician to the pending reason, and will see an additional physician field in the list of pending reasons.

        If physicians have been turned on for pending reasons, not all pending reasons may be tied to a physician. This option is set within the mapping configuration.

        If a pending reason is added to an account, the Submit button will be grayed out and unavailable. Click on the Save button to save all changes and exit the chart. Charts with pending reasons will stay within the existing Workgroup until the Pending Reason is removed. Pending Reasons can also be deleted/removed from accounts by clicking on the “X” next to the Pending Reason to be removed.

        Pending Reason Notes

        On any account, an edit button will appear to the left of the pending reason. Clicking that button will drop down a note entry where the user can record a note. Pressing ENTER will record the note. Keep in mind that a note can be deleted by clicking a trash can symbol to its left. In Account Search, the “Pending Reasons” drill down will now include the “Note” field.

        Pending Reason Note Pending Reason Note

        Quality Indicators

        In the Code Summary Viewer at the bottom, you’ll find the Algorithm for Quality Indicators, which outlines the methodology used to identify Pediatric Quality Indicators (PDI), Patient Safety Indicators (PSI), Quality Measure PC-06, and Elixhauser Measures.

        PSI Indicators

        The PSI Module uses the PSI technical specification from Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality U.S. Department of Health and Human Services from www.qualityindicators.ahrq.gov.

        PSI 06 in Banner Bar PSI 06 in Banner Bar

        Fusion CAC leverages the codes from the assigned code tree, along with other relevant patient data, to determine whether specific quality measures are met. Fusion CAC provides an indicator on the banner bar when codes coupled with patient demographics meet a PSI guideline.

        The PSI is reported in one of two fields CDI PSI Indicator or PSI Indicator. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting. When a PSI is applied to an account it will display in the algorithm section of the Code Summary viewer. A red tag will display next to the applied PSI for visibility.

        PSI Algorithm Flag PSI Algorithm Flag

        PDI Indicator

        The PDI Module uses the PDI technical specification from Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality U.S. Department of Health and Human Services www.qualityindicators.ahrq.gov.

        The Pediatric Quality Indicators (PDIs) focus on potentially preventable complications and iatrogenic events for pediatric patients treated in hospitals and on preventable hospitalizations among pediatric patients, considering the special characteristics of the pediatric population.

        This PDI indicator displays in the banner bar under the compute button. The PDI is reported in one of two fields CDI PDI Indicator or PDI Indicator if identified. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting.

        The algorithm for the PDI on if it applied or not is within the Code Summary viewer.

        If a code that causes an exclusion for a PSI or PDI occurs in the top 25 codes (or custom limit set by the organization) the PSI/PDI will show in the banner, with an asterisk next to it, to indicate the PSI was conditionally applied. The algorithm at the bottom of the Code Summary viewer will show the reason why.

        PC-06 Indicator

        The Quality Measure Module supports the PC06 measure and uses the Joint Commission technical specification https://manual.jointcommission.org/releases/TJC2018B/MIF0393.html.

        PC-06 Banner Bar PC-06 Banner Bar

        Fusion CAC uses the codes from the assigned code tree along with other patient data that meet each PC-06 guideline. Fusion CAC provides an indicator on the banner bar to a coder when codes coupled with patient demographics meet a PC-06 guideline. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting.

        Elixhauser Comorbidity Measure Indicator

        The Elixhauser Comorbidity Index is a method of categorizing comorbidities of patients based on the International Classification of Diseases (ICD) diagnosis codes. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting.

        Elixhauser Banner Bar Elixhauser Banner Bar

        The algorithm to determine the Elixhauser measure can be found on the code summary at the bottom under the assigned codes. A table under the Elixhauser section of the Code Summary sheet will appear, showing weight totals for each item that triggers.

        Elixhauser Alorithim Code Summary Elixhauser Alorithim Code Summary

        Elixhauser Table Code Summary Elixhauser Table Code Summary

        Validation Results

        When the Code Summary link displays RED , there are validation errors on the chart that must be resolved prior to submission.

        Red Code Summary Red Code Summary

        Any errors preventing submission of the chart will be highlighted in the box under Validation Results on the Code Summary screen. Validation Results within the chart that should be reviewed and validated before the chart is finalized and submitted for billing.

        ERROR results will display in RED . These are hard stops that will prevent the chart from being submitted. The Submit button will be grayed out until errors have been resolved, including pending reasons that have been assigned.

        Warning results will display in YELLOW . These are reminders/suggestions for the user. Warnings do not need to be resolved before submitting the chart.

        Code Summary Validation Results Code Summary Validation Results

        Once all necessary validations results are resolved, the Code Summary link in the Navigation tree will return to black and users can hit the Submit button to complete the chart.

        Denial Management

          Denials Viewer Denials Viewer

          The denial management viewer displays on submitted accounts. Clicking on this viewer presents a form with several fields to be filled in when an account has been denied payment.

          Denial management tracking involves monitoring cases where a patient’s submitted billing chart is rejected by the payer. Various reasons, such as medical necessity, code, or DRG assignment, could lead to these denials. This tool is designed to comprehensively record the specifics related to denial management and tracking. It is capable of documenting multiple denials for each chart, with the ability to log and categorize them for the purpose of tracking, managing workflows, and generating reports.

          Adding a Denial

          To add a denial, select “Denial Management” in the Navigation tree. This option will only be available if the account has been submitted. This will open up the Denial Management viewer in the center of the screen to then click on the +Add Denial button.

          Denial Management Viewer Denial Management Viewer

          Once a denial has been added, a form with multiple fileds will need to be filled in by the user working the denial. The fields are made up of various drop-down options, dates, and financial information about the denial.

          Denial Management Worksheet Denial Management Worksheet

          Auto-populated Fields

          The Coder Field will be defaulted to the Owner of the account as long as it is not a CDI Specialist. If there is no Coder but a Submitter, the field will default to the Submitter. If there is no Owner, the field will be left blank for user input.

          The Root Cause field has a drop down of options where one or more options can be selected.

          Denial Management Root Cause Denial Management Root Cause

          There can also be multiple Code(s) in Question entered.

          Denial Management Codes in Question Denial Management Codes in Question

          Options in the fields above with dropdown lists can be customized per organization by editing the appropriate mapping table in Mapping Configuration. These fields include the following:

          • DenialType
          • DenialStatus
          • DenialOutcome
          • DenialAppealRoute
          • DenialReason
          • DenialCodeChangeNeeded
          • DenialDRGChangeNeeded
          • DenialRootCauses

          Each field (except Comments) can be added to Grid Column Configuration for display in Account Search. These fields can also be used in workflow if necessary.

          As needed, mutiple denial sheets can be created for a single account. To do this, click on the +Add Denial button. As more denials are added to an account, they will be listed at the top of the Denial Management viewer. The denial a user is working on will be indicated in green bubble.

          Multiple Denails Multiple Denails

          Appealing a Denial

          If a denial needs to be appealed, there are separate fileds to track when those appeals were sent, how it was sent, and the outcome of the appeal. A user can track the strength of the appeal as low, medium, and high based on their organizations preferences. Additionally, a comment section has been added for any free text the user would like to enter.

          Appealing a Denial Appealing a Denial

          Deleting a Denial

          If a denial needs to be deleted from the account, click on the denial the user wishes to remove, which will bee in the green bubble, then click on the xDelete Denial button.

          Delete Denial Delete Denial

          Reporting Denials

          For reporting within Account Search, a Denials drilldown is available. This drilldown only reports on the first denial on the account.

          Documentation Reviews

            The Documentation Reviewss module is designed to provide flexibility for sites that prefer a different style of Clinical Documentation Improvement (CDI) reviews or need alternative methods for tracking management reporting. This module allows users to customize and monitor documentation reviews by various topics and types. It is particularly useful when reviews do not fit the conventional workflows of initial, follow-up, or reconciliation reviews, such as for utilization management purposes.

            Why Use Documentation Reviews?

            Sites sometimes choose to add documentation reviews because reporting productivity is more complex than tracking initial, follow-up, or reconciliation reviews. The module’s flexibility allows CDI teams to capture and track additional review types that are essential for comprehensive reporting but might not fit within the standard review categories.

            Standard Review Definitions

            Before exploring the customization capabilities of the Documentation Review module, it is essential to understand the baseline definitions of reviews in a CDI system:

            • Review: A review is defined as a save on an account by a CDI Specialist (CDS) on a single day. For inpatient accounts, the specialist must also calculate a Working DRG. Multiple saves on the same account by the same CDS within the same day count as one (1) review. In other words, there can be only one review per account per CDS per day.

            • Initial Review: The first review saved on an account by a CDs. For inpatient accounts, the CDS must calculate a Working DRG for it to count as an initial review. There can only be one initial review per account.

            • Follow-up Review: A review saved on an account by either the same or a different CDS on a different day, following the initial review. No account will have more than one follow-up review per day for the same CDSS.

            Example:

            Day 1: CDI Specialist “A” saves an inpatient account with a Working DRG.

            Day 1: CDI Specialist “A” updates the Working DRG (does not count as a separate review since it is within the same day).

            Day 2: CDI Specialist “B” saves the account with the same Working DRG (counts as a follow-up review).

            Day 3: CDI Specialist “A” saves the account with the same Working DRG.

            Day 3: CDI Specialist “B” saves the account with a different Working DRG (counts as a follow-up review).

            In this scenario, there is one initial review and three follow-up reviews. The change made by CDI Specialist “A” on Day 1 does not count as a follow-up because it occurred on the same day as the initial review.

            Customizing Documentation Reviews

            By default, the Documentation Review module includes a free-form text field, allowing CDI specialists to capture detailed information about their reviews. However, sites can further customize the module by creating forms specific to different review types, enabling more structured and consistent data entry.

            Creating Custom Forms

            Using the Worksheet Designer, sites can create tailored forms for different documentation review types. These forms can help standardize data collection and improve reporting accuracy. Some common examples of custom review types include:

            • MD Advisor Response
            • Query Opportunity Reply
            • Coder Question Response
            • Post-Discharge Follow-up
            • Pre-Bill Review
            • Retrospective Query Needed
            • Query Review
            • Case Management Review
            • Quality Improvement (QI) Review
            • Utilization Review
            • Types of Reviews

            Custom reviews allow CDI teams to track reviews that fall outside of traditional CDI workflows. These reviews can be particularly useful for:

            • Post-Discharge and Pre-Bill Reviews: These reviews focus on ensuring documentation accuracy and completeness before the billing process, helping to reduce denials and optimize revenue capture.
            • Query and Retrospective Reviews: These reviews allow CDI teams to capture follow-up actions taken after initial queries or when additional queries are required after discharge outside of a traditional review.
            • Utilization Management Reviews: These reviews may not fit into the standard initial or follow-up workflows but are crucial for tracking how effectively hospital resources are used and ensuring proper reimbursement.
            • Reporting and Productivity: Tracking productivity for non-standard reviews (such as utilization reviews or post-discharge follow-ups) can be more complex than traditional reviews. Customizing the module allows sites to generate more meaningful reports that reflect the variety of documentation efforts made by CDI teams.

            In the CDI Summary section of the dashboard, counts of reviews are displayed, such as “In the Last 7 Days,” excluding the current day. This allows for real-time tracking of CDI efforts and helps managers assess team productivity.

            CDI Productivity by Review Type

            This report shows productivity by each user by custom documentation review type.

            CDI Detailed by Review

            This report provides details about the custom documentation review type of CDI reviews performed by account.

            Unlike the CDI Worksheet which is located under the Document tree, the Documentation Reviewss section is found on the Navigation tree within the user interface. This distinction allows easy access to reviews that are separate from the standard CDI workflows and documents.

            Steps to Access Documentation Reviews

            1. Locate the Navigation tree: Once logged into the system, navigate to the left-hand side of the screen where the Navigation tree is displayed.
            2. Select Documentation Review: Under the Navigation tree, will be the Documentation Reviews section. Click on it to open the review interface.

            Documentation Reviews Documentation Reviews

            1. Adding a New Review: Upon opening the Documentation Reviews viewer, there will be the option to +Add Review. This allows the user to select the specific review type from the list of available choices. The choices available are customized per organization and can include any form types an organization has designed.

            Documentation Reviews Documentation Reviews

            Documentation Reviews Documentation Reviews

            DRG Reconciliation

              The DRG Reconciliation viewer displays the differences between the last known Working DRG and the Final DRG coded by a Coder, with symbols indicating the discrepancies. The viewer updates in real time and does not store historical information. If the Coder updates the DRG, the changes will reflect immediately in the DRG Reconciliation viewer. For historical data, please refer to reports.

              DRG Reconciliation Viewer DRG Reconciliation Viewer

              Impact Queries

                Impact Queries Viewer Impact Queries Viewer

                The Impact Queries Viewer is designed exclusively for CDI teams. This tool may not be necessary for all customers, but it serves a specific purpose for those who use it. CDI teams often issue multiple queries per account and require a way to track the impact of each query distinctly. This viewer allows teams to determine whether the impact of a query accounts for the total change in the account or if it shares this impact with other queries.

                Purpose and Use

                • Impact Tracking: Allows CDI specialists to clearly see the account impact of each query, from the initial baseline to the final assessment after all queries.
                • Impact Assignment: Within each query, CDI specialists can assign a percentage to quantify the impact of the query on the account. This percentage is then translated into a dollar value attributed to the query.

                This feature helps prevent double-counting and overestimating the impact that CDI claims on an account. After coding is completed, CDI specialists must revisit and reassess the account to determine and specify the precise impact each query had.

                By using the Impact Queries Viewer, CDI teams can ensure more accurate and accountable query impact assessments, contributing to more precise documentation and reimbursement processes.

                To access the Impact Queries Viewer, the user must have a CDI role AND there must be at least one (1) query sent by a CDI user.

                Displayed at the top of the viewer is the Baseline, Working and Final DRG. The account impact equals Final DRG – Baseline DRG.

                Impact Queries Viewer Impact Queries Viewer

                Clicking on the View Codes button in either the Baseline or Working DRG boxes will take the user to the Working CDI History viewer to allow the user to view how the CDS developed their DRG at different stages. Clicking on the View Codes button in the Final DRG box will take the user to the Final Code Summary viewer to show the user how the account was final coded by the Coder.

                To review the query that was assigned, click on the BLUE ENVELOPE . This will open the query in a dialouge box.

                To assign the impact of the query, the user will enter a percentage in the “Assigned Impact %” field. This will autocalculate the following fileds:

                • Total Impact %
                • Remaining Impact $
                • Remaining Impact Weight
                • Assigned Impact &
                • Assigned Impact Wgt.
                FieldDefinition
                Total Impact %This the % of the impact assigned to queries it can never exceed 100% but, it is allowed to be less than 100%. The impact % must be assigned in the assigned impact % field per each query.
                Remaining Impact $This is the account impact dollars left to divy out. Think about this like a bank account if the account impact between the baseline and final DRG is $10,000 it should start off with $10,000 then if we assign 50% of the account impact to the first query then it would reduce to $5k and so on.
                Remaining Impact WeightThis is the same concept as Remaining Impact $ we have a field for Remaining impact weight since some sites do not have reimbursement dollars in the system.
                Assigned Impact %This is the % of the account impact you are assigning per query.
                Assigned Impact $This is the $ of the account impact you are assigning per query based upon the % you placed in the assigned impact % field that pulls from the remaining impact $.
                Assigned Impact Wgt.This is the weight of the account impact you are assigning per query based upon the % you placed in the assigned impact % field that pulls from the remaining impact weight.
                TemplateThis is the query template you are assigning impact to. Only queries issues by CDI will display here.
                Query ReasonThis is the query reason to assigned to the query template.
                Pre-DrgThis is the pre-DRG assigned to the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                Post-DrgThis is the post-DRG assigned to the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                Shift ReasonsThis is the shift reasons assigned to the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                StatusThis is the status of the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                Impact Assignment

                For guidelines on how to quantify the impact of a query, or queries, Users should contact their supervisor for any internal policies and procedures.

                Audit Worksheet

                Starting an Audit

                The pre-audit codes and DRG are displayed for easy reference by the Auditor. The Auditor conducts the review (see steps 1-9) and makes changes to the codes in the Assigned code tree.

                Audit Worksheet Audit Worksheet

                Step 1

                Ensure the current user role is set to have the Auditor role as well as Chart Access of Auditor. Audit Rolle and Chart Access Audit Rolle and Chart Access

                Step 2

                Open a chart that has been submitted by a Coder. This may come from a worklist or by manually typing in an account number.

                Step 3

                On the Navigation tree select the viewer called “Audit Worksheet”, then click the +Add Audit button to begin.

                Add Audit Add Audit

                DRG Required

                A DRG must be computed by a user before an audit can be started.

                Step 4

                Select the appropriate audit type from the dropdown. This will be used for reporting on the types of audit performed and can also be used for workflow purposes. Audit Types Audit Types

                Step 5

                The codes in the Assigned code tree are the same codes initially submitted by the Coder, allowing the Auditor to start the audit with the codes from the Coder. The Audit viewer can be popped out onto a separate screen, allowing the Auditor to have a screen for reviewing the chart. Selecting “Show All” codes in the Unassigned code tree and then clicking on the codes assigned, the Auditor will load the documentation supporting that code. This will help streamline the audit process. Show All Button Show All Button

                Step 6

                Once the Auditor has made changes and is completed with the audit, they can click “Update Codes” which automatically calculates and populates the audit statistics section. There is a comment bubble next to each code as well as the DRG for the Auditor to enter any comment(s). A symbol may display next to the codes. - A green ‘plus’ sign will show if the code was added. Green Plus Green Plus - A red ‘minus’ sign will show if a code was deleted. Red Minus Red Minus - A orange up or down ‘arrow’ sign will appear if the code location has been changed, as in a primary and secondary are swapped. Orange Arrow Orange Arrow

                Step 7

                Although audit statistics have been automatically calculated and populated, the Auditor must manually enter in the “Total Errors” which then automatically calculates the “Error Rate”.

                Note

                Because of its importance, and to include principal diagnosis changes in the error rate, changing the principal diagnosis counts as two errors intentionally.

                • One error for changing a diagnosis code.
                • A second error if the principal diagnosis is incorrect.

                For an account with only two diagnosis codes, the error rate when the principal code is changed is 2 out of 3. If on the same account the Auditor says the principal is correct and only changes the secondary code, the error rate is 1 out of 3.

                Step 8

                Complete additional sections as needed.

                Abstracting

                The Audit viewer also allows Auditors to review the abstraction performed by the Coder. Abstraction is managed on the Account Information page, and the specific fields audited can be customized. By default, the system audits the discharge disposition, but additional fields—such as point of origin, admit type, admit source, or others can be included upon request. To enable auditing for additional fields, contact the CAC Support Team (CACsupport@dolbey.com).

                Audit Abstraction Audit Abstraction

                Once the desired fields are configured, the Auditor can make any necessary corrections directly in the Account Information viewer. Click on the Update Codes buttong next to the Auditor Outcome. This will cause the system to compare the updated information against the Coder’s original entries and include the selected Account Information fields for auditing.

                Before: Audit Abstraction Before Audit Abstraction Before Audit Abstraction Before Audit Abstraction Before

                After: Audit Abstraction After Audit Abstraction After Audit Abstraction After Audit Abstraction After

                Charges

                The Audit viewer also enables users to audit hard charges, but this functionality requires a configuration change by the CAC Support Team. To enable this capability, provide the CAC Support Team with the specific revenue codes to audit, as not all charges in the Charges or Transaction viewer will require auditing. Commonly audited revenue codes include 450 and 762, but others may apply depending on organizational needs.

                Once the specified revenue codes are provided and configured, the Audit viewer will flag accounts containing charges that match the selected codes. When an audit is initiated, the user will see sections for “Charge Codes” listed under both the Coder Outcome and Auditor Outcome. Below these outcomes there will be a section for “Audited Charges,” where changes amde to the charges can be recorded.

                Audit Charges Audit Charges

                Updated Charges

                It is important to note that most interfaces do not allow updated charges to be sent outbound. Therefore, the Auditor must manually record any changes on the audit worksheet. Changes can be made by directly editing the field or clicking the pencil icon, which launches the encoder, allowing the Auditor to look up CPT codes. The Auditor can also add modifiers, change the revenue code, or adjust the service date as needed.

                Training Recommendations

                At the conclusion of the audit, the Auditor can list any recommended training topics. If no recommendations are necessary, “None” should be indicated. These topics can be modified using the mapping table. Additionally, the Auditor has space to provide any additional details as needed.

                Training Recommendations Training Recommendations

                Auditor Outcome

                Auditor Outcome Auditor Outcome

                Step 9

                The Auditor can then re-submit the chart or route it back to the Coder of Record by using the Route to Coder button in the top right corner of the audit worksheet. This will route the chart to the Coder’s You worklist for the Coder to complete the Coder Acknowledgement section.

                Route to Coder Route to Coder

                Missed Queries

                This section will only be available if queries were initiated after the audit began. The query does not have to be initiated by the Auditor to be attributed to the audit as a missed opportunity.

                Missed Queries Missed Queries

                Multiple Audits per Account

                An account can have one or more audits added to it. Clicking the +Add Audit button will create a new, blank audit worksheet. These worksheets are numbered and displayed at the top of the Audit viewer, along with a date stamp indicating when each worksheet was opened. The worksheet currently being viewed will be highlighted with a green background.

                Multiple Audits Multiple Audits

                Coder Acknowledgement

                If there are changes for the Coder to address post-audit, the Auditor will route the chart back to the Coder by clicking on the Route to Coder button.

                When the Coder opens the chart to review, there will be a “Coder Acknowledgement” section. This section gives the Coder the opportunity to either agree with the audit or to provide a rebuttal. If the Coder selects the outcome to be a rebuttal the Coder must provide a comment for the Auditor. Once the Coder has added their comments they will route the chart back to the Auditor by clicking on the Return to Auditor button.

                Coder Acknowledgement Coder Acknowledgement

                Once the chart is returned to the Auditor, there are a few actions the Auditor can take based on the Coder Acknowledgement response:

                1. Review the rebuttal, select agree, and finish the audit.
                2. Review the rebuttal, select disagree, and finish the audit OR initiate the Audit Escalation process.

                Audit Escalation

                The Audit Escalation feature is triggered when the Coder’s outcome results in a rebuttal, and the Auditor disagrees with the rebuttal and further action may need to be taken. In this case, a section labeled “Escalation Requested” becomes available. The Auditor can activate this section to indicate that an escalation is necessary. Once this is set, an additional section called Audit Escalation will appear. This section allows the user to document the outcome of the escalation and provides a designated space for comments related to the escalation.

                Audit Escalation Audit Escalation

                This feature is governed by role-based permissions in the Role Management settings. Within Role Management, there is an option to specify who has the ability to edit the Audit Escalation section.

                If a coding manager or another designated individual is responsible for responding to escalations, they must meet the following requirements:

                1. Audit View Access: The user’s role must include permissions to view audits.
                2. Audit Role Setting: The role assigned to the user must have the Audit option enabled in the top-right corner of Role Management.
                3. Edit Escalation Access: The user must also have explicit permission to edit escalations, as defined within the Role Management settings.

                These permissions ensure that only authorized individuals can manage and resolve the escalation process effectively.s

                Finishing an Audit

                To finish an audit, whether it goes through a rebuttal process or not, the Auditor would simiply click on the Finish Audit button. This closes the audit, but the Auditor has the option to re-open the audit as needed.

                Matched Criteria

                Matched Criteria Viewer Matched Criteria Viewer

                CDI Users Only

                The Matched Criteria viewer is only visible if the active role is CDI Specialist.

                The Matched Criteria viewer allows a user to see why the chart was routed to them. The matched criteria group is a list of “Criteria Group” that the chart matched upon when it went through workflow. These criteria groups are used to indicate a “possible” query opportunity based upon the criteria outlined in workflow.

                Matched Criteria Matched Criteria

                Prioritizing Workflow using Matched Criteria

                Matched Criteria can be used to prioritize workflow using one of two fields:

                1. Criteria Group - This field will tell the name of the criteria that the workflow routed the chart to the CDI users. Often times the field is renamed to “Routed Reason” because this field represents why the chart was routed to the user. If the chart matches multiple criteria groups the criteria group that is displayed in this field is the first one that it matched. All others that it matched with will display within the Matched Criteria viewer when the chart is opened.

                2. Active Matched Criteria Groups - This is often renamed as “Opportunities” and is defined as the number of matched criteria groups the chart matched with, which reflects the total number of possible query opportunities currently present on the patient chart. This field can be used by the CDI user to sort the worklist based upon the charts that have the most to least possible query opportunities.

                Once a CDI user validates a criteria group by checking the box next to its name in the Matched Criteria viewer, that criterion is removed from consideration for routing purposes. However, this does not affect other criteria that may still be active in the workflow.

                If multiple worklists contain the same matched criteria group names and a chart has already had a prior matched criteria group with the same name validated, it will not be retriggered or displayed in the Matched Criteria viewer.

                Matched Criteria Routing Options Matched Criteria Routing Options

                Medications

                Medications Viewer Medications Viewer

                A Medication Administration Record (MAR, or eMAR for electronic versions), commonly referred to as a drug chart, is the report that serves as a legal record of the drugs administered to a patient at a facility by a health care professional. The MAR is a part of a patient’s permanent record on their medical chart. The health care professional signs off on the record at the time that the drug or device is administered.

                Open Medications Viewer Open Medications Viewer

                Activity Buttons

                There are activity buttons to “Save Layout” or expand the Medications viewer. Users can expand the width of the Medications viewer to view more available columns by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the viewer. This viewer also provides columns that can be sorted or filtered based on the user’s need. The columns include the medication Group, Category, Medication name, Dosage, Route, Rx#, Start Date/Time, and End Date/Time.

                Medications Activity Buttons Medications Activity Buttons

                Column Settings

                Each column within the Medications grid has menu options to Pin Column, Autosize, and Reset Columns. Click on the Menu icon to view the drop-down listing. After making column setting selections, click on the button to retain column settings for future coding sessions.

                Column SettingDefinition
                Pin ColumnAllows users to select the column and then pin it to the RIGHT or LEFT side of the assigned accounts grid. This function works similarly to freezing columns in Excel.
                Autosize This ColumnSelect this option to change the column width to automatically size the width of the column for contents of the cells in this column.
                Autosize All ColumnsTo quickly autosize all columns in the assigned accounts grid, click the Autosize All Columns button.
                Reset ColumnsClick on this option to Reset Columns to their default column width.

                Notes & Bookmarks

                  Notes & Bookmarks becomes visible in the center viewer after clicking on the hyperlink from the Navigation tree. This viewer presents a summary and chronological history of all notes and bookmarks added to an account. Users can expand the width of the Code Summary viewer by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the viewer.

                  Notes & Bookmarks Viewer Notes & Bookmarks Viewer

                  Notes

                  Notes can be added to the patient chart by clicking on the +Add Note button within the Notes & Bookmarks viewer.

                  +Add Note +Add Note

                  When notes or bookmarks are applied to the chart, the Notes and Bookmarks link in the Navigation tree will turn red.

                  Red Notes & Bookmarks Viewer Red Notes & Bookmarks Viewer

                  The columns in the Notes & Bookmarks viewer include the following:

                  • Action - Notes can be deleted, edited, or made private.
                  • Type - This will show if it is a Note or a Bookmark.
                  • Create Date/Time - This is a timestampe of when the Note or Bookmark was created.
                  • Created By - This shows the user’s name
                  • Role - This shows the user’s role, which will be the role they were logged in as when they made the note if they have multiple roles.
                  • Comment - This is the section where the user made the note.

                  The columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order. The column that is sorted will have a green arrow next to the column name. This is helpful if the user is looking for a note or bookmark by a specific date, user, or user role as an example.

                  Columns Columns

                  Account Notes also have formatting options for text. Highlighting the text displays a pop-up with formatting options. A user can now select text in those areas and can change the styles of text.

                  Formatting Notes & Bookmarks Formatting Notes & Bookmarks

                  Users have the option to make notes publicly visible among all users by clicking on the checkbox. Even if an end user marks a note/bookmark as private, users with the role of administrator or manager can still see private comments. This feature allows for a manager to review a patient chart and if they do not want the existing public note to show in the account note, they can change an existing note to private without putting in a new note. Then they have to make it public, then switch it to private in order to have the account note blank.

                  To keep your Comment box open while continuing to work on the chart, click on the Minimize Editor button. This will move a placeholder to the Accounts Action Bar.

                  Minimize Editor Button Minimize Editor Button Restore Notes Editor Button Restore Notes Editor Button

                  Bookmarks

                  Users can add a bookmark to a document by highlighting the relevant word(s), phrase or location within the text and then right-clicking to open the Bookmark menu.

                  Right Click to Add Bookmark Right Click to Add Bookmark

                  From the Bookmark menu, select Bookmark to open the Note window to add your note for this bookmark. Add the note for your bookmark in the Note text box, then click the checkmark button to save the bookmark with your note for future reference. Bookmarks within documents will have the bookmark icon. To view bookmarks from within a document, click on the green icon to open and view the bookmark note.

                  Green Bookmark Icon Green Bookmark Icon

                  To review all bookmarks within a chart, go to Notes & Bookmarks in the Navigation tree. All of the bookmarks within the chart are listed in the Notes & Bookmarks viewer.

                  Sample Notes & Bookmarks List Sample Notes & Bookmarks List

                  The RED X button will delete the selected bookmark. The BLUE PENCIL button is used to edit a previously added bookmark. The GREEN PAPER button will jump to the location where the bookmark was created.

                  Physicians & Queries

                    Within this viewer users can add physicians and change the physician’s staff function, if necessary. They can also intiaiate the physician query process in this viewer. Users can expand the width of the Physicians & Queries viewer by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the viewer.

                    Physicians & Queries Viewer Physicians & Queries Viewer

                    Adding/Editing Physicians

                    The are several fields that are pre-populated by the organization’s registration system including “Physician Number”, “Physician Name”, “Specialty” and “Staff Function”. Physicians can be added, changed, or removed if incorrect or missing. To add a physician, click on the +Add Physician button and begin typing in the physician’s last name to populate the correct physician. Choose the staff function that fits the chosen physician. If it is a consulting physician, also enter the consultation date.

                    Adding a Physician Adding a Physician

                    To remove a physician that either you added or was sent incorrectly from the registration system click on the RED X button to remove the physician.

                    Querying a Physician

                    Adding a Query

                    There are two ways to add a query to a physician that is listed. The first is to click on the BLUE ENVELOPE icon next to the physician.

                    Blue Query Envlope Blue Query Envlope

                    The second way is to click on +Add Query. This would also be how to query a physician that is not already listed.

                    When a physician is listed, the query will auto-populate the physician name. If a physician was not already listed, simply begin typing in the last name in the “Physician” field by entering two or more characters to find the correct physician name.

                    If configured, users can see a cosigner field that allows assignment of a cosigner. The cosigner field is a field that can be sent in the outbound interface for the query. The receiving system can choose to use this process if the cosigner needs to receive the query after the main recipient answers, but before it gets returned to Fusion CAC. When a physician query is created, a new “Cosigner” physician dropdown appears below the existing “Physician” dropdown. Filling in this field is optional. When the query is saved as a draft or sent outbound, the cosigner field will be saved with the query and sent as an additional recipient. In the grid inside the Physicians & Queries, the user may also choose to add “Cosigner” as a visible column.

                    Continue through the query build by selecting the query template.

                    Selecting Query Template Selecting Query Template

                    Sending a Query

                    Write the query or fill out the template details as needed.

                    Selecting a Query Reason Selecting a Query Reason

                    Once completed, select from the reason dropdown why you are sending the query, and above that field, check the box if the query will affect final coding.

                    Checkbox

                    The checkbox “Check if physician’s answer affects DRG or Final Coding” will not be visible to providers.

                    Click Send to Physician to complete the query and send it, or click Save Draft if the query is not ready to be sent. If the query is saved as a draft, a draft query section will appear that is separate from sent or closed queries. If a user has at least one draft, but no sent queries, the total drafts count on their personal dashboard will display as zero.

                    Query Drafts Query Drafts

                    Complete Query Options Complete Query Options

                    Alternatively, for organizations who do not have a physician query interface AND do not create a physician query until a response is received, a query can be created and not sent. When enabled, a physician query will show a Continue button in place of Send. Clicking Continue will refresh the query to open the physician response fields so that the query can then be closed.

                    Editing a Sent Query

                    The physician the query was orginally sent to can be changed after sending the query by opening the query and clicking Change Physician. A dropdown will appear so the user can select the reason the physician needs to be changed.

                    Change Physician Menu Change Physician Menu

                    Closing a Query

                    To close a query—whether to review a response and update the outcome or to cancel it—simply click the RED ENVELOPE icon. If a response from the provider is available, clicking the icon will open the query to display it.

                    Query Envelope Icon Query Envelope Icon

                    The user can then choose how to close the query using options in the screenshot below.

                    Close Query Options Close Query Options

                    Query Response Show Diff

                    The physician query has a “Show Diff” toggle above physician query responses in the Physician Query dialog. Clicking it will show additional text in blue highlighting and deleted text in red highlighting. When the diff is shown, the button changes to “Hide Diff,” which when clicked will show the unaltered response.

                    Query Show Diff Query Show Diff

                    Diff Logic

                    If your organization has an interface that imports the physicians response, the diff logic may report false positives and false negatives, like changes from double quotes to single quotes or the addition/deletion of blank lines.

                    Once a query is opened and responded (or the user is recording the response on behalf of the physician), the responding physician and the date/time of the response can be editied. If the organization is manually closing queries, this information ensures that the management reports reflect accurate turnaround times.

                    Record Query Response Record Query Response

                    If an organization has choosen to collect shift reasons, a dialog box will appear upon selecting an outcome for the query.

                    Documenting Query Shift Reasons

                    Shift reasons can be categorized as either automatic or manual. If manual shift reasons are enabled, users will encounter a dialog box after closing a query.

                    Query Shift Reasons Query Shift Reasons

                    This dialog box will display the pre and post-query DRG (if applicable) along with options for shift reasons. These shift reasons can be chosen by the end user to explain the rationale behind the change in the DRG. It is important to note that changes in the DRG might occur for reasons unrelated to the query outcome. Please be aware that the shift reasons dialog is customizable, so each organization may offer different options than what is shown in the screenshot.

                    Automatic vs Manual Shift Reasons

                    The dialog box will only display if shift reasons are set to manual. Organizations looking to enable or disable the dialog box, should contact CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com)

                    Query Impact

                    Upon initiation of the query, the user will see a Compute button below the template name. Click to compute the Pre-Query DRG if not already showing. Clicking this button will use currently assigned codes on the chart to compute a DRG. Once the pre-query DRG is completed users will follow the standard process to send the query.

                    When the query has been responded to, open the query to complete by clicking the RED ENVELOPE icon. Users will be able to compute a post-query DRG in order to capture impact. The previous DRG will auto-populate (unless the user added, deleted, or changed any codes, re-sequenced or changed the discharge disposition). If the pre-query DRG does not populate, it will need to be calculated again by clicking the Compute Pre-DRG below the template name. Users will now also see a Compute Post-DRG below the template name.

                    Users can minimize the query as needed to add, delete, or otherwise change any codes before clicking compute.

                    Placeholder Queries

                    Some organizaitions create a physcian query within Fusion CAC and then copy and paste it into a different system rather then send them through an interface. Dolbey refers to this as a place holder query for reporting and transparencey. A feature can be enabled so that text entered into fields on the place holder query will no longer display in bold. To activate this option, please contact CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com).

                    Quick Complete

                    The Quick Complete query feature is designed for sites that create placeholder queries ONLY. This feature allows a user to log a query without sending it externally. The user can assign a provider, template, reason, and both pre and post-DRG information along with closing the query with shift reasons all in one session. This quick complete feature aims to streamline these actions into a single, integrated process. This feature is optional and needs to be turned on. Contact CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com) to enable this feature.

                    Once enabled, create a new physician query, and notice a new Quick Complete button in the footer. Clicking it will automatically save the query and reopen it with “Record Physician Response” expanded to record a physician’s response. The Quick Complete button only appears on new queries, including queries opened from drafts. It will not appear if a query is edited or if a query’s physician is changed.

                    Query Status

                    The status of the query will display in the actions column on the query grid. The following are status options:

                    StatusDescription
                    OpenThis query has been sent, but not yet responded to by the provider.
                    AnsweredThis query has been sent and has received a response, but has yet to be closed by the end user.
                    CanceledThis query has been canceled by the end user. The status column will display the reason for the cancellation.
                    ClosedThis query has been closed by the end user. The status column will display the outcome of the query.
                    Canceling Queries

                    Not all organizations support canceling physician queries. Redirected queries may still need to be canceled within the EHR. Consult your supervisor to learn if additional steps need to be taken to cancel a query.

                    Per User Settings

                    This grid will display key details about the query, including the creator, recipient, creation date, reply status, and response timestamp. Columns can be reordered based on user preference. When moving around the columns in the Physician Queries grid and then clicking the Save Layout button, the columns and order will be saved for the Queries grid for all future accounts for that user. Any other user will see the default layout. Next to the Save Layout button is a Reset Filters button, this will take any custom layout and change it back to the default fields.

                    If the organization chooses to use signatures when sending queries, automatic signatures can be addended to the query. Signatures can be editied within each user’s profile.

                    Query Signature Sample Query Signature Sample

                    Note

                    Please refer to your supervisor for details as each organization has custom query templates and additional details surrounding queries.

                    Query Impact

                    Query Impact = Pre-Query Working DRG Weight – Post-Query Working DRG Weight

                    Query impact is calculated using the working DRG calculated within the same session in which the physician query was created. Once the physician replies to the query, the CDI will close the query. During the session the query was closed, the system will then capture the working DRG that was calculated. A session is closed by saving the chart.

                    If a physician query shifts the assigned DRG, diagnosis, procedures, CC/MCC/HAC/ROM/SOI or Quality metrics, the shift reason is automatically calculated by the system. The shift reason is captured by looking at the difference between the last working DRG and the Current Working DRG as well as the Code Sets difference in the most current working DRG. Code sets will be automatically captured for reporting.

                    Previous HCC

                      Previous HCCs Previous HCCs

                      The Previous HCC Overview will display the HCC history to show for both the current and prior year. When HCCs are enabled, these will display grouped by HCC category and by code — showing the account number and MRN for the visits each were associated to.

                      Previous HCC Viewer Previous HCC Viewer

                      If a check mark appears next to the HCC category and code, this indicates the code on the previous stay was also suggested for the current stay. If the patient chart currently being coded has codes that result in HCCs once they are added to the assigned code tree the code will display with an ‘H’ next to the code. By hovering over the ‘H’ icon, the HCC category will display.

                      It is recommended to turn HCCs on for all patient types to capture a more complete picture of HCCs. HCCs will be collected once HCCs have been enabled in the mapping table. To enable HCCs, check the box in the Category mapping table.

                      Enable HCCs in Mapping Table Enable HCCs in Mapping Table

                      As a reminder, this will not capture data prior to turning this feature on in the mapping table.

                      Readmission/Previous Visit

                      If the patient has been readmitted within 30 days of an admission date, the patient demographic data will display below from the previous stay. This is not just for inpatient readmissions, but also includes if the patient was ever seen for any patient type within the last 30 days. The 30 days look back can also be expanded to 45 or 90 days. If the previous stay was also coded, you will see the Code Summary display below. If a check mark appears next to the code, this indicates the code on the previous stay was also suggested for the current stay.

                      Readmission Summary Viewer Readmission Summary Viewer

                      If an account has multiple re-admissions, they will all show if they are in the default time of 30 days. A setting can be changed to allow the number of days to be customized. If the setting is updated to an amount other than 30, that new amount will show in the Re-admission Viewer AND in the red tag in the banner. Please contact Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com) to have the setting configured, if desired.

                      Transfer Account Codes

                      Transfer Account Codes Transfer Account Codes

                      Transfer codes can be used to help combine account codes into one encounter. Most sites leverage the ADT to combine the actual account; however, there are times it is necessary to copy codes from one encounter to another.

                      Transfer Account Codes Viewer Transfer Account Codes Viewer

                      If a patient has two different accounts and the coder has already done work on each of the accounts, the Transfer Codes feature can be an easy way to post codes when you’re within one account and want to search in another account, and have the ability to open that other account and see the codes.

                      To transfer codes either select the Account# radio button and type in the account number, or select the MRN radio button where the MRN of the opened account will populate. Once either of those numbers are entered, click the Load Account button. When the account or MRN is loaded, use the check boxes to the left of the codes to choose which codes will transfer. Once the needed codes are checked, click on the Transfer Codes button and the codes you selected will be added to the “Assigned” codes tree that is on the current account.

                      Working CDI History

                      The working CDI History can be used to look at historical working DRG calculations. The Coders cannot edit this information, but they can review the data.

                      Working CDI History Working CDI History

                      The first calculated DRG will assume the Baseline DRG role, which is used to calculate the CDI impact on a chart. Users wishing to change the Baseline DRG, can click the Set Baseline DRG button.

                      Users can also indicate which Working DRGs are an alternative DRG for reconciliation. By checking the box next to each DRG, users are approving it as an alternative DRG to auto-reconcile the chart. Users can manually add an additional DRG if it does not appear in the list.

                      Clicking on the arrow prior to the DRG information will expand the selection to display the codes that went into the DRG and the sequence. Any codes with a plus sign indicates the code has not been added to the account. The plus sign does not indicate that the codes need to be added. It simply allows the user to quickly add the code if they have determined it is vaild using their coding judgment and supporting documentation. If applicable, the code’s HCC designation will show the HCC number and its version.

                      Working CDI History Working CDI History

                      Administrative

                      Chat Room

                      A chat room feature is available in most administrative tools, including User Management, Workflow Management, Validation Management, Query Designer, and Worksheet Designer. This feature allows users to communicate in real-time while working within these tools.

                      Chat Room Chat Room

                      The chat room is only active when multiple users are simultaneously accessing one of the administrative tools to ensure that changes are not lost when multiple users are working in the same tool. When two users are in the same tool and one saves data, the other user will see a red button indicating that changes are out of sync. Clicking the button will refresh the page with the other user’s changes.

                      Changes out of Sync Changes out of Sync

                      Note

                      Please note that chat history resets upon logging off.

                      Inactivity Timeout

                      A configurable “inactivity reason” prompt can be displayed upon login, if the user has been logged out for a specified amount of time.

                      Inactivity Reason Prompt Inactivity Reason Prompt

                      If the user attempts to log in after having logged out between the minimum and maximum minutes, the user must record an “inactivity reason”. There is a default set of dropdown options for the reason, which can be customized in Mapping Configuration.

                      Inactivity Mapping Table Inactivity Mapping Table

                      Additionally, Role Management contains an option to exclude user roles from being prompted upon login.

                      Exclude from Inactivity Prompt Exclude from Inactivity Prompt

                      When enabled, this functionality allows management to track why users were idle during the day. The User Audit Trail report shows the inactivity reason that was selected.

                      Please contact CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com) to have the inactivity timeout enabeled.

                      Subsections of Administrative

                      Dashboards

                      A user with administrative rights is provided with overviews of Coder and CDI activity. The administrative user can also select to look specifically at Coder or CDI information by selecting the appropriate dashboard button.

                      The dashboard is shown when the user logs in and after login, it can be accessed by

                      • Clicking on Fusion CAC in the top left corner of the application

                      Fusion CAC Fusion CAC

                      • Clicking on the reporting menu item and selecting dashboard

                      Reporting Menu Dashboard Reporting Menu Dashboard

                      The software has 6 main dashboards with drill down data:

                      1. Administrative Dashboard
                      2. Coder Personal Dashboard
                      3. CDI Management Dashboard
                      4. CDI Personal Dashboard
                      5. Audit Management Dashboard
                      6. Audit Personal Dashboard

                      Administrative Dashboard

                      The administrative dashboard is only available for those users with the administrator role. This dashboard displays data at a glance. Clicking on any of the blue numbers will open a grid to display the data that goes into that number.

                      Administrative Dashboard Administrative Dashboard

                      The dashboard can be filtered by facility. Leaving the filter blank will combine all facilities and all patient types.

                      Facilites Filter Facilites Filter

                      Users Online

                      This displays the users online or offline broken out user type. The blue numbers are links to view the user detail behind the number you selected.

                      Users Online Users Online

                      Users Online Detail Users Online Detail

                      Users can right click on the grid to export to CSV.

                      Open Queries

                      This section displays open, unanswered, and answered queries per role along with average turn around time (TAT) and provider response rate.

                      Open Queries Open Queries

                      Click on any of the blue numbers to see the data behind that number. Right clicking on the grid provides the option to export to CSV.

                      Top 10 Queries in Last 30 Days

                      This displays the 10 most used query templates within the last 30 days.

                      Top 10 Queries Top 10 Queries

                      Click on any of the blue numbers to see the data behind that number. Right clicking on the grid provides the option to export to CSV.

                      AutoClose Daily Stats

                      This section displays AutoClose stats, including charts autoclosed and rejected on the current day. It also includes data for month to date.

                      AutoClose Daily Stats AutoClose Daily Stats

                      Click on any of the blue numbers to see the data behind that number. Right clicking on the grid provides the option to export to CSV.

                      Coder Productivity

                      This displays the coders productivity by charts submitted and those that are pending.

                      Coder Productivity Coder Productivity

                      Click on any of the blue numbers to see the data behind that number. Right clicking on the grid provides the option to export to CSV.

                      Coding Trends per day combines “Average Daily Coded” and “Average TAT to Submit” to show averages over the last 7, 30, and 90 days compared to the prior 7, 30, or 90 days, grouped by category.

                      Coding Trends Per Day Coding Trends Per Day

                      Discharge Not Final Coded (DNFC)

                      This section provides the admin staff the ability to see where the organization is in regards to the outstanding sum of total charges. The data broken down by total outstanding charges per charts outstanding for the current month also known as discharge not final coded. The admin staff can also see if the team is meeting their goal for how many charts are outstanding at the end of the month. A comparison is displayed to show total charges for the current month compared to the previous month. Next to each value should be a number in blue that represents the number of charts that make up the dollar value. Users can click these numbers to drill down and display the chart details

                      Discharge Not Final Coded Discharge Not Final Coded

                      TermDefinition
                      AvailableAll patients discharged and not submitted within a coding worklist per either the “current month” or “previous month” depending on the column reported. Workgroup Type must equal coding.
                      UnavailableDefined as all patients discharged and not submitted and not within a coding worklist per either the “current month” or “previous month” depending on the column reported. Workgroup Type not equal coding.
                      TotalThe total of both available and unavailable for coding.
                      GoalThe target goal set per organization for the discharge not final coded. Users can set the goal by clicking on the red **Add Goal ** button. Editing DNFC Goals Editing DNFC Goals
                      DifferenceThe difference between the goal and actual. For visual clarity, the number will be displayed in green if the difference is less than or equal to the goal. If the total is greater than the goal, the difference will be displayed in red.

                      Work Available Queue

                      This section will show how much work is in the queue to code for any given day. This allows users with the role of Coder to plan their workload based on availability and frees up management from having to monitor and communicate with the coding staff. Clicking on any of the blue numbers, will display the data behind that number. Right-clicking on the grid allows the user to export to csv.

                      Work Available Queue Work Available Queue

                      Patient Daily Census

                      This displays the patient daily census on patients discharged or still inhouse. Clicking on any of the blue numbers, will display the data behind that number. Right-clicking on the grid allows the user to export to csv.

                      Case Mix Index

                      This section will display the case mix for the Last 7, 30, 90, and 180 Days

                      Case Mix Index Case Mix Index

                      Top 10 Final DRGs

                      This displays the 10 most coded DRG’s within the current month, prior month, or last 6 months.

                      Top 10 Final DRGs Top 10 Final DRGs

                      Coder Personal Dashboard

                      The Coder dashboard is only available for users with a coder role. This dashboard displays quick at a glance personal statistics. Clicking on any of the numbers in blue will open a grid to display the data that goes into the number displayed.

                      Coder Personal Dashboard Coder Personal Dashboard

                      CDI Management Dashboard

                      The CDI Management Dashboard is available for management users with the CDI role. It can be deployed with a special role to CDI users if they have a need to see a team view of what all CDI users are doing. This dashboard displays at a glance team statistics. Clicking on any of the numbers in blue will open a grid to display the data that goes into the number displayed.

                      CDI Management Dashboard CDI Management Dashboard

                      CDI Personal Dashboard

                      The CDI Personal Dashboard is available users with the CDI role. Users can see their personal statics separate from the team view. Clicking on any of the numbers in blue will open a grid to display the data that goes into the number displayed.

                      CDI Management Dashboard CDI Management Dashboard

                      Audit Management Dashboard

                      The Audit Management Dashboard is available to users with the Auditor role to see a team view of statistics. Clicking on any of the numbers in blue will open a grid to display the data that goes into the number displayed.

                      Audit Management Dashboard Audit Management Dashboard

                      Audit Personal Dashboard

                      The Audit Personal Dashboard is available to users with Auditor role to see their personal statistics. Clicking on any of the numbers in blue will open a grid to display the data that goes into the number displayed.

                      Audit Personal Dashboard Audit Personal Dashboard

                      Subsections of Reporting

                      Account Search

                      Account Search Account Search

                      Account Search is helpful for reporting when creating a report that is not in the default user reports. Account Search allows the user to search most data points to export the raw data into a CSV file.

                      Sample Use Cases:

                      • How many inpatient accounts were discharged last month with a pricipal diagnosis of sepsis?
                      • What accounts were discharged with pending reasons?
                      • Of the inpatient accounts coded and then discharged last month, what is the total of each CC and MCC?

                      To answer any of the questions above, the data will need to be filtered as Account Search can pull all account/chart data available in the system.

                      Setting Criteria

                      Account Search is highly dynamic in the types of data users can pull. Account Search, much like workflow, has two different options to create a filters using the AND/OR criteria.

                      • AND criteria
                      • OR Criteria

                      AND Criteria

                      When using AND criteria, think about adding AND at the end of each criterion. For example, this criteria will cause the account search to display results if the patient chart had both the coder AND the CDI user identifying a PSI.

                      PSI Indicators Search PSI Indicators Search

                      OR Criteria

                      When using OR criteria, think about adding OR at the end of each criterion. The OR criteria will display in blue to differentiate between the first and second criteria that will trigger the results. For example, this criteria will cause the account search to display results if the patient chart had either the Coder OR the CDI user identifying a PSI.

                      OR Search Criteria OR Search Criteria

                      Start to filter the data by clicking the appropriate criteria button and selecting fields to constrain the data.

                      Add Criteria Add Criteria

                      Continue to constrain the data for the desired results. There are over 250 fields that can be used to constrain the data. Each organization will have their own custom fields, depending on how the system was configured.

                      Selecting Columns

                      Once the data has been constrained, select the columns to display by selecting Columns.

                      Account Search Columns Account Search Columns

                      When the results are initally returned, there will be more column fields displayed than needed. Users can pair down the columns by removing or adding the columns as needed. Clicking on the drop-down arrow on Columns allows the user to select or unselect all columns. Use the check box to indicate the column should display and uncheck it to remove the column from the Account Search or Scheduled Account Search report.

                      Drill-Down Level

                      Account Search allows for the ability to search for account level data or drill down to an array of different data collections.

                      • Account (Default)
                      • Audits
                      • CDI/Clinical Alerts
                      • Denials
                      • Final Assigned Codes
                      • Final CPT Codes
                      • Final Diagnoses
                      • Final Procedures
                      • Final Visit Reasons
                      • Pending Reasons
                      • Physician Coding Assigned Codes
                      • Physicians
                      • Queries
                      • Working Assigned Codes
                      • Working CPT Codes
                      • Working Diagnoses
                      • Working Procedures
                      • Working Visit Reasons

                      When a choice other than Account, which is the default view, is selected the columns for that choice are added to the beginning of the original grid. The drill-down level can be saved to the grid. For example, if there is search the user has saved called Unsubmitted, and the user added the Final Procedure drill-down to it, then when Unsubmitted is pulled up in Account Search it will include the drill-down columns. Additionally, the name of the drill-down will appear in the drill-down level field instead of the default of Account.

                      Account Search Drilldown Account Search Drilldown

                      Searching for Data

                      The data filter allows user to constrain the data before returning results in account search grid.

                      For example, a search for patient charts that CDI reviewed in the previous month might look like this:

                      Account Search for CDI Reviewed Last Month Account Search for CDI Reviewed Last Month

                      To learn more about the fields and how they are defined, navigate to the Fields section in this user guide.

                      Sort and Filter Results

                      Each column has menu options to filter the data to restrict the view for only the data the user has defined.

                      Filter Lines Filter Lines

                      To manually filter:

                      • Click the 3 lines on the column to be filtered
                      • Click on the Filter icon
                      • Check or uncheck the boxes depending on the data to be filtered
                      • Click on the filter to close the box

                      Filtered Column Filtered Column

                      Additionally, users can choose to group the data creating a pivot table.

                      Using the data to create a pivot table allows users to reorganize the selected columns and rows of data in the account search grid table to obtain a desired report. The fields that can be filtered on and/or displayed can be found in the Fields section in this user guide.

                      Account searches can be saved for future use.

                      Save/Save As Save/Save As

                      When saving a search, a new field will show in the save box called Filter Summary. If filled out, the summary will show in the banner of the search next to the Drill-Down Level.

                      Save Account Search Settings Save Account Search Settings

                      Saved Account Search Saved Account Search

                      Scheduling a Report

                      When a search is saved, a +Add Scheduler button will appear for users in Account Search to open a dialog box to create/edit/delete a schedule. Each saved search can have one schedule.

                      Add Scheduler Button Add Scheduler Button

                      Scheduler Box Scheduler Box

                      Once the user fills this out and saves, the button changes so the user can edit the scheduled report from account search.

                      Edit Scheduler Button Edit Scheduler Button

                      Users can also see the account searches that were scheduled under the reporting tabs and scheduled user reports.

                      Saved Account Search Filters Saved Account Search Filters

                      Export to CSV

                      Search results can be exportd from the right click menu. Exporting in the CSV format allows users to view them in Excel. Exported results will maintain the columns and grouping.

                      Export to CSV Export to CSV

                      Calendar View

                      Calendar View Calendar View

                      The calendar view will show which users touched charts on a specific day and the actions they took. Upon first logging on, users will be presented with a calendar view. By default, the view shows the current calendar week.

                      Calendar View per Week Calendar View per Week

                      To view the entire calendar month or choose a date range use the control keys at the top of the calendar.

                      Calendar View Control Keys Calendar View Control Keys

                      The left and right buttons located at the right of the date field will allow you to change the month forward or backward one month per click. Each of the calendar days have information provided which are defined below. The facility drop down menu, will allow the user to select a facility (if applicable). The type drop down menu, will allow the user to select a patient type (category) (if applicable). Once the parameters havee been defined, click Submit to display the data within the calendar.

                      Statistics

                      Each Calendar date has its own overview statistics. The numbers and totals shown on the calendar are distinct numbers, meaning each chart is only considered once per each category below even if a user clicked save or submit multiple times it will be ONLY counted once.

                      StatisticDescription
                      IP DischargedThis is a total inpatient chart that received a discharge date of the date you are viewing on the calendar.
                      OP AdmitThis is a total outpatient chart that received an admit date of the date you are viewing on the calendar.
                      SubmittedThis is the total number of charts that the user clicked the submit button. This is a distinct number of submits which means that each chart even if a user clicked submit multiple times it will be ONLY counted once.
                      SavedThis is the total number of charts that the user clicked the save button. This is a distinct number of submits which means that each chart even if a user clicked save multiple times it will be ONLY counted once.
                      InactivityThis is an account that was saved automatically due to inactivity (session timeout).
                      Est. Reim.This is the total number of charts that the user has clicked the submit button that resulted in the encoder sending an estimated reimbursement, commonly this only occurs on inpatient charts when a DRG is calculated.
                      Case Mix IndexThis is the total number of charts that the user has clicked the submit button, commonly this only occurs on inpatient charts when a DRG is calculated.
                      CDI DRG DiffThis is the total number of charts that resulted in a difference in DRG from CDI to Coding.
                      CDI Reim DiffThis is the reimbursement difference of charts that resulted in a difference in DRG from CDI to Coding. This number will not populate if you do not have the reimbursement coming back from the encoder with the DRG.
                      Total ChargesThis is the total charges from the charts that the submit button was clicked on.

                      To review the details surrounding a calendar date, click on the square with an arrow next to the calendar date. This will display the calendar day statistics making up the overview data.

                      Pop Out Icon Pop Out Icon

                      Calendar Day Statistics

                      All counts on the grouping row of the Calendar Stats by Day page are based on distinct accounts. Categories will be hidden if they have a count of zero. The information grid below the total sum will be an audit trail and will not add up to the grouping counts.

                      Calendar Day Statistics Calendar Day Statistics

                      FieldDescription
                      SubmittedSubmitted is a term used to mean the chart was completed by coding. This also means that the code packet including patient demographics, code data, and abstraction fields have been passed to the abstraction system to be finalized.
                      ResubmittedResubmitted is a term used to mean the chart was completed by coding and the chart had already had a submit action performed. This also means that the code packet including patient demographics, code data, and abstraction fields have been passed to the abstraction system to be finalized.
                      Saved AccountSaved is a term used to mean the chart was not completed by coding. A user may save a chart if there was missing documents, query or the user could not complete the chart at the time of coding.
                      InactivityInactivity is a term used to mean the chart was saved automatically due to inactivity (session timeout).
                      Canceled AccountCanceled is a term used to mean the chart was opened, nothing was changed on the account, and it was returned to the queue to be coded by another user.

                      View Account Codes

                      To view an account, right click on any of the grid rows. This will display codes assigned to this account.

                      View Account Codes View Account Codes

                      This view provides a look at codes that were assigned by Coders and/or CDI. Not all charts will have both user views. Available views will depend on if the chart opened yields information from one or both user types. This view will indicate the state of chart for the audit item selected.

                      The columns listed below are default, however a user can change this display by hovering over a grid field and selecting the 3 horizontal lines.

                      Column NameDescription
                      DurationThis field provides the total time that a user entered into the account displayed to the right of this field this will display in HH:MM:SS.
                      TimeThis field provides the time that a user entered into the account displayed to the right of this field.
                      UserThis is the person who performed the action.
                      Account #This is the account # of the patient chart the user reviewed.
                      ActionThis is the action the user did. An action being submit, resubmit, cancel or save.
                      MRNThis is the MRN of the patient chart the user reviewed.
                      Patient NameThis is the patient name of the patient chart the user reviewed.
                      StatusSubmitted – The chart has been sent outbound to a downsteam system (abstraction or billing) Unbilled – The chart has not yet been submitted yet. QA - The system had workflow that placed this chart into QA, there are many reasons please consult your workflow manual.
                      Admit DateThis is the admit date of the patient chart.
                      Discharge DateThis is the discharge date of the patient chart.
                      LOSThis is the LOS the CAC system calculated based on the admit and discharge date of the patient chart.
                      CategoryThis is the patient type of the patient chart.
                      FacilityThis is the facility of the patient chart.

                      User Reports

                      User Reports User Reports

                      User reports are canned reports that are preformatted. User reports were created to be run on-demand, but many reports can also be scheduled to run at a specific date/time interval. Each report is outlined below along with a brief description.

                      Users looking for data that is not available in user reports can use account search to create custom searches and then export the raw data.

                      Running a User Report

                      1. Select the report from the available list - the selected report will display a short description on the screen

                      User Report List User Report List

                      Report Discription Report Discription

                      1. Filter as needed - each report is unique in the style of data it will yield. Review filter options and use as needed.

                      Report Filter Options Report Filter Options

                      CDI Filters

                      Most CDI reports contain additional filters to give the user the option to filter as ‘ include’ or ‘exclude’

                      1. Select the format of the report - .xlsx will result in a file in the users downloads folder.

                      Report Format Options Report Format Options

                      1. Select Run Report

                      Run Report Run Report

                      User Reports and Descriptions

                      The following is a complete list of Fusion CAC’s default reports and their descriptions. An organization may have custom reports that do not appear in this list. Additionally, some reports may be part of an add-on module. For questions or if there are other reports your organization would benefit from and you cannot pull the data you need from account search please contact our SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com) to discuss options.

                      25 Most Common CPT Codes Report

                      This report is to provide a listing of the top 25 CPT® codes by patient type (category) for the discharge date range provided. The Date Range for this report is the Chart Discharged Date.

                      25 Most Common CPT Codes 25 Most Common CPT Codes

                      25 Most Common Diagnosis Codes Report

                      This report is to provide a listing of the top 25 diagnosis codes by patient type (category) per the discharge date range provided. The Date Range for this report is the Chart Discharged Date.

                      25 Most Common Diagnosis Code 25 Most Common Diagnosis Code

                      25 Most Common PCS Codes Report

                      This report is to provide a listing of the top 25 PCS codes by patient type (category) per the discharge date range provided. The Date Range for this report is the Chart Discharged Date.

                      25 Most Common PCS Codes Report 25 Most Common PCS Codes Report

                      Assigned Workgroup Report

                      This report provides details about each of the users and what workgroup they are assigned to in sequence. The date range input is irrelevant for this report and will always display the user’s current workgroups.

                      Date Criteria Ignored

                      Date criteria are not used for this report. The user’s current workgroup assignments are reported.

                      Assigned Workgroup Report Assigned Workgroup Report

                      Audit Abstract Report

                      This report will provide an overview of the abstraction scores for each user based upon a date range.

                      Notes:

                      • Abstract Pre-Audit value is the total number of abstraction items (discharge disposition change, date changes and provider changes) added pre-audit.
                      • Abstract D/C Disp Errors value is the total number of discharge disposition errors.
                      • Procedure Provider Changes value is the total number of procedure provider changes (PCS and/or CPT).
                      • Procedure Date Changes value is the total number of procedure date changes (PCS and/or CPT).
                      • Procedure Modifier Changes value is the total number of procedure modifier changes (CPT).
                      • Total Abstract Errors value is the Sum of all abstract (discharge disposition change, date changes and provider changes) errors during audit.

                      Audit Abstract Report Audit Abstract Report

                      Audit Executive Summary

                      This report is an executive level view that shows an overview of inpatient and outpatient audit activity by Auditor. It includes the audit rate and average error rates for diagnoses and procedure coding. The date of this report is based on the date the account was first submitted.

                      Audit Executive Summary Audit Executive Summary

                      Inpatient Audit Scorecard

                      This monthly report provides a summary of the Auditor’s work completed for any type of inpatient audit and the financial impact based on the audit findings. This report will show number of coders and coded encounters audited that resulted in a DRG change and either over payments or under payments. This report will also show the details of physician queries that resulted because of the audit and financial impact of changes made.

                      Inpatient Audit Scorecard Inpatient Audit Scorecard

                      Inpatient Auditor Productivity

                      This report shows auditor productivity by audit type and sub-type and a sum of the total outcomes for each.

                      Inpatient Auditor Productivity Inpatient Auditor Productivity

                      Inpatient Coder Scorecard

                      This report shows, on an individual coder basis, the principal diagnoses, secondary diagnoses, and procedure code assignment errors that may or may not have resulted in a DRG change and financial impact. The report has an audit present. The date range for this report is for the date the audit was performed.

                      Inpatient Coder Scorecard Inpatient Coder Scorecard

                      Outpatient Audit Scorecard

                      This monthly report provides a summary of the Auditor’s work completed for any type of outpatient audit.

                      Outpatient Audit Scorecard Outpatient Audit Scorecard

                      Outpatient Auditor Productivity

                      This report shows auditor productivity by outpatient audit type and sub-type and a sum of the total outcomes for each.

                      Outpatient Auditor Productivity Outpatient Auditor Productivity

                      Outpatient Coder Scorecard

                      This report shows, on an individual coder basis, the errors and accuracy rates for diagnosis codes including Reason for Visit and secondary diagnoses; errors in CPT code assignments, modifiers, charges, and procedure details (provider name and date of procedure). The date range for this report is for the date the audit was performed.

                      Outpatient Coder Scorecard Outpatient Coder Scorecard

                      Cancelled Query Report

                      This report is to track Physician Queries that were cancelled within the date range specified. Only queries cancelled from within the Physician Query viewer will be tracked on this report, i.e. any third- party cancellations will not appear. Created date and cancelled date will be displayed, along with the amount of time the query was open. The date range for this report is the date that the physician query was cancelled.

                      Cancelled Query Report Cancelled Query Report

                      Case Mix Index Comparison Trend Report

                      This report shows the Baseline, Working, and Final CMI per discharge month. (Filtering: Only run as a monthly report). The date range on this report is the Chart Discharge Date please note the range is expanded to the full month.

                      Case Mix Index Comparison Trend Report Case Mix Index Comparison Trend Report

                      Case Mix Index Report by Attending Physician Report

                      This report will show the difference between the most Current Working CMI and Final CMI, additionally providing the CMI Difference (Final CMI – Current Working CMI.) This report will show how the physician’s documentation impacted the chart over the course of the patient’s stay. If the physician documented appropriately, the Current Working and Final DRG should be very close. If the DRGs are far apart, the likely cause is that either the CDI did not have the documentation, or the physician did not document the chart comprehensively. This report should be used in conjunction with additional auditing on the attending physician if you are questioning the results. (Filtering: Only run as a monthly report). The date range for this report is on the Chart Admit Date

                      Case Mix Index Report by Attending Physician Report Case Mix Index Report by Attending Physician Report

                      Case Mix Index per Month

                      Date Range: Chart Discharge Date (only Submitted Inpatient charts with a DRG Weight valued will appear in this report) This report will provide a monthly case mix overall for all financial classes then for each financial class. This report is based upon final coded outcomes. A “case mix index” is the average DRG Weight of accounts that have a DRG Weight - This report only includes submitted inpatient accounts with a DRG Weight.

                      Total Groups

                      Totals are displayed differently based on the facility filter and the number of facilities returned by the report.

                      • If there is no filter on facility and more than one facility is in the report, an additional “All Facilities” group is appended that calculates the case mix for each financial class across all facilities.
                      • If there is any filter on facility and more than one facility is included in the report, an additional “Combined Facilities” group is appended that calculates the case mix index for each financial class across the filtered facilities.
                      • If only one facility appears in the report, there is no “All Facilities” or “Combined Facilities” group.
                      Blank Field Values

                      Blank facilities or financial classes are displayed as an empty string to be consistent with other reports.

                      Case Mix Index per Month Case Mix Index per Month

                      CC/MCC Capture Rate

                      This report provides the final outcome of CC/MCC capture rate. This can be used to compare the CC/MCC capture rate to those DRG’s that don’t have a DRG but, have the opportunity to be maximized which is defined as DRG’s with a DRG description of without CC/MCC, w/o CC, w/o MCC. This report will tell you what opportunities may have been missed

                      CC/MCC Capture Rate CC/MCC Capture Rate

                      CDI Executive Summary Report

                      This report is an executive level view broken down per month that shows total discharges vs. total reviews in addition to the # of total queries, response rates and improved DRG’s. The improved DRG is calculated by determining if there was a positive reimbursement gain from the baseline to the working DRG. (Filtering: Max of 12 months selected; only run as a monthly report). The date range on this report is the Chart Admit Date, please note that this report date range is expanded to the full month

                      CDI Executive Summary Report CDI Executive Summary Report

                      CDI Financial Benefit Report

                      This report is broken down per month coded and the total financial impact CDI had on the chart. The report will only display charts with unmatched DRG’s and show a financial impact based on the baseline DRG to final coded DRG. The date range on this report is the Chart Submitted Date (LastSubmitter).

                      CDI Financial Benefit Report CDI Financial Benefit Report

                      CDI Metric Score Card

                      This report shows CDI productivity based upon the CDI user reviews and queries. The report will show CDI activity specifically on the number of initial reviews (first time a CDI reviews a chart), number of follow up reviews (reviews beyond the first time a CDI reviews a chart), queries issued, agreed upon query amounts, and the number of days we show activity occurring.

                      CDI Metric Score Card CDI Metric Score Card

                      CDI Productivity - Admission Month Report

                      This report shows CDI productivity based upon the admission month of the patient. The report will show CDI activity specifically on the # of initial reviews (first time a CDI reviews a chart). A review is calculated by the following:

                      • Inpatient: First time a user with a role of CDI computed a Working DRG and saved the chart.
                      • Outpatient: First time a user with a role of CDI saved the chart.

                      This report will also tell you out of the charts the CDI staff member completed what the query rate is and on average how many days did it take before the chart was initially reviewed. Reporting is done on the admission month, so this report displays any patient discharged or not discharged during this admission month if there was a CDI review. (Filtering: Only run as a monthly report). The date range on this report is the Chart Admit Date, please note that this report date range is expanded to the full month.

                      CDI Productivity CDI Productivity

                      CDI Query Detail Report

                      This report provides details of physician queries created by CDI Specialists on accounts that have since been discharged. This report details how the account evolved from a Baseline DRG to a Final DRG.

                      No PDF Support

                      Due to the number of columns, this report is not intended to be launched as a PDF.

                      Any non-canceled physician query created by a CDI Specialist on an inpatient, now-discharged account should appear as a line item on this report.

                      CDI Query Detail Report CDI Query Detail Report

                      CDI Query Score Card Report

                      This report is displayed in several sections:

                      1. Discharge/Reviews – This section reports on the review rate of the CDI team. It displays the number of patients discharged in the current month along with how many of them were reviewed by CDI.
                      2. CDI Query Outcome – Of the charts that made up the review rate under discharges, this section displays the total that resulted in queries that are broken down more granularly by the physician’s response rate.
                      3. Reconciliation – This section displays charts that created the review rate section and have a final DRG without having a submitted status. This section shows how often CDI and coders agree on the DRG.
                      4. CMI Comparison – This section reviews where the chart started (Baseline DRG CMI) and where the chart ended up (Final DRG CMI – which is the reported CMI). (Filtering: Max of 12 months selected; only run as a monthly report).
                      5. CDI Team Metrics - The calculations within these sections are like the existing fields in the CDI Metric Score Card report, but the review counts are determined by the discharge date or admit date of accounts, respectively

                      The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date, please note that this report date range is expanded to the full month

                      CDI Query Score Card Report CDI Query Score Card Report

                      CDI Query Score Card by Admission Month

                      This report is displayed in 4 sections:

                      1. Admit/Reviews – This section reports on the review rate of the CDI team. It displays the number of patients admitted in the current month along with how many of them were reviewed by CDI.
                      2. CDI Query Outcome – Of the charts that made up the review rate under admits, this section displays the total that resulted in queries that are broken down more granularly by the physician’s response rate.
                      3. Reconciliation – This section displays charts that created the review rate section and have a final DRG without having a submitted status. This section shows how often CDI and coders agree on the DRG.
                      4. CMI Comparison – This section reviews where the chart started (Baseline DRG CMI) and where the chart ended up (Final DRG CMI – which is the reported CMI).

                      (Filtering: Max of 12 months selected; only run as a monthly report).

                      Calculations

                      • Daily Initial Average is simple math of two other values to get the average number of initial reviews per day:
                        • Daily Initial Average = (Number of Initial Reviews) / (Number of Days Worked) - rounded to whole number
                      • Daily Follow Up Average is similar:
                        • Daily Follow Up Average = (Number of Followup Reviews) / (Number of Days Worked) - rounded to whole number
                      • Daily Average Total Reviews is simply adding both averages:
                        • Daily Average Total Reviews = (Daily Initial Average) + (Daily Follow Up Average) - rounded to whole number

                      CDI Rounding Report

                      This report shows all charts reviewed and not reviewed by CDI. If the account has not been reviewed by CDI, working information will be blank to allow CDI to take notes while rounding. If the account has been reviewed by CDI, this report will show an account level view by admit date of the difference between the ALOS and the GMLOS based on the most current Working DRG. The variance is the difference between ALOS and the GMLOS. The higher that number, the chart is identified as needing a re-review for potential DRG change and SOI/ROM. The date range on this report is the Chart Admit Date. To qualify for this report the chart must be an Inpatient Chart.

                      CDI Rounding Report CDI Rounding Report

                      CDI Activity Report

                      This report shows the number of ‘Initial Reviews’ vs ‘Followup Reviews’ per category (patient type) with the total number of queries sent. (Filtering: Max of 31 days selected). The date range on this report is the Chart Working DRG Save Date/Time (Query Create Date for the Queries.)

                      CDI Activity Report CDI Activity Report

                      CDI Codes on Submitted Charts Report

                      This report shows the list of diagnosis codes and procedures that CDI assigned in sequenced order.

                      No PDF Support

                      Due to the number of columns, this report is not intended to be launched as a PDF.

                      CDI Codes on Submitted Charts Report CDI Codes on Submitted Charts Report

                      Coder DRG Summary

                      This report is to show the breakdown per coder MS-DRG to show the total visits per DRG.

                      Coder DRG Summary Coder DRG Summary

                      Engine Outcome Summary by Coder Report

                      This report can be used to determine how the engine performed for the coder. It shows whether they leveraged the code suggestions or if they manually entered codes, bypassing suggestions. Data is gathered based on the date the chart was coded, and is based on final codes, not working. This report should be used in conjunction with a coding audit if needed.

                      • Accepted: A code suggestion was assigned directly to the account.
                      • Added: A code was added to a text document manually and assigned to the account.
                        • Added Text: counts the number of codes added to phrases in text documents that were not suggested by FAE.
                        • Added Non-Text: counts the number of codes added to the top of text documents and worksheets that were not suggested by FAE.
                      • Edited: A code suggestion was edited and then assigned to the account.
                      • Direct: A code was assigned directly to the account manually or from the Solventum CRS encoder, but also suggested by FAE
                      • Image: A code was assigned from an image document.
                        • Image (Non-Duplicate): counts the number of codes added to image documents not suggested by FAE.
                        • Image (Duplicate): counts the number of codes added to image documents that were also suggested by FAE.

                      The date range on this report is the Chart Submitted Date (FirstSubmitter.)

                      Engine Outcome Summary by Coder Report Engine Outcome Summary by Coder Report

                      Coded Procedure Account Details Report

                      This report provides details about charts with assigned procedures. The date range on this report is the Chart Last Submitted Date. To qualify for this report the chart must have at least one Procedure code assigned on the chart.

                      Coded Procedure Account Details Report Coded Procedure Account Details Report

                      Coder Activity Report

                      This report shows the distinct number of accounts that were ‘Viewed’, ‘Saved’, ‘Submitted’, and ‘Resubmitted’, then the total number of Queries created, the total time updating, time viewing accounts, and total time spent per day - grouped by coder then by category (patient type) over the date range. Date Range is the date of the activity, beginning of start date to the ending of end date. (Filtering: max of 31 days selected). The date range on this report is the Change History Audit Date (Viewed, Saved, Submitted, Resubmitted actions.

                      Coder Activity Report Coder Activity Report

                      Coder Detailed Activity Report

                      This report is very similar to the “Coder Activity Report” but with two notable changes:

                      1. The new column “Chart Touches” counts the number of times the user touched" an account on a specific date. A touch is defined as a unique save or submit action.
                      2. The times submitting and times saving are split. If the user loads an accounts, saves it, keeps the account loaded, and then submits it, the time between loading the account and saving it counts as time submitted instead of time saving.

                      Coder Detailed Activity Report Coder Detailed Activity Report

                      Physician Coding Activity

                      This report shows the distinct unique charts a physician coder viewed and how many changes were submitted and pended, then the total number of Queries created, the total time updating, time viewing accounts, and total time spent per day - grouped by coder then by category over the date range. Date Range is the date of the activity, beginning of start date to the ending of end date.

                      Physician Coding Activity Physician Coding Activity

                      Coding Chart Status Report

                      This report displays coding productivity in regard to submitted, pending, and unbilled charts. This report shows how long the chart took to code from the time the patient was discharged and how long the chart took from the time the coder had accessibility to the patient chart. Once a patient is discharged, it may be examined for completeness and non-coding staff may place pending reasons on the chart to indicate deficiencies. When the deficiencies are resolved, the chart is then assigned to a coding worklist to indicate the chart is ready for coding. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date

                      Coding Chart Status Report Coding Chart Status Report

                      Discharged Not Final Coded Report

                      This report will show management all of the discharged charts within the system that do not have final coding. The date range for this report is the Chart Discharged Date. To qualify for this report the chart must have a status of Unbilled. If there are multiple pending reasons on a qualifying chart, they will be separated by a comma.

                      Discharged Not Final Coded Report Discharged Not Final Coded Report

                      DRG Comparison Report

                      This report shows the difference between Baseline DRG and Final DRG per account. Only accounts that have both a CDS calculated Baseline DRG and a Coder Submitted Final DRG with an Admit Date within the selected range will be included. The user(s) selected below will constrain the data to either (or both) by the CDS on the most current calculated Baseline DRG or the Coder that last submitted with a Final DRG. (Filtering: Minimum of 1 category selected). The date range on this report is the Chart Admit Date.

                      DRG Comparison Report DRG Comparison Report

                      Engine Outcome Detail per Coder

                      This report should be used to show if the user is using code suggestions or manually adding codes. It will show total assigned codes broken down by code set along with how many codes were suggested by the engine versus added by text documents and non-text documents in addition to those that were added in duplicate. This report card should be used as an educational opportunity to show possible improvements for the end-user and/or code suggestions. This report is recommended to be used in conjunction with an audit.

                      Documents without codes not included in total

                      The field “Total Documents” had to be constrained to count the total documents on the account with at least one attached code to make the formulas correct. Documents with no codes (suggested nor added) are not counted in this report (and shouldn’t be since this report is about engine outcome).

                      Engine Outcome Detail per Coder Engine Outcome Detail per Coder

                      Engine Outcome Detail per CDI

                      This report shows the total codes that the engine is suggesting, and what CDI is using vs. what CDI is manually adding compared to the coder’s Final Codes. This report should tell the level of manual effort per CDI of those codes that are being used for final code assignment by coders. It will show total assigned codes by CDI broken down by code set along with how many codes were suggested by the engine versus added by text documents and non-text documents in addition to those that were added in duplicate. There is also a column to indicate of the codes manually added how many did the coder assign for final code assignment. This report card should be used as an educational opportunity to show possible improvements for the end-user and/or the code suggestions. This report is recommended to be used in conjunction with an audit.

                      Engine Outcome Detail per CDI Engine Outcome Detail per CDI

                      Engine Results by Documents Report

                      This report shows the default engine accuracy per document at the time of submission. Also, shows the first and last times the document was received on the submitted accounts. The report is sorted from most to least added/edited codes by the coder. The date range on this report is the Chart Submitted Date (FirstSubmitter).

                      Engine Results by Documents Report Engine Results by Documents Report

                      Financial Class Outcome by Discharge Report

                      This report shows the breakdown per financial class per month. It will breakdown the total patient charts, average length of stay total charts and case mix index.

                      Financial Class Outcome by Discharge Report Financial Class Outcome by Discharge Report

                      Final Code Count per Account Report

                      This report shows the submitted chart high level outcomes for diagnosis and procedure codes per account. The Total Dx column displays the total of unique diagnosis codes on the account (visit, admit, principal and secondary); the # of DX Unspecified column shows how many of those codes are showing an ‘unspecified’ designation in their description. This report will allow managers to target coder audits to determine if the chart is being coded correctly or if additional data should have been requested through a query. This report would be used in conjunction with an audit. The date range on this report is the Chart Last Submitted Date (Must have a status of Submitted.)

                      Final Code Count per Account Report Final Code Count per Account Report

                      Global Productivity Report

                      This report shows coder productivity by patient type per day, the number of ‘Viewed’, ‘Saved’, and ‘Submitted’ actions, and the total time logged working on that patient type. (Filtering: Max of 31 days selected). The date range on this report is the Change History Audit Date (Submitted, Resubmitted, Saved, Viewed actions.)

                      Global Productivity Report Global Productivity Report

                      HAC Report

                      This report is to provide a listing of all patients admitted within the date range of this report that contains hospital acquired conditions. This report only looks at final coded data and does not reflect working data. The date range on this report is the Chart Admit Date.

                      HAC Report HAC Report

                      Incentive Productiviy Report

                      This report applies an incentive multiplier to the distinct number of accounts that were first submitted each week, per user, to calculate incentive points.

                      • Multiplies the number of first submitted accounts per week by an incentive multiplier per category that is configured in Mappings Configuration.
                      • The administrator can optionally record an incentive multiplier that is used in this report.
                      • Categories without a value in the incentive multiplier will be calculated with an incentive multiplier of 1.0.
                      • This report is like the “Weekly Coder Productivity Report” in that it reports on whole weeks, but only produces an entry if the coder first submitted an account that week.

                      Incentive Productivity Report Incentive Productivity Report

                      Length of Stay Variance Report

                      This report shows an account level view by admit date of the difference between the ALOS and the GMLOS based on the most current Working DRG. The variance is the difference between ALOS and the GMLOS. The higher that number, the chart is identified as needing a re-review for potential DRG change and SOI/ROM. The date range on this report is the Chart Admit Date (Must be an Inpatient Chart).

                      Length of Stay Variance Report Length of Stay Variance Report

                      Outstanding Queries Report

                      This report displays a list of the physicians that have open queries. At the top of the report there is a summary that shows the Top Physicians with outstanding queries and the length of time their oldest query has been open. Date Range: Query Create Date (The date that the query was initially created and sent).

                      Outstanding Queries Report Outstanding Queries Report

                      Pending Reasons Report

                      This report shows which charts are pending, who placed the pending reason, what the pending reason is, and which physician was assigned to the pending reason. Not all pending reasons will have a physician assigned as some pending reasons are not a result of chart deficiency. The date range on this report is the Chart Admit Date.

                      Pending Reasons Report Pending Reasons Report

                      Query Impact Report

                      This report includes all charts that received queries and resulted in at least one of the following:

                      • A change in DRG
                      • Change in CC/MCC/HAC Totals
                      • Other reasons your facility has defined as a query shift reason

                      This report will show you the impact that the query made. The report is grouped by query template name, then by Author, then by account #. The query will also show if there was a shift in DRG and what the user listed as the reason for the shift. The date range on this report is the Query Create Date (The date that the query was initially created and sent)

                      Queries with same DRG & No Shift Reasons Not Included

                      By design, the Query Impact Report only reports queries that had an impact by either having different before-and-after DRGs or by having shift reasons. The queries not displayed in the Query Impact Report had identical DRGs and no shift reasons, so they were excluded. Hence, the name of the report – Query Impact Report.

                      Query Impact Report Query Impact Report

                      Query Impact by Discharge Date Report

                      This report includes all charts that received queries and resulted in at least one of the following:

                      • A change in DRG
                      • Change in CC/MCC/HAC Totals
                      • Other reasons your facility has defined as a query shift reason

                      This report will show you the impact that the query made. The report is based on the patient’s discharge date and is grouped by query template name, then by Author, then by account #. The query will also show if there was a shift in DRG and what the user listed as the reason for the shift. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date.

                      Queries With the Same DRG & No Shift Reasons Not Included

                      By design, the Query Impact Report only reports queries that had an impact by either having different before-and-after DRGs or by having shift reasons. The queries not displayed in the Query Impact Report had identical DRGs and no shift reasons, so they were excluded. Hence, the name of the report – Query Impact Report.

                      Query Impact by Discharge Date Report Query Impact by Discharge Date Report

                      Query Overview Report

                      This report shows pre-discharge physicians query response or non-response and the template used. The date range on this report is the Query Create Date (The date that the query was initially created and sent).

                      Query Overview Report Query Overview Report

                      Query Stats Report

                      This report shows the physicians within the date range that were queried. The report will show how many charts the physician was queried for and how many queries these charts resulted in. The date range on this report is the Query Create Date (The date that the query was initially created and sent.)

                      Query Stats Report Query Stats Report

                      Present on Admission Tracking Report

                      This report is based on the date the patient chart was discharged and its final diagnosis codes. POA Values will be listed, along with HAC determinations if they are present. The totals for the columns Visit Count, Total LOS Days and Average LOS, (if available; Deaths, Autopsy Required) are figured per account, the Totals for the Present on Admit and HAC columns are figured per code. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date.

                      Present on Admission Tracking Report Present on Admission Tracking Report

                      Query TAT by Author Report

                      This report shows all of the queries that have been responded, with who sent the queries and the turn around time, which is based on the date/time it was sent to the physician until the date/time that the query was responded. The date range on this report is the Query Create Date (The date that the query was initially created and sent).

                      Query TAT by Author Report Query TAT by Author Report

                      Query Template Volume Overview Report

                      This report shows the volume of queries per template sorted by whom the query was sent with the date sent and then responded to then when it was closed as agreed, disagreed or no opinion per account along with the discharge date. The date range on this report is the Query Create Date (The date that the query was initially created and sent).

                      Query Template Volume Overview Report Query Template Volume Overview Report

                      Query Template Volume by Discharge Date Report

                      This report shows the volume of queries per template for discharged accounts, sorted by whom the query was sent with the date sent and then responded to then when it was closed as agreed, disagreed or no opinion.

                      Query Template Volume by Discharge Date Report Query Template Volume by Discharge Date Report

                      Info

                      This report is a clone of the “Query Template Volume Overview” report but the date range of the report is by Discharge Date instead of Query Creation Date. This means that only queries of discharged accounts will appear in this report.

                      Recent Suggested/Working DRG Report

                      This report shows all unsubmitted inpatient accounts without a discharge date that have a calculated Suggested or Working DRG, grouped by calculation date. Only the most recent Suggested or Working DRG is displayed for each account. The ““Updated By”” column will say ““Suggested”” to indicate that the DRG was calculated automatically from the Suggested DRG module. Sites that do not use the Suggested DRG module can still use this report to get the most recent Working DRGs for all Inhouse accounts. In addition to displaying the GMLOS, it also displays the LOS and Variance.

                      The date range is irrelevant and will report on all inpatient accounts with no discharge date that have either a suggested DRG (calculated by the Suggested DRG module) or a working DRG (calculated by a CDI Specialist).

                      Recent Suggested/Working DRG Report Recent Suggested/Working DRG Report

                      Recurring Account Productivity Report

                      This report tracks daily productivity for recurring accounts. It uses the effective date to track which occurrence of the account was coded. An account can repeat on the report if the chart has been coded multiple times on the same day with different effective dates. Total time in account is shown as HH:MM:SS. The date range on this report is the Change History Audit Date (Submitted, Resubmitted, Saved, Viewed actions

                      Recurring Account Productivity Report Recurring Account Productivity Report

                      Submitted by Coder Report

                      This report shows the number of accounts submitted - grouped by facility, category, and submitter - over the account discharged date range. The number of accounts submitted per coder is compared to the total number of accounts per facility and category to calculate a submitted rate. Total discharges are only displayed per facility and category. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date

                      Submitted by Coder Report Submitted by Coder Report

                      Submitted by Discharge Date Report

                      This report shows the number of accounts discharged, submitted, and percent of submitted - grouped by facility, discharge date, and patient type over the date range. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date.

                      Submitted by Discharge Date Report Submitted by Discharge Date Report

                      Submitted Secondary Diagnosis Total

                      This report is based on the first submit of an account. It shows the total number of secondary diagnoses codes per account and whether the end user manually added the code(s), the system suggested them, or the user added AND the engine suggested the code(s). In addition, the total codes still unassigned upon submit will be shown.

                      Submitted Secondary Diagnosis Total Submitted Secondary Diagnosis Total

                      Top 10 Coded Medical vs. Surgical DRG Report

                      This report displays the Top 10 Medical vs. Surgical DRGs for submitted accounts within the defined discharge date. Medical DRGs and Surgical DRGs are defined by the DRG type that is returned from the TruCode or Solventum CRS encoder. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date (Must be Submitted and have a Final DRG).

                      Top 10 Coded Medical vs. Surgical DRG Report Top 10 Coded Medical vs. Surgical DRG Report

                      User Audit Trail Report

                      This report shows user activities within the selected date range. Not selecting a User will result in only system events being displayed. (Filtering: Max of 1 user selected; max of 1 day selected). The date range on this report is the Date & Time of the action of the activity.

                      User Detail Report

                      This report shows the detail of the accounts that are coded including re-submits, the codes Added/Deleted by the coder, number of documents, and Total Charges amounts — grouped by coder over the date range. (distinct accounts) Date Range is the date the account was submitted, beginning of start date to the ending of end date. (Filtering: Minimum of 1 user selected; max of 7 days selected). The date range on this report is the ChangeHistory Audit Date (Submitted actions).

                      User Detail Report User Detail Report

                      User Session Log Report

                      This report shows the users log showing the Checkout time (when user went into the account), Checkin time (‘Saved’, ‘Submitted’, or canceled activity in the account), and total time in the account per each account session. (Filtering: Minimum of 1 user selected; max of 7 days selected). The date range on this report is the ChangeHistory Audit Date (Check Out & Check In of the Account Dates).

                      User Session Log Report User Session Log Report

                      Weekly Coder Activity Report

                      This report shows the distinct number of accounts that were ‘Viewed’, ‘Saved’, ‘Submitted’, and ‘Resubmitted’, then the total number of Queries created, the total time updating, time viewing accounts, and total time spent per week - grouped by coder then by category (patient type) over the week range. The week range contains the date of the activity, beginning of start date to end date. (Filtering: Minimum of 1 user selected). The date range on this report is the Change History Audit Date (Viewed, Saved, Submitted, Resubmitted actions).

                      Weekly Coder Activity Report Weekly Coder Activity Report

                      CDI Query Detail Report

                      This report provides details of physician queries created by CDI Specialists on accounts that have since been discharged. This report details how the account evolved from a Baseline DRG to a Final DRG. Any non-canceled physician query created by a CDI Specialist on an inpatient, now-discharged account should appear as a line item on this report. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date. To qualify for this report the chart must be an inpatient patient type.

                      CDI Query Detail Report CDI Query Detail Report

                      No PDF Support

                      Due to the number of columns, this report is not intended to be launched as a PDF.

                      Consulting Provider Report

                      This report provides a list of all consulting provider(s) that were added to each account. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date. To qualify for this report the chart must be Submitted and have at least one Consulting Provider.

                      Consulting Provider Report Consulting Provider Report

                      Engine Outcome per Coder Report

                      This report should be used to show if the user is using code suggestions or manually adding codes. It will show total assigned codes broken down by code set along with how many codes were suggested by the engine versus added by text documents and non-text documents in addition to those that were added in duplicate. Duplicate is defined by codes that both the engine and the end-user added the code. This report card should be used as an educational opportunity to show possible improvements for the end- user and/or code suggestions. This report is recommended to be used in conjunction with an audit.

                      The field Total Documents had to be constrained to count the total documents on the account with at least one attached code to make the formulas correct. Documents with no codes suggested nor added are not counted in this report and should not be since this report is about engine outcome. The date range on this report is the Chart Submitted Date. To qualify for this, report the chart must be Submitted with assigned codes.

                      Engine Outcome per Coder Report Engine Outcome per Coder Report

                      Payor Volumes Report

                      This report shows the submitted patient account number, full name, MRN#, discharge date, patient type, and facility - grouped by payor with number of accounts submitted subtotals and grand total over the date range. Date Range is the date the account was discharged, beginning of start date to the ending of end date. The date range on this report is the Chart Discharged Date. To qualify for this report the chart must be Submitted.

                      Payor Volumes Report Payor Volumes Report

                      Current Workgroup Report

                      This report shows the list of all of the workgroups with the total charts, oldest admit and discharge date along with total charges.

                      Date Range not Used

                      The date fields below are not used for this report. The current workgroup assignments are reported.

                      User Filter Behavior

                      • If no user is filtered on this report, this report will output the current workgroup statistics for all enabled workgroups that do not have a workgroup type of “Purge” (more info below)
                      • If one or more users are selected as a filter, this report will output the current workgroup statistics for the workgroups that are assigned to only those users (mimicking the workgroup list that appears in the user’s personal dashboard).
                      • CDI workgroups can have a blank “oldest discharge date” since no accounts in CDI workgroups typically have a discharge date.

                      Current Workgroup Report Current Workgroup Report

                      AMA CPT Utilization Report

                      This report lists all users who have added or edited CPT codes on accounts for a specified date range for AMA license reporting. This is a report Dolbey uses to report CPT code usage to the AMA.

                      AMA CPT Utilization Report AMA CPT Utilization Report

                      Topics

                      User reports can be categorized by topic, per organization.

                      For example, the following reports might be added to a topic of Impact Reports: you are running reports.

                      • Physician Query Impact
                      • Physician Query Impact by Discharge Date
                      • CDI Financial Benefit

                      Reports can be filtered by topic to narrow down the list of available reports.

                      Filter by Topic Filter by Topic

                      To assign a topic to report

                      • Select the report
                      • Click Edit Topic
                      • Edit the selected report Edit Topics Dialog Edit Topics Dialog
                        • Choose an exisiting topic from the dropdown menu
                        • Enter a name for a custom topic, and click +Add
                        • Click Save
                      Info

                      A report can have multiple topic tags.

                      Topics can be managed in the Topics Mapping Table.

                      Scheduled Reports

                      Scheduled User Reports Scheduled User Reports

                      Reports in Fusion CAC can be scheduled to be delivered via email at specified times.

                      Clicking +Create New Schedule will open the scheduling options.

                      Report Schedule Options Report Schedule Options

                      Click Save in the upper right hand corner to save the settings and start the schedule.

                      FieldPurpose
                      NameName of the scheduled report that will display on the left hand side of the screen
                      ReportDropdown list of User Reports available to be scheduled
                      FormatFormat of the report when delivered to the recipient(s)
                      DisclaimerMust be checked to acknowledge the report in question may contain PHI
                      Run ForAllows for filtering the report by role type (All Users, Auditors Only, CDI Only, Coders Only)
                      Date RangeDate range for the report. Can be set for X number of days or months in past
                      Email ToEmail(s) for recipient(s). If sending to multiple people, email addresses should be comma separated. Receipients do not need to have an active Fusion CAC account to receive a scheduled report
                      SubjectText to appear in the subject of the email
                      BodyText to appear in the body of the email. It is recommended to include a note that the email is automatically generated and to include contact details for those who no longer want to recieve the report
                      FrequencyHow often the report will be sent to the recipient(s). It is recommended to schedule reports outside of peak hours whenever possible for performance.
                      CommentsNote for management to keep track of report details. Text entered here will not be included in the email sent out

                      Saved reports will display on the left hand side of the screen.

                      Saved Scheduled Reports Saved Scheduled Reports

                      Run History

                      Scheduled reports will have a run history.

                      Report Run History Report Run History

                      A run history will display above the schedule data for the last three times the report ran, whether it was successful or errored. No text in the message column indicate the report ran and was delivered without error. A message of “No Message Returned” indicates nothing was sent as the report yeilded no results. The application will not send out a blank report.

                      Subsections of Tools

                      Code Set Management

                      Code Set Management Code Set Management

                      Code sets are commonly used groups of codes that can be saved for ease of use and productivity. Codes sets can be saved by topic to provide a quick code assignment. Managers can create code sets to push out to coders and/or users can create their own.

                      Coding Standard Changes / Expirations

                      Code sets need to be regularly reviewed and updated by administrators to account for changes and expirations in the ICD/CPT coding standards.

                      Create a Code Set

                      1. Click on +Add in the Active Code Set navigation menu on the left hand side of the screen
                      2. Name the code set so it is clear what codes it contains
                      3. Select if code set should be shared. Check with management for the organization’s policy on code sets
                      4. Choose what patient type this code set is relevant to
                      5. Add codes into the “Add codes" box.
                      6. Click “Save Code Sets” when completed

                      Add Add

                      User Management

                      User Management User Management

                      User Management allows management to add, delete, or change permissions and/or set work lists for other users. The grid view will display all users with a Fusion CAC User ID. The columns can be arranged in any order and saved per user.

                      ColumnDescription
                      ActionCopy exisiting profile when creating new user:Copy User Copy User Edit existing profile:Edit User Edit User Remove unused profile: Delete User Delete User
                      LockedIndicates if the user is locked out of the application
                      Employee NumberEmployee number from ogranization
                      User IDUsername used to log into the application
                      First NameUser’s first name
                      Last NameUser’s last name
                      FacilitiesUser’s assigned facilites
                      RolesUser’s assigned role(s) in the applicationied to their permissions
                      WorkgroupsUser’s assigned workgroups
                      Active UserIndicates if the user has active access to the application
                      Last Access TimeDate and time the user last logged into the application
                      Force AutoloadStatus of Force Autoload for the user
                      EmailUser’s email address
                      Removing a Profile

                      A profile can only be removed if the user has not signed into the application. Once a user logs in, the delete icon will no longer show in their Actions column. This is to maintain accurate reporting. If a user should no longer have access to the Fusion CAC application, their profile should be locked.

                      Edit User Profile

                      New User

                      +Add User allows management to create a brand new user profile from scratch

                      Copying a user profile will carry over some settings from an existing profile to a brand new profile

                      • Roles
                      • Facilites
                      • Chart Access
                      • Workgroups

                      User Name and Password (Required)

                      It is common practice for organizations to use LDAP to communicate with their Active Directory, which stores user information such as usernames and passwords. When a user logs into Fusion CAC, the application can use LDAP to check Active Directory for the user’s credentials. In short, LDAP allows the application to use existing usernames and passwords from Active Directory, so users do not need to remember separate login credentials specific to Fusion CAC.

                      For this process to work, the credentials entered into Fusion CAC must be identical to the Windows login provided by the organization. As long as the user name matches, there is no need to enter a password when creating a new profile in the application. Fusion CAC will be able to link to Active Directory and the end user can log into the application using the same information they use to log into their work computer.

                      User Name Cannot be Changed

                      Once a user name is entered it cannot be edited. If a profile is created with an invalid user name, a new profile with the correct user name must be created. This is to maintain consistency for reporting. If the incorrect profile is never used, it may be removed from the User Management page.

                      Employee Number

                      If applicable, the user’s employee number can be entered. Only administrators can see and edit user Employee Numbers.

                      Roles

                      In Fusion CAC, roles determine the permissions and privileges a user has while navigating the application. Users can have multiple roles. Roles can be configured by management in the Role Management tool.

                      Default roles include:

                      RoleDescription
                      ViewerCan view the patient chart but cannot make changes.
                      CoderCan view the patient chart, as well as add, delete, and change codes and DRGs on the coding abstract. Can add and remove items on coding forms, access editable fields in account information, and add notes and bookmarks.
                      Physician CoderCan view the patient chart, add, delete, and change codes for physician-specific coding. Can add and remove items on physician coding forms, access editable fields in account information, and add notes and bookmarks.
                      Single Path CoderCan view the patient chart and has permissions to add, delete, and modify final codes for both physician and hospital coding.
                      CDI SpecialistCan view the patient chart, add, delete, and change codes and DRGs on the CDI abstract. Can add and remove items on CDI forms, access editable fields in account information, and add notes and bookmarks.
                      RouterThis role is an add-on for Coder, Physician Coder, or CDI Specialist roles. Enables users to manually route tasks to other users or workgroups, overriding the system’s automated workflow.
                      AuditorCan view the patient chart and add, delete, and change codes and DRGs on the coding abstract. Can add and remove items on coding forms, access editable fields in account information, and add notes and bookmarks. Can also import previously submitted codes and initiate an audit worksheet.
                      ManagerCan do everything that Coders and Viewers can do. They can also add and delete users to the system from their own facility, change passwords, or change user roles. Managers can assign accounts to users and produce reports describing the state of the work queue and various coder statistics from their own facility.
                      AdministratorCan do everything that Coders and Viewers can do. They can also add and delete users to the system, change passwords, or change user roles throughout all facilities (if multi-site). Administrators can assign accounts to users and produce reports describing the state of the work queue and various coder statistics.

                      Facilities

                      Multi-site organizations can assign specific facilities to users. Options in the dropdown menu can be customized using the Mapping Configuration tool. Once assigned, the user will only be able to acces charts from their assigned facilities.

                      Manager

                      The user can be assigned to an individual manager. Selecting a user from the Manager dropdown and saving the user will add/edit the manager assigned to the coder.

                      User Manager Assignment User Manager Assignment

                      Managers only have accessibility to pull user reports and dashboard activities for the end users assigned to them. When the manager logs in and has at least one coder assigned to them, the coder and audit administrative dashboards will only show data relevant to the assigned coder(s). When the manager runs a User Report, the report will automatically be filtered to the users assigned to the manager. The manager is unable to gather any report information involving users not assigned to the manager.

                      For this feature, managers are defined as users with the role of “Manager” but not a role of “Administrator.” No users have managers by default, since the configuration of managers is entirely optional. Additionally, a user cannot be their own manager.

                      Email

                      The user’s email can be entered for documentation purposes, unless the organization is using the Enable Query functionality.

                      Name (Required)

                      Data entered in these fields are used to identify the user various areas of the application, including reporting.

                      Signature

                      Clicking +Add next to Signature in the top right corner allows each user to create a signature that will automatically be sent at the bottom of physician queries. This line will appear at the bottom of Physician Queries to show who created the query. A new button is located next to the user’s name in the user profile.

                      Add Signature Add Signature

                      Clicking it will open a box allowing the user to create the signature.

                      Sample User Signature Sample User Signature

                      For formatting options, highlight the text in the signature box.

                      Enable Query

                      This setting is not commonly configured. Enable Query allows a user to send a Physician Query to a valid email, if the user receiving the query is added in User Management with a vaild email address.

                      Enable Query Checkbox Enable Query Checkbox

                      If that checkbox is checked, the user becomes searchable in the physician dropdown within a physician query.

                      Physican Query Picklist Physican Query Picklist

                      The user will only be visable upon typing in the User ID and will show a little person icon next to their name to indicate they are not a physician.

                      Email-based Physician Queries Only

                      Most sites sending physician queries choose to send to physicians in their MFN file rather than email. This feature was developed for a select few sites that do query through email. This setting must be turned on by your Project Team or CAC Support. Enableing this functionality requires development work as an interface change is needed as to how and where queries are sent.

                      Active

                      This field allows management to revoke access to the system. If checked the user is active and can log into the application. If unchecked, the user is inactive and will not have access to the system.

                      Locked

                      The user will not be able to login until this box is unchecked. An account will automatically lock by incorrectly after three (3) incorrect sign in attempts. If a user’s profile is locked, they will not be able to log into the Fusion CAC application. Unchecking the box will allow the user to attempt to sign back in.

                      Active Directory Users - Reset Password

                      If a user forgets their password the system is configured to use Windows log-in (Active Directory), the password must be reset through the organization’s internal processes for resetting account information.

                      Workgroups

                      Workgroups selected from the dropdown are assigned to the user.

                      Assigned Primary Workgroups Assigned Primary Workgroups

                      Assigned workgroups will display to the end user in the Assgned To: dropdown on the Accounts page.

                      Primary workgroups will be presented to the end user first. Backup workgroups will be presented if there are no accounts availble in the user’s primary queues.

                      To select multiple workgroups at a time, hold the Ctrl key while clicking.

                      Force AutoLoad

                      Force AutoLoad Checkbox Force AutoLoad Checkbox

                      Force Autoload helps prevent cherry-picking by forcing the order in which patient charts are presented to end users.

                      Autoload Dashboard Autoload Dashboard

                      Users with ForceAutoload enabled will bypass the Account List page upon logging in and be directed to the AutoLoad page. To access their next account, they simply click Go To Next Account, which automatically loads the first available account from their assigned workgroups. The system follows the sort order set by the manager and skips any charts currently locked in use by another user.

                      If there are no accounts left to work, the user will receive a message that there are no accounts in the queue.

                      No Accounts in Queue No Accounts in Queue

                      Workgroup Limits

                      When Force Autoload is enabled, Limit: boxes will display next to each assigned workgroup.

                      Force Autoload Workgroup Limits Force Autoload Workgroup Limits

                      Managers can limit the number of accounts per workgroup the user will be assigned before they are presented with accounts from the next list. If no limit is set, the user will have access to however many accounts are currently in the workgroup. To transition to the next workgroup, the current workgroup must be fully completed.

                      Manual Routing Always Takes Priority

                      If an administrator routes a chart directly to the user’s “You” worklist, the chart will automatically be presetened before resuming normal workgroup priority order.

                      The Autoload page provides a copy of the Coder Personal Dashboard. The coder will also see a list of accounts they saved with a Pending Reason at the bottom of the autoload page.

                      User Profile Menu

                      Users can access their profile information by clicking on their name in the top right hand corner.

                      • Selecting “Profile” will open their profile. The user’s permissions will dictate which settings they are able to edit. Users with multiple roles will need to open their profile to switch roles.
                      • Log Out will log the user out of the application. It is recommened for users to log out when they are done working rather than just closing the browser window.

                      Today’s Productivity

                      Daily productivity stats are displayed when the user clicks on the bar graph icon to the left of the user’s ID. This is an alternative way for the user to quickly see their work if they are not looking at their Personal Dashboard.

                      Today’s Productivity Today’s Productivity

                      When the bar graph icon is clicked, the “Today’s Productivity” dialog box will open.

                      Coder/Auditor View: Today’s Productivity Coder Today’s Productivity Coder

                      CDI View: Today’s Productivity CDI Today’s Productivity CDI

                      Workflow Management

                      Workflow Management Tool Workflow Management Tool

                      The Workflow Management tool allows Administrators to create, design, modify, and manage workflow(s) within Fusion CAC.

                      The purpose of a workflow is to systematically organize and streamline the patient chart activities for proper completion. Workflows are designed to improve efficiency, productivity, and collaboration between the various user roles by defining the sequence of steps, assigning responsibilities, and establishing the flow of information between different individuals or departments involved in the process. They ensure that tasks are completed in a structured and efficient manner, enabling organizations to achieve their goals more effectively.

                      Worklists

                      Worklists are organized into one of the following categories:

                      CategoryDescription
                      AuditAvailable for any charts needing an audit. This workflow can be used to define certain days for when charts are added to the Auditor worklist(s)
                      AutocloseProcess by which an ancillary patient chart can be autoclosed based upon a set of rules without coder intervention
                      CDI/ConcurrentONLY valid if the patient chart does not have a discharge date and has a status of unbilled
                      Post DischargeONLY valid if patient chart has a discharge date and has a status of unbilled
                      QA ReviewAvailable for any charts needing QA and/or for reconciliation workflow
                      CustomAllows custom categories to meet unique client specification

                      Categories are made up of one or more worklists. Each worklist is then made up of one or more criteria groups. For example:

                      Worklist Hierarchy Worklist Hierarchy

                      • The Post Discharge category
                        • contains the Inpatient worklist
                          • which has the Ready for Coding criteria group
                            • which is then made up of multiple pieces of criteria

                      It is possible for an account to be in more than one worklist at a time, depending on the category:

                      • An account may only be in one default category at a time.
                      • Custom categories allow an account to be in multiple custom categories at the same time.
                      • An account can also be in one default category and multiple custom categories at the same time.
                      • An account cannot be in more than one workgroup within the same category.

                      Often a worklist will contain multiple criteria groups. Each criteria group has many different filters to fully constrain the data. This ensures the appropriate number of charts are caught in each worklist.

                      Terminology

                      Worklist, Workgroup, and Queue are often used interchangeably when discussing sorting accounts into “buckets”.

                      Audit

                      Audit workflow collects charts meeting the specified criteria needed to be reviewed by an Auditor. The workflow can define certain days for when charts are added to the Auditor worklist(s).In Workflow Management the Audit default workgroup category is identical to all other workgroup categories, but Audit workflow is triggered on a schedule instead of in real-time.

                      Example: Select that workflow automatically adds charts to the worklist on the first day of every month and last day of the month.

                      Edit Audit Dialog Edit Audit Dialog

                      On the designated days every month, 5 charts (the limit can be changed) from every Coder (First Submitter) will be automatically routed to the Auditor’s worklist.

                      Schedule

                      The setting to determine when workflow will run for this Audit (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly).

                      Groups

                      One or more single fields to perform the grouping. For example, a grouping of “Last Submitter” and “Is Inpatient” would tell Audit workflow that after gathering the list of accounts, group them by unique Last Submitter and Is Inpatient.

                      Limits

                      The number of accounts to assign from each grouping. This value can be a maximum number, a percentage, or both. Using the example above:

                      • Setting the selection to 5 maximum with no percentage means that for each unique group of “Last Submitter” and “Is Inpatient” accounts, randomly assign up to 5 accounts
                      • Setting the selection to 50 percent and 10 maximum means that for each unique group of “Last Submitter” and “Is Inpatient” accounts, randomly assign 50% of the accounts, up to 5 maximum
                      • Setting the selection to 50 percent with no maximum means that for each unique group of Last Submitter" and “Is Inpatient” accounts, randomly assign 50% of the accounts
                      Random Audit

                      The criteria filter, “Random Percentage” is included in the workflow criteria options. When set to a number between 0 and 100 and detected in the workflow engine, a random number will be generated. If the random number is less than or greater than the number in the filter criteria, the Criteria will match.

                      Random Inclusion Factor that is less than 20 will pass a theoretical 20% of accounts through the filter. You don’t want to use this with equals (=) because it would always cause a ~1% result, and you don’t want to use it with greater than (>) because it will pass an inverse percentage.

                      As noted, this is not going to be an exact percentage, only a theoretical one. In edge cases, you could ask for “20% of accounts” and end up getting zero, or you could end up getting all of them, but most of the time, you should get ~20%.

                      This field is intended to be used with QA Workflow, although the application will not prevent an Administrator from using it in other types of workflow. Valid values for this field are from 1 to 99; any other values in this field will not work.

                      Do not think of this field as a percentage, but rather as a 100-sided die. When workflow examines this filter, it will “roll the die”. The common use case for this filter is “Random Inclusion Factor –> less than –> 10”.

                      AutoClose

                      This automation is the a process by which an ancillary patient chart can be closed by the application based upon a set of rules without Coder intervention. Autoclose is a process that takes routine outpatient visits and automates the coding process by submitting the chart directly to billing. This concept is known in the industry as autonomous coding.

                      Organizations often use AutoClose to ensure they can capitalize on the value of these ancillary charts while not sacrificing the staff they have. Common outpatient service lines that make great candidates for AutoClose include:

                      • Screening Mammogram
                      • Sleep Lab
                      • Labs
                      • Chest X-rays
                      • ED Left Without Being Seen
                      • Canceled Accounts
                      • Cardiac rehab
                      • Dietary or nutritional counseling
                      • Esophageal motility studies
                      • Outpatient dialysis
                      • Pulmonary function tests
                      • Vaccine visits

                      The types of accounts eligible for AutoClose depend on the organization, the type of services offered, payor(s), and state requirements. The Dolbey SME Team is happy to answer any questions and will work with each organization to configure AutoClose.

                      With AutoClose, charts can be processed within seconds and the total turn-around time can be a little as a few minutes. Charts are processed 24 hours a day, 365 days a year with AutoClose. The impact AutoClose can have on revenue is one of the best benefits of this feature. Many organizations AutoClose, on average, 10,000 or more charts per month. This equals out to about 120,000 outpatient visits AutoClosed per year without Coder intervention. That is an estimate of 2.5FTEs.

                      Completeing Charts

                      AutoClose can be set to complete charts on day one. Many organizations, however, choose to learn more about how the engine functions before AutoClose is enabled. Autoclose has a test mode which allows organizations to simulate what would have AutoClosed had it been enabled in production. This allows users to review and determine if AutoClose is ready for production at their facility.

                      Patient charts that pass AutoClose criteria are coded and submitted to billing. Those that fail AutoClose are rejected and routed to a worklist for Coder intervention. Rejected accounts are presented to the Coder with a failure reason.

                      As an organization expands their AutoClose capabilities, Dolbey recommends conducting regular audits to ensure the system captures and codes everything correctly.

                      Edit Workflow

                      Terminology

                      Worklist and Workgroup are often used interchangeably when discussing sorting accounts into “buckets”.

                      New Category

                      To add a new category in Workflow Management, click +Add New Category in the top right corner.

                      The dialog box has options to add a default/standard category or a new custom category.

                      Add New Category Add New Category

                      Add Worklist

                      To add a new worklist, click +Add under the appropriate category on the left hand side of the screen.

                      Add a Worklist Add a Worklist

                      Name the new workgroup.

                      Name Workgroup Name Workgroup

                      Add a Criteria Group

                      Add Criteria Group Add Criteria Group

                      Name the Criteria Group something simple but meaningful to describe the reason accounts will move into the workgroup. This will help with troubleshooting in the future.

                      Set Criteria

                      Workflow has two different criteria options to build workflow.

                      • AND criteria
                      • OR Criteria

                      AND

                      Add Criteria Button Add Criteria Button

                      All the criteria must be met for an account to “match” and be sorted into a workgroup.

                      For example, for an account to “match” with the Ready for Coding workgroup pictured below, the category must be inpatient and the admit date/time must exist and the discharge date/time must exist and the stage cannot equal A (submitted) and the workgroupassignedby cannot exist and it must not have a pending reason.

                      Ready for Coding Criteria Ready for Coding Criteria

                      OR

                      Add OR Group Criteria Button Add OR Group Criteria Button

                      At least one of the criteria must be met for an account to “match” and be sorted into a workgroup.

                      OR Criteria Example OR Criteria Example

                      The OR criteria is listed in blue to call attention.

                      Workgroup Level Criteria

                      Workgroup level criteria works like all other criteria, but when enabled will apply to every group under that workflow. This alleviates the need for the same criteria to be added to all of the criteria groups.

                      Workgroup Level Criteria Workgroup Level Criteria

                      After setting the Workgroup Level criteria, check the box to include the criteria in the appropriate criteria groups.

                      Include Workgroup Level Criteria Include Workgroup Level Criteria

                      This functionality helps to keep repetitive criteria creation to a minimum.

                      Add as many values as needed to ensure the data is sufficiently constrained so the appropriate charts make it into each queue.

                      Workflow Operators

                      Each criterion has a set of operators. Depending on the property slected, the operators may be different.

                      OperatorDescription
                      EqualsThis is used if you have one value, and it must equal the value. This is case sensitive.
                      Not Equal
                      >This sign means that the value must be less than the value noted.
                      <This sign means that the value must be greater than the value noted.
                      >=This sign means that the value must be less or equal to than the value noted.
                      <=This sign means that the value must be greater or equal to the value noted.
                      In ListIf you have more than one value, it could be any of the following.
                      Not In ListIf you have more than one value, you do not want it to equal.
                      Starts WithThis operator is a search function that identifies resulsts where a string begins with a specific set of characters such as codes and document types.
                      ContainsIf you have a word, phrase or value that can contain it must have what you added exactly. This is common when including payors.
                      Only ContainsAny one of the codes it is not needed to do all 3.
                      ExistsThis will search to see if anything “exists” in this field, if it’s not blank it will match. No value is needed after the operator.
                      Does not ExistThis will search to see if anything “does exists” in this field if it’s blank it will match. No value is needed after the operator.
                      More ThanThis operator is only used with date fields, you will need to define “more than” how many days ago. You cannot add a date into the field as this field will need to be dynamic therefore days ago is used.
                      Less ThanThis operator is only used with date fields, you will need to define “less than” how many days ago. You cannot add in a date into the field as this field will need to be dynamic therefore days ago is used.
                      Later ThanThis operator is only used with date fields, you will need to define the exact date you do not wish to exceed.
                      Is OnThis is for an exact date, this is uncommon to use for workflow.
                      Includes Each OfIf you have more than one value, it must contain all of the following. However, note the chart must have each of the values but can also have other values.
                      Includes Any OfIf you have more than one value and it could be any of the following.
                      Does not IncludeIf you have more than one value, you do not want it to equal you must use “Not In List”
                      Operator Values

                      Unless an operator does not require a value, the value field must be filled in to save the criteria.

                      Properties

                      Workgroup properties can be edited by clicking +Properties to expand the dialog.

                      Worklist Properties Worklist Properties

                      Workgroup Type

                      Workgroup Type is used to identify which team or department owns a specific workgroup. This classification is essential for determining ownership and accountability within the workflow. For example, to verify whether a particular chart is accessible or being held up, management can check which team owns that worklist. This property allows users to quickly identify the appropriate workgroup for reporting and ensure accurate tracking and visibility across departments.

                      Sort Field and Direction

                      Sort Field is used to define how patient charts are automatically organized when added to a worklist. This field determines the primary criterion for sorting, ensuring that charts are arranged in a consistent and logical order to streamline the workflow. For example, coding worklists are commonly sorted by Discharge Date to prioritize records based on when the patient was discharged.

                      After selecting the appropriate sort field, setting the Sort Direction allows management to specify the order in which the charts will appear:

                      • Ascending: Sorts the charts starting with the oldest date, ensuring that older records are addressed first.
                      • Descending: Sorts the charts starting with the most recent date, prioritizing the newest records.

                      This sorting mechanism helps users efficiently manage their workload by organizing patient charts in a way that aligns with their operational priorities, such as completing older cases first or focusing on more recent discharges.

                      Assigned Users

                      Users listed here are assigned to the worklist and will see it in the Assigned To: dropdown on the Accounts page.

                      Click in the assigned users box and select the desired user(s). Holding down Ctrl allows for selecting multiple users at once.

                      Click the X next to an assigned user to remove them from the worklist.

                      Notes

                      Worklist Notes Worklist Notes

                      Notes can be added to indicate to anyone reviewing workflow management why changes were made to criteria or sequencing. As notes are added, they will be added to a table in the workgroup properties.

                      Reordering Worklists

                      When workflow is triggered, placement decisions are made top-down and inside-out

                      • Examine criteria in the first workgroup’s first criteria group
                      • Potentially assign the workgroup and criteria If the account meets all the criteria
                      • If no “match”, examine the next criteria group in the same workgroup (if applicable)
                      • If there are no more criteria groups, examine the next workgroup and repeat until a “match” is found

                      Worklist order matters because of how placement decisions are made.

                      Move Worklist Up or Down Move Worklist Up or Down

                      Workgroups can be reordered using the buttons at the top of the worklist or by clicking and dragging the worklist name in the list on the left hand side of the screen.

                      Workflow History Edits

                      The Workflow Management page displays a running history of edits. A timestamp next to the worklist name will show the date and time of the last change made. Hovering over the date/time stamp will provide additional details. Clicking on that timestamp will open a log of changes made to the workgroup and criteria group(s).

                      Workgroup Level Timestamp Workgroup Level Timestamp

                      Any change made to criteria will show as a timestamp to the right of the specific criteria that was changed. Hovering over the date/time stamp will provide additional details. Clicking on that timestamp will open a log of changes made to that criteria.

                      Workflow Edit History Workflow Edit History

                      Users and Linked Users will now be seen under the name of the workgroup and will be defaulted as collapsed. Clicking on the link will toggle the box open.

                      Manual Routing

                      Users with the ability to route charts, can right-click on an account and manually assign it to a user or workgroup.

                      Manual Account Assignment Manual Account Assignment

                      If an account is manually routed to a user it will populate their “You” queue.

                      Not Recommended

                      It is not recommended to manually route a chart unless absolutely necessary. Once a chart has been manually routed it will no longer move through workflow automatically.

                      Role Management

                      Role Management Role Management

                      Under “Tools” in the application, is a tab for “Role Management”. Role Management allows administrators and managers to create custom user roles in the Fusion CAC application by checking or unchecking the box next to each of the privileges. By default, Role Management will already have privileges for each default role checked.

                      Note

                      Even though a role may have additional privileges, they will still maintain default chart access (Auditor, CDI Specialist, Coder, etc) to determine the assigned code tree and required fields within the software.

                      Create a New Role

                      Navigate to the Type new role… field in the top right corner of the screen. Enter the desired name for the new role (e.g., CDI Enhanced) and click the “+Add Role” button.

                      In the example of a “CDI Enhanced”, management may provide users with this role access to all previous CDI permissions while also enabling the ability to design queries. To start, replicate the settings from the CDI Specialist default role. Then, add privileges for the Query Designer to Create/Edit All Physician Query Templates.

                      Once all privileges for the custom role are selected, click Save All Roles in the top-right corner.

                      Features and Privileges

                      Privileges are assgined to roles for specific features within the application. To grant privileges, first identify the feature the role should have access to. Features can be viewed all at once or narrowd down using the blue dropdown list on the left side of the screen. Application features are sorted into the following:

                      • Chart - (Access, Editing, Physician Queries, Routing)
                      • Community
                      • Dashboard
                      • Document Types Management
                      • Grid Column Configuration
                      • Login
                      • Mapping Configuration
                      • Query Designer
                      • Reporting - (Account Search, Calendar, Scheduled Reports, User Reports)
                      • Role Management
                      • Shortcut Configuration
                      • System Search
                      • Tuning Dashboard
                      • Tuning Productivity
                      • User Management
                      • Workflow Management
                      • Worksheet Designer

                      Hidden Roles

                      When editing custom roles, consider removing irrelevant roles to make the page easier to navigate. Columns can be hidden and unhidden by simply clickling on the role name. For instance, clicking on “CDI Specialist” will hide the corresponding column, moving it to the “Hidden Roles” section above the role columns. To unhide the role, click on “CDI Specialist” again and the column will reappear.

                      Deleting Roles

                      Click the “Delete Role” button in the top right corner to display a list of all custom user roles in the software.

                      The pop-up box for deleting custom roles provides a warning that any users assigned to the role will lose their privileges. As a best practice, reassign users to a different role before deleting the custom role to prevent them from being locked out of the software.

                      Locked Roles

                      A lock icon appears next to certain roles, indicating they are default roles within the application and cannot be deleted. In contrast, custom roles, which do not have a lock icon, are not tied to specific areas of the software and can be removed if needed.

                      Validation Management

                      Validation Management Validation Management

                      Validation Management allows user roles with the correct permission to create rules that show up on the code summary page prior to submitting an account. Rules can be made to prevent an account from being submitted until certain requirements are met, or issue a warning to alert users about potentially incomplete items while still allowing the user to submit an account.

                      Examples of rules that can be created include:

                      • An account must have a discharge date to submit an inpatient chart
                      • The newborn weight must exist on a newborn chart
                      • If a certain charge is on a chart and a diagnosis code is not present

                      Creating a Validation Rule

                      Begin by entering a rule name in the top right-hand corner of the page and then click on +Add Rule.

                      Naming a New Rule Naming a New Rule

                      When the new rule is added, a number will be associated with the rule. The number will be used as reference when troubleshooting a rule that may not be working as intended.

                      Rule Number Rule Number

                      When a rule is triggered in Code Summary, the rule number will display on the right end of the rule.

                      Level Type

                      Once a validation rule has been added, the rule can be edited by clicking on the + to the left of the rule number.

                      Start by selecting the Level from the dropdown menu on the left-hand side of the screen.

                      Rule Level Dropdown Rule Level Dropdown

                      LevelDescription
                      ErrorMust be resolved before the user can submit a chart. This validation rule typically only applies to Coders because CDI specialists do not generally submit charts. Errors have a red background, indicating there is a hard stop.
                      CriticalSame as an error, with an additional warning. If upon clicking save, the end-user still has a critical error, they will get a pop-up box that indicates they still have validation rules outstanding and will be asked if they wish to continue. This validation rule has a red background, indicating there is a hard stop.
                      WarningA soft stop used to notify a user that there may be items to resolve. It does not prevent the user from submitting the chart. This validation rules has a yellow color background, indicating possible intervention is needed.
                      Toast MessageA notification that comes from the top right-hand corner of the browser as a red message presented for a few seconds. Toast messages do not stop the user from submitting or saving a chart. It is simply a notification message to alert the user.
                      DisabledThis level will disable the validation rule and prevent it from alerting the end user. The rule will turn red within validation management to show it is not active.

                      Defining the Criteria

                      Once you have selected the level of the validation rule you want to create, you must define what the criteria is starting with the verbiage you want to display to the end user. For example, you can display an error if a chart does not have a discharge disposition so it does not get submitted to billing without one. Since we would want to warn the Coder and not the CDI specialist, we would add another criterion input so user role is not equal to CDI specialist. First, type in the display name; this will be what the user will see on the code summary. Keep the information concise, but also provide how they can fix the error.

                      Example: Missing Discharge Disposition - The end user would know they have to add the disposition to continue.

                      Type of Criteria

                      To add criteria to rule, as in the example above, click on Add Criteria to define how the system fires this rule.

                      Upon clicking on Add Criteria, you will be presented with different types of criteria.

                      Account - Account type criteria allows you to select fields for a patient chart/account such as discharge date, discharge disposition, admit date, procedure codes, diagnosis codes, and many others.

                      User - User type criteria allows you to restrict the rule to a certain user role(s), such as a Coder or a CDI user role only. Typically, account-level criteria and user roles are used together, though account-level criteria can be used independently of user roles. However, creating a rule based solely on a user role without specifying any additional account-level criteria is not advisable.

                      Once you have defined the type of criteria, you can then add the details.

                      Example: Missing Discharge Disposition

                      Building criteria for a validation rule is much like workflow. For this example, select account, then in the field name find Discharge Disposition. Once you drop in the field name, it will then give you other fields. In this example it allows you to select an operator.

                      AND/OR Criteria

                      Validation Rules, much like workflow, has two different options to create a validation rule.

                      1. AND criteria - think of adding the word “and” to the end of each criterion Example of And Criteria Example of And Criteria This rule will trigger if the user is a CDI Specialist and the discharge disposition does not exist
                      2. OR criteria - think of adding the word “or” to the end of each criterion in blue. OR criteria will turn blue to differentiate between the conditions Example of Or Criteria Example of Or Criteria This rule will trigger if the user is a CDI Specialist and the discharge disposition equals 30 or does not exist
                      OperatorDescription
                      EqualsOne value must be the same as another value. Case sensitive
                      >The value on the left must be greater than the value on the right
                      <The value on the left must be less than the value on the right
                      >=The value on the left must be greater than or equal to the value on the right
                      <=The value on the left must be less than or equal to the value on the right
                      In ListThe value can be any of the following listed items
                      Not In ListThe value can not be any of the listed items
                      Starts withThis operator is a search function that identifies resulsts where a string begins with a specific set of characters such as codes and document types.
                      Does not start withThis operator is a search function that identifies results when a string does not beging with a sppefici set of charatcters such as codes and document types.
                      ContainsThe value can contains entered. This is common when including payors.
                      Only ContainsAny one of the codes it is not needed to do all 3.
                      ExistsThis will search to see if anything “exists” in this field, if it’s not blank it will match. No value is needed after the operator.
                      Does not ExistThis will search to see if anything “does exists” in this field if it’s blank it will match. No value is needed after the operator.
                      More ThanThis operator is only used with date fields, you will need to define “more than” how many days ago. You cannot add a date into the field as this field will need to be dynamic therefore days ago is used.
                      Less ThanThis operator is only used with date fields, you will need to define “less than” how many days ago. You cannot add in a date into the field as this field will need to be dynamic therefore days ago is used.
                      Later ThanThis operator is only used with date fields, you will need to define the exact date you do not wish to exceed.
                      Is OnThis is for an exact date, this is uncommon to use for workflow.
                      Includes Each OfIf you have more than one value, it must contain all of the following. However, note the chart must have each of the values but can also have other values.
                      Includes Any OfIf you have more than one value and it could be any of the following.
                      Does not IncludeIf you have more than one value, you do not want it to equal you must use “Not In List”

                      Once you have selected the field and your operator add a value.

                      Example: ERROR: D/C Disposition must be present We might select Does Not Exist as an operator. This would mean if a discharge disposition does not exist, then this rule would display on the code summary and prevent the user from submitting the chart.

                      Additionally, we may only want to display this rule if the user has a role of a coder. To constrain the rule further, click on the Add Criteria again, select user, and then select “Is not CDI Specialist”. This will prevent the rule from display to a user with a role of a CDI.

                      Missing Discharge Disposition Missing Discharge Disposition

                      For Each Check Box

                      For each is used for fields that are repetitive. For example, a field like discharge disposition is a single field (there are not multiple discharge dispositions on a patient chart) therefore, you do not need the “for each” checkmark.

                      The For Each checkmark makes sense when you’re trying to create a rule that would have multiple outcomes, such as checking if any diagnosis codes have a POA status of U. We don’t want to check only the first diagnosis rather we want to check all diagnosis to see if it has a status of U. For Each can also be used if you want to check if a procedure code has a date of service and/or provider attached. We don’t want to just check the first procedure code for the date of service, we want to check each of them.

                      To use this field, first select For Each before defining a field. The system will open another drop-down field to the right of For Each to indicate where you want to create the rule. There are only a handful of fields the For Each field make sense for: charges, CPT codes, diagnosis codes, procedures, pending reasons, and physicians.

                      Once you have selected a fields, you need to define the field you are looking for. Example: Place an error reminding the Coder to add the POA status on any diagnosis code that has a U Click on For Each, then select diagnosis codes. Select POA from the field drop-down menu which will allow you to review operators. For this example, use the operator of Equals. Once you select the operator of Equals, then you have a field to fill in the value, which would e be “U” in this example.

                      Adding Fields to a Rule

                      Fields can be added to the message displayed by rule to tell the user exactly what is triggering the rule when it is displayed in the Code Summary.

                      You can inject a field within the rule that will be displayed for the end-user. Do this by putting the field name in braces exactly like this {Code}. When the rule fires for the end-user, it will display the code with the issue. If there are multiple, use the For Each field to see each of the codes that are the issue as an individual rule.

                      Once you have defined your rule, you will want to decide if it makes sense to take the end user somewhere in the software to correct the issue based on the rule created. In the example of a discharge disposition, it does make sense to direct the user to go to the account information page as that is where they would likely change the disposition. Under where you selected the level, there is a field for

                      Navigate To Navigate To

                      Navigate to (these are placed within the patient chart, under the Navigation tree).

                      • None – Will not take the user anywhere if they click on the error/warning.
                      • Account Info – Will take the user to the account information viewer.
                      • Charges – Will take the user to the charges viewer.
                      • Document Code – Will take the user to where the code was validated/added within the documentation.
                      • E/M Level - Will take the user to the E/M Level viewer.
                      • Notes & Bookmarks - Will take the user to the Notes & Bookmarks viewer.
                      • Physicians & Queries – Will take the user to the Physicians & Queries viewer.
                      • Working DRG History - Will take the user to the Working DRG History viewer.

                      Pending Reason

                      This field will have a dropdown with all available pending reasons. If a rule is triggered on an account and it has a pending reason attached, then the pending reason will be added and the user will be able to see the number of the rule. Pending reasons that have a physician or date requirement will NOT be available in this list. The only way to remove a pending reason that was added by a rule is to have that rule cleared

                      Saving Rules

                      Once you’ve completed adding criteria for your validation rule remember to click on Save Rules in the top right-hand corner. It is recommended that you test your validation rule by opening a chart that fits the criteria of your validation rule

                      ER E/M Configuration Page

                      Note

                      The organization must have ER E/M Module enabled to use this feature. If this is not currently enabled, please contact your account representative for more information.

                      Once the E/M Configuration has been enabled, the initial setup must be completed by the Dolbey Team. After this setup is finalized, your organization can make any desired changes directly or contact the SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com) for additional support.

                      ER E/M Tool Menu ER E/M Tool Menu

                      The configuration page allows for customization of the E/M Level Matrix and other related components. If the organization has Facility Mapping, the E/M Configuration can be copied across different facilities.

                      ER E/m Config Page ER E/m Config Page

                      When Facility Mapping is available, the facility can be selected in the top right corner. Once a facility is selected, the levels associated with that facility will be displayed. Copy will also appear at the top of the Levels section to easily duplicate settings accross facilites.

                      Clicking Copy opens a dialog box to choose a destination facility to copy the current levels to. Facilities available for copying will be listed in a dropdown menu.

                      This option will overwrite and copy the current levels that are onscreen to the facility that is selected.

                      Note

                      If an organization has only one facility, the copy options will be hidden.

                      E/M Matrix

                      The table below illustrates how the E/M Matrix will appear to end users. Text displayed in this table can be customized to tailor the information shown to end users.

                      ER E/M Matrix ER E/M Matrix

                      The E/M Level matrix features horizontal columns that display the levels across the top.

                      Below each level are the defining criteria organized into several topics, each with a list of relevant items. By default, these categories include:

                      • Mode of Arrival
                      • Disposition
                      • Testing
                      • Medication
                      • Behavioral
                      • Procedures
                      • Other Criteria

                      Topics are fully configurable based on the specific needs of each facility.

                      The E/M Matrix configuration allows organizations to customize the content within each field under the respective E/M Level, enabling facilites to tailor the listed items for each code to meet specific requirements.

                      To make changes to the default options, click the grey numbers to open the matrix configuration.

                      Edit EM E/R Defaults Edit EM E/R Defaults

                      After expanding the topic, users will see each E/M Level along with its corresponding codes. Next to each level is +Add. Clicking this button allows for the addition of a new level item.

                      To remove any criteria selections, under each topic and level, simply click on the X button next to the criteria.

                      To change or udpate the verbiage of the criteria selection, place the cursor into the level item field and change the text.

                      Configuring Charging Options and CDM

                      Below the E/M Level matrix configuration is a section for “Other”. The “Other” section allows for the addition of charging components attached to the facility’s charge master. To make changes to the default, click on the grey number to open the charge and CDM configuration.

                      The Effective Date field specifies the date when the CDM Table and its associated new charge(s) will take effect. This feature allows updates to the CDM Table to be scheduled, ensuring that future changes are staged and ready for the Coding Team when needed.

                      Updating the CDM

                      Copy and Paste

                      Click on the green “Edit CDM Table” button to the right of the effective date.

                      CDM columns can be copy and pasted directly into the “Edit CDM Table” window from an Excel spreadsheet.

                      Best practice is to paste in the column for the CDM code, then the description, and finally the CPT code. This step is extremely important because any assigned CDM code will need to be sent in the outbound interface. Therefore, the CDM table in Fusion CAC needs to match whatever system is downstream

                      After the information has been correctly updated, click Ok to continue.

                      Manually

                      CDM codes can be updated manually by clicking +Add CDM Manually.

                      This will create a new row with free text fields to add the CDM code, the description, and the CPT code.

                      Once the CDM table is populated, categories can be edited within the “Option” section. The default options are:

                      • Trauma
                      • No charges
                      • Medication quantity
                      • Medication time/modifier
                      • Additional charges

                      Like the E/M Level matrix, these categories can be customized to best fit the facility’s needs.

                      To edit an option, click the gray date tab to open the options and make changes. If certain options are not relevant, remove items under those sections simply by clicking on the RED.X . Once emptied, the section will no longer for your users.

                      Options: Trauma

                      Expanding the trauma section will display several items by default. Each item has a CDM attached per E/M level, including critical care. Ensure that the CDM underneath each of the levels corresponds to what the CDM table indicates.

                      For end users, this will appear as a dropdown menu in the E&M Coding viewer. Based on the matrix and their selection, the system will automatically populate the corresponding CDM code associated with the assigned level.

                      Trauma Dropdown Menu Trauma Dropdown Menu

                      Update With CDM

                      If your CDM changes, this table needs to be updated as well.

                      Options: No Charge

                      Clicking on the gray date next to No Charge will exapnd the section. The “Item” field will be the verbiage that corresponds to the CPT code in the CPT column to the right of the Item column.

                      No Charge Option No Charge Option

                      For end users, this will appear as a dropdown menu in the E&M Coding viewer. The user will choose the item and the outbound interface will contain both the CPT code and the corresponding CDM code listed in this table.

                      No Charge Dropdown No Charge Dropdown

                      Options: Medication Quantity & Medication Time/Modifier

                      Click on the gray date next to Medication Quantity to expand the section. Item names, for which Dolbey provides default descriptions, can be listed here. These items will align with their corresponding CPT and CDM codes.

                      The medication sections are not about the medication, but rather the way the medication was administered. This allows organizations to charge for any injections, infusions, IV pushes, immunizations, and hydration. The medication administration quantity allows facilities to define how many of each occurred on a particular date, if the ER visit occurred over more than one day, and other modifiers as needed.

                      Medication Section Medication Section

                      Medication Time/Modifier includes the ability to indicate that multiples of an item exist on the account. If there are different drugs involved, the user can copy the individual lines and add in the durations of each medication along with the date and modifier if the modifiers, if appropriate.

                      To the end-user, this will be a table where they can pick all the medication administrations to apply and provide dates and modifiers in the E&M Coding viewer. There is also a section end users to enter a note to keep everything in line so that they can indicate which medications they have already charged for. This helps the end user stay organized while providing information in the event of an audit.

                      Medication Section Viewer Medication Section Viewer

                      Some organizations like to have Medication Quantity and Medication Time/Modifier. Other organizations choose to relocate all of the items within the Medication Quantity to the Medication Time/Modifier section so that all medications are within the same section.

                      Copy Icon Copy Icon

                      Options: Additional Charges

                      Addtional Charges is often a list of items commonly charged in the ER. The default list includes:

                      • Voiding Cystogram
                      • Insert Foley (Simple)
                      • Change Cystostomy (Simple)
                      • Temporary External Pacing

                      This list can be modified to best the needs of the organization.

                      Add Button Add Button

                      Delete Button Delete Button

                      Items listed in this section will align with their corresponding CPT and CDM codes.

                      To the end-user this displays as a table where they can quickly add a quantity, date, and modifier as applicable.

                      Grid Column Configuration

                      Grid Column Configuration is an administrative tool used to identify the columns to be displayed in Account List, Account Search, Calendar Stats, and Dashboard pages. Columns can be set to display per default user roles: Coders (incl Physician Coder, Single Path, and Auditor) and CDI.

                      All columns added in Grid Column Configuration will appear in Account Search, and selected columns can be made visible on other pages by checking the appropriate box.

                      The order of the fields in Grid Column Congifguration determines the default order of columns elsewhere in the applicaiton. Each user can then rearrange the column order on specific pages per their preference. Changes are saved automatically on the Account List page, while on Account Search, Calendar Stats, and Dashboard, users must save their adjustments manually.

                      Add/Remove Column

                      To add a column, click +Add New Column in the top right of the screen. The new column will appear as the bottom of the list.

                      Select the field to be added from the dropdown options. Field names that are italicized and grayed out have already been added as a column. By default, the field name will populate in the Title box to the left of the blue dropdown. The title acts as the friendly name that will be displayed to end users. Titles can be changed to best fit the terminology used by the organization.

                      To the right of the field name are four checkboxes. These allow configuration as to which pages (Account List, Calendar Stats, and Dashboard) will display the column(s).

                      Actions buttons for each column can be found on the right side of the screen.

                      Action ButtonDescription
                      Double Arrow to Change Position Double Arrow to Change PositionDouble lined up and down arrows will jump the column to either the top or bottom of the list
                      Single Arrow to Change Position Single Arrow to Change PositionSingle line up and down arrows will the column up or down one space
                      X to Delete Column X to Delete ColumnThe red X will delete the column from the application
                      Filter Panel for Dates Filter Panel for DatesDate columns can be filtered to display in ascending or descending order by default

                      Clicking on the “Filter” button will quickly show what columns are being used for which pages in the application.

                      Mapping Configuration

                      Mapping Configuration Mapping Configuration

                      Mapping Configuration is an administrative tool designed for users with an administrative role, enabling them to map data field names to user-friendly, end-user-facing names.

                      Note

                      Avoid modifying data mapping tables in a production environment unless you have received proper training.

                      Export to CSV on the right-hand side of the the mapping title bar will export the selected mapping table to CSV should the table(s) need to be reviewed outside of the application.

                      Export to CSV Export to CSV

                      New Mapping Table

                      A new mapping table can be added by clicking +Add to the right of Active Mappings.

                      Add New Mapping Table Add New Mapping Table

                      Each mapping table must have a unique ID and Title.

                      • The ID: is how the mapping table is identified by the application. It cannot contain spaces or symbols.
                      • The Title: is the user friendly name for the mapping table.

                      The ID and Title will often match, but the Title tends to be nicer for users to read as it can contain spaces.

                      Editing Mapping Tables

                      Click on a table title from the list of Active Mappings. Not every table contains the same information, but for the majority of the tables, the fields that can be updated include the key and the description.

                      • The Key is a unique value for that entry in the database
                      • The Description is the friendly value that will be displayed to users.

                      The Key and Description may or may not match. An example of when they differ is the “Stage” mapping table where the key value of “P” equals “Unbilled”.

                      To add values to the mapping table, click +Add New… to either the top or bottom of the list as desired.

                      Table values can be sorted by Ascending or Descending order using the arrow buttons.

                      Each value can be individually moved using the “Action” buttons.

                      Table rows can also be reordered by clicking the white space in the desired row, dragging, and dropping it in the new location.

                      Some tables can be removed by clicking the red X in the Active Mapping list.

                      If a mapping table does not have a red X to the right of its title, that means it is a default mapping table that cannot be removed from the system.

                      Special Mapping Columns & Tables

                      While many of the mapping tables are set up the same way, several are unique and have more fields available to edit.

                      Category Mapping:

                      Incentive Multiplier

                      Incentive Multiplier allows administrators to optionally record an incentive multiplier that is used in the Incentive Productivity Report. Categories without a value in this column will be calculated with an incentive multiplier of 1.0.

                      The Incentive Productivity Report reports on whole weeks, but only produces an entry if the coder first submitted an account that week. This report pulls its data in real-time.

                      Display HCC Indicators
                      • When the user assigns a code that has a CMS HCC, a small H indicator appears.

                        • The current version of HCC and the version for the previous calendar year (retroactively) will display when the user hovers over the H in the Assigned codes tree.
                      • The Previous HCC Overview will be available in the Navigation tree for any subsequent patient chart with the same MRN number that previously had HCC’s.

                        Previous HCC Overview Previous HCC Overview

                      • Current HCC Total will be captured for each chart and is viewable in account search.

                      HCC Indicators Are Not Retroactive

                      HCC data that existed prior to enabling this feature in the mapping table will not be captured.

                      Pending Reasons Mapping:

                      Administrators can specify the facilities, categories, or roles each pending reason applies to. Alternatively, these fields can be left blank to apply the pending reason universally.

                      When a pending reason has the Physician Required box checked, the user will be prompted for a physician when that pending reason is assigned to an account. The selected physician will appear on the Code Summary page and in the Pending Reasons report.

                      Additionally, there is another checkbox to indicate a date is required, when applicable.

                      CDI Review Types Mapping:

                      CDI Review types are custom and not enabled at every organization. Additional information on the use of custom reviews can be found here.

                      Note: Changing Existing Types

                      Changing an existing CDI Review Type will change reporting and dashboards.

                      Payor Mapping:

                      The “Days to Bill” column indicates how many days are left to bill the payor.

                      • A default value can be set, which will apply to any payor in the mapping table without a specified value in the “Days to Bill” column.

                      • Each payor can have a unique number of days to bill

                      The billing date is compared to the current date (or the last submitted date if the account has already been submitted) to calculate the “Billing Countdown,” which represents the number of days remaining to submit the account. If an account has no payor, no matching payor mapping, or a payor mapping without a value in the “Days to Bill” field, the “Default Days to Bill” value is used. If the “Default Days to Bill” field is blank, a value of zero is applied.

                      A “Billing Countdown” field can be added from Grid Column Configuration to use for account search filters and workflow. See a use case for this workflow in the screenshot below:

                      Query Reasons (PhysicianQueryReasons)

                      The mapping of PhysicianQueryReasons now has a column called Roles, which will allow the user to assign reasons to specified roles.

                      Physician Query Reasons Physician Query Reasons

                      Notifications Management

                      Notifications Manager Notifications Manager

                      Notifications Manager, found in the Tools dropdown menu, allows users with an Administrative role to create notifications that will alert other users of anything they may need to be aware of within the system and/or organization. The notifications can be added to the CAC login screen, the Dashboard, or both.

                      Adding a Notification

                      To add a new notification, select Notification Manager from the Tools dropdown menu, then click on +Add Notification. Fields will become available on the screen to allow the user to build out the notification.

                      • Title - Name the alert with a brief title.
                      • Description - Add more detials to the title with a description of what the users should exepct as a result of the notification.
                      • Style - The notification can be displayed in a color that will draw yhe user’s attention.
                      • Start and End Date - Each notification can have a start and end date. If there should be no end date to the notification, simply keep the End Date blank.
                      • Location - Where the notification will appear. It can either be on the login screen, Dashboard, or both.
                      • Role(s) - If desired, the notification can be directed to a specific user role or roles IF the Location is set to Dashboard only.

                      Notifications Manager Build Notifications Manager Build

                      There can be multiple notifications and each will be numbered. To collapse the details of the notification, click on the number icon and it will hide the information. If a notification is no longer needed, the user can delete the notification by clicking on the RED X . When a user is done adding or making changes to a notification, click Save Notifications.

                      Multiple Notifications Multiple Notifications

                      Viewing a Notification

                      Notification on the login screen:

                      Notifications on Login Notifications on Login

                      Notification on the Dashboard:

                      Notification on Dashboard Notification on Dashboard

                      Multiple Notifications:

                      Multiple Notifications Multiple Notifications

                      Worksheet Designer

                      Worksheet Designer Worksheet Designer

                      Worksheet designer is used to create custom worksheets for users, which are used to collect data and/or take notes.

                      Access to worksheets can be restricted by user role:

                      • Audit
                      • CDI
                      • Coding
                      • Physician Coder

                      Alternatively, worksheets can be shared. A Shared Worksheet is a worksheet that can be utilized by Auditors, CDI Specialists, and Coders unlike the “CDI Worksheet” and “Coder Worksheet” which are exclusive to CDI and Coding, respectively.

                      Creating a New Worksheet

                      To add a workheet, simply click on the +Add button in the desired section.

                      Add New Worksheet Add New Worksheet

                      A blank template will appear on screen. The first step is to enter a unique a document name. Each worksheet must have a unique name for reporting purposes. A document name must exist before the template can be saved.

                      Renaming a worksheet

                      Once a worksheet name has been saved, it cannot be edited. To rename an exisitng worksheet, please see the Source Code section below or contact the SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com).

                      Blank Template Blank Template

                      To start with a document that has already been created, copy the text and paste it into the form designer. Changes to the formatting may be needed once pasted depending on the original document format.

                      Text copied or typed directly into the worksheet will be read-only for the end user(s) working with the form. This text is often used as labels and to direct users on completing the template.

                      Static Text Static Text

                      Adding Fields

                      Fusion CAC offers several types of fields that can be added to worksheet templates. These fields allows end users to enter information into the worksheet once it has been added to an account.

                      Add a new field by clicking +Add Field in the template tool menu.

                      Add Field Add Field

                      Field Type

                      Field Type Field Type

                      Single Input

                      Single Input Field Single Input Field

                      A single input field allows the end user to free type text. This field is best used for entering a concise amount of information, such as a name or short series of numbers. The box will grow horizontally as the user types to fit the data entered.

                      Multiple-Line Text

                      Multiple-Line Text Multiple-Line Text

                      A multiple-line text field allows the end user to free type text. This field is often used for entering a large amount of information, such as taking notes or providing detailed comments. The box will grow vertically as the user types to fit the data entered.

                      Checkbox

                      Worksheet Checkbox Worksheet Checkbox

                      A checkbox allows the end user to indicate certain items are applicable. This field has been used to show that the worksheet is complete or as a way for users to select certain action items.

                      Date/Datetime

                      Date Date Datetime Datetime

                      These fields allow the end user to indicate the date and time of a response, test, or other item being tracked.

                      Select Item From Dropdown Select Item From Dropdown

                      Dropdown menus allow end users to select from a pre-determined list of options.

                      After naming and determining who can edit the field, a dialog box will open to set the options in the dropdown menu.

                      Dropdown Field Dropdown Field

                      Dropdown items can be edited by pulling up the template in Worksheet Designer and clicking Edit Dropdown in the template tool bar.

                      Account Field

                      Account Field Account Field

                      Account fields will automatically populate information from the account, if it has been sent to Fusion CAC. Auto-populated account information will be displayed in a bolder font to differentiate it from text manually entered by an end user.

                      Populated Account Field Populated Account Field

                      Field Name

                      Unique Field Name Unique Field Name

                      Each field should have a unique name for reporting purposes.

                      Field names can repeat across worksheets, but each field on a worksheet must be unique. If a field name is repeated on a worksheet, whatever is entered into one field will be automatically duplicated into the other fields with the same name on that worksheet.

                      Editable

                      Editable Editable

                      Individual fields can be locked down per user role. This way Auditors, CDI Specialists, and Coders can add and view a shared worksheet to a chart, but only users with the specified role can edit certain fields. All users will be able to see the information in that field, but only the specified user role can edit the field.

                      Make Required

                      Make Field Required Make Field Required

                      Fields can be made required by checking the box. Leaving the box unchecked means the field is optional and the worksheet can be completed even if that field is left blank.

                      When a worksheet is added to a chart, required fields will have a light red background to indicate action must be taken. Addiontally, the user will be presented with a red toast message if they try to save the chart without completing all required fields. The toast message will include the fields that need to be completed.

                      Required Field Red Background Required Field Red Background

                      Clicking OK, will add the selected field to the template with the specified settings. A box will then display in Worksheet Designer as a placeholder for the selected field with the field name. The fields are not interactive from Worksheet Designer. Once a worksheet has been added to a chart, the field name will be replaced with instructions for the end user.

                      Fields From the Front End Fields From the Front End

                      Show History

                      Worksheet Designer will create a history for changes made to templates in Worksheet Designer. Once a change is made on a template and saved, Show History will appear in the top right of the worksheet. Clicking on it will bring up a notes box, just like in Workflow Management.

                      Show History Button Show History Button

                      Show History Changes Dialog Show History Changes Dialog

                      Source Code

                      The template source code can be found under the Tools menu within the template tool bar. The source code is the programming language that tells the application how to display the worksheet. It may be overwhelming to look through, but can be helpful in making quick edits to worksheets.

                      Source Code Source Code

                      Changing Field Width

                      By default, fields will take up the full width of the template. The width can be reduced in the source code to best fit formatting needs.

                      In the example below, the width of the dropdown menu has been modified so that it can be on the same line as a checkbox and a multi-line text box.

                      Modified Fields Modified Fields

                      This was done by opening the source code, finding the name of the field, and changing the width percentage.

                      Modified Width Modified Width

                      Renaming/Moving a Worksheet

                      Once a worksheet has been named and saved, the Document Name cannot be edited. This is intentional for accurate reporting. If a worksheet needs to have a new name, the simplest way to change the name is to copy the source code into a new template and give that template the correct name. Copying the source code will bring over the whole body of the worksheet as is, so the only thing that needs to change is the document name.

                      1. In worksheet designer, open the template to be copied/renamed
                      2. Open the template’s source code
                      3. Select all the text in the source code box
                        • This can be done by clicking and dragging to highlight or with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + A
                      4. Copy the source code
                        • This can be done by right-clicking in the highlighted text and choosing copy or with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + C
                      5. Click Ok to close the source code window
                      6. Add a new worksheet in the desired section
                      7. Open the template’s source code
                      8. Paste the copied source code into the box
                        • This can be done by right-clicking and choosing paste or with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + V
                      9. Click Ok
                      10. Enter a new document name and Save

                      Click the red X button to remove the original worksheet so it can no longer be used. The deleted worksheet will still show up on accounts it was added to prior to being deleted, but users will not be able to add it to new accounts.

                      This method also allows for an existing worksheet to easily be re-catagorized by role.

                      If you have any questions or would like to walk through editing source code with someone, please reach out to the Dolbey SME team (smeteam@dolbey.com).

                      Query Designer

                      Query designer is used to create custom queires per organization. Query templates are frequently created and saved as a base template with most of the query written to show as read only text. The creator can then add open fields for the end user to add additional questions to the base query template.

                      Access to queries can be restricted by user role:

                      • Audit
                      • CDI
                      • Coding
                      • Physician Coder

                      Alternatively, queires can be shared. A Shared Query can be utilized by Auditors, CDI Specialists, and Coders.

                      Creating a Query

                      To add a query, simply click on the +Add button in the desired section.

                      Add New Query Add New Query

                      A blank template will appear on screen. The first step is to enter a unique a document name. Each query must have a unique name for reporting purposes. A document name must exist before the template can be saved.

                      Blank Template Blank Template

                      Renaming a Query

                      Once a query name has been saved, it cannot be edited. To rename an exisitng query, please see the Source Code section below or contact the SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com).

                      To start with a document that has already been created, copy the text and paste it into the form designer. Changes to the formatting may be needed once pasted depending on the original document format.

                      Text copied or typed directly into the query will be read-only for the end user(s) working with the form. This text is often used as labels and to direct users on completing the template.

                      Static Text Static Text

                      Adding Fields

                      Fusion CAC offers several types of fields that can be added to query templates. These fields allow end users to enter information into the query after it has been added to an account.

                      Add a new field by clicking +Add Field in the template tool menu.

                      Add Field Add Field

                      Field Type

                      Field Type Field Type

                      Single Input

                      Single Input Field Single Input Field

                      A single input field allows the end user to free type text. This field is best used for entering a concise amount of information, such as a name or short series of numbers. The box will grow horizontally as the user types to fit the data entered.

                      Multiple-Line Text

                      Multiple-Line Text Multiple-Line Text

                      A multiple-line text field allows the end user to free type text. This field is often used for entering a large amount of information, such as taking notes or providing detailed comments. The box will grow vertically as the user types to fit the data entered.

                      Checkbox

                      Query Checkbox Query Checkbox

                      A checkbox allows the end user to indicate certain items are applicable. This field has been used to show that the query is complete or as a way for users to select certain action items.

                      Date/Datetime

                      Date Date Datetime Datetime

                      These fields allow the end user to indicate the date and time of a response, test, or other item being tracked.

                      Select Item From Dropdown Select Item From Dropdown

                      Dropdown menus allow end users to select from a pre-determined list of options.

                      After naming and determining who can edit the field, a dialog box will open to set the options in the dropdown menu.

                      Dropdown Field Dropdown Field

                      Dropdown items can be edited by pulling up the template in Query Designer and clicking Edit Dropdown in the template tool bar.

                      Account Field

                      Account Field Account Field

                      Account fields will automatically populate information from the account, if it has been sent to Fusion CAC. Auto-populated account information will be displayed in a bolder font to differentiate it from text manually entered by an end user.

                      Populated Account Field Populated Account Field

                      Sections

                      Dynamic Query Sections Dynamic Query Sections

                      Sections allows end users to customize the query by removing sections as needed from the template or to rearrange the order of information.

                      Static text and fields can be inserted into a section, however sections cannot be inserted in other sections.

                      When the query is added to an account, each section will show have arrows so the end user can re-order as needed. Sections will also have a X to remove that section from the query. Once a section has been removed, an undo button will become available to place it back into the query.

                      Section Buttons Section Buttons

                      Physician

                      Physician Field Physician Field

                      The physician field will auto-populate the name of the physician being sent the query, if the information is available.

                      Field Name

                      Unique Field Name Unique Field Name

                      Each field should have a unique name for reporting purposes.

                      Field names can repeat across queries, but each field on a query must be unique. If a field name is repeated on a query, whatever is entered into one field will be automatically duplicated into the other fields with the same name on that query.

                      Make Required

                      Make Field Required Make Field Required

                      Fields can be made required by checking the box. Leaving the box unchecked means the field is optional and the query can be completed even if that field is left blank.

                      When a query is added to a chart, required fields will have a light red background to indicate action must be taken. Addiontally, the user will be presented with a red toast message if they try to save the chart without completing all required fields. The toast message will include the fields that need to be completed.

                      Required Field Red Background Required Field Red Background

                      Clicking OK, will add the selected field to the template with the specified settings. A box will then display in Query Designer as a placeholder for the selected field with the field name. The fields are not interactive from Query Designer. Once a query has been added to a chart, the field name will be replaced with instructions for the end user.

                      Fields From the Front End Fields From the Front End

                      Creating Internal Notes

                      Internal Note Internal Note

                      Internal notes can be added to query templates to provide a note for the end user only from the Insert menu in the template tool menu.

                      Insert Internal Note Insert Internal Note

                      These notes are only displayed for the user filling out the query and is not set to the provider receiving the query. When adding a physician query the user will see the highlighted section in the query when that template is selected.

                      Front End Note Front End Note

                      After sending the query, the internal note will no longer be seen unless the user has the privilege of “Edit Open Queries to Resend” in Role Management.

                      Blank Query Template

                      Blank Query Template Blank Query Template

                      If a Physician Query has a document name of “Blank Query Template”, then an additional Add Input For ‘Query For’ field is automatically added for the user to enter plain text when the query is added to an account. This field cannot be removed from the Blank Query Template.

                      Query For Field Query For Field

                      When the end users use this template, they will be presented with a box to free type the query topic.

                      In the following reports, the Query template column will show “Blank Query Template”: followed by the value for the ”Query For” field:

                      • Outstanding Queries
                      • Query Impact by Discharge Date
                      • Query Impact Report
                      • Query TAT by Author Report
                      • Query Template Volume Overview

                      Verbal Query Template

                      A verbal query template can be requested through CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com). Scripting logic will be added so that when a template named “VERBAL QUERY” is used, the query will not be sent outbound to the provider.

                      For accurate reporting on the topics of the query, Dolbey recommends creating a template using the exact name “VERBAL QUERY” and selecting the check box Add Field For ‘Query For’ next to the document name.

                      Add Field For ‘Query For’ Add Field For ‘Query For’

                      When the end users use this template to record the verbal query outcome they will be presented with a box to free type the query topic.

                      Query For Field Query For Field

                      Show History

                      Query Designer will create a history for changes made to templates in Query Designer. Once a change is made on a template and saved, a Show History will appear in the top right of the query. Clicking on it will bring up a notes box, just like in Workflow Management.

                      Show History Button Show History Button

                      Show History Changes Dialog Show History Changes Dialog

                      Source Code

                      The template source code can be found under the Tools menu within the template tool bar. The source code is the programming language that tells the application how to display the query. It may be overwhelming to look through, but can be helpful in making quick edits to queries.

                      Source Code Source Code

                      Changing Field Width

                      By default, fields will take up the full width of the template. The width can be reduced in the source code to best fit formatting needs.

                      In the example below, the width of the dropdown menu has been modified so that it can be on the same line as a checkbox and a multi-line text box.

                      Modified Fields Modified Fields

                      This was done by opening the source code, finding the name of the field, and changing the width percentage.

                      Modified Width Modified Width

                      Renaming/Moving a Query

                      Once a query has been named and saved, the Document Name cannot be edited. This is intentional for accurate reporting. If a query needs to have a new name, the simplest way to change the name is to copy the source code into a new template and give that template the correct name. Copying the source code will bring over the whole body of the query as is, so the only thing that needs to change is the document name.

                      1. In query designer, open the template to be copied/renamed
                      2. Open the template’s source code
                      3. Select all the text in the source code box
                        • This can be done by clicking and dragging to highlight or with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + A
                      4. Copy the source code
                        • This can be done by right-clicking in the highlighted text and choosing copy or with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + C
                      5. Click Ok to close the source code window
                      6. Add a new query in the desired section
                      7. Open the template’s source code
                      8. Paste the copied source code into the box
                        • This can be done by right-clicking and choosing paste or with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + V
                      9. Click Ok
                      10. Enter a new document name and Save

                      Click the red X button to remove the original query so it can no longer be used. The deleted query will still show up on accounts it was added to prior to being deleted, but users will not be able to add it to new accounts.

                      This method also allows for an existing queryt to easily be re-catagorized by role.

                      If you have any questions or would like to walk through editing source code with someone, please reach out to the Dolbey SME team (smeteam@dolbey.com).

                      Shortcut Configuration

                      Keyboard shortcuts are keys or key combinations allowing users to take certain action within the application without using their mouse. Some users find it more efficent to work without having to take their hands off the keyboard to use their mouse.

                      Many different applications use hotkeys and keys may already be mapped to different software solutions used by an organization. Dolbey allows hotkeys for Fusion CAC to be configured per organization. Default settings have been provided, but can be changed as needed by users with the role of Administrator.

                      To record a new hotkey combination, simply press the record button on the line of the function you wish to configure and enter in a key combination (usually 1-2 keys on the keyboard). Since Fusion CAC is a browser-based application, standard browswer hotkeys should not be used.

                      Tuning

                      The Dolbey Tuning Team is made up of credentialed medical coders, each with over 10 years of experience. Their primary job is to work with the Dolbey FAE engine to ensure the Fusion CAC application is providing the most accurate code suggestions. It is the Tuning Team’s responsibility to:

                      • File Documents into the Correct Folders - Unsorted documents indicatie a unique document type that has not yet been seen by the application. The Tuning Team will need to train the engine on how to handle the document. Incorrect handling skews the accuracy/precision resulting in too many or not enough codes suggested to the Coder. Once the team has decided on engine handling, they will then collect document headers to indicate where within the document the engine should or should not suggest codes.

                      • Triage Customer Issues with Engine Results - Users can report questions and/or issues with code suggestions by emailing results@dolbey.com.

                      • Analyze Engine Results - Dashboards within the application tell the Tuning Team what codes are regularly missed, suggested, and/or not used by end users allowing the team to tailor the engine per organization.

                      By design, the FAE engine over codes. This means the FAE engine will code for everything including but not limited to diagnoses, procedures, allergies, medications, family history, past medical history, signs & symptoms as well as if there is an injury how the injury was caused and where the injury occurred. Accuracy typically means how accurate and precise the FAE engine is at suggesting codes. However, since the application is over coding by design the Tuning Teams measures accuracy by how often the FAE engine misses a code causing Coders to take manual action to add the code. This is as close to accuracy as Dolbey can get without splitting hairs trying to determine accuracy by site and state guidelines. This method of measuring accuracy is used by other CAC vendors as well, and is considered to be industry standard.

                      Any questions on code suggestions or document handling should be directed to the Tuning Team via email (results@dolbey.com).

                      Subsections of Tuning

                      System Search

                      System Search works similarly to Account Search.

                      System Search System Search

                      Creating filters allows the user to search for patient charts using different criteria. System Search is also used by the Tuning Team to identify targeted codes that need reviewed and possibly refined.

                      An example of a System Search would be all inpatient charts with a diagnosis of hypertension.

                      System Search for Hyptension Dx System Search for Hyptension Dx

                      Users may want to include other hypertension codes such as I13.0, I13.9, I12.0, I12.9, etc.

                      Clicking Refresh will display a list of all accounts that meet the criteria. If this is a search that will be used more than once, users can save the search, making it available in the drop-down box.

                      Saved Hypertension System Search Saved Hypertension System Search

                      The results that yield may show other codes, as the filter placed will bring up any chart with the codes suggested. The grid displays all codes on the account as well as the code in question. To filter to only those codes within in the grid column, click on the hamburger button in the column header to further filter the list.

                      Hamburger Button to Filter Hamburger Button to Filter

                      Document Types Management

                      Document Types Management Document Types Management

                      Filing Documents

                      To file documents:

                      • Open Document Types Management
                      • Sort on documents by clicking on the group name to display the documents currently not in a folder. Choose the documents that need to be filed
                      • Change the friendly name by double-clicking on the name and replacing it with another name using a naming convention that new users will understand

                      Filing a Document Filing a Document

                      Engine Handling

                      Engine Handling is set up after the documents have a friendly name. This set-up instructs the code suggestion engine what to do when it encounters each document.

                      Depending on how the organization is configured, there may be a drop-down menu to select the type of handling the document receives.

                      Engine Handling Drop Down Menu Engine Handling Drop Down Menu

                      Alternatively, there are two different columns that allow for inclusion or exclusion of certain code sets starting with a prefix.

                      For example, on a Newborn History and Physical, the engine should exclude O codes to prevent confusion if the account conatins documentation for the mother. This exclusion will prevent O codes from being suggested on the newborn’s chart.

                      Includes and Excludes Columns Includes and Excludes Columns

                      Once engine handling is set up, documents can be sorted into a folders. Sorting is done by double-clicking the empty space in the Group Name column and entering the name of the desired folder. To view the folder structure, go to the top of the group name, hover over the column, and click on the hamburger button to see all the available group names.

                      Hamburger Icon Hamburger Icon

                      Group Name Folder Structure Group Name Folder Structure

                      Adds/Cancels Pending Reason

                      This field in Document Types Management can be used to edit any existing pending reason.

                      Cancel Pending Reason Column Cancel Pending Reason Column

                      Add Remove Pending Reasons Add Remove Pending Reasons

                      A selection in the Cancels column will remove the existing pending reason(s) and re-trigger workflow. If the original pending reason is used for DNFC reporting and/or a user needs to know the original reason for pending, the pending reason does not need to be deleted. Instead, there is an option to Add a Pending reason.

                      Two important facts about the “Adds Pending Reason” field:

                      1. The presence of an “Adds Pending Reason” value overrides the functionality that cancels pending reasons from the “Cancels Pending Reason” field. In other words, when a pending reason exists on the account that matches the “Cancels Pending Reason” field, the pending reason is not deleted when there is an “Adds Pending Reason” value present. The functionality is designed to be one or the other – not both – but the account must have one of the “Cancels Pending Reasons” to add the pending reason.
                      2. The “Adds Pending Reason” is intentionally free-form text. It can contain a value that is not listed in the Pending Reasons mapping so that users cannot select it. Whatever value is recorded in this field will be the pending reason name that the Script Engine will automatically add to the account.
                      Enabling “Adds Pending Reason”

                      To use this functionality, a one-time step must be performed to add the Adds Pending Reason column to the Document Types Management grid. This is done by clicking on the hamburger icon in the column header, clicking on the column list tab, and checking Adds Pending Reason. Adds Pending Reason Hamburger Icon Adds Pending Reason Hamburger Icon Adds Pending Reason Check Box Adds Pending Reason Check Box In the grid, double click in the field to edit the Adds Pending Reason. The user must press Enter to save that value (just like all other text fields in this grid). The “Mass Edit” dialog in Document Types Management also supports the entry of the Adds Pending Reason field.

                      Caution Coding

                      Documents can be configured in Document Types management to be caution code documents. Coders should not code from these documents, but still be aware that the verbiage exists as it may result in a possible query. For example, if a nurse indicates the patient was being treated for respiratory failure but the provider never mentioned it, the caution code will help to ensure users are not missing anything.

                      In Document Types Management, change the “Caution Coding” field of the Document Type to “All Patient Types” by double clicking in the Caution Code column. Save the change, then load the account and that document. The code suggestions within the document will have a golden “caution” background instead of the usual lavender background to indicate they cannot be assigned. The Unassigned code tree displays the same caution background for those codes, and the right-click menu on those codes prevent assigning or changing the caution code.

                      Caution Code Column Caution Code Column

                      In the Unassigned codes tree, any code attached to a caution document will show in a yellow background and will not have the option to assign on the right click menu.

                      Caution Code in Tree Caution Code in Tree

                      New Document Grouping

                      New Document Grouping New Document Grouping

                      By default, users with the Administrator role or the Tuning role have access to the “New Document Grouping” page in the Tuning menu. This page allows users to create a list of groups that should be created for new document types. For example, if the document name contains the word “consults” or “consultation”, the organization may want to file it within the Consults folder and set the engine handling to Do not Code Procedures.

                      Grouped Consults Grouped Consults

                      Creating a New Automated Grouping

                      Field NameDescription
                      Group NameName of existing document group from Document Types Management. When one is selected, the Group Order automatically populates.
                      +Add GroupAdds a new document group that is not in Document Types Management. Users will be prompted to enter a new document group name and order number.
                      Group OrderSequence of the document grouping. The order is copied from Document Types Management but can be edited. Edits will only affect new document types.
                      Includes, Excludes, and NLP HandlingAs in Document Types Management, these fields indicate limitations placed on the group(s).
                      DocumentsList of documents included in the group.
                      Sequencing buttonsNew document types are processed through the groups in the order that is displayed.
                      To create a new group:
                      1. Click +Add Group
                      2. Select the appropriate group name from the drop down or click + to create a custom group name
                      3. Select how the engine should handle these types of documents using the engine handling dropdown or includes/excludes Engine Handling Options for Documentation Engine Handling Options for Documentation

                      The drop down allows users to block certain code sets. If more targeted handling is needed to include or exclude certain codes, consider using the includes or excludes method.

                      Using includes or excludes allows users to override the settings and choose to either include or exclude certain code prefixes. The image above indicates that the group will uses codes that start with A,B,C,D,E,F,G, or H.

                      Includes and excludes cannot be used at the same time.

                      Once the folder and engine handling have been set, select the documents to be included in this group. Click on Edit, then +Add. When choosing an operator, “Contains” will likely be the best choice. For example, if the user wants to put all radiology documents into a folder, consider that if it contains XR, NM, MRA, MRI, US, CT, then those should go into the radiology folder. Use a comma to separate multiple items. Click OK once complete.

                      Once the new grouping is complete, select Save All in the top right corner.

                      Colors and Symbols

                      The Fusion CAC 2 application contains a variety of colors and symbols. The following guide provides a detailed explanation of the significance associated with each color and symbol.

                      Top Right Corner (Any Screen)

                      The ? icon represents the help menu where users can find the user guide, hot keys configured per organization, and more.This menu can include customized links for each organization. If this functionality is needed, contact cacsupport@dolbey.com to log a ticket.

                      Question Mark Menu Question Mark Menu

                      Dashboards

                      Clickable Links Clickable Links

                      Most of the blue text on the dashboard is a clickable link. When clicked, it will open a new tab into a pop out with the details behind the number. Some numbers, such as percentage rates or averages, will not yield pop out results.

                      Symbol/ColorMeaning
                      ROM/SOIRed numbers mean that the ROM or SOI is high (either a 3 or a 4) Red ROM SOI Red ROM SOI
                      LOS InformationGreen indicates there are still days left in the patient stay LOS Information LOS Information Red means they have exceeded the days.
                      DRGA red DRG means that a mismatch occurred where the CDI and coder do not match. The exact DRG may be different, or if the DRGs are the same the DRG weight is different. This can occur on APR-DRGs. Red DRG Red DRG If the DRG is green it means the DRG’s matched. Green DRG Green DRG

                      The viewer name will turn red to alert the user that action is needed.

                      Viewer Turned Red Viewer Turned Red

                      Code Summary

                      Symbol/ColorMeaning
                      Blue/Red Circles Containing NumbersThese circles with numbers next to each code are the Risk of Mortality (ROM) and Severity of Illness (SOI) which can be values 1-4, this information comes from the APR-DRG which is a priority grouper licensed from Solventum GPCS. ROM SOI Circles ROM SOI Circles
                      P IconIndicates the diagnosis is a principal Principal Diagnosis Icon Principal Diagnosis Icon
                      Numbers in Visit Reason SectionIndicates the position number of visit reason Visit Reasons Numbers Visit Reasons Numbers

                      Validation Results

                      Validation Results Validation Results

                      Red: Validation hard stop used to notify a user that there are things that they need to resolve. It does prevent the user from submitting the chart.

                      Yellow: This color is associated with validation soft stop used to notify a user that there may be things that they need to resolve. It does not prevent the user from submitting the chart.

                      Physicians & Queries

                      Highlighted Physicians & Queries Highlighted Physicians & Queries

                      The “Physicians & Queries” viewer will be highlighted with an amber background in the Navigation tree if the account has at least one physician query.

                      The amber background does not appear if the “Physician & Queries”

                      viewer is selected because the “selected” background overrides the amber background.

                      The viewer will turn brown to indicate there are open queries awaiting a response.

                      Open Query Open Query

                      Charges

                      Caution Symbol Caution Symbol

                      The caution symbol next to the left of the code is a edit that comes from the TruCode encoder or add on edits. If you hoover over the caution symbol you can see the edit, if you need a larger view of the edit you can open the TruCode research page for further details.

                      CDI/Clinical Alerts

                      CDI Alers Paper Icon CDI Alers Paper Icon

                      The paper icon allows users to click to enter notes to indicate thoughts on the CDI Alert.

                      Audit Worksheet

                      Symbol/ColorMeaning
                      Red TitleIndicates an open audit Open Audit Open Audit
                      Brown TitleIndicates a closed audit Closed Audit Closed Audit
                      AstriskIndicates a required field Required Field Required Field
                      P IconIndicates the diagnosis is a principal Principal Diagnosis Icon Principal Diagnosis Icon
                      Numbers in Visit Reason SectionIndicates the position number of visit reason Visit Reasons Numbers Visit Reasons Numbers
                      Speech BubbleAllows auditors to enter in notes next to any of the codes or items getting audited on the coder or auditor tree Speech Bubble Speech Bubble
                      Blue BackgroundAccuracy rate lines have a blue background, so they stand out. Blue Background Blue Background

                      Documents Tree

                      Symbol/ColorMeaning
                      Paper IconText based document and may be eligible to receive code suggestions. Paper Icon Paper Icon
                      Camera IconScanned document and is not eligible to receive code suggestions. Camera Icon Camera Icon
                      Pink TextLate arriving documentation. These documents were not accessible during the coding process as they were added to the patient chart after submission. Pink Text Pink Text
                      Black BackgroundThe document has been archived, meaning it was removed or replaced on the account. The end user had already added codes or bookmarks on the document.
                      Red TextSearch results were found on the document. Red Text Red Text
                      Grey Circle with NumberDisplays the umber of instances the searched word/phrase is within the document. Grey Circle Grey Circle
                      Square with ArrowIndicates the user can pop out the document(s) into a separate tab. Document Pop Out Square
                      Aqua BackgroundIndicates the document has been popped out into a different tab. Popped Out Document Popped Out Document

                      Documents Tree

                      Words/Phrases and Codes can be highlighted in few different colors:

                      Symbol/ColorMeaning
                      Bright YellowThe user clicked on the code from the Unassigned or Show All code tree linking to the code location within the document. It can also turn yellow if the user uses the search feature to search on a word or phrase. Yellow Highlighted Code Yellow Highlighted Code
                      Green HighlightThe code is validated by an end users on a different document. This allows the end user on subsequent documents to quickly see what was already validated. Green is also used by CDI/Clinical Alerts which highlights words and phrases used to pull details out to link to text for clinical evidence for CDI/Clinical Alerts. Green Highlighted Code Green Highlighted Code
                      Caution YellowIdentifies caution codes which indicates when the system suggests codes that are flagged as cautionary. Caution codes are applied to documents that the management team has identified as requiring careful consideration. These cautionary documents enable the system to suggest codes that may not be present on provider-facing or codable documents. It’s important to note that these codes cannot be validated from these documents alone. Caution Code Yellow Caution Code Yellow example: If a nurse mentions that a patient was treated for respiratory failure, but there is no mention of it by the provider, the caution code serves as a reminder to ensure that no relevant information is overlooked. It acts as a safety net to capture potential discrepancies or omissions in the documentation process.
                      Green Paper IconA bookmark has been added by an end user. Hovering over this icon will display the associated note. Alternatively, users can go to notes & bookmarks within the navigation tree you can see all that were placed. Bookmark Icon Bookmark Icon
                      Green FlagDisplayed next to the code within the document and on the show all or unassigned code tree to indicate there is a comment on a code. The code comment can also be found on the notes & bookmarks under the navigation tree within the code comment section. Code Comment Code Comment
                      Blue Backgroundindicates a diagnosis code Blue Diagnosis Code Blue Diagnosis Code
                      Red Backgroundindicates a procedure code Red Procedure Code Red Procedure Code

                      Code Tree

                      Symbol/ColorMeaning
                      H IconIndicates that the code is a HCC Code is a HCC Code is a HCC
                      MCCIndicates that the code is a MCC Code is a MCC Code is a MCC
                      CCIndicates that the code is a CC Code is a CC Code is a CC
                      HACReturned upon computing for the MS-DRG, this indicates that the code is an HAC.
                      NORIndicates the procedure code is a non-OR procedure.
                      TagReturned upon computing for the MS-DRG, this indicates that the code is responsible for one of the following quality measures PSI, PDI, PC-06 or Elixhauser. Quality Indicator Tag Quality Indicator Tag
                      Purple Background on Assigned CodesThere are more than 25 codes and any code in purple is below the the 25th position. This is important since CMS only accepts 25 diagnosis codes in the event you need to consider resequencing codes that need to be above the 25th position.Purple Background Purple Background
                      Exclamation IconWill appear on the “Show All” tree when a user manually entered this code and the system suggested it.Exclamation Mark Exclamation Mark
                      Person IconA user manually entered this code. It was not suggested by the application. Hovering over the icon will display the user who added it.Person Icon Person Icon
                      Caution SymbolAn edit that comes from the TruCode encoder or add on edits. If you hover over the caution symbol you can see the edit. Users needing a larger view of the edit can open the TruCode research page for further details.Caution Symbol Caution Symbol
                      Green FlagIn the “Show All” or “Unassigned” code tree, the presence of a green flag next to a code signifies that there is a comment associated with that particular code. This same flag can also be found alongside the code within a document and in the notes & bookmarks section under the Navigation tree within the code comment section.Code Comment Code Comment
                      Pencil IconExclusively available for non-TruCode organizations. It allows end users to manually input a code into the encoder using the compute button. This signifies that there is no direct association between the code and any specific location on a document.
                      Letter BlocksIndicates the present on admission (POA) status. When clicked the end user can change the status to the following:
                      • Y = Yes
                      • N = No
                      • U = Undefined
                      • W = Withdrawal
                      • E = Exempt
                      Letter Blocks Letter Blocks

                      Tuning Dashboard

                      Tuning Menu Tuning Menu

                      Star Symbol Star Symbol

                      The star symbol can be found in the tuning dashboard when clicking on a numbered result. It represents the charts that an user accessed. The tuning team uses this to keep track of the cases they have reviewed vs those they have left to review.

                      Fields and Definitions

                      This section contains an alphabetical list of fields and definitions in the application.

                      Fields are configured to be available in account search,workflow, and account list grid. These fields and their friendly names are set in the grid columns configuration by administrative users. This list may not have the full listing of fields as some fields are custom, however those listed are the most common.

                      Subsections of Fields and Definitions

                      Dolbey Definitions

                      TermDefinition
                      30 Day ReadmitOptional add-on to indicate if the patient has been readmitted within 30 days of the admit date. This field will populate with the previous account number and can be used for reporting.
                      Admit ReasonThe reason registration typed in, not the admit reason set by the coder.
                      AssignedThe code was used for billing purposes. If you are looking for codes that are suggested or added by CDI for working/baseline purposes you would use the document code. Note: If designing workflow it is recommended this field is used for CDI, but for QA purposes its recommended that‘Assigned’ is used to ensure you are QA on what was billed vs what was suggested.
                      BaselineThe baseline data of the chart that would have been coded and billed without the intervention of CDI staff. This data is used to measure the impact that CDI has on a patient’s chart is then measured as the difference between the Baseline DRG and the Billed DRG (either the weights or the reimbursement).
                      CategoryA category is a “Dolbey” created field used to further specify a patient type, if applicable. At some sites, category might equal patient type while others may have a category that is comprised of multiple fields to create that category. For example, if you would like to report on how many charts a coder completed for inpatient and then define them by LOS, you then have a category to define the difference between LOS patient types or service lines.
                      Document CodeAny code on a chart, manually entered or suggested. The code can be unassigned which means it’s not used for billing or assigned which is used for billing. Note: If designing workflow it is recommended this field is used for CDI, but for A purposes it’s recommended that ‘Assigned’ is used to ensure you are QA on what was billed vs what was suggested.
                      Document TypeThe document(s) that are present on the patient account. The document types for searching and/workflow are required to have the interface name, not the friendly name. If you do not know the document names that are available to use, Dolbey can provide a table which provides this information. Send an email to results@dolbey.com requesting the document table names.
                      DRG Reconciled?Reconciliation typically refers to a process that occurs when the working and final DRG’s do not match. Charts get flagged with a field called ‘Is DRG reconciled’. If there is a check mark, then the chart has been reviewed and the chart has been reconciled either as an agree to disagree or agree and an adjustment is made to the working or final DRG once CDI and/or Coding does another review.
                      FinalCoded data added to the chart be billed out.
                      Next Review DateNext review date is set either automatically by the system or manually by the CDI user if they choose to override the system automatic default date. The default date is whatever your management team has selected as a default interval for follow up reviews to occur. This may mean that the default is set for the next business day or two days later. This field is can be manually overridden by a CDS in the Code Summary viewer. Why would a CDS manually override this field? If you have reviewed the chart and know the patient is going to have surgery in a few days and there is no reason for a follow up review based on your sites policy’s. You may choose to augment the next review date for after the scheduled surgery.
                      Physician Query OpenThe number of physician queries on the account that have not been closed. A physician response could have been received, but if it hasn’t been viewed by a user within CAC, the physician query is still considered “open”.
                      Physician Query TotalThe number of queries on a chart, regardless of whether the queries are opened or closed. If a user was in an account that had an open physician query, and an external interface closed that query, the query total on the account is updated upon closing the account.
                      ReconciliationA process that occurs when the working and final DRG’s do not match. Charts get flagged with a field called ‘Is DRG reconciled’. If there is a check mark then the chart has been reviewed and the chart has been reconciled either as an agree to disagree or agree and an adjustment is made to the working or final DRG once CDI and/or Coding does another review.
                      WorkgroupA list of charts to be completed for coding, CDI or QA. Most charts flow into a Workgroup based upon automatic criteria, however admin user can route a chart to Workgroup (uncommon).
                      WorkingThe working information due to the intervention of the CDI staff. The CDI staff will update this information concurrently until the patient is discharged with additional data surrounding presenting problems or provisional diagnosis.

                      Fields

                      Standard Fields

                      FieldDescription
                      Abstract Patient ClassThis is the abstraction Patient Class for the patient chart.
                      Account NumberThis is the account number for the patient chart.
                      Account StatusThis is the account status for the patient chart.
                      Active Matched Criteria GroupsThis is the total number of active criteria groups on a patient chart.
                      Added to ImagesThis is how many total codes were added to an image document.
                      Added to ImagesTotal number of codes added to images
                      Admit DateThis is the admit date of the patient. Even though the field is named admit date time it only displays the date.
                      Admit Date w/ TimeComputed to display the patient’s admit date with the admit time
                      Admit Diagnosis CodesThis is the admit diagnosis code of the patient chart.
                      Admit ReasonThis is the admit reason which comes from ADT.
                      Admit SourceThis is the admit source of the patient chart.
                      Admit TypeThis is the admit type on the patient chart.
                      Admitting PhysicianComputed to display the first physician name with a role of Admitting.
                      Admitting Physician IDComputed to display the first physician ID with a role of Admitting.
                      Age in YearsComputed to display the patient’s age in years.
                      Assigned CPT CodeThis is used to search for a chart with an assigned CPT code.
                      Assigned Diagnosis CodeThis is used to search for a chart with an assigned diagnosis code.
                      Assigned POA
                      Assigned Procedure CodesThis is used to search for a chart with an assigned procedure (PCS) code.
                      Assigned Visit Reason CodesThis is used to search for a chart with an assigned visit reason code.
                      Attending PhysicianComputed to display the first physician name with a role of Attending
                      Attending Physician IDComputed to display the first physician ID with a role of Attending
                      AutoClose Date/TimeThis is the date and time the patient chart was AutoClosed.
                      AutoClose Rejection ReasonThis is the reason why the patient chart was rejected from AutoClose.
                      Baseline Working APRDRGThis is the Baseline APR-DRG.
                      Baseline Working DRGThis is the Baseline DRG.
                      Baseline Working DRG WeightThis is the Baseline DRG Weight.
                      Baseline Working Estimated ReimbursementThis is the Baseline DRG Estimated Reimbursement.
                      BedThis is the last known patients bed.
                      Billing CountdownThe billing countdown will tell you how many days left to bill the payor. In Mapping Configuration," if you add or edit a mapping for ““Payor””"," you see a new ““Default Bill Days”” field in the header and a new ““Bill Days”” column for each Payor. These fields contain numbers zero or higher or blank to indicate the number of days to add to the discharge date (current date is there is no discharge date) to calculate what is basically a billing due date. The billing date is compared to the current date (or the last submitted date if the account is already submitted) to compute the ““Billing Countdown”” – the number of days left to submit an account. If an account has no payor", no matching payor mapping," or payor mapping with no ““bill days”” defined"," the ““default bill days”” is used (zero if ““default bill days”” is blank as well.)
                      Birth Weight (g)This is the patients birth weight in grams. This can be provided either through the ADT interface or manually entered by a coder.
                      BuildingThis is the last known patients building which is usually equal to the nursing unit or location.
                      Calculated Date/TimeThis field shows you the last time the encoder was last run, if it’s blank, the encoder needs to be run. This is so that in Account Search and workflow. This can help find an accounts that the user should have an APC, DRG or if you are reviewing to see if a coder clicked on the encode to run edits
                      CategoryThis is a Dolbey created patient type to assist with reporting because often a patient type field needed to be joined with a location, hospital service or other fields to alter reporting for productivity categories join those fields to create custom patient types for easy productivity and DNFC reporting.
                      CDI Physician Queries AgreedThis is the outcome of the query reporting by the CDI user closing the query. Agree commonly means that the physician provided the CDI with a valid diagnosis.
                      CDI Physician Queries CanceledNot accessible in Query or Worksheet Designer. You can customize these by adding a mapping table using this key PhysicianQueryCancelReasons this will overwrite the default cancel options.
                      CDI Physician Queries ClosedThis is the total number of physician queries closed issued by a CDI user.
                      CDI Physician Queries DisagreedThis is the outcome of the query reporting by the CDI user closing the query. Disagree commonly means that the physician provided the CDI with a different result than expected.
                      CDI Physician Queries No OpinionThis is the outcome of the query reporting by the CDI user closing the query. No Opinion commonly means that the physician provided the CDI with a clinically insignificant diagnosis.
                      CDI Physician Queries No ResponseThis is the total number of physician queries closed by a CDI user due to no response from the physician.
                      CDI Physician Queries OpenThis is the total number of physician queries still open issued by a CDI user.
                      CDI Physician Queries RespondedThis is the total number of physician queries responded to by Physician for issued by a CDI user.
                      CDI Physician Query TotalThis is the total number of physician queries issued by a CDI user regardless of if the query is open or closed. If a user was in an account that had an open physician query, and an external interface closed that query, the query total on the account is updated upon closing the account.
                      CDI PSI IndicatorThis is the PSI’s that were identified by a CDI user. The PSI indicator is identified by using the patient safety indicator technical specifications. This field requires the quality module.
                      CDI Quality MeasureThis is a field used to identified if a CDI user identified PC-06. The PC- 06 indicator is identified by using the quality measures technical specifications. This field requires the quality module
                      Charge CPT CodesComputed as a list of CPT codes assigned to Charges. Does not apply to Transactions.
                      Charge Revenue CodesComputed as a list of Revenue Codes assigned to Charges. Does not apply to Transactions.
                      Coder Add RateTotal number of codes that the coder manually added to text documents that the engine did not get correct compared to how many codes were ‘assigned’
                      Coding Ready End Date/TimeThis is a field used to identify the end date used for when a chart is completed by coding.
                      Coding Ready Start Date/TimeThis is a field used to identify the start date used for when a chart is ready for coding.
                      Days to First SubmitThis column will show the difference between the Discharge Date and the date the account was first submitted. This will also include the time along with the date, so the number will be shown as a decimal.
                      Denial Billed DRGThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the billed DRG.
                      Denial Code Change NeededThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display if a code change is needed.
                      Denial Coder IdThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Coder Id that is to work the denial which could also be the coder of record.
                      Denial Codes in QuestionThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Code(s) in Question.
                      Denial CompleteThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display if the denial is completed.
                      Denial DRG Change NeededThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the if a DRG change is needed.
                      Denial Final Appeal DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Final Appeal Date.
                      Denial First Appeal DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the First Appeal Date.
                      Denial First Appeal Sent DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the First Appeal Sent Date.
                      Denial HIMS Received DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the HIMS Received Date.
                      Denial Manager Assigned DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Manager Assigned Date.
                      Denial Notification Letter DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Notification Letter Date.
                      Denial OutcomeThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Outcome of the Denial.
                      Denial Payer DRGThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Payer DRG.
                      Denial ReasonThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the reason of the Denial.
                      Denial Response Due DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Response Due Date.
                      Denial Reviewer IDThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Reviewer ID.
                      Denial Second Appeal RouteThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Second Appeal Route.
                      Denial Second Appeal Sent DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Second Appeal Sent Date.
                      Denial StatusThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the status of the Denial.
                      Denial Third Appeal RouteThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Third Appeal Route.
                      Denial Third Appeal Sent DateThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the Third Appeal Sent Date.
                      Denial TypeThis is a field from the denial management viewer to display the type of the Denial.
                      Discharge DateThis is the discharge date of the patient.
                      Discharge Date w/ TimeComputed to display the patient’s discharge date with discharge time
                      Discharge Date w/ TimeThis is the discharge date with the time of the patient.
                      Discharge DispositionThis is the discharge disposition of the patient.
                      Discharged ToThis is where the patient was discharged to.
                      Document CodeThis is used to find any code suggested by the engine or added by a user assigned or unassigned.
                      Document TypeThis is a field to identify a unique document name that is on a patient chart.
                      DRG Weight DifferenceComputed to display the Final DRG Weight minus the Baseline Working DRG Weight
                      Effective DateThis is a field used to drive reoccurring patient charts. If the coder is coding multiple encounters within a single encounter in order to generate a bill for each they would code, set an effective date and save to generate an outbound message. If they need to code for another encounter date within the same they would change the date and re-save the account.
                      Engine DX Suggest RateHow many DX codes the engine suggested compared to how many codes were ‘assigned’
                      Engine PR Suggest RateHow many procedure codes (PCS and/or CPT codes) the engine suggested compared to how many codes were ‘assigned’
                      Exclude from Matched CriteriaThis is a field to identify when we do not want a criteria group to display on the match criteria viewer.
                      FacilityThis is the facility of the patient.
                      Final ALOSThis is the final ALOS on the patient chart.
                      Final APR-DRGThis is the final APR-DRG on the patient chart.
                      Final APR-DRG DescriptionThis is the final APR-DRG Description on the patient chart.
                      Final APR-DRG GLOSThis is the final APR-DRG GMLOS on the patient chart.
                      Final APR-DRG WeightThis is the final APR-DRG weight on the patient chart.
                      Final CC TotalThis is the final CC total on the patient chart.
                      Final DRGThis is the final DRG on the patient chart.
                      Final DRG DescriptionThis is the final DRG Description on the patient chart.
                      Final DRG WeightThis is the final DRG weight on the patient chart.
                      Final Estimated ReimbursementThis is the final DRG Estimated Reimbursement on the patient chart.
                      Final GLOSThis is the final DRG GMLOS on the patient chart.
                      Final HAC TotalThis is the final HAC total on the patient chart.
                      Final HCC TotalThis is the final HCC total on the patient chart.
                      Final MCC TotalThis is the final MCC total on the patient chart.
                      Final PPC TotalThis is the final PPC total on the patient chart.
                      Final Risk of MortalityThis is the final APR-DRG ROM on the patient chart.
                      Final Severity of IllnessThis is the final APR-DRG SOI on the patient chart.
                      Financial ClassThis is the financial class of the patient.
                      First CDI OwnerThis is the first CDI owner user Id on the patient chart.
                      First CDI Owner DateThis is the first CDI owner date on the patient chart.
                      First CDI Owner First NameThis is the first CDI owner first name on the patient chart.
                      First CDI Owner Last NameThis is the first CDI owner last name on the patient chart.
                      First CDI SaverThis is the first CDI saver user Id on the patient chart.
                      First CDI Saver DateThis is the first CDI saver date on the patient chart.
                      First CDI Saver First NameThis is the first CDI saver first name on the patient chart.
                      First CDI Saver Last NameThis is the first CDI saver last name on the patient chart.
                      First Coded DateThis is the first time the chart was submitted.
                      First Coder First NameThis is the first users first name that submitted the chart.
                      First Coder Last NameThis is the first users last name that submitted the chart.
                      First Coder User IDThis is the first users user Id that submitted the chart.
                      First CPT CodeThis is the first sequenced CPT code coded by a coder.
                      First Diagnosis CodeThis is the first sequenced Diagnosis code coded by a coder.
                      First Procedure CodeThis is the first sequenced Procedure PCS code coded by a coder.
                      First Submitted DateThis is the first date the patient chart was submitted.
                      First Submitter First NameThis is the first users first name to submit the patient chart.
                      First Submitter Last NameThis is the first users last name to submit the patient chart.
                      First Submitter User IDThis is the first user id to submit the patient chart.
                      FloorThis is the last known patients floor location.
                      "Has Late-Arriving Documents
                      Hospital ServiceThis field is used to identify the patients hospital service.
                      Is AutoClosedThis is a field that will tell if you if the chart was AutoClosed by the system. True means that it was.
                      Is DRG ReconciledThis is a field to tell if a patient chart was reconciled on submit. True means that either the Last known Working or alternative DRG matched the Final DRG. False means that either the patient charts Last known Working or alternative DRG listed did not match the Final DRG. This field is only applicable on inpatient charts.
                      Is Emergency Room VisitThis field identifies if the chart is an ER visit.
                      Is InpatientThis field identifies if the chart is an inpatient chart.
                      Is Prior HCC PresentComputed as True if any prior account of the patient contains an HCC code. Field is defined in the site’s ADT script and performs a database lookup upon receipt of ADT for prior accounts.
                      Is Released by CDIThis field shows if the CDI user released the chart while in the reconciliation process on behalf of the coder from the submit state the coder originally submitted.
                      Is ResubmittedIs Resubmitted is a term used to mean the chart was completed by coding and the chart had already had a submit action performed. If Is Resubmitted is True that means a coder has submitted this chart to billing a subsequent time. If Is Resubmit is equal to false then the chart has not been resubmitted and it was only submitted a single time.
                      Last CDI Owner DateThis is the last CDI Owner date they saved the account. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer
                      Last CDI Owner First NameThis is the last CDI Owners first name. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer.
                      Last CDI Owner Last NameThis is the last CDI Owners last name. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer.
                      Last CDI Owner User IDThis is the last CDI Owners user id. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer.
                      Last CDI Saver DateThis is the last CDI user that saved the accounts date.
                      Last CDI Saver First NameThis is the last CDI user that saved the accounts first name.
                      Last CDI Saver Last NameThis is the last CDI user that saved the accounts last name.
                      Last CDI Saver User IDThis is the last CDI user that saved the accounts user id.
                      Last Interface UpdateThis is the last date and time the interface received an update to the account.
                      Last Saved DateThis is the last coder user that saved the accounts date.
                      Last Saver First NameThis is the last coder user that saved the accounts first name.
                      Last Saver Last NameThis is the last coder user that saved the accounts last name.
                      Last Saver User IDThis is the last coder user that saved the accounts user id.
                      Last SubmittedDate This is the last coder user that submitted the accounts date.
                      Last Submitter First NameThis is the last coder user that submitted the accounts first name.
                      Last Submitter Last NameThis is the last coder user that submitted the accounts last name.
                      Last Submitter User IDThis is the last coder user that submitted the accounts user id.
                      Last Viewed Date/TimeThis is the last viewer’s date they viewed the account without saving or submitting.
                      Last ViewerThis is the last viewer’s user id to view the account without saving or submitting.
                      Last Viewer First NameThis is the last viewer’s first name to view the account without saving or submitting.
                      Last Viewer Last NameThis is the last viewer’s last name to view the account without saving or submitting.
                      Late Document CountThis is the total documents that were late. Late is defined as post submit.
                      Late Document TypeThis is the document types that are late arriving.
                      Length of StayCalculated; This is the current Length of Stay on the patient’s chart. This is Admit Date to Discharge Date and if Discharge Date is not present then it’s calculated to today’s date. This is different than the ALOS and the GMLOS that is calculated by the encoder. Often referred to as the LOS.
                      LocationThis field can store the location but, commonly the location is stored within the building field not the location field.
                      Locked ByThis is the current user that has the account locked which is defined by actively in use.
                      Locked Date/TimeThis is the date and time the account became locked in use by the current user.
                      New Document FlagComputed to true if any documents were imported onto account after the last time the account was saved. The user would see in the accounts grid a check mark to indicate True; Not accessible in Query or Worksheet Designer
                      Next Review DateThis field can be changed to a different date other than the default which is every day. This field is used by the CDI team to indicate the date that they want the chart routed back to the follow-up review worklist. This field can be found on the code summary page changing the calendar date field from the date displayed to a future date. This will tell the chart to not route back to the “Follow-up Review” until the current calendar date matches the date you changed the next review date to.
                      Owner First NameThis is the current Owners first name. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer.
                      Owner Last NameThis is the current Owners last name. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer.
                      Owner NameThis is the current Owner date they saved the account. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer.
                      Owner User IDThis is the current Owners user id. An ownership can be claimed by selecting the owner button on the code summary viewer.
                      Patient Birth DateThis is the patients birth date.
                      Patient ClassThis is the patient class of the account.
                      Patient First NameThis is the patient’s first name.
                      Patient GenderThis is the patient’s gender.
                      Patient Last NameThis is the patient’s last name.
                      Patient Middle NameThis is the patient’s middle name.
                      Patient MRNThis is the patients’ medical record number.
                      Patient TypeThis is the patient type of the account.
                      PayorThis is the primary payor of the account.
                      Payor (Secondary)This is the secondary payor of the account.
                      Pending ReasonAn account can have zero or more pending reasons. Each pending reason can have additional properties Mappings Configuration and provides the client to control what pending reason are displayed for the role the end user has in addition to what other information should be recorded with a pending reason such as provider and date. Commonly, pending reasons can also trigger workflow and validation rules to ask the end user to take other actions such as adding a form to collect additional data such as CDI Questions or Quality Initiatives detail.
                      Pending Reason Physician IDThis is the physicians Id that is attached to the pending reason.
                      Pending Reason Physician NameThis is the physicians name that is attached to the pending reason.
                      Physician Coding StageThis is the stage of the account for physician coding which is independent from the stage field which is known as the facility stage.
                      Physician Queries AgreedThis is the outcome of the query reporting by the physician coding user closing the query. Agree commonly means that the physician provided the CDI with a valid diagnosis.
                      Physician Queries CanceledThis is the outcome of the query reporting by the physician coding user closing the query as canceled. You can customize these by adding a mapping table using this key PhysicianQueryCancelReasons this will overwrite the default cancel options.
                      Physician Queries ClosedThis is the total number of physician queries closed issued by a physician coding user
                      Physician Queries DisagreedThis is the outcome of the query reporting by the physician coding user closing the query. Disagree commonly means that the physician provided the physician coding with a different result than expected.
                      Physician Queries No OpinionThis is the outcome of the query reporting by the physician coding user closing the query. No Opinion commonly means that the physician provided the physician coding with a clinically insignificant diagnosis.
                      Physician Queries No ResponseThis is the total number of physician queries closed by a physician coding user due to no response from the physician.
                      Physician Queries OpenThis is the total number of physician queries still open issued by a physician coding user.
                      Physician Query RespondedThis is the total number of physician queries responded to by Physician for issued by a physician coding user.
                      Physician Query TotalThis is the total number of physician queries issued by a physician coding user regardless of if the query is open or closed. If a user was in an account that had an open physician query, and an external interface closed that query, the query total on the account is updated upon closing the account.
                      Pre-Bill DRG MatchThis field is shows true or false. True meaning that there was a pre- bill DRG match of the last know working and the final DRG.
                      Pre-Bill Final DRGThis is the final DRG pre-bill.
                      Pre-Bill Final DRG DescriptionThis is the final DRG Description pre-bill.
                      Pre-Bill Final DRG WeightThis is the final DRG Weight pre-bill.
                      Pre-Bill Working DRGThis is the working DRG pre-bill.
                      Pre-Bill Working DRG DescriptionThis is the working DRG Description pre-bill.
                      Pre-Bill Working DRG WeightThis is the working DRG Weight pre-bill.
                      Pre-Visit Account NumberNot accessible in Query or Worksheet Designer
                      Primary GrouperThis is the primary grouper of the account.
                      Principal CPT CodeThis is the principal CPT code on the account.
                      Principal CPT ModifierThis is the principal CPT code modifier(s). The user can add up to 4 modifiers unless they are using the Solventum CRS encoder, then they will be able to add up to 5 modifiers.
                      Principal CPT PhysicianThis is the principal CPT code abstracted physician.
                      Principal Diagnosis CodeThis is the principal diagnosis code on the account.
                      Principal Procedure CodeThis is the principal procedure (PCS) code on the account.
                      Principal Procedure PhysicianThis is the principal procedure (PCS) code abstracted physician.
                      PSI IndicatorThis is the PSI’s that were identified by a coder user. The PSI indicator is identified by using the patient safety indicator technical specifications. This field requires the quality module.
                      Public NoteThis is the public note.
                      Public Note Date/TimeThis is the date and time that the public note was created.
                      Public Note User IDThis is the users id that created the public note.
                      Quality MeasureThis is a field used to identified if a coder user identified PC-06. The PC-06 indicator is identified by using the quality measures technical specifications. This field requires the quality module.
                      Random Inclusion FactorComputed to display a random number between 1 and 100; Not accessible in Query or Worksheet Designer
                      Redundant Code CountTotal number of codes that the coder added manually but the engine suggested the code already
                      RoomThis is the last known room of the patient.
                      Secondary GrouperThis is the secondary grouper of the account.
                      Service TypeThis is the service type of the account.
                      StageThe stage of the patient tells you if the patient chart is unbilled, billed (submitted), In Review (QA).
                      Submit Account for Post- QAThis is used in workflow to define when a chart qualifies for a QA Review worklist if it should be prebill or post bill review. True indicates it will be a post bill account and False is Prebill.
                      Time Spent By CDIThis is the total time spent in an account for a user with a CDI role.
                      Time Spent By CodingThis is the total time spent in an account and any subsequent time after the first time it was saved or submitted for a user with a Coder role
                      Time Spent By First CoderThis is the total time spent in an account for the first timefor a user with a Coder role.
                      Total ChargesThis is the total charges on the patient chart. Commonly, this information is sent on the ADT interface.
                      Total DocumentsComputed to display the total number of documents on the account.
                      Total DX CodesTotal number of diagnosis codes submitted
                      Total Procedure CodesTotal number of procedure codes (PCS and/or CPT codes) submitted
                      Transfer FromThis is where the patient was transferred from.
                      Transfer ToThis is where the patient was transferred to.
                      Validation Rule Count at SubmitThis tells you if there were any active validation rules at Submit.
                      Workflow Trigger DateNot accessible in Query or Worksheet Designer
                      WorkgroupThis field identifies what current default workgroup the patient chart is currently within.
                      Workgroup Assigned ByThis is used to indicate that user manually assigned the chart to another user’s “You” worklist.
                      Workgroup Assigned DateThis field identifies the date that the patient chart qualified for the current workgroup.
                      Workgroup CategoryThis field identifies what current workgroup(s) category the patient chart is currently within.
                      Workgroup SubmittedThis is used in QA workflow to identify that a chart should not requalify for a QA workgroup if it was previously submitted from it to prevent chart looping.
                      Workgroup TypeIn Workflow Management," each workgroup now has a new ““WorkGroup Type”” field. This field is optional", but sites can designate a type for each workgroup. The purpose of doing so is for current and future reporting. For this feature," setting a workgroup to a type besides ““Coding”” will exclude the account’s time assigned to it in the ““Coding Chart Status Report””.
                      Working Admit Diagnosis CodeThis is the working admit diagnosis code.
                      Working ALOSThis is the working ALOS.
                      Working APRDRGThis is the working APR-DRG.
                      Working APRDRG DescriptionThis is the working APR-DRG Description.
                      Working APRDRG GLOSThis is the working APR-DRG GMLOS.
                      Working CC TotalThis is the working CC total count.
                      Working CPT CodesThis is used to identify working CPT Codes.
                      Working Diagnosis CodesThis is used to identify working diagnosis Codes.
                      Working DRGThis is the working DRG.
                      Working DRG DescriptionThis is the working DRG Description.
                      Working DRG WeightThis is the working DRG Weight.
                      Working Estimated ReimbursementThis is the working DRG Estimated Reimbursement.
                      Working GLOSThis is the working DRG GMLOS.
                      Working HAC TotalThis is the working HAC total count.
                      Working HCC TotalThis is the working HCC total count.
                      Working MCC TotalThis is the working MCC total count.
                      Working PPC TotalThis is the working PPC total count.
                      Working Principal CPT CodeThis is used to identify working principal CPT Codes.
                      Working Principal Diagnosis CodeThis is used to identify working principal diagnosis Codes.
                      Working Principal Procedure CodeThis is used to identify working principal procedure (PCS) Codes.
                      Working Procedure CodesThis is used to identify working procedure (PCS) Codes.
                      Working Risk of MortalityThis is the working APR-DRG ROM.
                      Working Severity of IllnessThis is the working APR-DRG SOI.
                      Working Visit Reason CodesThis is used to identify working Visit Reason Codes.

                      Formulated Fields

                      FieldFormula
                      Abstracting Accuracy Rate(Procedure (PCS/CPT) Date Changes + Procedure (PCS/CPT) Provider Changes + Discharge Disposition Changes + Consulting Provider Changes/Abstracting Pre-Audit) - 100%.
                      Abstracting Error RateProcedure (PCS/CPT) Date Changes + Procedure (PCS/CPT) Provider Changes + Discharge Disposition Changes + Consulting Provider Changes/Abstracting Pre-Audit.
                      Abstracting ErrorsProcedure (PCS/CPT) Date Changes + Procedure (PCS/CPT) Provider Changes + Discharge Disposition Changes + Consulting Provider Changes.
                      Abstracting Pre-Audit(Total Procedure and CPT Codes x 2) + 1 for Discharge Disposition + 1 for Consulting Providers if Present). Procedure and CPT Codes are multiplied by two since there are to abstraction opportunities which is date of service and preforming provider.
                      CPT Accuracy Rate(CPT Codes Added + CPT Codes Edited + CPT Codes Unassigned + Principal CPT Changed/CPT Codes Pre-Audit) – 100%
                      CPT Error RateProcedure Codes Added + Procedure Codes Edited + Procedure Codes Unassigned + Principal CPT Changed/CPT Codes Pre-Audit
                      CPT ErrorsCPT Codes Added + CPT Codes Edited + CPT Codes Unassigned + Principal CPT Changed
                      Diagnosis Accuracy Rate(Diagnosis Codes Added + Diagnosis Codes Edited + Diagnosis Codes Unassigned + POA Changes + Principal Dx Changed/ Diagnosis Codes Pre-Audit) – 100%. This line will be highlighted in blue so the data stands out.
                      Diagnosis Error RateDiagnosis Codes Added + Diagnosis Codes Edited + Diagnosis Codes Unassigned + POA Changes + Principal Dx Changed/ Diagnosis Codes Pre-Audit
                      Diagnosis ErrorsDiagnosis Codes Added + Diagnosis Codes Edited + Diagnosis Codes Unassigned + POA Changes + Principal Dx Changed
                      Procedure Accuracy Rate(Procedure Codes Added + Procedure Codes Edited + Procedure Codes Unassigned + Principal PCS Changed/ Procedure Codes Pre-Audit) – 100%
                      Procedure Error RateProcedure Codes Added + Procedure Codes Edited + Procedure Codes Unassigned + Principal PCS Changed/ Procedure Codes Pre-Audit
                      Procedure ErrorsProcedure Codes Added + Procedure Codes Edited + Procedure Codes Unassigned + Principal PCS Changed
                      Total Accuracy RateThis is the total overall accuracy as a percentage the formula is: Total Errors = (Diagnosis Errors + Visit Reason Errors + Procedure Errors + CPT Errors + Abstracting Errors/Total Pre-Audit) – 100%.
                      Total Error RateThis is the total overall error rate as a percentage the formula is: Total Errors = Diagnosis Errors + Visit Reason Errors + Procedure Errors + CPT Errors + Abstracting Errors/Total Pre-Audit.
                      Total ErrorsThis is the total overall errors that appear in the above boxes the formula is as followed: Total Errors = Diagnosis Errors + Visit Reason Errors + Procedure Errors + CPT Errors + Abstracting Errors.
                      Visit Reason Accuracy Rate(Visit Reasons Added + Visit Reasons Codes Edited + Visit Reasons Codes Unassigned/Visit Reasons Pre-Audit) – 100%. This line will be highlighted in blue so the data stands out. This will only display on an outpatient chart
                      Visit Reason Error RateVisit Reasons Added + Visit Reasons Codes Edited + Visit Reasons Codes Unassigned/Visit Reasons Pre-Audit. This will only display on an outpatient chart.
                      Visit Reason ErrorsVisit Reasons Added + Visit Reasons Codes Edited + Visit Reasons Codes Unassigned. This will only display on an outpatient chart.

                      DRG Outcome (Inpatient Only)

                      FieldDescription
                      APR-DRG Change?This is a yes or no field. If the APR-DRG was changed from the previous DRG assignment. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit. Note if the Billing DRG and the APR-DRG as the same there could be duplication of changes reported on this field and the MS-DRG field which is the Billing DRG.
                      APR-DRG ROM Change?This is a yes or no field. If the APR-DRG changed resulted in an ROM (Risk of Mortality) change. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit.
                      APR-DRG SOI Change?This is a yes or no field. If the APR-DRG changed resulted in an SOI (Severity of Illness) change. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit.
                      MS-DRG Change?This is a yes or no field. If the billing DRG was changed from the previous DRG assignment. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit. Note if the Billing DRG and the APR-DRG as the same there could be duplication of changes reported on this field and the APR-DRG Change field.
                      Reimbursement Change AmountThis is a field that indicates if the billing DRG change resulted in a change the amount will be displayed.
                      Reimbursement Change?This is a field that indicates if the billing DRG change resulted in a increase, decrease or no reimbursement change. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit.

                      Audit & Audit Worksheet Fields

                      If the auditor disagrees with any of the auto-calculated fields below, they can choose to override the field by entering in the value that makes sense per the audit. The system will provide an audit trail to show what the value was changed from and to for transparency along with the user that made the change and the date/time the change was performed.

                      FieldDescription
                      Abstracting Accuracy RateThis is the total abstracting accuracy as a percentage
                      Abstracting Error RateThis is the total abstracting error rate as a percentage
                      Abstracting Pre-AuditThe total is the number of abstracting components there were at the time the audit is started.
                      Audit Closed by First NameThis is the auditor/coder first name who closed the audit.
                      Audit Closed by Last NameThis is the auditor/coder last name who closed the audit.
                      Audit Closed by User Id  This is the auditor/coder user Id who closed the audit.
                      Audit Closed DateThis is the date the audit was closed.
                      Audit Coder AgreeThis is if the coder agreed with the audit or if they decided to rebuttal.
                      Audit Coder of Record First NameThis is the coders first name that last submitted the chart prior to audit start.
                      Audit Coder of Record Last NameThis is the coders last name that last submitted the chart prior to audit start.
                      Audit Coder of Record User IdThis is the coders user Id that last submitted the chart prior to audit start.
                      Audit Opened by First NameThis is the auditor first name whom opened the audit.
                      Audit Opened by Last NameThis is the auditor’s last name who opened the audit.
                      Audit Opened by User Id  This is the auditor user Id who opened the audit.  
                      Audit Opened DateThis is the date the audit was opened by the auditor.
                      Audit Rebuttal CommentThis is the rebuttal comment from the coder.
                      Audit Rebutted by First NameThis is the coders first name who rebutted the audit.
                      Audit Rebutted by Last NameThis is the coders last name who rebutted the audit.
                      Audit Rebutted by User IdThis is the coders user Id who rebutted the audit.
                      Audit Rebutted DateThis is the date the audit was first rebutted.
                      Audit Response to RebuttalThis is the response from the auditor for the rebuttal from the coder.
                      Audit Returned DateThis is the date that the audit was returned to the coder.
                      Audit Sub-Types  This is the audit sub-type.
                      Audit Training RecommendationsThis is the training recommendations if applicable that the auditor recommends for the coder.
                      Audit Training TopicsThese are the training topics if applicable that the auditor recommends for the coder.
                      Audit TypeThis is the audit type.
                      CC AddedThis is the count of the total of added codes that has a classification of CC (complication or comorbidity) by the auditor on secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The added action is defined by right clicking on a code from the unassigned code tree  right clicking on a code to validate from a document or adding a code that did not exist previously. These are not counted in the total error rate to prevent duplication of errors. This will only display on an inpatient chart.
                      CC RemovedThis is the count of the total of removed codes that had a classification of CC (complication or comorbidity) by the auditor on secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The unassign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting one of the unassign diagnosis code    unassign as secondary   unassign as admit or by selecting edit diagnosis code and deleting the code. These are not counted in the total error rate to prevent duplication of errors. This will only display on an inpatient chart.
                      CPT Accuracy RateThis is the total codes that appear in the above boxes the formula is as followed: CPT Error Rate = (CPT Codes Added + CPT Codes Edited + CPT Codes Unassigned + Principal CPT Changed/CPT Codes Pre-Audit) – 100%    
                      CPT Codes Added  This is the count of the total of added or assign actions by the auditor for principal and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The assign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the unassigned code tree and selecting assign as principal or secondary    right clicking on a code to validate from a document or adding a code that did not exist previously.
                      CPT Codes EditedThis is the count of the total of edit actions by the auditor for principal and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. An edit is defined as a simple change to the same code category such as the last digit of a code however if the auditor replaced the full code this is still counted as an edit rather than an unassign and an add. The editing action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting edit CPT code with a replacement procedure code.
                      CPT Codes Post-AuditThe total is the number of CPT codes including principal and secondary at the time the auditor selects the Update Codes button
                      CPT Codes Pre-AuditThe total is the number of CPT codes including principal and secondary at the time the audit is started.
                      CPT Codes UnassignedThis is the count of the total of deleted or unassign actions by the auditor for principal and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The unassign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting one of the unassign principal code   unassign as secondary   unassign all episodes or by selecting edit procedure code and deleting the code.
                      CPT Error RateThis is the total codes that appear in the above boxes the formula is as followed: CPT Error Rate = Procedure Codes Added + Procedure Codes Edited + Procedure Codes Unassigned + Principal CPT Changed/CPT Codes Pre-Audit
                      CPT ErrorsThis is the total codes that appear in the above boxes the formula is as followed: CPT Errors = CPT Codes Added + CPT Codes Edited + CPT Codes Unassigned + Principal CPT Changed.
                      Diagnosis Codes AddedThis is the count of the total of added or assign actions by the auditor for admit and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The assign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the unassigned code tree and selecting assign as admit or secondary    right clicking on a code to validate from a document or adding a code that did not exist previously. This total does not include Reason for Visit as they are calculated separately.
                      Diagnosis Codes EditedThis is the count of the total of edit actions by the auditor for admit and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. An edit is defined as a simple change to the same code category such as the last digit of a code however if the auditor replaced the full code this is still counted as an edit rather than an unassign and an add. The editing action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting edit diagnosis code with a replacement diagnosis code. This total does not include Reason for Visit as they are calculated separately.
                      Diagnosis Codes Post- AuditThe total is the number of diagnosis codes including principal  admit and secondary at the time the auditor selects the Update Codes button. This total does not include Reason for Visit as they are calculated separately.
                      Diagnosis Codes Pre-AuditThe total is the number of diagnosis codes including principal    admit and secondary at the time the audit is started. This total does not include Reason for Visit as they are calculated separately.
                      Diagnosis Codes UnassignedThis is the count of the total of deleted or unassign actions by the auditor for admit and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The unassign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting one of the unassign diagnosis code     unassign as secondary   unassign as admit or by selecting edit diagnosis code and deleting the code. This total does not include Reason for Visit as they are calculated separately.
                      Discharge Disposition Changed?This is a true or false field. If the Discharge Disposition was changed from the previous Disposition assignment the field will result in true which is counted as one error and if it was not changed it will result in false which is not counted as an error. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit.
                      HAC(s) AddedThis is the count of the total of added codes that has a classification of HAC (Hospital Acquired Condition) by the auditor on secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The added action is defined by right clicking on a code from the unassigned code tree     right clicking on a code to validate from a document or adding a code that did not exist previously. These are not counted in the total error rate to prevent duplication of errors. This will only display on an inpatient chart.
                      HAC(s) RemovedThis is the count of the total of removed codes that had a classification of HAC (Hospital Acquired Condition) by the auditor on secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The unassign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting one of the unassign diagnosis code   unassign as secondary   unassign as admit or by selecting edit diagnosis code and deleting the code. These are not counted in the total error rate to prevent duplication of errors. This will only display on an inpatient chart.
                      MCC AddedThis is the count of the total of added codes that has a classification of MCC (major complication or comorbidity) by the auditor on secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The added action is defined by right clicking on a code from the unassigned code tree  right clicking on a code to validate from a document or adding a code that did not exist previously. These are not counted in the total error rate to prevent duplication of errors. This will only display on an inpatient chart.
                      MCC RemovedThis is the count of the total of removed codes that had a classification of MCC (major complication or comorbidity) by the auditor on secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The unassign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting one of the unassign diagnosis code    unassign as secondary   unassign as admit or by selecting edit diagnosis code and deleting the code. These are not counted in the total error rate to prevent duplication of errors. This will only display on an inpatient chart.
                      POA ChangesThis is the count of the total of POA changes only on unchanged codes (Edited or Added) to prevent double counting errors once the auditor selects the update codes button. If a code was edited    assigned/added or unassigned/deleted it will not be counted within this total. This will only display on an inpatient chart.
                      Principal CPT ChangedThis is a true or false field. If the principal CPT was changed from the previous code assignment the field will result in true which is counted as one error and if it was not changed it will result in false which is not counted as an error. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit.
                      Principal Dx ChangedThis is a true or false field. If the principal diagnosis was changed from the previous code assignment the field will result in true which is counted as one error and if it was not changed it will result in false which is not counted as an error. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit.
                      Principal PCS ChangedThis is a true or false field. If the principal PCS was changed from the previous code assignment the field will result in true which is counted as one error and if it was not changed it will result in false which is not counted as an error. N/A is available in the event the auditor wants to list it as not applicable to the audit.
                      Procedure Codes AddedThis is the count of the total of added or assign actions by the auditor for principal and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The assign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the unassigned code tree and selecting assign as principal or secondary, right clicking on a code to validate from a document or adding a code that did not exist previously.
                      Procedure Codes EditedThis is the count of the total of edit actions by the auditor for principal and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. An edit is defined as a simple change to the same code category such as the last digit of a code however if the auditor replaced the full code this is still counted as an edit rather than an unassign and an add. The editing action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting edit procedure code with a replacement procedure code.
                      Procedure Codes Post-AuditThe total is the number of procedure codes including principal and secondary at the time the auditor selects the Update Codes button.
                      Procedure Codes Pre-AuditThe total is the number of procedure codes including principal and secondary at the time the audit is started.
                      Procedure Codes UnassignedThis is the count of the total of deleted or unassign actions by the auditor for principal and secondary codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The unassign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting one of the unassign principal code, unassign as secondary, unassign all episodes or by selecting edit procedure code and deleting the code.
                      Total Modifiers AddedThis is the count of the total of added modifiers on a CPT by the auditor where the code previously existed. If the code was already counted within the CPT Codes Added section to prevent duplication of errors. The added action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting to edit to add a modifier.
                      Total Modifiers RemovedThis is the count of the total of removed modifiers on a CPT by the auditor where the code previously existed. If the code was already counted within the CPT Codes Added section to prevent duplication of errors. The removed action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting to edit to remove an existing modifier.
                      Visit Reasons AddedThis is the count of the total of added or assign actions by the auditor for reason for visit codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The assign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the unassigned code tree and selecting assign as visit reason   right clicking on a code to validate from a document or adding a code that did not exist previously. This will only display on an outpatient chart.
                      Visit Reasons EditedThis is the count of the total of edit actions by the auditor for reason for visit codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. An edit is defined as a simple change to the same code category such as the last digit of a code however if the auditor replaced the full code this is still counted as an edit rather than an unassign and an add. The editing action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting edit diagnosis code with a replacement diagnosis code. This will only display on an outpatient chart.
                      Visit Reasons Post-AuditThe total is the number of reason for visit diagnosis codes at the time the auditor selects the Update Codes button. This will only display on an outpatient chart.
                      Visit Reasons Pre-AuditThe total is the number of reason for visit diagnosis codes at the time the audit is started. This will only display on an outpatient chart.
                      Visit Reasons UnassignedThis is the count of the total of deleted or unassign actions by the auditor for reason for visit codes once the auditor selects the update codes button. The unassign action is defined by right clicking on a code from the assigned code tree and selecting one of the unassign diagnosis code  unassign as visit reason or by selecting edit diagnosis code and deleting the code. This will only display on an outpatient chart

                      ER E/M Fields

                      FieldDescription
                      E/M Critical Care CPT CodeThis is the Critical Care CPT Code that was generated based upon time entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M Critical Care DurationThis is the Critical Care time duration that was entered in by the coder either manually or using the time helper based upon time entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M ER DateThis is the ER date the user entered into the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M ER Physician First NameThis is the ER Physician First Name the user entered into the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M ER Physician IDThis is the ER Physician ID the user tied to the physician entered on the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M ER Physician Last NameThis is the ER Physician Last Name the user entered into the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M Is CC Criteria MetThis is the radio button outcome from the CC Criteria Met that the user manually entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M Is CC Time DeterminedThis is the radio button outcome from the CC Time Determined that the user manually entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M Level CPT CodeThis is the E/M Level CPT Code that was generated based upon the matrix selections entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet. This pertains to level 1-5 as critical care is documented in the E/M Critical Care CPT Code.
                      E/M Level NumberThis is the E/M Level that was generated based upon the matrix selections entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet. This pertains to level 1-5 as critical care is documented separately.
                      E/M No Charge CPT CodeThis is the No Charge CPT Code that was generated based the selection entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M No Charge DescriptionThis is the No Charge Description that was generated based the selection entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet.
                      E/M TraumaThis is the Trauma selection that was entered from within the ER E/M Worksheet.

                      General

                      Help Menu

                      The Help Menu can be accessed by clicking on the ? in the top right hand corner of the application.

                      Help Menu Help Menu

                      Here, users will find the following resources:

                      ResourceDescription
                      Fusion CAC HelpFusion CAC User Guide
                      Keyboard ShortcutsA list of shortcuts that can be used when woking an account in Fusion CAC
                      About Fusion CACLicense and version information
                      CAC User CommunityA link to the Dolbey virtual user group, Dolbey Community. Users needing access should contact the SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com)
                      CAC Technical SupportDocument providing information on how to contact the Dolbey Support Team and escalation procedures for support issues.
                      Engine Tuning SupportAn email address to contact the Dolbey Tuning Team
                      Haugen AcademyAccess to the Haugen Academy educational platfom, if licensed by the organization

                      Keyboard Shortcuts

                      Keyboard shortcuts are keys or key combinations allowing users to take certain action within the application without using their mouse. The keyboard short cuts can be changed by an administrator in the Shortcut Configuration tool.

                      Subsections of General

                      Accessing Accounts

                      Clicking on the Accounts tab at the top of the screen allows users to access accounts in the system. Click anywhere on the row of an account to open it.

                      Account List

                      The main view for a workgroup is called the Account List, which displays accounts that need to be worked by the user.

                      Accounts are commonly sorted into workgroups based on criteria set by the operational/management team. Each workgroup is a list of work that needs to be completed by users assigned to the workgroup.

                      Account List Account List

                      To access assigned worklists, click on the down arrow to the right of the Assigned to dropdown. Each of the user’s assigned worklists will be listed along with a bubble showing the number of accounts in the group available for coding. By default, a worklist must have at least one pending chart to display in the system. Assigned Workgroups will not be visible here if there are no accounts available for coding for that specific Workgroup.

                      Assigned To Assigned To

                      Note

                      If there are no workgroups in the drop-down, ensure the drop-down menu to the left of Assigned to says Accounts. If it does, contact your supervisor.

                      For more information on workgroups at your organization, contact your supervisor.

                      Auto-Load

                      Auto Load Checbox Auto Load Checbox

                      Checking the Auto-Load box before starting a session, or while in an assigned worklist, will automatically load the next chart in the selected Workgroup upon Save, Submit, or Cancel. Users can discontinue Auto-Load at any time by unchecking the Auto-Load box. This will return them to the Assigned to Workgroup for manual selection of the next chart in the selected Workgroup.

                      Refresh Button

                      Fusion CAC is regularly reacting to account activity, submitting information to the encoder, updating Workgroups, and returning data to the EHR. When working from the assigned accounts listing, it is recommended to occasionally refresh the data and update the Workgroups with recent information.

                      Refresh Button Refresh Button

                      To ensure the most up-to-date information for accounts is presented in your assigned Workgroups, or when your current session of Fusion CAC has been idle for an extended period, hit the Refresh button, within the application, to update the session with recent activity.

                      Note

                      The refresh button within Fusion CAC is different from the refresh button in your browser. Using the browser refresh button is NOT recommended as this will reload your session, resulting in a loss of work.

                      Assigned Account Grid

                      Account Grid Column Headers Account Grid Column Headers

                      Each column within the Assigned Accounts Grid has menu options to pin, auto size, and reset columns as well as a Tool Panel to select which columns you want displayed in your view of the assigned accounts grid. Click on the Menu icon to view the drop-down listing.

                      Pin Column

                      Pin a Column Pin a Column

                      The Pin Column feature allows users to freeze desired columns to the right or left of the accounts grid pane. Doing so will keep these columns visible when moving to other areas of the assigned accounts grid. Columns can be rearranged after they have been pinned based on view preferences. To unpin a column, select the Pin Column option from the menu and choose No Pin.

                      Autosize & Reset Columns

                      Within the assigned accounts listing, the default column width is based on the account with the data field with the most characters. Users can size individual columns, or all columns to automatically fit the width of contents of that particular column. To autosize just one column, select the menu button for the column, then select “Autosize This Column”. To automatically fit the width of contents for ALL columns, select the menu button for any column, then select “Autosize All Columns”. To return column widths to their default settings, select the menu button for any column, then select “Reset Columns”.

                      Tool Panel

                      The Tool Panel feature gives users the flexibility to customize which columns are displayed within their Assigned Accounts Grid.

                      Tool Panel Tool Panel

                      Click on “Tool Panel” from the Column Setting drop-down listing to view the Tool Panel selection menu. Select/deselect columns to be displayed and then click on “Tool Panel” again to hide the Tool Panel selection menu.

                      Grid Column Fields

                      Users can choose which columns to view when displaying their assigned accounts list by clicking on the Columns icon in any column on the assigned accounts listing.

                      Hide or Show Columns Hide or Show Columns

                      Tool Panel settings will remain for all future coding sessions and subsequent logins. To bring all columns back into view, click on Reset Columns from the Column Settings drop-down listing.s

                      Sorting and Filtering

                      After selecting a workgroup, a list of accounts will appear in the grid. The displayed grid can be customized using the column menu settings to pin, auto size, sort, filter, and select columns to display. Columns can also be re-ordered by clicking and dragging the column headings. These setting are custom and “sticky”, meaning they can be set per user and remembered for future logins.

                      Column Filter and Sort Column Filter and Sort

                      Column Filter Options Column Filter Options

                      Using the filter menu allows users to narrow down and isolate the accounts to be worked based on data elements within the selected column. For example, the filter menu for the D/C Date column allows the user to filter the account list by selected dates using the checkboxes or entering specific dates in the Search box. A icon in front of the column heading means that a filter has been applied.

                      Filtered Column Filtered Column

                      To remove any selected filters, click on the and then check the box for (Select All) to remove all filters. When filtering more than one column, use the ‘Reset Filter’ button to remove all filters instead of removing the filter from individual columns.

                      Reset Filters Button Reset Filters Button

                      Sorting information in the assigned accounts grid allows users to see data the way they want and find accounts quickly. Data can be sorted by text (A to Z or Z to A), numbers (smallest to largest or largest to smallest), and dates (oldest to newest and newest to oldest). To sort a single column, click once on the column header of the column you want to sort. The column header will change to an up arrow. This will sort the column first in ascending order (A-Z). Click the column header again to change to a descending (Z-A) sort with a down arrow. Clicking on the column heading a third time will return the column to the default sort and the arrow will disappear.

                      Ascending Sort: Ascending Sort Ascending Sort

                      Descending Sort: Descending Sort Descending Sort

                      Users can select multiple columns for ascending and descending sorts. To sort multiple columns, click the column heading of the first column in the selection, then hold down the SHIFT button while clickiing the column headings of other columns to be added to the selection for sorting. Click the column header for sort selection (ascending, descending, default) until the individual column is sorted in the preferred sort order. After all selections have been made, release the keys for the sort results.

                      Manually Loading an Account

                      If a specific account is needed, it can be accessed by typing the account number into the Account # field on the right side of the Account List bar. The entered account will open after the user hits the Enter key or clicks the List icon.

                      Account Number Search Account Number Search

                      Alternate Views

                      Other special-case views are available by clicking the drop-down next to Account List and selecting the appropriate option:

                      Alternate Views Dropdown Alternate Views Dropdown

                      Recent Views

                      The Recent Views menu item allows users to quickly find accounts accessed within the last 24 hours in sequenced order.

                      Recent Views Recent Views

                      Pending Accounts

                      The Pending Accounts menu item displays all of the accounts that currently have a Pending Reason set by the user.

                      Pending Accounts Pending Accounts

                      The MRN Search field allows users to search accounts by MRN. The grid will display MRNs that match the search.

                      MRN Search MRN Search

                      Subsections of Accessing Accounts

                      Adding/Validating Codes

                        Validating a Code

                        Codes can be validated/added to the chart as Assigned Codes while reviewing documents and the suggested codes within each document. Right-click on the code to Edit/Assign the code.

                        Code HighlightMeaning
                        Purple Highlighted Code Purple Highlighted CodeIf the background of the text suggestion has a purple background, the text matches a code suggestion
                        Red Text Secondary Token Red Text Secondary TokenIf the background of the text suggestion has a red background, the text matches only a secondary token
                        Green Highlighted Code Green Highlighted CodeIf the background of the code has a green background this means the code was already validated on a different document

                        Adding a Code

                        There are multiple ways to add a code to a chart, if it has not already been suggested by the engine

                        Add Code via Right Click

                        After reviewing all suggested codes from either the Documents tree or the Unassigned code tree, users can add a code to a text document by highlighting the relevant word(s) or phrase and then right-clicking to open the Add Code menu.

                        Right Click Add Code Menu Right Click Add Code Menu

                        Add Code via Direct Entry

                        The Add Code box can be used when the code to be assigned is known and encoder is not needed.

                        Add Code Entry Box Add Code Entry Box

                        Alternatively, the user can highlight a term, right click, and select +Add Code.

                        Add Code Right Click Menu Add Code Right Click Menu

                        Enter at least the first 2 characters of the code to bring up the drop-down list of available codes for the main term, then scroll down the listing for codes to confirm the sub-term and select the appropriate code for complete coding. From the Code Editor window, users can also confirm the code description, set the POA Indicator, and designate the code as Admit, Principal or Secondary. Users may also enter the text description of the code and select the code that way.

                        Code Editor Box Code Editor Box

                        Either a Diagnosis or Procedure/CPT® code can be entered from the Code Editor window.

                        Add Code From Encoder

                        Users can add a code to a text document by highlighting the relevant word(s) or phrase and then right-clicking to open the Add Code menu. Left-click and drag the mouse to highlight the selected text for code addition, then right-click to open the Add Code Menu. Click on the Add Code from Encoder + sign to launch the Encoder. Continue to use the encoder and accept the final code which will be returned to your chart.

                        Add Code From Encoder Right Click Add Code From Encoder Right Click

                        Add Code to Scanned Documents

                        The engine does not suggest codes from scanned documents. Users can add codes to scanned documents for codes not assigned elsewhere within the chart. Adding codes to scanned documents is recommended only when a code has not already been added to a text document within the chart or documentation to be coded is not found elsewhere.

                        To add a code to a scanned document, start typing the code in the Add Code box or click on the Encoder button in the bar above the scanned document.

                        Codes added to the scanned document will appear in the Additonal Codes space at the top of the document viewer.

                        Add Code to Scanned Document Add Code to Scanned Document

                        Add Code From Codebook

                        Users can add a code to a text document by highlighting the relevant word(s) or phrase and then right-clicking to open the Add Code menu. Left-click and drag the mouse to highlight the selected text for code addition, then right-click to open the Add Code Menu. Click on Add Code from Encoder + to launch the Encoder. Continue to use the encoder and accept the final code which will be returned to the chart.

                        The exact functionality of adding a code from encoder can vary depending on organizational settings and the encoder used. Please consult your supervisor if you need further instructions.

                        Left-click and drag the mouse to highlight the selected text for code addition, then right-click to open the Add Code Menu. Click on Code Description Search to have Fusion CAC present any relevant code based on the highlighted word or phrase. If the correct code appears in this list, clicking on it will add the code to the document.

                        Code Description Search Menu Code Description Search Menu

                        Supporting Evidence

                        Supporting evidence is defined as the components within the chart that were used to make up any suggested codes.

                        Supporting Evidence Box Supporting Evidence Box

                        The supporting details help the user understand why the engine suggested a code. Clicking on the down arrow next to the code will show the words/phrases used to create the code. This linkage will allow users to determine if the code is correct or if it tried to put two thoughts together together incorrectly.  

                        Editing Codes

                          To edit an existing or suggested code, left click on the code to bring up the encoder and Code Editor windows. If the user is set up with dual monitors, the encoder window can be moved to the second monitor to remain open as they work through validation of each the engine suggested codes. From the Code Editor window, users can update codes from the code drop-down menu, via Direct Entry, or Encoder. The POA indicator and code status (Admit, Principal, or Secondary) can also be updated in the Code Editor.

                          To change a code, place the curser in the drop-down box where the code to be changed is displayed. Code parts, such as the code extension, can be edited instead of removing the whole thing.

                          Code Editor Window Code Editor Window

                          Users have the option to minimize and restore the Code Editor window to continue viewing documents or other areas of the chart as they are working to complete additional details for the procedure code.

                          Code Editor IconDescription
                          Edit Icon Edit IconThis button launches the encoder for the existing code
                          Direct Entry Button Direct Entry ButtonAdds a new line for direct entry of additional codes
                          +Encoder Button +Encoder ButtonLaunches the encoder for selection of a code
                          OK Button OK ButtonSaves any changes for the current session of Code Editor
                          Cancel Button Cancel ButtonCloses window without saving changes from the current session of Code Editor
                          X Icon X IconDeletes the selected code from the chart
                          Minimize Editor Window Minimize Editor WindowMinimizes Code Editor window so that the main screen can be viewed
                          Restore Code Editor Button Restore Code Editor ButtonRestores the Code Editor window to full size for review and completion

                          Adding Procedure Code Data

                          Procedure Code Editor Procedure Code Editor

                          Procedure codes typically require additional information such as Physician and Date of Service for the procedure indicated along with procedure details. These fields are configured according to facility requirements and may look different per organization.

                          To enter in a date and physician to the procedure codes, right-click on the procedure code and then select Edit Procedure Info from the menu. After selecting a procedure code, the Code Editor window for the selected procedure code will open.

                          Add Procedure Date

                          To enter the procedure date, start entering the date in MM/DD/YYYY format or click on the calendar to select the procedure date.

                          Add Physician

                          To add the physician, click into the Add physician… drop-down menu. Start entering the name of the physician who completed the procedure, then select the physician’s name to complete this field. At least 3 characters of the physician’s last name are needed to view the drop-down listing. Continue entering characters of the physician’s last name to narrow the listing of physicians to choose from. 

                          Add Additional Procedure Details

                          Click on the ellipsis button under the Action heading.

                          Users have the option to minimize and restore the Code Editor window to continue viewing documents or other areas of the chart as they are working to complete additional details for the procedure code.

                          Minimize Editor Window Minimize Editor Window

                          Restore Code Editor Button Restore Code Editor Button

                          Mass Editing Codes

                          Mass editing of codes can be accessed by right clicking and selecting “Edit All Codes” on any of the code headers such as assigned diagnosis, assisted procedures, admit diagnosis.

                          Right Click Edit All Codes Right Click Edit All Codes

                          Each code has a checkbox, and each section has an ‘ALL’ checkbox. If the user clicks the All checkbox, a checkmark will appear in all codes under it. Any change made to one of those checked codes will be reflected in all other checked codes.

                          Edit All Codes Editor Edit All Codes Editor

                          The CPT code section has a Modifier column with a plus sign. Clicking the plus will open up the details window to add/change Modifier, plus other items that are included in that window. Clicking on the ellipsis symbol next to the Episode field will also open the details. The user can add up to 4 modifiers, unless they are using the Solventum™ Coding and Reimbursement System (CRS) then they will be able to add up to 5 modifiers.

                          PCS and CPT codes can be updated together. If there is a check mark, the change will be made to both the CPT and the Procedure Code. When both CPT and Procedure are selected together, only the Physician and Date can be changed.

                          Add Another Episode

                          Right clicking on a procedure allows the user to add another instance of the same procedure without needing to duplicate the effort of recoding the procedure.

                          Add Another Episode Add Another Episode

                          From Edit Procedure Info, you can also update additional information for the selection of procedure codes to add procedure date, add physician, and update additional details such as

                          • Anesthesiologist
                          • Anesthesia Type
                          • Tissue Sample
                          • Procedure Location
                          • Minutes)

                          These fields are configured according to facility requirements and may look different per organization.

                          Code Sequencing and Computing a DRG

                            Code Sequencing

                            There are multiple ways to re-sequence codes that have been validated and added to a chart. Dolbey’s recommendation is to re-sequence codes using the existing encoder.

                            Code Sequencing and Grouping with Encoder

                            After clicking the Compute button, all patient demographic information and validated codes are uploaded to the existing encoder.

                            Highlighted Compute Button Highlighted Compute Button

                            Use the encoder to re-sequence codes, complete grouping, and complete the encoder session to return the computed grouping and re-sequenced codes to Fusion CAC. From here you will be directed to the Code Summary page for review of Validation Results (and resolution or errors), Assigned Diagnosis Codes, and Assigned Procedure Codes.

                            Code Sequencing with CAC

                            If grouping and billing edits are not required, codes can be re-sequenced by dragging and dropping codes within the Assigned Codes Pane. Left click and hold the code to be re-sequenced, then move it to the new sequence location and release.

                            TruCode users have the option to perform an encoder calculation without automatically resequencing the assigned codes on an as-needed basis. In the dropdown menu on the right-side of the “Compute” button, the “Compute w/o Resequence” menu will perform the encoder computation but leave all diagnosis codes in their original position. This feature will enable sites to re-sequence codes above a certain position.

                            Compute without Resequence Compute without Resequence

                            Computing a DRG/Grouping

                            Use the Compute button to launch the encoder and proceed with confirmation of codes and sequencing to complete grouping and return the computed grouping and codes to Fusion CAC.

                            Principal DX Analysis

                            Use the Principal DX Analysis button to analyze all assigned codes on an inpatient chart to see what the DRG would be if the code was a principal diagnosis.

                            TruCode users have the option of Principal DX Analysis. In the dropdown menu on the right-side of the “Compute” button, the “Principal DX Analysis” menu.

                            Exiting a Chart

                              Once a user has finished working in an account, there are three ways of proceeding:

                              Cancel

                              Cancel Button Cancel Button

                              This action cancels all work in the chart and either returns the user to the Workgroup or autoloads the next account (if autoload is selected). Upon canceling, the user will be prompted if any unsaved changes exist.

                              Save

                              Save Button Save Button

                              This action saves the users work and either returns to the Workgroup or autoloads the next account (if autoload is selected).

                              Submit

                              Submit Button Submit Button

                              This action saves and sends the users work to the next phase of workflow, based on the organizations requirements. The user is either returned to the Workgroup or the next account via autoload (if autoload is selected).

                              Account Changed Warning Box

                              Upon taking one of the actions above, Fusion CAC may present a pop-up warning that reads, “Warning: Account Changed. The account has been changed by an upstream system” This warning appears when Fusion CAC has received a change to the account – usually a new document – between the time the account was opened and when the user chooses to Cancel, Save, or Submit. This warning allows the user to double check their work based on new information provided to Fusion CAC.

                              Warning: Account Changed Warning: Account Changed

                              Selecting Save and Apply will apply the incoming changes to the account and continue with the process the user had selected. Choosing Apply will apply the incoming changes to the account and return the user to the account to continue working.

                              Ending a Coding Session (Log Off)

                              To log out of the application, click on the down-arrow next to the user name in the top right corner of the software, then select ‘Log Out.’

                              Log Out Log Out

                              Account Screen

                              Account Action Bar

                              Account Action Bar Account Action Bar

                              The blue bar across the top of the screen is the Account Action Bar. This bar displays specific account information such as the account status,the account number, and the dates of service. Additonally, the Account Action Bar houses buttons allowing the user to compute, cancel, save, or submit the account as needed.

                              ButtonFunction
                              ComputeLaunches the encoder. This button should be used to COMPUTE the DRG or view encoder Edits.
                              CancelThis button will CANCEL any changes made to the account and return to the Assigned Accounts Listing for selection of a new account.
                              SaveThis button will SAVE any changes made to the account during the current session and return to the Assigned Accounts Listing for selection of a new account.
                              SubmitThe SUBMIT button will save and send any changes made to the account downstream based on facility requirements (usually billing or abstraction).

                              Below the Accounts Action Bar is the Banner Bar.

                              Banner Bar Banner Bar

                              Patient Information

                              Information in the banner bar may include:

                              • Admit details
                              • Discharge details
                              • Patient Name – Last Name, First Name & Middle Initial
                              • Gender
                              • Patinet Age and date of birth
                              • Medical Record Number (MRN)
                              Banner Bar Collapse/Expand

                              Clicking the patient’s name will collapse the banner bar to provide more vertical screen space. Clicking the patient’s name again will expand the banner bar and the information displayed.

                              DRG/APC

                              From the Banner Bar, you can toggle between demographic information and Primary DRG information by clicking on the Primary DRG hyperlink.

                              Primary Grouper Primary Grouper

                              The DRG view displays information available from the encoder for the computed DRG. The DRG or APC information will appear on the Banner Bar after codes have been assigned and DRG or APC computed and returned from the encoder.

                              Banner Bar - DRG/APC Banner Bar - DRG/APC

                              The Navigation tree sits above the Documents tree on the left-hand side of the Account Screen. The Navigation tree includes hyperlinks, or Viewers, to pages within the chart providing summary views of coding information, demographic information, as well as clinical documentation, workflow, and worksheets.

                              Any Navigation link highlighted in RED indicates action items required to finalize the chart or additional information available for review and reference.

                              +Add

                              Click on the +Add document button to add a document configured based on your user role.

                              Add Document Button Add Document Button

                              Available document types are configured with the operational/management team per organization.

                              Documents Tree

                              Document Tree Document Tree

                              The Documents tree includes a listing of all documents in a patient chart categorized by document type, as configured by the organization. It frames the Documents tree and is located on the left-hand side of the Account Screen. Icons next to document names in the Documents tree indicate document types. Each document in the Documents tree uses an icon or bolding to give information about the document.

                              IconMeaning
                              Pop Out Pop OutOpen document in new tab/window to allow continued access to the document while working in other areas of the chart.
                              Camera CameraImage/scanned document
                              Text Document Text DocumentText document
                              Bold Text Bold TextBold document titles indicate the document has not been viewed by the current user
                              Expand Code Suggestions Expand Code SuggestionsDocument with engine code suggestions
                              Black Bar White Text Black Bar White TextArchived documents that contain codes assigned by coders. This document will appear in the Documents pane with white text against a black background. Bookmarks on those documents will also be retained. Doing a Ctrl Click on the document header in the viewer will now show the archive date and time.

                              For convenience, users may want to pop out the document into a separate window to continue viewing it while accessing other areas of the chart.

                              Pop Out Pop Out

                              On the documents panel users will see a backward and a forward arrow. This will allow the user to move up and down through the documents listed in the panel.

                              Document Tree Arrows Document Tree Arrows

                              Document Codes

                              If the document has a plus sign to the left of the document name, there are codes within the document for review and validation. Click on the + next to a document to expand and show all codes found on the selected document.

                              Documented Codes Documented Codes

                              Clicking on a document will load the document in the document viewer. Clicking on a suggested code listed underneath the document will take you to highlighted text within the document that triggered the engine to make that code suggestion.

                              Suggested Document Code Suggested Document Code

                              Sort Documents

                              Sorting documents within the Documents tree is done by right-clicking on a document within the pane and selecting Sort, then Default, A-Z, Z-A, Date Ascending, or Date Descending.

                              Document Sort Menu Document Sort Menu

                              Users can reorganize the Documents tree by right clicking on the documents. Clicking on sort will allow users to sort the documents within the folders alphabetically or date. Documents can also be sorted chronologically which removes all folders and will organize all documents in chronological order.

                              Text Document Visual Differences

                              For text only documents, users can view the differences between two documents. Attempting to use images or manual documents will result in a red toast message advising the user to use a different document.

                              To see differences, the user must first open a document. Next, they will right click on another document in the document tree and select View Diff from the menu.

                              View Diff Right Click Menu View Diff Right Click Menu

                              This will bring up a new tab. The left side of the tab will show the older document, and the right side will show the newer document. The older document will show red highlights wherever something was changed, and the right side will show blue highlights for anything that was added.

                              New Tab For View Diff New Tab For View Diff

                              Document Differences Document Differences

                              Search Button

                              The Documents tree includes a Search button.

                              Document Search Document Search

                              Click on the Search button to open and enter the specific terms or phrase to be found within the documents in the chart. Upon clicking the search button, a floating window will now open and will fill with all results for the search word. Each result will display the name and date of the document along with a short portion of the sentence containing the word. The arrows allow you to move up and down through the list. This window stays active when using auto-load and will update with each account’s search results. The window can be minimized to a ‘Restore’ button on the Documents tree. Clicking on the Restore button will re-open the search window and will display the results.

                              Document Search Results Document Search Results

                              After pressing the Enter key, documents that include the searched term or phrase will be highlighted in RED.

                              Documents Highlighted Red Documents Highlighted Red

                              Click on the document highlighted in RED to view the searched term/phrase within the document. Each occurrence of the searched term/phrase will be highlighted in yellow.

                              Yellow Highlighted Search Term Yellow Highlighted Search Term

                              Expand Documents

                              Right-click on a document within the Documents pane and select Expand to visualize all documents within a documents folder or all suggested codes within each document. The default view is Expand Documents, with options to Collapse All. This allows the user to see the whole folder structure to see what options they have before they open a folder to view specific documents.

                              Expand Documents Expand Documents

                              The right click zoom will not be available for photo documents or pdf documents, since they have their own. Zoom will also not be available on worksheets. This feature is not compatible for Firefox users because Firefox does not support the style.

                              Read/Unread

                              When returning to a chart after new documents have been added, documents that have not previously been reviewed by the current user will appear in BOLD text. Documents that have been previously viewed will appear in normal text.

                              Documents Tree

                              Document Pane Document Pane

                              The Documents viewer is in the middle of the screen to display the documents, or viewer, clicked on within the document tree or Navigation tree.

                              On the left hand side of main header are backward and forward arrows. These arrows will allow users to move back and forth through documents that have been opened in the document the viewer screen.

                              When a user arrows back and forth, then clicks on another document, the user starts a new history for that option.

                              If there is a physician on a document, the name will show in the document viewer header, on the popout, and in the Ctrl+ click of the header.

                              Click on the pop out icon to open the selected document in a new window. The document opens in a new window for continued viewing while other areas of the chart are accessed during the current coding session.

                              Pop Out Pop Out

                              Zoom Documents

                              To adjust the level of zoom on a document, right-click within the document and click “Zoom”. This feature is available both on the main page and in popped out documents. When a user selects a zoom level, that level will be retained for all documents. The last zoom level used before sign out is the zoom level the user will get when they sign back in.

                              Document Zoom Document Zoom

                              Code Panes

                              Upon opening the account for initial coding review, all the engine suggested codes will be listed in the Unassigned pane on the right-hand side under the Assigned Codes pane. This allows the user to view each code with a link to the documentation and context of words and phrases which prompted the code suggestion. If the code has a + to the left of the code, there are codes within the document for review and validation.

                              Unassigned Codes

                              Unassigned Code Pane Unassigned Code Pane

                              There are 2 different symbols that may display next to the code(s). If there is not an icon next to the code, then the engine suggested these codes.

                              Code IconMeaning
                              Person Icon Person IconThe Person icon indicates a user manually entered this code and the system did not suggest it. Hovering over this icon will display the user who manually added it.
                              Exclamation Icon Exclamation IconThe exclamation mark icon indicates a user manually entered this code and the system suggested it. Clicking on the + next to the code then hovering over the person icon will display the user whom manually added it.

                              Codes are categorized by Diagnosis Codes, Procedure Codes, and then CPT® Codes.

                              Categorized Codes Categorized Codes

                              Alternatively, users can toggle between showing All Codes or just the Unassigned codes. Click on the Show All button to toggle between showing All Codes suggested by the engine on this account or Show Unassigned to view just the suggested codes pending validation to be moved to the Assigned Codes pane. If there is a code that appears on multiple document types and one of those is assigned, it will appear as BOLD in the “Show All” codes tree.

                              Show All Code Button Show All Code Button

                              Bold Code in Show All Bold Code in Show All

                              Users can right-click on a code, then either Assign or Edit the selected code.

                              Right Click Code Menu Right Click Code Menu

                              Selecting Edit will open a window to review the code, code description, set the POA indicator, and designate the code status as Admit, Principal or Secondary.

                              Code Edit Box Code Edit Box

                              Clicking OK after making these selections will then move the selected code to the Assigned Codes pane.

                              Assigned Code Pane Assigned Code Pane

                              Left-clicking on an Unassigned Code will open the relevant document in the center document viewer and highlight instances of the suggested code in yellow.

                              Left Click Unassigned Code Left Click Unassigned Code

                              Yellow Highlighted Code Yellow Highlighted Code

                              Continue reviewing all Unassigned Codes until all Assigned Codes have been validated with POA indicator and status.

                              Procedure Codes

                              Under Unassigned Diagnosis Codes are listed all unassigned Procedure Codes that have been suggested by the engine for validation. Left-clicking on the procedure code will take the user to the location within the document that prompted the code suggestion.

                              CPT Codes

                              Under Unassigned Procedure Codes are listed all unassigned CPT® Codes that have been suggested by the engine for validation. Left-clicking on the CPT® code will take you to the location within the document that prompted the code suggestion.

                              Hide CDI Added Codes

                              If a CDI adds codes to a document, they can be hidden by the Coder. When the Coder opens the account, a box in the Unassigned Codes Pane will be viewable. When checked, any code added to a document by a CDI will be hidden from the list.

                              Hide CDI Codes Check Box Hide CDI Codes Check Box

                              Code Comments

                              A comment can be added to a code on the Documents tree, or the Unassigned/Show All code tree.

                              Add/Edit Code Comment Add/Edit Code Comment

                              Add/Edit Code Comment Add/Edit Code Comment

                              Comments will show as a green flag in the code trees and on the code in the Documents tree. The comment is readable via a hover over; in the document itself, the flag can be clicked to open the comment. The comment can be added to or deleted by erasing the text. The comment will show in its own section in the Notes and Bookmarks viewer, and can be edited or deleted there.

                              Code Comment Flag Code Comment Flag

                              Code Comment Notes & Bookmarks Code Comment Notes & Bookmarks

                              Assigned Codes

                              The Assigned tree sits above the Unassigned tree on the right-hand side of the Account screen. The Assigned tree includes Admit Diagnosis, Principal and/or Visit Reasons Assigned Diagnoses, Principal and Secondary ICD-10 Procedures and Assigned CPT® Codes. Once a Coder validates a code from the document or right clicks and assigned a code from the unassigned codes menu, they will appear in the assigned codes pane. All codes on submit within this pane will go outbound to the abstraction or billing system. Codes can be removed from here by right-clicking and selecting unassign.

                              Codes falling below the 25th position will display in a light purple color.

                              Assigned Code Pane Assigned Code Pane

                              Admit Diagnosis

                              Listed first in the Assigned tree is the Admit Diagnosis. Users can right-click on any assigned diagnosis code and select Assign as Admit Diagnosis to add the code as the Admit Diagnosis. This right click menu will change depending on if the user clicks on diagnosis or procedures and if the user is in an inpatient vs outpatient chart.

                              Right Click Admit Diagnosis Right Click Admit Diagnosis

                              Assigned Diagnoses

                              Under Admit Diagnosis are all Assigned Diagnoses as they are validated and added via direct entry or using the encoder. There is no designation for principal, the code will display as the first listed under assigned diagnosis and will appear in bold text. Users will need to right click on desired code to add as an assigned principal code to see the bold text.

                              Assigned ICD-10 Procedures

                              Listed beneath Assigned Diagnoses are all Assigned ICD-10 Procedures as they are validated and added using the encoder.

                              Assigned CPT® Codes

                              Following the listed Assigned ICD-10 Procedures are the Assigned CPT® Codes.

                              Code Editor

                              An additional, quicker, way to open the Code Editor dialog via the right-click menu right from the assigned code tree. When clicking on the code from the Assigned code tree, user will edit only the code along with the position they have clicked on. However, if using the hot key from the Unassigned code tree will open a full code editor, since no action has been assigned yet to that code.

                              Right Click Edit Code Right Click Edit Code

                              Add Code Set Button

                              Users have the option of adding codes from a code set for standard procedures based on facility settings.

                              Add Code Set Add Code Set

                              Click on the Add Set button to open the Add code from code set window then click on the down arrow to review a menu of code sets.

                              Add Code From Code Set Add Code From Code Set

                              Click on the Code Set to view a listing of the codes for this code set.

                              Code Set Codes List Code Set Codes List

                              Click OK to simultaneously add all codes from this code set to the chart.

                              Subsections of Account Screen

                              CDI Reviews

                              Statistics can be tracked using the CDI Personal Dashboard. The CDI Dashboard includes data for Today and This Week only, and data is based on the current week. This also provides the CDI Specialist (CDS) with DRG and reconciliation data.

                              Initial Review

                              An initial review is a case that has never been reviewed by a CDS in Fusion CAC. A CDI review for inpatient charts must have a working DRG associated to be considered “reviewed”. If there is no DRG then the patient is considered new.

                              When a CDS creates a Baseline DRG (the first Working DRG), edits the account - causing the Working DRG to be cleared - and saves the account without computing a new Working DRG, the Baseline DRG creation also counts as an initial review.

                              The CDS will review the patient chart documentation and assign any codes necessary to calculate a working and/or baseline DRG. The CDS may see more codes than are necessary to calculate the DRG(s). Codes displayed on the chart are all the suggested diagnosis and procedures codes to provide a better picture of how coding would look at this chart. Any codes that are not needed for calculation of the DRG can be ignored.

                              Note

                              The system does not take the place of a Coder; this is the computer’s best guess at how Coders would have coded the chart

                              While reviewing, if the CDS has notes they wish to add to the chart they can add an ‘Initial CDI Worksheet’. The CDS worksheet can be customized per organizational needs and preferences. This section outlines the initial default worksheet prior to customization.

                              The CDI worksheet can include any notes that are needed such as:

                              • Medical History
                              • Labs/Procedures
                              • Medications
                              • Clinical Indicators

                              Creating a Query

                              If a physician query opportunity is identified during an intiail review or any subsequent reviews, the CDS should query the physician by sending an electronic query through the Physicians & Queries viewer in the Navigation tree.

                              Physicans & Queries Viewer Physicans & Queries Viewer

                              In the Physicians & Queries viewer, if the provider the user wants to query is listed on the page they can click on the BLUE ENVELOPE icon. If the provider is not listed, they should click on the +Add Query button. Either option will take the user to the same place; however selecting “+Add Query” requires the user to manually enter in the provider they wish to query.

                              Adding a Query Adding a Query

                              Query Components:

                              • Physician - Search for the desired physician using either the physican’s last name or physican number.
                              • Template - Select the appropriate query template from the dropdown list.
                              • Reason(s) - Choose the appropriate reason(s) for sending the query.
                              • Query Body - Fill out the selected query template as needed.
                              • Finalize - Once completed, click the Send to Physician button to send the query to the physician.
                              Info

                              Finalizing a query may differ between organizations. Be sure to check with your supervisor for best practices observed by your facility.

                              Follow-up

                              A CDI follow-up review is a case that has already been reviewed at least once by a CDS within Fusion CAC. A CDI review for inpatient charts must have a working DRG associated to be considered reviewed. If no DRG then the patient is considered new. A follow-up review is a subsequent review of the first. The default interval for review is every 24hrs until the patient is discharged; however, CDI staff can override this interval by changing the next review date on the Code Summary viewer.

                              Next Review Date Next Review Date

                              A CDI user can change the interval that the chart is routed back to a queue. Changing the calendar date in the “Next Review Date” field to a future date will tell the chart to not route back to the “Follow-up Review” queue until the current calendar date matches the date selected by the user. A CDS can complete as many follow-up reviews as needed.

                              Reconciliation

                              After discharge, the Coder will assign a Final DRG. How the organization has choosen to set up workflow will determine what happens after the Coder clicks the Submit button. Commonly, organizations choose for charts to flow into a reconciliation queue for a CDI team member to review if the last known working DRG and the final DRG do not match. When the Coder clicks on the Submit button, the chart is either:

                              • sent outbound and goes to the reconciliation queue. If the Coding DRG needs changed it will need to be resubmitted; OR
                              • is NOT sent outbound until CDI reviews the chart and reconciles.
                              Reconciliation Options

                              There are other options that can occur for reconciliation when a Coder submits an account; however, these are the two most common workflow paths.

                              In the event the DRGs do not match, the CDS will see an active Reconcile button instead of the usual grayed out Submit button.

                              Reconcile Button Reconcile Button

                              Clicking on the Reconcile button will bring up a window displaying the DRG difference.

                              DRG Difference DRG Difference

                              From here the CDS has 3 options:

                              • Cancel will take the user back to the account screen where they can make any coding adjustments or send a Physician Query.
                              • No will result in the account being closed and the CDS willbe taken back to the Account List. The user has not agreed with the code.
                              • Yes will result in the Working DRG being automatically changed to match the Final DRG. The account will close and the CDS will be taken back to the Account List.
                              Outpatient CDI

                              Organizations with users performing CDI on outpatient charts will meet with the Dolbey SME Team to set up outpatient specific workflow for their CDI team.

                              Receiving Credit for Reviews

                              Review TypeDetails
                              Initial ReviewFor Inpatient charts, this is the first time a Working DRG is computed and saved on a chart by a user with the role of CDI. For outpatient charts, this is the first time a chart is opened and saved by a user with the role of CDI.
                              Follow-up ReviewFor inpatient charts, each time a chart is accessed after the initial review, a Working DRG is calculated and saved by a user with the CDI role. However, each chart is only counted once per day. For outpatient charts, the count is recorded the first time a chart is opened and saved by a CDI user, with each chart also being counted only once per day.
                              ReconciliationReconciliation can only happen one (1) time per chart, so passing the account back and forth does not count.
                              Query CompletionThis is counted as a Subsequent or Follow-up Review.
                              Documentation ReviewsIf your site conducts different types of CDI reviews or needs to track management reporting in a customized way, there are reports available for documentation reviews that differ from our default tracking. You can use the Documentation Review Viewer to monitor reviews by topic. Other organizations have utilized this tool when their CDI team conducts utilization management-style reviews that do not fit the standard initial or follow-up review process.

                              Documentation Reviews

                              If an organization does different styles of CDI reviews, or want to track management reporting different than default tracking, the Documentation Reviews viewer can be used to track reviews by topic. Organizations have used this if the CDI team would like to do a utilization management type review and it doesn’t fit the typical initial or follow-up review.

                              By default, documentation reviews have a free form text field. Organizations can also create forms within the Worksheet Designer for each of these reviews.

                              Custom management reports are built into the application to report out on specific reviews. The CDI Management and CDI Personal Dashboard will also change to accommodate these custom reviews. Organizations that do not have documentation reviews enabled will have custom review content hidden as it is not appliable.

                              If an organization does not have documentation reviews enabled and they wish to track reviews differently, they should contact the Dolbey SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com) for a demonstration.

                              Subsections of CDI Reviews

                              Baseline DRG

                              The baseline DRG is used for reporting CDI program impact.

                              Baseline DRG Baseline DRG

                              Not Used By All Organizations

                              This reporting style may not be used by all organizations; however, the Fusion CAC system accommodates for it should an organization choose to use it. Users should speak with their management team if there are questions about how their facility tracks impact.

                              The Baseline DRG is defined as the DRG that would have been coded and billed if no CDI specialist reviewed the chart. Organizations can report the impact of a CDI specialist by measuring the difference between the Baseline DRG and the Final Billed DRG.

                              There are two seperate styles of impact that can be reported:

                              1. Chart Impact - postivie, negative, or neutral
                              2. Query Impact - can be positive regardless of chart impact

                              Fusion CAC measures impact on the last known Working and Final DRGs, readjusting as needed, to accurately track impact throughout the patient stay.

                              While Baseline DRG may seem like a simple concept, it can at times be difficult to determine. Here is an example:

                              1. A patient is admitted through the ER after presenting with undiagnosed abdominal pain, which would result in DRG 392 with an estimated reimbursed of $5,008 .
                              2. After further testing, it is revealed that the abdominal pain is the result of acute cholecystitis; this changes the DRG 446 (disorders of the biliary tract without complication) with an estimated reimbursement of $5,175 .
                              3. CDI documents an increased creatinine and a decreased glomerular filtration rate and queries the physician regarding the patient’s renal status. If the doctor provides proper documentation, it could be possible to assign a code indicating a complication for Stage IV chronic kidney disease, which would result in DRG 445 (disorders of the biliary tract with CC) with an estimated reimbursement of $7,464 .
                              4. The patient undergoes a laparoscopic cholecystectomy, changing the DRG to DRG 418 (laparoscopic cholecystectomy with CC) with an estimated reimbursement of $11,868 .
                              5. Next, the patient develops shortness of breath, and the consulting cardiologist documents acute-on-chronic congestive heart failure, changing the DRG to DRG 417 (laparoscopic cholecystectomy with MCC) with an estimated reimbursement of $17,478 .

                              In the example above, the Baselin DRG of DRG 392 , which is the first listed, would be readjusted to DRG 417 once the patient goes to surgery. If the patient had not undergone surgery the Baseline DRG would have remained DRG 392 . This would be the Chart Impact: Difference between Baseline DRG DRG 417 and Final DRG DRG 417 = $0.

                              Because CDI queries are counted separately, the CDI Impact would not be lost. This would be the Query Impact: Difference between DRG 446 and DRG 445 = $2,289

                              The above is how some organizations choose to do report impact.

                              Baseline DRG Reminder

                              To remind the user that the Baseline DRG may need to be updated, a feature can be enabled to display a message when a CDI user saves a chart.

                              Update Baseline DRG Prompt Update Baseline DRG Prompt

                              Dolbey recommeneds to only move the Baseline DRG when it needs adjusted, such as a patient going in for surgery. Constantly updating the Baseline DRG will result in little to no impact.

                              Subsections of Navigation Tree

                              Code Summary

                              Code Summary Code Summary

                              The Code Summary is the last pane to be reviewed prior to chart submission. This screen shows a summary of activity on the account and provides activity buttons to Claim Ownership, Show History, and Print Summary (if a printer is configured). This viewer also provides information on Current Owner, First Coder, Last Saver, and Last Submitter. Users can expand the width of the Code Summary pane by clicking on the arrow in the top right of the pane.

                              Code Summary Viewer Code Summary Viewer

                              Show History

                              The Show History button provides a timeline view of activity on the account along with an audit trail of account activity from point of admission to the current date. It includes a visual timeline and below the timeline there will be an audit trail of account activity.

                              Show History View Show History View

                              Upon opening Show History, users will see the entire history from a birds-eye view. The user has the option of using the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to expand or collapse the timeline. The Zoom Fit will bring the visual timeline back to its original collapsed grid. Hover over any of the event boxes and the contents will be displayed.

                              The legend can be found by clicking Show Legend button to let the user know what the colors represent without having to hover over them. When clicked, it will open the Legend and the button name will change to “Hide Legend”. Click again to close.

                              Click on an entry by date to view the changes that were made to the account on the date and time indicated.

                              Audit Trail Audit Trail

                              Review Validation Results

                              When the Code Summary link displays RED , there are validation errors on the chart that must be resolved prior to submission.

                              Red Code Summary Red Code Summary

                              Any errors preventing submission of the chart will be highlighted in the box under Validation Results on the Code Summary screen. Validation Results within the chart that should be reviewed and validated before the chart is finalized and submitted for billing.

                              ERROR results will display in RED . These are hard stops that will prevent the chart from being submitted. The Submit button will be grayed out until errors have been resolved, including pending reasons that have been assigned.

                              Warning results will display in YELLOW . These are reminders/suggestions for the user. Warnings do not need to be resolved before submitting the chart.

                              Code Summary Validation Results Code Summary Validation Results

                              Once all necessary validations results are resolved, the Code Summary link in the Navigation tree will return to black and users can hit the Submit button to complete the chart.

                              Pending Reasons

                              A list of Pending Reasons assigned to the account can be found within the Code Summary pane below Validation Results.

                              Pending Reasons Pending Reasons

                              Pending reasons are used when a chart cannot be completed or routed to another Workgroup. The number of pending reasons selected is unlimited. Pending reasons will be different for each facility based on system configuration specifications. Please contact your manager for definition and use of available pending reasons.

                              Pending Reasons can be added to the account by clicking on the drop-down menu and selecting the applicable Pending Reason. If the organization has selected to allow a physician to be tied to a pending reason, the user will be prompted to assign a physician to the pending reason, and will see an additional physician field in the list of pending reasons.

                              If physicians have been turned on for pending reasons, not all pending reasons may be tied to a physician. This option is set within the mapping configuration.

                              If a pending reason is added to an account, the Submit button will be grayed out and unavailable. Click on the Save button to save all changes and exit the chart. Charts with pending reasons will stay within the existing Workgroup until the Pending Reason is removed. Pending Reasons can also be deleted/removed from accounts by clicking on the “X” next to the Pending Reason to be removed.

                              Pending Reason Notes

                              On any account, an edit button will appear to the left of the pending reason. Clicking that button will drop down a note entry where the user can record a note. Pressing ENTER will record the note. Keep in mind that a note can be deleted by clicking a trash can symbol to its left. In Account Search, the “Pending Reasons” drill down will now include the “Note” field.

                              Pending Reason Note Pending Reason Note

                              Admit Diagnosis

                              The Admit Diagnosis code and description are displayed below any Validation Results and/or Pending Reasons.

                              Admit Diagnosis Admit Diagnosis

                              Visit Reasons

                              Listed beneath Admit Diagnosis are the Visit Reason codes in code sequence order. The list includes the Visit Reason code and description.

                              Visit Reasons Visit Reasons

                              Assigned Diagnosis Codes

                              The Assigned Diagnosis Codes are listed in code sequence order below Visit Reasons. The listing includes the diagnosis code, description, and POA assignment (Y/N).

                              Assigned Diagnoses Codes Assigned Diagnoses Codes

                              Assigned Procedure Codes

                              Listed beneath Assigned Diagnosis Codes are the Assigned Procedure Codes in code sequence order. The list includes the procedure code, description, Service Date, and Physician.

                              Assigned Procedure Code Assigned Procedure Code

                              Assigned CPT Codes

                              Listed beneath Assigned Procedure Codes are the Assigned CPT Codes in code sequence order. The list includes the CPT code, description, Service Date, and Physician.

                              Assigned CPT Code Assigned CPT Code

                              If a printer is configured for the computer, click on this button to print a copy of the abstract for this account.

                              Claim Ownership

                              Use the Claim Ownership feature based on the organization’s requirements and procedures. Consult your manager for more information on claiming ownership of a chart.

                              Final Code Summary

                              Final Code Summary Viewer Final Code Summary Viewer

                              The Final Code Summary will only be available once the facility Coder clicks the Submit button. This provides transparency between CDI and physician coding teams (if also using Fusion CAC) as to what was coded. When a submitted chart is open again, users will see a new viewer under the navigation menu called the Final Code Summary. This will display what the coders coded along with code status details and sequencing. This data is viewable only for the role of ‘CDI’.

                              Final Code Summary Final Code Summary

                              Clicking on the header will expand the selection to display the codes that were coded and DRG/APC, if applicable. Any codes with a plus (+) sign indicates the code has not been added to the account. The plus (+) sign does not indicate that the code needs to be added. It is for the user to quickly add the code if they determine it is needed using coding judgment and supporting documentation. If applicable, the code’s HCC designation will show the HCC number and its version.

                              Physician Coding Summary

                              The Physician Code Summary will display if the Physician Coders are also coding within Fusion CAC, and they submit the chart. This provides transparency between the facility and physician coding teams as to what was coded.

                              Physician Coding Summary Physician Coding Summary

                              Clicking on the header will expand the selection to display the codes that were coded. Any codes with a plus (+) sign indicates the code has not been added to the account. The plus (+) sign does not indicate that the code needs to be added. It is for the user to quickly add the code if they determine it is needed using coding judgment and supporting documentation.

                              Subsections of Code Summary

                              Quality Indicators

                              In the Code Summary Viewer at the bottom, you’ll find the Algorithm for Quality Indicators, which outlines the methodology used to identify Pediatric Quality Indicators (PDI), Patient Safety Indicators (PSI), Quality Measure PC-06, and Elixhauser Measures.

                              PSI Indicators

                              The PSI Module uses the PSI technical specification from Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality U.S. Department of Health and Human Services from www.qualityindicators.ahrq.gov.

                              PSI 06 in Banner Bar PSI 06 in Banner Bar

                              Fusion CAC leverages the codes from the assigned code tree, along with other relevant patient data, to determine whether specific quality measures are met. Fusion CAC provides an indicator on the banner bar when codes coupled with patient demographics meet a PSI guideline.

                              The PSI is reported in one of two fields CDI PSI Indicator or PSI Indicator. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting. When a PSI is applied to an account it will display in the algorithm section of the Code Summary viewer. A red tag will display next to the applied PSI for visibility.

                              PSI Algorithm Flag PSI Algorithm Flag

                              PDI Indicator

                              The PDI Module uses the PDI technical specification from Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality U.S. Department of Health and Human Services www.qualityindicators.ahrq.gov.

                              The Pediatric Quality Indicators (PDIs) focus on potentially preventable complications and iatrogenic events for pediatric patients treated in hospitals and on preventable hospitalizations among pediatric patients, considering the special characteristics of the pediatric population.

                              This PDI indicator displays in the banner bar under the compute button. The PDI is reported in one of two fields CDI PDI Indicator or PDI Indicator if identified. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting.

                              The algorithm for the PDI on if it applied or not is within the code summary pane.

                              If a code that causes an exclusion for a PSI or PDI occurs in the top 25 codes (or custom limit set by the organization) the PSI/PDI will show in the banner, with an asterisk next to it, to indicate the PSI was conditionally applied. The algorithm at the bottom of the Code Summary viewer will show the reason why.

                              PC-06 Indicator

                              The Quality Measure Module supports the PC06 measure and uses the Joint Commission technical specification https://manual.jointcommission.org/releases/TJC2018B/MIF0393.html.

                              PC-06 Banner Bar PC-06 Banner Bar

                              Fusion CAC uses the codes from the assigned code tree along with other patient data that meet each PC-06 guideline. Fusion CAC provides an indicator on the banner bar to a coder when codes coupled with patient demographics meet a PC-06 guideline. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting.

                              Elixhauser Comorbidity Measure Indicator

                              The Elixhauser Comorbidity Index is a method of categorizing comorbidities of patients based on the International Classification of Diseases (ICD) diagnosis codes. The indicator can be used for workflow and/or reporting.

                              Elixhauser Banner Bar Elixhauser Banner Bar

                              The algorithm to determine the Elixhauser measure can be found on the code summary at the bottom under the assigned codes. A table under the Elixhauser section of the Code Summary sheet will appear, showing weight totals for each item that triggers.

                              Elixhauser Alorithim Code Summary Elixhauser Alorithim Code Summary

                              Elixhauser Table Code Summary Elixhauser Table Code Summary

                              Account Information

                                Account Info Viewer Account Info Viewer

                                The Account Information pane summarizes patient demographic information (based on custom system configuration) with data captured for purposes of state and/or registry reporting. To update data fields in the Account information pane, click on the blue button and select the appropriate selection from the drop-down menu.

                                Account Information Viewer Account Information Viewer

                                Users can expand the width of the Code Summary pane by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the pane.

                                Account Information Banner Account Information Banner

                                Unspecified Code Edit Flag

                                On April 1, 2022 CMS made the Unspecified Code Edit effective. This new edit is triggered when a code from the unspecified code list is assigned by a coder. It is the provider’s responsibility to determine if a more specific code from that subcategory is available in the medical record documentation by a clinical provider.

                                If additional information to identify the laterality from the available medical record documentation by any other clinical provider is unable to be obtained, or there is documentation in the record indicating that the physician is clinically unable to determine the laterality because of the nature of the disease/condition, then the provider must enter that information into the remarks section. Specifically, the provider may enter “UNABLE TO DET LAT 1” to identify that they are unable to obtain additional information to specify laterality or they may enter “UNABLE TO DET LAT 2” to identify that the physician is clinically unable to determine laterality. If not entered, the claim will be returned.

                                Fusion CAC/CDI can support the addition of this field to your account information viewer and send the necessary information, known as the billing note, downstream if required. If this is something that you need, please reach out to the Dolbey SME Team at smeteam@dolbey.com.

                                Notes & Bookmarks

                                  The Notes & Bookmarks becomes visible in the center pane after clicking on the hyperlink from the Navigation tree. This tree presents a summary and chronological history of all notes and bookmarks added to an account. Users can expand the width of the Code Summary tree by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the tree.

                                  Notes & Bookmarks Viewer Notes & Bookmarks Viewer

                                  Notes

                                  Notes can be added to the patient chart by clicking on the +Add Note button within the Notes & Bookmarks viewer.

                                  +Add Note +Add Note

                                  When notes or bookmarks are applied to the chart, the Notes and Bookmarks link in the Navigation tree will turn red.

                                  Red Notes & Bookmarks Viewer Red Notes & Bookmarks Viewer

                                  Account Notes also have formatting options for text. Highlighting the text displays a pop-up with formatting options. A user can now select text in those areas and can change the styles of text.

                                  Formatting Notes & Bookmarks Formatting Notes & Bookmarks

                                  Users have the option to make notes publicly visible among all users by clicking on the checkbox. Even if an end user marks a note/bookmark as private, users with the role of administrator or manager can still see private comments. This feature allows for a manager to review a patient chart and if they do not want the existing public note to show in the account note, they can change an existing note to private without putting in a new note. Then they have to make it public, then switch it to private in order to have the account note blank.

                                  To keep your Comment box open while continuing to work on the chart, click on the Minimize Editor button. This will move a placeholder to the Accounts Action Bar.

                                  Minimize Editor Button Minimize Editor Button Restore Notes Editor Button Restore Notes Editor Button

                                  Bookmarks

                                  Users can add a bookmark to a document by highlighting the relevant word(s), phrase or location within the text and then right-clicking to open the Bookmark menu.

                                  Right Click to Add Bookmark Right Click to Add Bookmark

                                  From the Bookmark menu, select Bookmark to open the Note window to add your note for this bookmark. Add the note for your bookmark in the Note text box, then click the checkmark button to save the bookmark with your note for future reference. Bookmarks within documents will have the bookmark icon. To view bookmarks from within a document, click on the green icon to open and view the bookmark note.

                                  Green Bookmark Icon Green Bookmark Icon

                                  To review all bookmarks within a chart, go to Notes & Bookmarks in the Navigation tree. All of the bookmarks within the chart are listed in the Notes & Bookmarks viewer.

                                  Sample Notes & Bookmarks List Sample Notes & Bookmarks List

                                  The RED X button will delete the selected bookmark. The BLUE PENCIL button is used to edit a previously added bookmark. The GREEN PAPER button will jump to the location where the bookmark was created.

                                  Physicians & Queries

                                    Within this viewer users can add physicians and change the physician’s staff function, if necessary. They can also intiaiate the physician query process in this viewer. Users can expand the width of the Physicians & Queries pane by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the pane.

                                    Physicians & Queries Viewer Physicians & Queries Viewer

                                    Adding/Editing Physicians

                                    The are several fields that are pre-populated by the organization’s registration system including “Physician Number”, “Physician Name”, “Specialty” and “Staff Function”. Physicians can be added, changed, or removed if incorrect or missing. To add a physician, click on the +Add Physician button and begin typing in the physician’s last name to populate the correct physician. Choose the staff function that fits the chosen physician. If it is a consulting physician, also enter the consultation date.

                                    Adding a Physician Adding a Physician

                                    To remove a physician that either you added or was sent incorrectly from the registration system click on the RED X button to remove the physician.

                                    Querying a Physician

                                    Adding a Query

                                    There are two ways to add a query to a physician that is listed. The first is to click on the BLUE ENVELOPE icon next to the physician.

                                    Blue Query Envlope Blue Query Envlope

                                    The second way is to click on +Add Query. This would also be how to query a physician that is not already listed.

                                    When a physician is listed, the query will auto-populate the physician name. If a physician was not already listed, simply begin typing in the last name in the “Physician” field by entering two or more characters to find the correct physician name.

                                    If configured, users can see a cosigner field that allows assignment of a cosigner. The cosigner field is a field that can be sent in the outbound interface for the query. The receiving system can choose to use this process if the cosigner needs to receive the query after the main recipient answers, but before it gets returned to Fusion CAC. When a physician query is created, a new “Cosigner” physician dropdown appears below the existing “Physician” dropdown. Filling in this field is optional. When the query is saved as a draft or sent outbound, the cosigner field will be saved with the query and sent as an additional recipient. In the grid inside the Physicians & Queries, the user may also choose to add “Cosigner” as a visible column.

                                    Continue through the query build by selecting the query template.

                                    Selecting Query Template Selecting Query Template

                                    Write the query or fill out the template details as needed.

                                    Selecting a Query Reason Selecting a Query Reason

                                    Once completed, select from the reason dropdown why the query is being sent, and above that field, check the box if the query will affect final coding.

                                    Checkbox

                                    The checkbox “Check if physician’s answer affects DRG or Fincal Coding” will not be visible to providers.

                                    Query Impact Codes

                                    Before sending the query, the user will see a Compute button below the template name. When this is clicked, a Edit Query Impact Codes dialog box will open. Here, the user can add or remove assigned codes that should be associated with the DRG when they compute the Pre-DRG. Clicking on the Overwrite All Codes button will associate all of the assigned codes. Once the pre-query DRG is completed users will follow the standard process to send the query.

                                    Edit Query Impact Codes Edit Query Impact Codes

                                    Prior to closing a query, when the query has been responded to, open the query to complete it by clicking the RED ENVELOPE icon. Users will be able to compute a Post-DRG in order to capture impact. The previous DRG will auto-populate (unless the user added, deleted, or changed any codes, re-sequenced or changed the discharge disposition). If the Pre-DRG does not populate, it will need to be calculated again by clicking the Compute button next to the Pre-DRG. Users will now also see a Compute button for a Post-DRG below the template name. Users can minimize the query as needed to add, delete, or otherwise change any codes before clicking compute.

                                    Sending a Query

                                    Click Send to Physician to complete the query and send it, or click Save Draft if the query is not ready to be sent. If the query is saved as a draft, a draft query section will appear that is separate from sent or closed queries. If a user has at least one draft, but no sent queries, the total drafts count on their personal dashboard will display as zero.

                                    Query Drafts Query Drafts

                                    Complete Query Options Complete Query Options

                                    Alternatively, for organizations who do not have a physician query interface AND do not create a physician query until a response is received, a query can be created and not sent. When enabled, a physician query will show a Continue button in place of Send. Clicking Continue will refresh the query to open the physician response fields so that the query can then be closed.

                                    Editing a Sent Query

                                    The physician the query was orginally sent to can be changed after sending the query by opening the query and clicking Change Physician. A dropdown will appear so the user can select the reason the physician needs to be changed.

                                    Change Physician Menu Change Physician Menu

                                    Closing a Query

                                    To close a query—whether to review a response and update the outcome or to cancel it—simply click the RED ENVELOPE icon. If a response from the provider is available, clicking the icon will open the query to display it.

                                    Query Envelope Icon Query Envelope Icon

                                    The user can then choose how to close the query using options in the screenshot below.

                                    Close Query Options Close Query Options

                                    Query Response Show Diff

                                    The physician query has a “Show Diff” toggle above physician query responses in the Physician Query dialog. Clicking it will show additional text in blue highlighting and deleted text in red highlighting. When the diff is shown, the button changes to “Hide Diff,” which when clicked will show the unaltered response.

                                    Query Show Diff Query Show Diff

                                    Diff Logic

                                    If your organization has an interface that imports the physicians response, the diff logic may report false positives and false negatives, like changes from double quotes to single quotes or the addition/deletion of blank lines.

                                    Once a query is opened and responded (or the user is recording the response on behalf of the physician), the responding physician and the date/time of the response can be editied. If the organization is manually closing queries, this information ensures that the management reports reflect accurate turnaround times.

                                    Record Query Response Record Query Response

                                    If an organization has choosen to collect shift reasons, a dialog box will appear upon selecting an outcome for the query.

                                    Documenting Query Shift Reasons

                                    Shift reasons can be categorized as either automatic or manual. If manual shift reasons are enabled, users will encounter a dialog box after closing a query.

                                    Query Shift Reasons Query Shift Reasons

                                    This dialog box will display the pre and post-query DRG (if applicable) along with options for shift reasons. These shift reasons can be chosen by the end user to explain the rationale behind the change in the DRG. It is important to note that changes in the DRG might occur for reasons unrelated to the query outcome. Please be aware that the shift reasons dialog is customizable, so each organization may offer different options than what is shown in the screenshot.

                                    Automatic vs Manual Shift Reasons

                                    The dialog box will only display if shift reasons are set to manual. Organizations looking to enable or disable the dialog box, should contact CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com)

                                    Placeholder Queries

                                    Some organizaitions create a physcian query within Fusion CAC and then copy and paste it into a different system rather then send them through an interface. Dolbey refers to this as a place holder query for reporting and transparencey. A feature can be enabled so that text entered into fields on the place holder query will no longer display in bold. To activate this option, please contact CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com).

                                    Quick Complete

                                    The Quick Complete query feature is designed for sites that create placeholder queries ONLY. This feature allows a user to log a query without sending it externally. The user can assign a provider, template, reason, and both pre and post-DRG information along with closing the query with shift reasons all in one session. This quick complete feature aims to streamline these actions into a single, integrated process. This feature is optional and needs to be turned on. Contact CAC Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com) to enable this feature.

                                    Once enabled, create a new physician query, and notice a new Quick Complete button in the footer. Clicking it will automatically save the query and reopen it with “Record Physician Response” expanded to record a physician’s response. The Quick Complete button only appears on new queries, including queries opened from drafts. It will not appear if a query is edited or if a query’s physician is changed.

                                    Query Status

                                    The status of the query will display in the actions column on the query grid. The following are status options:

                                    StatusDescription
                                    OpenThis query has been sent, but not yet responded to by the provider.
                                    AnsweredThis query has been sent and has received a response, but has yet to be closed by the end user.
                                    CanceledThis query has been canceled by the end user. The status column will display the reason for the cancellation.
                                    ClosedThis query has been closed by the end user. The status column will display the outcome of the query.
                                    Canceling Queries

                                    Not all organizations support canceling physician queries. Redirected queries may still need to be canceled within the EHR. Consult your supervisor to learn if additional steps need to be taken to cancel a query.

                                    Per User Settings

                                    This grid will display key details about the query, including the creator, recipient, creation date, reply status, and response timestamp. Columns can be reordered based on user preference. When moving around the columns in the Physician Queries grid and then clicking the Save Layout button, the columns and order will be saved for the Queries grid for all future accounts for that user. Any other user will see the default layout. Next to the Save Layout button is a Reset Filters button, this will take any custom layout and change it back to the default fields.

                                    If the organization chooses to use signatures when sending queries, automatic signatures can be addended to the query. Signatures can be editied within each user’s profile.

                                    Query Signature Sample Query Signature Sample

                                    Note

                                    Please refer to your supervisor for details as each organization has custom query templates and additional details surrounding queries.

                                    Calculating Query Impact

                                    Query Impact = Pre-Query Working DRG Weight – Post-Query Working DRG Weight

                                    Query impact is calculated using the Working DRG calculated within the same session in which the physician query was created. Once the physician replies to the query, the CDI will close the query. During the session the query was closed, the system will then capture the Working DRG that was calculated. A session is closed by saving the chart.

                                    If a physician query shifts the assigned DRG, diagnosis, procedures, CC/MCC/HAC/ROM/SOI or Quality metrics, the shift reason is automatically calculated by the system. The shift reason is captured by looking at the difference between the last Working DRG and the current Working DRG as well as the Code Sets difference in the most current Working DRG. Code sets will be automatically captured for reporting.

                                    Charges or Transactions

                                      If an interface for account charges or transactions is set up during configuration, the Charges screen shows a listing of charges on the account.

                                      Charges or Transactions Viewer Charges or Transactions Viewer

                                      There are activity buttons to “Save Layout” or expand the Charges viewing pane. Users can expand the width of the Charges pane to view more available columns by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the pane. This pane also provides information on CPT Codes, Descriptions, Modifiers, Quantity, Service Date, Revenue Code, and Total Price.

                                      Open Charges Viewer Open Charges Viewer

                                      Column Settings

                                      Each column within the Charges grid has menu options to Pin Column, Autosize, and Reset Columns. Click on the Menu icon to view the drop-down listing. After making column setting selections, click on the button to retain column settings for future coding sessions.

                                      Three Line Column Settings Three Line Column Settings

                                      Column SettingDefinition
                                      Pin ColumnAllows users to select the column and then pin it to the RIGHT or LEFT side of the assigned accounts grid. This function works similarly to freezing columns in Excel.
                                      Autosize This ColumnSelect this option to change the column width to automatically size the width of the column for contents of the cells in this column.
                                      Autosize All ColumnsTo quickly autosize all columns in the assigned accounts grid, click the Autosize All Columns button.
                                      Reset ColumnsClick on this option to Reset Columns to their default column width.

                                      Adding Modifiers to Charges

                                      Click on the BLUE PENCIL button to open the Modifiers window. Start entering the digits for the modifier to bring up the drop-down listing of available modifiers and their descriptions to select the appropriate modifier. After the modifier is in the window, click on the OK button to save the selected modifier. Continue this process to add all applicable modifiers to charges in the Charges pane. The user can add up to four (4) modifiers unless they are using the Solventum CRS encoder, then they will be able to add up to five (5) modifiers.

                                      Charge Modifier Charge Modifier

                                      Editing Hard Charge Details (Physician Coder)

                                      A user with the role of a Physician Coder can now add assigned diagnosis codes along with physicians and CPT Modifier codes to hard charges listed in the Charges viewer. When a Physician Coder opens the Charges viewer, new columns with edit buttons will be seen.

                                      Physician Coder Role Physician Coder Role

                                      Physician Coder Edit Charge Options Physician Coder Edit Charge Options

                                      Clicking on the BLUE PENCIL button in the Diagnosis column will open a code field, which when dropped down, will list all assigned diagnosis codes on the account. The Physician Coder can then select which diagnosis code(s) to attach to the hard charge. The top most diagnosis code of a charge is designated the “principal” diagnosis. If you add or remove codes, whatever code is listed first is the principal – the principal code on a charge can be different than the principal code on the account. If a user moves the codes around, the top code will always become the primary code.

                                      Physician Coder Add Dx Box Physician Coder Add Dx Box

                                      Clicking on the BLUE PENCIL button in the Physician column will open a physician field to allow the selection of a physician. This is the same for the Physician Modifiers column which will open a modifier window allowing modifiers to be selected. When launching the encoder, the physician coder’s modifiers will be sent instead of the final modifiers in the Charges viewer.

                                      Physician Coder Add Phsyician Box Physician Coder Add Phsyician Box

                                      Clicking on the BLUE PENCIL button in the Quantity column will open a field to allow the end user to enter a new value for the quantity of the charge. The dialog will perform validation so that invalid quantities are not recorded such as letters, blanks, and/or a zero quantity. Negative quantities are permitted. Decimal quantities are permitted.

                                      Note

                                      The organization must have physician coding enabled to use this feature, if you do not have physician coding please contact your account representative for more information.

                                      Assigning a Pending Reason per Charge (Single Path & Physician Coder)

                                      Users that have a Physician Coder or Single Path Coder role will have the ability to place a pending reason per charge on the physician charges.

                                      • If a charge is removed, then the pending reason would be removed.
                                      • If a charge is updated, then the pending reason would not change.

                                      Caution Column (TruCode)

                                      A Caution Column is avaialble for sites that use the TruCode Encoder to the Charges and Transactions viewers. This column will indicate a flag if TruCode reports an edit on a charge on an outpatient account.

                                      TruCode Caution Column TruCode Caution Column

                                      Medications

                                      Medications Viewer Medications Viewer

                                      A Medication Administration Record (MAR, or eMAR for electronic versions), commonly referred to as a drug chart, is the report that serves as a legal record of the drugs administered to a patient at a facility by a health care professional. The MAR is a part of a patient’s permanent record on their medical chart. The health care professional signs off on the record at the time that the drug or device is administered.

                                      Open Medications Viewer Open Medications Viewer

                                      Activity Buttons

                                      There are activity buttons to “Save Layout” or expand the Medications viewing pane. Users can expand the width of the Medications pane to view more available columns by clicking on the arrow in the top right corner of the pane. This pane also provides columns that can be sorted or filtered based on the user’s need. The columns include the medication Group, Category, Medication name, Dosage, Route, Rx#, Start Date/Time, and End Date/Time.

                                      Medications Activity Buttons Medications Activity Buttons

                                      Column Settings

                                      Each column within the Medications grid has menu options to Pin Column, Autosize, and Reset Columns. Click on the Menu icon to view the drop-down listing. After making column setting selections, click on the button to retain column settings for future coding sessions.

                                      Column SettingDefinition
                                      Pin ColumnAllows users to select the column and then pin it to the RIGHT or LEFT side of the assigned accounts grid. This function works similarly to freezing columns in Excel.
                                      Autosize This ColumnSelect this option to change the column width to automatically size the width of the column for contents of the cells in this column.
                                      Autosize All ColumnsTo quickly autosize all columns in the assigned accounts grid, click the Autosize All Columns button.
                                      Reset ColumnsClick on this option to Reset Columns to their default column width.

                                      Working CDI History

                                      The working CDI History can be used to look at historical working DRG calculations. The Coders cannot edit this information, but they can review the data.

                                      Working CDI History Working CDI History

                                      The first calculated DRG will assume the Baseline DRG role, which is used to calculate the CDI impact on a chart. Users wishing to change the Baseline DRG, can click the Set Baseline DRG button.

                                      Users can also indicate which Working DRGs are an alternative DRG for reconciliation. By checking the box next to each DRG, users are approving it as an alternative DRG to auto-reconcile the chart. Users can manually add an additional DRG if it does not appear in the list.

                                      Clicking on the arrow prior to the DRG information will expand the selection to display the codes that went into the DRG and the sequence. Any codes with a plus sign indicates the code has not been added to the account. The plus sign does not indicate that the codes need to be added. It simply allows the user to quickly add the code if they have determined it is vaild using their coding judgment and supporting documentation. If applicable, the code’s HCC designation will show the HCC number and its version.

                                      Working CDI History Working CDI History

                                      DRG Reconciliation

                                        The DRG Reconciliation viewer displays the differences between the last known Working DRG and the Final DRG coded by a Coder, with symbols indicating the discrepancies. The viewer updates in real time and does not store historical information. If the Coder updates the DRG, the changes will reflect immediately in the DRG Reconciliation viewer. For historical data, please refer to reports.

                                        DRG Reconciliation Viewer DRG Reconciliation Viewer

                                        Impact Queries

                                          Impact Queries Viewer Impact Queries Viewer

                                          The Impact Queries Viewer is designed exclusively for CDI teams. This tool may not be necessary for all customers, but it serves a specific purpose for those who use it. CDI teams often issue multiple queries per account and require a way to track the impact of each query distinctly. This viewer allows teams to determine whether the impact of a query accounts for the total change in the account or if it shares this impact with other queries.

                                          Purpose and Use

                                          • Impact Tracking: Allows CDI specialists to clearly see the account impact of each query, from the initial baseline to the final assessment after all queries.
                                          • Impact Assignment: Within each query, CDI specialists can assign a percentage to quantify the impact of the query on the account. This percentage is then translated into a dollar value attributed to the query.

                                          This feature helps prevent double-counting and overestimating the impact that CDI claims on an account. After coding is completed, CDI specialists must revisit and reassess the account to determine and specify the precise impact each query had.

                                          By using the Impact Queries Viewer, CDI teams can ensure more accurate and accountable query impact assessments, contributing to more precise documentation and reimbursement processes.

                                          To access the Impact Queries Viewer, the user must have a CDI role AND there must be at least one (1) query sent by a CDI user.

                                          Displayed at the top of the viewer is the Baseline, Working and Final DRG. The account impact equals Final DRG – Baseline DRG.

                                          Impact Queries Viewer Impact Queries Viewer

                                          Clicking on the View Codes button in either the Baseline or Working DRG boxes will take the user to the Working CDI History viewer to allow the user to view how the CDS developed their DRG at different stages. Clicking on the View Codes button in the Final DRG box will take the user to the Final Code Summary viewer to show the user how the account was final coded by the Coder.

                                          To review the query that was assigned, click on the BLUE ENVELOPE . This will open the query in a dialouge box.

                                          To assign the impact of the query, the user will enter a percentage in the “Assigned Impact %” field. This will autocalculate the following fileds:

                                          • Total Impact %
                                          • Remaining Impact $
                                          • Remaining Impact Weight
                                          • Assigned Impact &
                                          • Assigned Impact Wgt.
                                          FieldDefinition
                                          Total Impact %This the % of the impact assigned to queries it can never exceed 100% but, it is allowed to be less than 100%. The impact % must be assigned in the assigned impact % field per each query.
                                          Remaining Impact $This is the account impact dollars left to divy out. Think about this like a bank account if the account impact between the baseline and final DRG is $10,000 it should start off with $10,000 then if we assign 50% of the account impact to the first query then it would reduce to $5k and so on.
                                          Remaining Impact WeightThis is the same concept as Remaining Impact $ we have a field for Remaining impact weight since some sites do not have reimbursement dollars in the system.
                                          Assigned Impact %This is the % of the account impact you are assigning per query.
                                          Assigned Impact $This is the $ of the account impact you are assigning per query based upon the % you placed in the assigned impact % field that pulls from the remaining impact $.
                                          Assigned Impact Wgt.This is the weight of the account impact you are assigning per query based upon the % you placed in the assigned impact % field that pulls from the remaining impact weight.
                                          TemplateThis is the query template you are assigning impact to. Only queries issues by CDI will display here.
                                          Query ReasonThis is the query reason to assigned to the query template.
                                          Pre-DrgThis is the pre-DRG assigned to the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                                          Post-DrgThis is the post-DRG assigned to the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                                          Shift ReasonsThis is the shift reasons assigned to the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                                          StatusThis is the status of the query, to change this click on the blue envelop icon to the right of assigned impact.
                                          Impact Assignment

                                          For guidelines on how to quantify the impact of a query, or queries, contact your supervisor for any internal policies and procedures.

                                          Readmission Viewer

                                          If the patient has been readmitted within 30 days of an admission date, the patient demographic data will display below from the previous stay. This is not just for inpatient readmissions, but also includes if the patient was ever seen for any patient type within the last 30 days. The 30 days look back can also be expanded to 45 or 90 days. If the previous stay was also coded, you will see the Code Summary display below. If a check mark appears next to the code, this indicates the code on the previous stay was also suggested for the current stay.

                                          Readmission Summary Viewer Readmission Summary Viewer

                                          If an account has multiple re-admissions, they will all show if they are in the default time of 30 days. A setting can be changed to allow the number of days to be customized. If the setting is updated to an amount other than 30, that new amount will show in the Re-admission Viewer AND in the red tag in the banner. Please contact Support (cacsupport@dolbey.com) to have the setting configured, if desired.

                                          Denial Management

                                            Denials Viewer Denials Viewer

                                            The denial management viewer displays on submitted accounts. Clicking on this viewer presents a form with several fields to be filled in when an account has been denied payment.

                                            Denial management tracking involves monitoring cases where a patient’s submitted billing chart is rejected by the payer. Various reasons, such as medical necessity, code, or DRG assignment, could lead to these denials. This tool is designed to comprehensively record the specifics related to denial management and tracking. It is capable of documenting multiple denials for each chart, with the ability to log and categorize them for the purpose of tracking, managing workflows, and generating reports.

                                            Adding a Denial

                                            To add a denial, select “Denial Management” in the Navigation tree. This option will only be available if the account has been submitted. This will open up the Denial Management viewer in the center of the screen to then click on the +Add Denial button.

                                            Denial Management Viewer Denial Management Viewer

                                            Once a denial has been added, a form with multiple fileds will need to be filled in by the user working the denial. The fields are made up of various drop-down options, dates, and financial information about the denial.

                                            Denial Management Worksheet Denial Management Worksheet

                                            The Root Cause field has a drop down of options where one or more options can be selected.

                                            Denial Management Root Cause Denial Management Root Cause

                                            There can also be multiple Code(s) in Question entered.

                                            Denial Management Codes in Question Denial Management Codes in Question

                                            Options in the fields above with dropdown lists can be customized per organization by editing the appropriate mapping table in Mapping Configuration. These fields include the following:

                                            • DenialType
                                            • DenialStatus
                                            • DenialOutcome
                                            • DenialAppealRoute
                                            • DenialReason
                                            • DenialCodeChangeNeeded
                                            • DenialDRGChangeNeeded
                                            • DenialRootCauses

                                            Each field (except Comments) can be added to Grid Column Configuration for display in Account Search. These fields can also be used in workflow if necessary.

                                            As needed, mutiple denial sheets can be created for a single account. To do this, click on the +Add Denial button. As more denials are added to an account, they will be listed at the top of the Denial Management viewer. The denial a user is working on will be indicated in green bubble.

                                            Multiple Denails Multiple Denails

                                            Appealing a Denial

                                            If a denial needs to be appealed, there are separate fileds to track when those appeals were sent, how it was sent, and the outcome of the appeal. A user can track the strength of the appeal as low, medium, and high based on their organizations preferences. Additionally, a comment section has been added for any free text the user would like to enter.

                                            Appealing a Denial Appealing a Denial

                                            Deleting a Denial

                                            If a denial needs to be deleted from the account, click on the denial the user wishes to remove, which will bee in the green bubble, then click on the xDelete Denial button.

                                            Delete Denial Delete Denial

                                            Reporting Denials

                                            For reporting within Account Search, a Denials drilldown is available. This drilldown only reports on the first denial on the account.

                                            Documentation Reviews

                                              The Documentation Review module is designed to provide flexibility for sites that prefer a different style of Clinical Documentation Improvement (CDI) reviews or need alternative methods for tracking management reporting. This module allows users to customize and monitor documentation reviews by various topics and types. It is particularly useful when reviews do not fit the conventional workflows of initial, follow-up, or reconciliation reviews, such as for utilization management purposes.

                                              Why Use Documentation Review?

                                              Sites sometimes choose to add documentation reviews because reporting productivity is more complex than tracking initial, follow-up, or reconciliation reviews. The module’s flexibility allows CDI teams to capture and track additional review types that are essential for comprehensive reporting but might not fit within the standard review categories.

                                              Standard Review Definitions

                                              Before exploring the customization capabilities of the Documentation Review module, it is essential to understand the baseline definitions of reviews in a CDI system:

                                              • Review: A review is defined as a save on an account by a CDI Specialist (CDS) on a single day. For inpatient accounts, the specialist must also calculate a Working DRG. Multiple saves on the same account by the same CDS within the same day count as one (1) review. In other words, there can be only one review per account per CDS per day.

                                              • Initial Review: The first review saved on an account by a CDs. For inpatient accounts, the CDS must calculate a Working DRG for it to count as an initial review. There can only be one initial review per account.

                                              • Follow-up Review: A review saved on an account by either the same or a different CDS on a different day, following the initial review. No account will have more than one follow-up review per day for the same CDSS.

                                              Example:

                                              Day 1: CDI Specialist “A” saves an inpatient account with a Working DRG.

                                              Day 1: CDI Specialist “A” updates the Working DRG (does not count as a separate review since it is within the same day).

                                              Day 2: CDI Specialist “B” saves the account with the same Working DRG (counts as a follow-up review).

                                              Day 3: CDI Specialist “A” saves the account with the same Working DRG.

                                              Day 3: CDI Specialist “B” saves the account with a different Working DRG (counts as a follow-up review).

                                              In this scenario, there is one initial review and three follow-up reviews. The change made by CDI Specialist “A” on Day 1 does not count as a follow-up because it occurred on the same day as the initial review.

                                              Customizing Documentation Reviews

                                              By default, the Documentation Review module includes a free-form text field, allowing CDI specialists to capture detailed information about their reviews. However, sites can further customize the module by creating forms specific to different review types, enabling more structured and consistent data entry.

                                              Creating Custom Forms

                                              Using the Worksheet Designer, sites can create tailored forms for different documentation review types. These forms can help standardize data collection and improve reporting accuracy. Some common examples of custom review types include:

                                              • MD Advisor Response
                                              • Query Opportunity Reply
                                              • Coder Question Response
                                              • Post-Discharge Follow-up
                                              • Pre-Bill Review
                                              • Retrospective Query Needed
                                              • Query Review
                                              • Case Management Review
                                              • Quality Improvement (QI) Review
                                              • Utilization Review
                                              • Types of Reviews

                                              Custom reviews allow CDI teams to track reviews that fall outside of traditional CDI workflows. These reviews can be particularly useful for:

                                              • Post-Discharge and Pre-Bill Reviews: These reviews focus on ensuring documentation accuracy and completeness before the billing process, helping to reduce denials and optimize revenue capture.
                                              • Query and Retrospective Reviews: These reviews allow CDI teams to capture follow-up actions taken after initial queries or when additional queries are required after discharge outside of a traditional review.
                                              • Utilization Management Reviews: These reviews may not fit into the standard initial or follow-up workflows but are crucial for tracking how effectively hospital resources are used and ensuring proper reimbursement.
                                              • Reporting and Productivity: Tracking productivity for non-standard reviews (such as utilization reviews or post-discharge follow-ups) can be more complex than traditional reviews. Customizing the module allows sites to generate more meaningful reports that reflect the variety of documentation efforts made by CDI teams.

                                              In the CDI Summary section of the dashboard, counts of reviews are displayed, such as “In the Last 7 Days,” excluding the current day. This allows for real-time tracking of CDI efforts and helps managers assess team productivity.

                                              CDI Productivity by Review Type

                                              This report shows productivity by each user by custom documentation review type.

                                              CDI Detailed by Review

                                              This report provides details about the custom documentation review type of CDI reviews performed by account.

                                              Unlike the CDI Worksheet which is located under the Document tree, the Documentation Review section is found on the Navigation tree within the user interface. This distinction allows easy access to reviews that are separate from the standard CDI workflows and documents.

                                              Steps to Access Documentation Review

                                              1. Locate the Navigation tree: Once logged into the system, navigate to the left-hand side of the screen where the Navigation tree is displayed.
                                              2. Select Documentation Reviews: Under the Navigation tree, will be the Documentation Reviews section. Click on it to open the review interface.

                                              Documentation Reviews Documentation Reviews

                                              1. Adding a New Review: Upon opening the Documentation Reviews viewer, you will have the option to +Add Review. This allows the user to select the specific review type from the list of available choices. The choices available are customized per organization and can include any form types an organization has designed.

                                              Documentation Reviews Documentation Reviews

                                              Documentation Reviews Documentation Reviews

                                              Previous HCC

                                                Previous HCCs Previous HCCs

                                                The Previous HCC Overview will display the HCC history to show for both the current and prior year. When HCCs are enabled, these will display grouped by HCC category and by code — showing the account number and MRN for the visits each were associated to.

                                                Previous HCC Viewer Previous HCC Viewer

                                                If a check mark appears next to the HCC category and code, this indicates the code on the previous stay was also suggested for the current stay. If the patient chart currently being coded has codes that result in HCCs once they are added to the assigned code tree the code will display with an ‘H’ next to the code. By hovering over the ‘H’ icon, the HCC category will display.

                                                It is recommended to turn HCCs on for all patient types to capture a more complete picture of HCCs. HCCs will be collected once HCCs have been enabled in the mapping table. To enable HCCs, check the box in the Category mapping table.

                                                Enable HCCs in Mapping Table Enable HCCs in Mapping Table

                                                As a reminder, this will not capture data prior to turning this feature on in the mapping table.

                                                Transfer Account Codes

                                                Transfer Account Codes Transfer Account Codes

                                                Transfer codes can be used to help combine account codes into one encounter. Most sites leverage the ADT to combine the actual account; however, there are times it is necessary to copy codes from one encounter to another.

                                                Transfer Account Codes Viewer Transfer Account Codes Viewer

                                                If a patient has two different accounts and the coder has already done work on each of the accounts, the Transfer Codes feature can be an easy way to post codes when you’re within one account and want to search in another account, and have the ability to open that other account and see the codes.

                                                To transfer codes either select the Account# radio button and type in the account number, or select the MRN radio button where the MRN of the opened account will populate. Once either of those numbers are entered, click the Load Account button. When the account or MRN is loaded, use the check boxes to the left of the codes to choose which codes will transfer. Once the needed codes are checked, click on the Transfer Codes button and the codes you selected will be added to the “Assigned” codes tree that is on the current account.

                                                Add-On Modules and Viewers

                                                Optional Viewers

                                                The following viewers are part of optional add-on modules and may not be used at all organizations. If you are unsure if a module is relevant to your organization, please contact your supervisor. Organizations looking for more information on these modules should reach out to the Dolbey SME team via email (smeteam@dolbey.com).

                                                  Audit Module

                                                  Audit Viewer Audit Viewer

                                                  The audit viewer displays when the account is opened by a user in the role of Auditor. The audit viewer can be popped out onto a separate screen, allowing the auditor to have a screen for reviewing the chart. By selecting “Show All” codes in the unassigned code tree, the auditor is taken to the documents/documentation supporting that code. This will help streamline the audit process.

                                                  An account can have one or more audits added to it. By clicking +Add Audit a new, blank audit worksheet will be created. These worksheets are numbered and displayed at the top of the audit viewer, along with a date stamp indicating when each worksheet was opened. The worksheet currently being viewed will be highlighted with a green background.

                                                  Data in the audit viewer is only intended for coder education and administrative staff to score how the coder is doing in a report card. The auditor will need to add the coder of record so that the coder of record, any auditor, or other user role that has been given access can view the audit worksheets.

                                                  The audit module allows for the role of an auditor within the application. The role of an “Auditor” has the same privileges as a “Coder” when it comes to account editing. More details on audit functionality can be found in the Audit User Guide.

                                                  Discrete Values (Viewer)

                                                  This feature may not be supported by your organization’s EHR vendor. The Discrete Values viewer show trending data or data that has values. The most common examples of discrete values are lab values and vital signs. The viewer can be popped out into another window by clicking on a little square with an arrow pointing to the right in the navigation tree next to the viewer name.

                                                  Discrecte Values Viewer Discrecte Values Viewer

                                                  An older style of discrete data can be displayed in a Discrete Values viewer. Tabs across the top of the screen display the categories of data. This displays each of the types of discrete data elements, which may vary by organization.

                                                  The Discrete Values viewer has a Filter by Month box, listing the months that contain values. Selecting a month will highlight all the corresponding dates in the Filter by Date box. The resulting values will show in the viewing pane. The Normal and Abnormal tabs both have this functionality and are filtered separately.

                                                  Discrete Values with a grey header are within normal limits. Each organization sends what is the reference point to determine what is normal and what is abnormal. If a header is display in red, it is considered abnormal by the organization. In addition to the header color, users can tell if the value is out of normal limits as there is a flag that indicates if the value is low vs. high.

                                                  Flowsheet (Viewer)

                                                  Flowsheet Viewer Flowsheet Viewer

                                                  This feature may not be supported by your organization’s EHR vendor. The Flowsheet viewer shows information found in nursing documentation such as nursing or respiratory assessments, skin assessments, intake and outake data, etc. The viewer can be popped out into another window by clicking on a little square with an arrow pointing to the right in the navigation tree next to the viewer name.

                                                  The Flowsheet viewer is the most recent style of discrete data viewer. This viewer is organized much like a spreadsheet. Depending on configuration, users may see major categories on the left-hand side of the spreadsheet (there are many different options as each site is a little different.). Upon clicking on one of these items users will be presented with a grid to the right. That grid will have multiple columns, the first column being name. Hovering over the column name will display three little lines. Clicking on them, will allow the user to filter in order to narrow down the data. If any of those names appear in red that means that at least one of the data elements are outside of the normal limits if there is a range.

                                                  Flowsheet Data Flowsheet Data

                                                  To the right of the name, if applicable, is a reference column. This reference column will indicate if the value is within normal limits. This is data that the EHR system has sent to Fusion CAC. If the reference column is available, then to the right of that is a flag column. A checkmark in that field also means the value is out of the normal range. This column can also be filtered if the user wants to look at everything outside of the normal limits. Next to that field is a date and time column. The user may see multiple dates and times depending on how the data is organized and how frequently it is documented. If a discrete value on the Flowsheet viewer has a specimen, it will show as a beaker symbol in the Results column. Hovering over the symbol will provide the name and site of the specimen.

                                                  Flowsheet Beaker Flowsheet Beaker

                                                  Right clicking in the Major Category column will show a menu allowing the user to expand or collapse all categories. That configuration will be saved for all accounts that have the Flowsheet Viewer, per user role. Note that if a user collapses/uncollapses a major category in the pop-out, it will not be seen on the main page until the user moves to a different viewer and back.

                                                  Right Click Expand or Collapse Right Click Expand or Collapse

                                                  ER E/M Module

                                                  ER E/M Coding Viewer ER E/M Coding Viewer

                                                  The ER E/M viewer is part of an add-on module for any chart with a “Is Emergency” flag within the account properties. If this module is turned on, any “Is Emergency” chart will have the “E/M Coding Worksheet” in the Navigation menu. There are several sections to the E/M Coding worksheet including: E/M No Charge, E/M Level, Trauma, Critical Care, Medications, and Additional Charging. More details on ER E/M functionality can be found in the Administrative User Guide.

                                                  Completing the ER E/M Worksheet

                                                  ER Date and Provider

                                                  The first step in completing this worksheet is filling in the ER Date and the ER Physician fields. Once these are completed, the rest of the worksheet will populate.

                                                  ER Date and Provider Fields ER Date and Provider Fields

                                                  No Charge

                                                  If a patient fits the criteria for “no charges” (for example, a registration error), all other fields in the worksheet go away because there is nothing else to be done from an ER charging perspective. However, other selections from the list will populate the fields accordingly.

                                                  No Charge Dropdown No Charge Dropdown

                                                  Critical Care

                                                  Select appropriate answers to “Is Criteria Met” and “Is Time Determined.” To enter the duration, click on the clock icon.

                                                  Critical Care Fields Critical Care Fields

                                                  Enter start date/time and click on the Update button for the minutes to display.

                                                  Duration Helper Duration Helper

                                                  If there were multiple spans of time for critical care, click on +Add and enter any additional durations of time. The system will add up on the minutes and display once “Update” has been selected.

                                                  Duration Helper +Add Time Duration Helper +Add Time

                                                  E/M Levels Matrix

                                                  The E/M Levels martix is configured per organization. This matirx will allow the user to check what interventions were completed during the ER visit. Once an intervention is selected from one of the columns, that becomes the minimal level and all columns before that will gray out. As the remaining sections are completed, users may see the level advance.

                                                  E/M Levels E/M Levels

                                                  Trauma

                                                  If the case was a trauma, make the appropriate selection from the dropdown menu (pre-hospital notification, post-hospital notification, consult).

                                                  E/M Trauma Options E/M Trauma Options

                                                  Medication Administration Qty

                                                  Based on the selection, additional fields or boxes will populate. Complete the quantities, add modifiers, and any notes. Modifier fields are available in the appropriate sections of the worksheet. The user can add up to four (4) modifiers unless they are using the Solventum CRS encoder, then they will be able to add up to five (5) modifiers. The “Notes” field is available for the coder to track things such as medications.

                                                  Medication Administration Qty Medication Administration Qty

                                                  Medication Administration Time/Modifier

                                                  Update this section with the duration of each medication as needed, any modifier(s), and notes. The user can add up to four (4) modifiers unless they are using the Solventum CRS encoder, then they will be able to add up to five (5) modifiers.

                                                  Medication Administration Time/Modifier Medication Administration Time/Modifier

                                                  If there are multiple infusions (for example, one infusion started in left arm and one infusion stated in the right arm), click on the Action button to create another row to be completed including appropriate modifiers for each infusion.

                                                  Action Button Action Button

                                                  Additional Charges

                                                  Add any additional charges. Much like the matrix, the additional charges section will be configured per each organization to include the necessary charges each organization captures.

                                                  Add Additional Charges Add Additional Charges

                                                  Charges for Assigned CPT Codes

                                                  If the Coder adds a CPT code (otherwise referred to as “soft code”), the codes will appear in this section of the E/M Coding worksheet. It must then be determined by the Coder, or Charger, if the procedure added by the Coder occurred in the ER and should be charged. If so, the fields should be completed. If the procedure is determined to have occurred elsewhere, leave the 0 in the field.

                                                  Charges for Assigned CPT Codes Charges for Assigned CPT Codes

                                                  Note

                                                  When there is a CPT coded added that has no CDM charge, it won’t appear in this section; only those that have a CDM.

                                                  E/M Summary

                                                  Once the Additional Charges section is complete, users will see the Summary which details the E/M level and other charges with the corresponding CDM Code.

                                                  E/M Summary E/M Summary

                                                  When all charging is complete and the charges are ready to be submitted, check the “Send Charges Outbound” checkbox and click on the Save button in the banner bar. This action sends charges out and the account will automatically route to a coder worklist so the rest of the coding that is not charge-related can be completed.

                                                  If the charges cannot be completed for some reason (missing trauma documentation), the box should NOT be checked, and instead, a pending reason should be assigned on the Code Summary. Once a pending reason has been added, click on the Save button in the banner bar.

                                                  Banner Bar Action Buttons Banner Bar Action Buttons

                                                  If the “Send Charges Outbound” checkbox is NOT checked, the Coder will get a warning that ER charges are missing and will not be able to submit the account upon completion of coding. The Coder, in this case, would attach a pending reason to send the account back to the user applying charges to check the box. The account then goes back to the Coder to submit the account for final billing. This workflow ensures that the Coder does not submit an account unless all ER charges have been completed.

                                                  E/M History

                                                  This section displays the history of charges submitted. Click to expand for details.

                                                  E/M History E/M History

                                                  Physician Coding/Single Path

                                                  Physician Coders differ from hospital coders in that they will usually work for a doctor who specializes in a specific type of medicine. As a result, they typically code for just that specialty. These coders will only deal with a subset of the ICD10 code set. Within the CAC system, functionality is built to allow a Physician Coder to code charts just like hospital coding staff. The Single Path coding role allows the user to code an account as a final coder and a physician coder simultaneously. When a Single Path user opens up the detail on a CPT code, they will see two separate fields for modifiers, and they can enter modifiers for both.

                                                  A Single Path role can also be modified from the Profile drop-down menu under the user name at the top of the Account Detail screen, provided that another changeable profile role, such as CDI, Coder, or Physician Coder, is available on the User Profile. When adding or editing modifiers in the Charges viewer, the Single Path user sees the Coder’s version of the viewer, so what is added will be viewable to both a Coder and a Single Path user. The Physician Coder charges viewers are different and viewable only to them.

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alerts

                                                  The software has a feature called CDI/Clinical Alerts which are automated messages generated by the software that can be used to prioritize CDI workflow. CDI/Clinical Alerts are used to detect potential inaccuracies, inconsistencies, and/or discrepancies in clinical documentation. These Alerts help CDI teams to prioritize the charts based on potential query opportunities available.

                                                  The software provides real-time Alerts when potential query opportunities are identified. Which will then allow CDI staff to prioritize charts based upon those potential opportunities.

                                                  What is a CDI/Clinical Alerts Topic?

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alert Topics are the diagnosis that is being targeted by the Alert. The Topic encompasses a broad range of diagnoses that address various issues being targeted by the system. These diagnoses then branch out into more specific types known as Alerts. These are based on the type of issue being targeted.

                                                  What is a CDI/Clinical Alerts Message?

                                                  The Alert message is a specific message that details what is missing, incomplete, and/or inaccurate documentation that is missing with the Diagnosis/Topic that is being targeted.

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alerts Types

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alerts branch out into four (4) types of Alerts.

                                                  Alert TypeDescription
                                                  No Documentation but, Clinical IndicatorsThis Alert type is when the provider did not document a diagnosis but, there are clinical indicators that support “Possible Diagnosis”.
                                                  Documentation but lack of Clinical IndicatorsThis is where the provider documented the diagnosis but there is a lack of clinical indicators that support the diagnosis. For example, Sepsis was documented by the provider but it’s not supported by clinical indicators. This Alert helps to ensure that diagnoses are audit proof, ensuring that the supporting evidence requiered for a proper diagnsosis validation is present within the patient’s chart.
                                                  Documentation but Not Fully SpecifiedThis is where the provider documented a diagnosis but, it was not documented to its full specificity. For example, Heart Failure Unspecified: the diagnosis is not documented to the full specificity. This CDI/Clinical Alert is helpful for ensuring that diagnoses are documented to their full extent in order to combat denials.
                                                  Conflicting DiagnosisThis alert detects instances where two or more fully specified versions of a diagnosis may conflict. For example, if one provider documents Acute Diastolic Heart Failure in one section of a patient’s record, while another records Acute on Chronic Systolic Heart Failure elsewhere, the alert flags the discrepancy. By ensuring diagnostic consistency, this alert helps maintain an accurate clinical picture, enabling all care providers to deliver the best possible care.

                                                  Setting up CDI/Clinical Alerts

                                                  In order to set up CDI/Clinical Alerts, reach out to the SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com) for assistance. There is a module that must be deployed in conjunction with set up within the workflow management editor.

                                                  Viewing CDI/Clinical Alerts

                                                  To access and view CDI/Clinical Alerts within a patient’s chart, locate them in the Navigation tree and click on the “CDI/Clinical Alerts” viewer. This will make the viewer display in the middle of the screen. There is also a box with an arrow next to “CDI/Clinical Alerts” that will allow the user to pop-out the viewer in a different tab. Doing this gives the user the ability to move the tab to a different monitor, if desired.

                                                  CDI in Nav Tree CDI in Nav Tree

                                                  In the CDI/Clinical Alerts viewer there are two headings in the dark blue bars which include:

                                                  1. Active Alerts; and
                                                  2. Completed Alerts

                                                  Clicking on either of these headings will expand or collapse the section. Within each section are the actual Alerts that were triggered for the current account that is opened.

                                                  Navigating the CDI/Clinical Alerts Viewer Navigating the CDI/Clinical Alerts Viewer

                                                  Active Alerts

                                                  The section “Active Alerts” are Alerts that the system found and no action has been taken to resolve them.

                                                  There are three parts to an Alerts title to observe:

                                                  1. Alert Topic - This corresponds to a diagnosis.
                                                  2. CDI/Clinical Alerts Message - This is a brief description of what the system found to be missing, incomplete, or possibly inaccurate and corresponds to the Topic.
                                                  3. Date and Time - This is the date and time when the system found evidence for the alert to trigger. This information is tracked for reporting to see how quickly the system is triggering an alert.

                                                  Alert Title Alert Title

                                                  Completed Alerts

                                                  The section “Completed Alerts” are Alerts that have been closed in one of the following manners:

                                                  1. Auto-Resolve by the system
                                                  2. CDS initiates a query
                                                  3. CDS clicks on the RED X next to the Alert

                                                  When choosing to close the Alert, the CDS will be presented with a “Close Alert” dialouge box to select why they are closing the alert.

                                                  Close Alert Close Alert

                                                  The date and time stamp in the title of the Alert will indicate when the Alert was closed, and by whom. The title will also display GREEN text that depicts how the Alert was closed.

                                                  Close Alert Reason Close Alert Reason

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alerts Notes

                                                  Next to each of the Alerts in either the Active or Completed Alerts section is a paper icon.

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alert Paper Icon CDI/Clinical Alert Paper Icon

                                                  When clicked, this icon will launch a notes page. This can be used by a CDS to leave a note if they do not feel the Alert currently has enough evidence to build a query, but also shouldn’t be ruled out as it could trend towards the diangosis alerted. Once a note is typed in it will leave the date and time as well as the CDS name so if another CDS enters the chart, they will be able to clearly see who chose to monitor the Alert at this time and why.

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alert Notes CDI/Clinical Alert Notes

                                                  Upon adding the note the paper icon will turn RED , notifying the next user that is reviewing the CDI Alerts that there is a note present on the Alert.

                                                  CDI/Clnical Alert Red Note CDI/Clnical Alert Red Note

                                                  Once a note is typed in it will leave the date and time as well as the CDS name so if another CDS enters the chart, they will be able to clearly see who chose to monitor the Alert at this time and why. Upon adding the note the paper icon will turn red, notifying the next user that is reviewing the CDI/Clinical Alerts that there is a note present on the Alert.

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alerts Editor Function

                                                  Adjacent to the Alert message, there is a pencil icon. Clicking on it will open an editor, enabling the CDS to rearrange and customize the placement of evidence using a drag-and-drop functionality. This feature empowers CDI professionals to organize their items in a personalized manner, aligning with their specific querying requirements.

                                                  CDI Alert Pencil Icon CDI Alert Pencil Icon

                                                  Reviewing Clinical Evidence

                                                  Each CDI/Clinical Alert contains clinical evidence extracted from the patient’s chart. There are four different types of evidence that can be extracted.

                                                  1. Words and phrases within documentation such as signs and symptoms, and medications.
                                                  2. Value abstractions from the documentation such as vital signs or laboratory findings within physical documents.
                                                  3. Code abstractions from documenation.
                                                  4. Discrete values such as laboratory studies and vital signs found in the flowsheets, medications from the medication viewer and other flowsheet data.

                                                  The evidence in the Alerts are linked to documents within the patient’s chart, via a blue hyperlink, ensuring that the CDS directly connects to the relevant document associated with the Alert. This feature is especially useful for referencing specific documents that may be crucial to a particular Alert. The evidence is systematically categorized into sections such as Laboratory Studies, Clinical Evidence, Vital Signs, and Intake & Output Data.

                                                  Reviewing Clinical Evidence Reviewing Clinical Evidence

                                                  After the abstraction process, there will be words or phrases in quotes—these represent the terms the engine identified within the documentation or values. If the data is derived from a document, the document name and date are displayed; if obtained from flowsheets, the result date and time are shown.

                                                  For medication discrete abstraction, key details such as the medication name, dosage, route, and administration date and time are presented, ensuring essential context is provided.

                                                  When selecting evidence with a document type and date, a hyperlink will direct the CDS to the exact location in the document where the abstraction was found, with the relevant text highlighted in yellow. Additionally, there will bes green highlights within the documentation, marking abstractions specific to CDI/Clinical Alerts. These function similarly to code abstractions but are tailored for CDI rules.

                                                  Hovering over a green-highlighted abstraction will display which Alert the evidence is associated with, especially when multiple Alerts are present.

                                                  Reviewing Clinical Evidence Document Reviewing Clinical Evidence Document

                                                  When clicking on a hyperlinked evidence that is followed by result date and time, indicating a discrete value abstracted from the flowsheets, it will automatically take the CDS to the corresponding location in the flowsheets and highlight the respective row.

                                                  Reviewing Clinical Evidence Discrete Value Reviewing Clinical Evidence Discrete Value

                                                  Another noteworthy capability within Clinical Evidence is the ease with which a CDS can incorporate additional evidence. While reviewing documentation and flowsheets, if a CDS identifies items deemed crucial for inclusion in the CDI/Clinical Alerts as supporting evidence for a query, they can effortlessly highlight words or phrases in a document, up to a maximum of 1000 characters, and perform a right-click. This action triggers a menu presenting various options, including one that reads “Copy to CDI Alert.” Clicking on this option reveals a pop-out menu displaying available Alerts to which the evidence can be added.

                                                  Copy to CDI Alert Copy to CDI Alert

                                                  Upon selecting the desired Alert, the system opens the Evidence Editor, allowing the CDS to specify where the evidence should be attached. If the CDS clicks on existing evidence, the new evidence will be attached below it. Once the evidence is copied over, the system provides details such as the evidence itself, the name of the document, and the date. For Laboratory Studies, it includes the result date and time.

                                                  Added Alert Added Alert

                                                  After incorporating the evidence into the designated alert, any highlighted evidence will be displayed in the document in purple, accompanied by the phrase “MANUALLY_ADDED” in green at the end. This informs the user that the evidence was added manually. Similar to other evidence, hovering over the green-highlighted section will provide information about the CDI/Clinical Alert to which the item was applied.

                                                  Added Alert in Documents Added Alert in Documents

                                                  When going back to the CDI/Clinical Alerts viewer there will be check boxes present next to the evidence which serves two purposes. First, when a query is initiated, any evidence marked with a check mark will be automatically copied to the clipboard allowing the CDS to conveniently paste the evidence into the query. This copying action occurs when the clicking on the BLUE ENVELOPE icon.

                                                  Second, unchecking any of the clinical evidence will put a strike through the text and it will prevent it from being copied over. Additionally, any unchecked evidence will be reported back to Dolbey’s Clinical Team if an Alert is closed due to it having invalid clinical indicator, insuffiecient clinical evidence, or documentation is already present.

                                                  Unchecking Evidence Unchecking Evidence

                                                  How to initiate a Query

                                                  In the right hand corner of the Alert there is see a BLUE ENVELOPE icon next to a RED X icon. Clicking on the BLUE ENVELOPE will launch the CDS into a query template.

                                                  Query

                                                  A query template will autoload for the specific Alert that is being queried. These templates can be set by the management staff specific to each organziation.

                                                  The evidence previously examined on the Alerts viewer page can now be effortlessly incorporated into the query. When the query button is pressed, the selected evidence will be automatically copied to the clipboard. This can be pasted using a simple process, either by pressing the “ctrl” and “v” keys, the standard Windows keyboard shortcut for copying, or by performing a right-click and choosing the paste option. After the query is submitted, the corresponding CDI/Clinical Alert will transition from the Active Alerts section to the Closed Alerts section.

                                                  Once that query has been submitted that CDI/Clinical Alert will move from the Active Alerts section down to the Closed Alerts section.

                                                  Unchecking Evidence and Creating Query Unchecking Evidence and Creating Query

                                                  Autoresolve

                                                  The Alerts have the ability to autoresolve themselves if documentation comes in that would satisfy the Alert. Once an Alert is Autoresolved it will move to the Completed Alert section. This will ensure that only Alerts that require attention are active for the CDS.

                                                  Closing Alerts without Querying

                                                  If it is determined that an Alert can be closed without initiating a query, a CDS can click on the RED X and the CDS will be presented with a “Close Alert” dialouge box to select why they are closing the alert (see the Completed Alerts section of this page).

                                                  Subsections of CDI/Clinical Alerts

                                                  Chart Prioritization

                                                  Once CDI/Clinical Alerts are enabled, within the workgroup there is a column named “Criteria Group”. The name of this field may vary depending on the organization’s setup. If it is not visible, review Grid Column Configuration to determine whether it is displayed or labeled differently.

                                                  These criteria groups identify potential query opportunities based on algorithmic analysis. Once the algorithms meet the necessary criteria to trigger a CDI Alert, the alert is matched within the workflow. If it is the only alert present, it will be displayed as the “Criteria Group.”

                                                  Workgroup Prioritization Workgroup Prioritization

                                                  In cases where multiple Alerts match during workflow execution, the displayed Criteria Group name will be determined by the hierarchical list. This hierarchical list is established by an organization’s management team using the workflow management editor. The management team has the ability to rearrange the order of the Alerts based on priority and initiatives at each organization, ensuring the Alerts are organized from highest to lowest priority.

                                                  There is also a second grid column called “Active Matched Criteria Groups”. This column will display the actual number of active CDI/Clinical Alerts on each account, regardless of the Alert being matched to something first as it goes thorugh workflow list. This column represents the total number of “potential” query opportunities in a patient chart.

                                                  The columns “Criteria Group” and “Active Matched Criteria Groups” are available for prioritizing the worklist. Of these, “Active Matched Criteria Groups” is particularly valuable, as it helps focus efforts on charts that require the most significant improvement. Utilizing this column allows for more effective resource allocation and workflow prioritization.

                                                  It’s important to note that the only Alerts that affect the Priority Criteria Group name and number of Active Matched Criteria Groups are Active Alerts. Once an Alert is closed it will not be used in these columns for prioritization. This helps to make sure charts with the most priority are getting in front of the CDI Team. As Alerts are closed these numbers will be updated in real time.

                                                  Subsections of Release Notes

                                                  V2.23 (Dec 2021)

                                                  V2.23.8021 Released 12/17/21

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-3581 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow customers with encoder other than TruCode to see Partial Code Suggestions

                                                  TruCode encoder users today can receive benefits when the documenation is not fully available for engine to suggest a complete code. In this case,a partial code is suggested We have added the ability for non-TruCode encoder users to also enjoy this feature but, TruCode must be liscensed to enable this feature. Please contact your sale representative for pricing to enable.

                                                  CACTWO-3892 (Enhancement)

                                                  New section added to Administrative Dashboard

                                                  New sections have been added to the Administrative Dashboard: Coding Trends, Top 10 Queries, and Top 10 Final DRGs. Top 10 Final DRGs has a dropdown to allow viewing for current month, prior month and last 6 months.

                                                  The Top 10 Queries in Last 30 days pane has a dropdown to allow viewing of all accounts, inpatient accounts or outpatient accounts.

                                                  The Coding Trends per Day has a dropdown to allow viewing of Average Daily Codedand Average TAT to Submit. This pane does not have any grid links associated with it and is intended for informational purposes only. Coding Trends are based on the last day work was submitted and does not include today’s work. The last workday will show in the pane’s title bar.

                                                  CACTWO-4386 (Enhancement)

                                                  New Engine Outcome per CDI report

                                                  The Engine Outcome per CDI report shows the total codes that the engine is suggesting, and what CDI is using vs. what CDI is manually adding compared to the coder’s Final Codes. This report should tell the level of manual effort per CDI of those codes that are being used for final code assignment by coders. It will show total assigned codes by CDI broken down by code set along with how many codes were suggested by the engine versus added by text documents and non-text documents in addition to those that were added in duplicate. Duplicate is defined as codes that both the engine and the end-user added and are notated with an exclamation mark (!) in account detail. There is also a column to indicate the codes manually added and how many the coder assigned for final code assignment. This report card should be used as an educational opportunity to show possible improvements for the end-user and/or the code suggestions. This report is recommended to be used in conjunction with an audit. This is not retroactive enhancement.

                                                  CDI Feature

                                                  You must be using Fusion CAC for CDI to view this report.

                                                  CACTWO-4412 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Workgroup Type classifications to each worklist to more accurately depict the Coding Chart Status Report

                                                  In Workflow Management, each workgroup now has a new “WorkGroup Type” field. This field is optional, but sites can designate a type for each workgroup. The purpose of doing so is for current and future reporting. For this feature, setting a workgroup to a type besides “Coding” will exclude the account’s time assigned to it in the “Coding Chart Status Report”.

                                                  Workflow groups can now be excluded from the Coding Chart Status Report if a group other than ‘Coding’ is selected. A new dropdown will appear in the criteria pane of the workgroup:

                                                  The Workgroup Type dropdown is based on a new Mapping Configuration that the user can add to if desired. A default set is included with the upgrade. If a user sets this field as anything other than ‘Coding’ or leaves it blank, any account with this workflow assignment will no longer count in the ‘From Coding Worklist’ column. In this Inpatient case, the account was assigned to workflow that had a Workgroup Type of Audit for 1 day, then was moved to a workflow with a Workgroup Type of Coding for another day before submission. Only the Coding time is showing in the column.

                                                  CACTWO-4601 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add 3 New columns to grid columns

                                                  Three new fields are available in grid columns for use in account search: Time Spent by CDI, Time Spent by Coding and Time Spent by First Coder. This change is not retroactive.

                                                  CACTWO-4654 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create Dashboards for Auditors

                                                  Two additional Dashboards have been created: Audit Personal Dashboard and Audit Management Dashboard. With the addition of these dashboards, the original buttons used for selecting the dashboard have been changed.The user can either click on the down arrow and drop down to see all the dashboards, or the user can click the left and right arrows to page through each dashboard choice.

                                                  CACTWO-4691 (Enhancement)

                                                  Work Available list added to all Dashboards

                                                  A panel on the dashboards that shows all work available will now show on all dashboards. The worklist starts with a ‘You’ assignment, then continues down through all workflow groups in order to how they appear in your users profile. The columns in this panel are the assigned groups, total charts in each group, oldest discharge date and total charges.

                                                  Work Available Numbers Are Not Clickable

                                                  Most dashboard numbers in blue are clickable, but on the work available queues they are not since some users are in force autoload mode and therefore this view is simply a view of whats available in each.

                                                  CACTWO-4692 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Forced Autoload user to view the new Work Available Queue

                                                  A new privilege called ‘View Work Available Queue in Forced Autoload has been added to Role Management. When this option is enabled, a Forced Autoload user will now see the Work Available Queue on the dashboard.

                                                  Note

                                                  This feature requires Roles Management to be enabled.

                                                  CACTWO-4698 (Enhancement)

                                                  Scheduled Workflow for Auditors

                                                  A new workflow category of Audit has been created which allows its assigned workgroups to be scheduled to run. When a criteria is created for the workgroup, a new link for adding an audit will be shown under the criteria name:

                                                  Clicking on the new link will bring up a schedule box, allowing that criteria to only be run daily, weekly or monthly.

                                                  Limits for the audit are assigned at the bottom. The first box is a max amount of accounts to pull into the workgroup, the second box is a percentage of matched accounts to be pulled in. If both boxes are filled out, the max amount will override the percentage. This can also be set to be run per group, selected from the groups drop down field.

                                                  CACTWO-4700 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add assigned workgroup to top of Audit Worksheet

                                                  The top of the Audit worksheet will now display any Workgroup assignments for that account.

                                                  CACTWO-4704 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add buttons to move through document tree

                                                  New backward and forward arrows have been added to the top of the Documents panel. This will allow the user to move up and down through the documents listed in the panel.

                                                  CACTWO-4705 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add buttons to move through viewer panel

                                                  New backward and forward arrows now appear to the left in the blue bar of the document viewer. This will allow users to move back and forth through documents that have been opened into the viewer screen. Note that when a user arrows back and forth, then clicks on another document, the user is starting a new history for that option.

                                                  CACTWO-4707 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add ability to drill down to physician queries in Account Search

                                                  ‘Queries’ has been added to the Drill-Down Level options in Account Search. This will automatically add Queries columns to the resulting account search without the user having to add them. These default columns appear at the beginning of the grid and can be moved to other positions.

                                                  CACTWO-4710 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add ‘Query For’ field on queries to further define generic queries.

                                                  The new field will appear under the template name,. This additional “Query For” field will allow the template reason to be more specified.

                                                  The text that is added in this field will show in a new ‘Query For’ column in these reports: Outstanding Queries, Query Impact by Discharge Date, Query Impact Report, Query TAT by Author Report and Query Template Volume Overview. In order to see this new field you must add it to the template created in forms designers.

                                                  CACTWO-4716 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add internal note for physician queries

                                                  Internal only notes can now be added to Physician Query templates from Query Designer.

                                                  On a template, clicking the Insert dropdown will now show a new option of Add Internal Note. The Internal note is only displayed for the user filling out the query and is not set to the provider receiving the query. Selecting this option will add a highlighted free text line to the document

                                                  When adding a physician query the user will see the highlighted section in the query when that template is selected.

                                                  After sending, this note will no longer be seen unless the user has the privilege of ‘Edit Open Queries to resend’ in Role Management. An Edit checkbox will show on the dte line, and checking it will show the query with the internal note.

                                                  CACTWO-4721 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Validation Rules to be exported

                                                  A new ‘Export’ button has been added to the top of the page under the save rules button of the Validation Management page. Clicking on the down arrow will give the user the ability to export as a CSV file.

                                                  CACTWO-4722 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add chatroom to Validation Management

                                                  The chatroom that automatically opens if more than one user is in the same page has been added to Validation Management.

                                                  CACTWO-4724 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Pending Reason drop down to Account List

                                                  The Account List dropdown button now has the option for a list of pending accounts. When Pending Accounts is chosen, the user will get a list of any accounts they have added a pending reason to.

                                                  CACTWO-4731 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add ‘You’ count to the Dashboard

                                                  The dashboards have a Work Available Queue panel. ‘You’ has been added to the list of workflow to show accounts that are assigned to that user.

                                                  CACTWO-4733 (Enhancement)

                                                  When ESC is selected while in a field it will clear new contents

                                                  By putting your cursor in any of the above text fields. If the field has an original value, then change it, then press ESC. The field should revert to its original value before you placed the cursor in the field (note: not the original field from the database).

                                                  • Account Search
                                                  • System Search
                                                  • Tuning Dashboard
                                                  • Validation Management
                                                  • Workflow Management

                                                  CACTWO-4741 (Enhancement)

                                                  Move Cancel button in Physician Query

                                                  The Cancel button has been moved a little farther away from the send button on a Physician Query to alleviate accidental clicks.

                                                  CACTWO-4748 Enhancement

                                                  Add columns to Account Search Pending Reasons drilldown

                                                  When drilling down on Pending Reasons in Account Search, new and updated automatic columns will be added: Added By, Added On, Current Role, Physician, Service Date.

                                                  CACTWO-4754 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change portions of the Audit Management viewer

                                                  In Audit Management viewer the Abstractions section of the viewer are no longer included in the Overall section. The Overall section has been renamed Overall Code Statistics. The tooltips in this section will no longer include the Abstracting values.

                                                  CACTWO-4755 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Stages to the CDI Query Detail Report

                                                  A new column for “Stage” has been added to the right of the “Financial Class” column in the CDI Query Detail Report.

                                                  CACTWO-4758 (Important)

                                                  Reports updated to improve performance

                                                  Several user reports were timing out when the user was on a large database. Updates to reporting have been made to fix those performance problems. The reports affected are:

                                                  • Case Mix Index Report by Attending Physician
                                                  • Outstanding Queries
                                                  • Pending Reasons
                                                  • Query Overview
                                                  • Query Stats
                                                  • Query Template Volume Overview

                                                  CACTWO-4762 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow for editing of text when changing physician on a query

                                                  When a user chooses to change a physician on a physician query after it is sent, the other fields on the query will also be open to editing the original query will retrain oringal text and can be found in the query list as “Canceled”

                                                  CACTWO-4765 (Enhancement)

                                                  Save section selection/arrangement when editing queries

                                                  All dynamic sections on physician querieswill be saved and viewable when editing a set query. Prior to this, when sections were changed on a query and the query sent, if subsequently edited, the changed sections would revert to their original positions. This will no longer happen. Testing Steps: Create any query with a template using sections. Rearrange/hide sections, populate some values, and send the query. Open the query and click the “Edit” checkbox to edit the query (if you are a non-Administrator, you need a privilege enabled to see the “Edit” checkbox). When you edit the query, the rearranged/hidden sections are still rearranged and hidden. Previously, all sections reverted to their original display.

                                                  CACTWO-4766 (Enhancement)

                                                  Populate the name field with the grid column name

                                                  When adding a new column in Grid Column Configuration, the Title will now automatically be defaulted to the field name. You can still change the friendly name if the automatic name is not what you want to use.

                                                  CACTWO-4769 (Enhancement)

                                                  Replace ‘filters’ with ‘criteria’

                                                  The word ‘filter’ has been changed to ‘criteria/criterion’ throughout the Workflow Management page for clarification purposes.

                                                  CACTWO-4774 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Autoload users work lists to be updated live

                                                  If a change is made to an Force Autoload user’s worklist in his profile, the user will no longer have to log out and log back in to get the new sequence. It will happen automatically.

                                                  CACTWO-4777 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add more drilldown ability to Administrative Dashboard

                                                  On the Admin Dashboard, Total Charts AutoClosed Today and Total ChartsRejected Today statistics will now be drilldowns.

                                                  CACTWO-4780 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Auditor count to Administrative Dashboard

                                                  The Admin Dashboard will now show Auditors Online and Offline in the Users Online pane.

                                                  CACTWO-4781 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change Coder Productivity Pending data in the Admin Dashboard

                                                  On the Admin Dashboard Coder Productivity Pending Info and $ will only reflect discharged patients. The coder Productivity Pending Info and $ should only reflect discharged patients. We are using the pending info/$ to show DNFB which is Discharged Not Final Billed and we are capturing non- discharged patients here as well.

                                                  CACTWO-4782 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Case Mix Index pane to Administrative Dashboard

                                                  On the Admin Dashboard a section for Case Mix Index has been added . This pane will show the Last 7 Days, 30 Days, 90 Days and 180 Days.

                                                  Case Mix Index is defined as the sum of DRG Relative Weights divided by the number of accounts with a DRG Relative Weight.

                                                  CACTWO-4783 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Working Case Mix Index pane to CDI Management Dashboard

                                                  On the CDI Management Dashboard a section for Case Mix Index for Working DRGs has been added as a pane to the Administrative Dashboard. This pane will show the Last 7 Days, 30 Days, 90 Days and 180 Days.

                                                  The Working Case Mix Index numbers come from the sum of Working DRG Relative Weights divided by the number of accounts with a Working DRG Relative Weight.

                                                  CACTWO-4785 (Important)

                                                  Errors occurring in the Discharged Not Final Coded report

                                                  When a large data amount is being reported, the Discharged Not Final Coded report would not complete as an XLSX and gave incorrect data. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4786 (Important)

                                                  Missing physician validation rule is not being triggered

                                                  A rule to trigger for a missing physician that was set up in Validation Manager was not triggering when the account did not have a physician. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4788 (Important)

                                                  Large accounts cause Validation Rule delays

                                                  Long stay accounts with thousands of documents were not triggering Validation Rules in an acceptable amount of time. Performance has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4789 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Physician ID to be added to CDI Query Detail report as XLSX

                                                  The CDI Query Detail report will now add a Physician ID column only when it is exported as a XLSX.

                                                  CACTWO-4795 (Important)

                                                  Missing drilldown columns from Account Search

                                                  When a drilldown is used in an Account Search filter, the columns associated with that drilldown are added to the results grid. But when scheduled as a report, those columns were not showing in the report. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4797 (Enhancement)

                                                  Reassign a chart after a specified time period

                                                  A new field has been added to workflow to allow accounts to be assigned to new workgroups if they have sat too long in their original workgroup.

                                                  “WorkGroup Assigned Date” has been added to Workflow Management. When used, this field adds a new optional workgroup field to type in the name of a workgroup. By doing so, the workflow engine will check the assigned date/time of the specified workgroup to determine assignment eligibility.

                                                  To test, assign any account to any workgroup (manually or automatically, doesn’t matter). In Workflow Management, create or edit a custom workgroup with the criteria “WorkGroup Assigned Date” –> name of the workgroup you assigned the account to –> “More Than” –> 1 day ago. Let the Script Engine run overnight. At midnight workflow additionally assign the account to your custom workgroup. If it didn’t, attach the Script Engine log for review.

                                                  When implemented at the site, to mimic “24 hours”, the criteria should be “More Than –> 2 days ago” since workflow works off days and not times.

                                                  CACTWO-4798 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change how Audit accuracy fields appear in Account Search

                                                  In Account Search, any Audit accuracy fields were showing as a decimal point. This has been changed to show as a percentage.

                                                  CACTWO-4803 (Important)

                                                  Weekly Coder Activity report receiving disconnect error

                                                  A connection error was occurring when running the Weekly Coder Activity Report multiple times. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4804 (Important)

                                                  Not correctly checking codes for validity using the Solventum CRS Encoder

                                                  When using Solventum CRS encoder, the Discharge Date was used for figuring validity of a code in Solventum CRS. Any outpatient accounts that have a discharge date that is after the admit date are then likely to get coded with invalid codes. Correction has been made so that outpatient accounts use the admit date as the discharge date for figuring whether a code is valid.

                                                  Solventum CRS Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to Solventum CRS users.

                                                  CACTWO-4805 (Important)

                                                  Document Type Management was not saving mass edit changes

                                                  Document type changes were not being saved properly when using mass edit or changing document group assignments. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4806 (Important)

                                                  Restored images are being marked as new documents

                                                  If an image that has been purged is restored by redownloading, it was being marked as a new document. This has been corrected so that restored images are given an original import date to keep it from being considered as a new document.

                                                  CACTWO-4813 (Important)

                                                  Validation rules not being triggered properly for empty fields

                                                  A validation rule that looks for a field match was not being considered when the field was blank. These operators have been updated to ensure that if a property is an empty string, the validation rule will interpret it the same way as if the field was null or didn’t exist: Not Equal, Not In List, Not Contains and Does not Exist.

                                                  CACTWO-4817 (Important)

                                                  Data in Audit comment bubbles is not being retained

                                                  Text that is attached to a code in an Audit via the comment bubble was not being retained when sent to the Coder from the Auditor. This has been corrected. The code will remain with the red bubble, which when hovered over or clicked on will show the text.

                                                  CACTWO-4823 (Important)

                                                  Physician deactivation is calculated in inconsistent ways

                                                  If a physician’s deactivation date is during an inpatient account timeline, they could still be assigned to a procedure if the date is after the physician’s deactivation date. For the sake of consistency, the procedure date will be looked instead of the account date to determine if a physician is deactivated.

                                                  CACTWO-4825 (Important)

                                                  Display of sample date on monthly run reports is not correct

                                                  When a report is scheduled to run in a monthly format, the ‘sample’ date that is shown to the right does not match the month dates. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4826 (Important)

                                                  Role Management not giving ‘save’ reminder

                                                  When in Role Management and making a change, the user is not being reminded to save when attempting to leave and open a different page. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4830 (Important)

                                                  Change how duplicate codes are calculated in Audit Worksheet

                                                  When a procedure code is duplicated by a coder and an Auditor then updates the Audit worksheet, one of the codes was being calculated as an additional code. This has been corrected so that intentional duplicates are not read as extra codes.

                                                  CACTWO-4831 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change coloring of Code Summary to red for warnings

                                                  The Code Summary shows as red in the Navigation Tree if there is a validation error. Validation warnings in the Code Summary will display in red, to indicate more attention needs to be paid to the validation rule.

                                                  CACTWO-4836 (Important)

                                                  Single Path Coder is not able to submit an account

                                                  An error was occurring when a Single Path coder role attempted to submit an account. This has been corrected. Single Path coders can both save and submit.

                                                  CACTWO-4838 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Account Search on accounts without date properties

                                                  The user can now run an Account Search based on an account number without using a date property criterion. If a user puts together Account Search criterion without having a date or account number field, they will receive a new pop-up warning box:

                                                  CACTWO-4851 (Important)

                                                  Scheduled Report is being duplicated

                                                  If a user accidently double clicked while saving an Account Search as a Scheduled Report, two reports were being recorded. This has been corrected. Multiple clicking will only result in one ‘save’ of a scheduled Account Search report.

                                                  CACTWO-4863 (Important)

                                                  Data entered on a pop-out worksheet not appearing on main viewer

                                                  When popping out a worksheet and then moving to a different document on the main viewer, if the user added data to the popped-out worksheet and then on the main tab moved from the document back to that worksheet, the data would not show in the main viewer. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4864 (Important)

                                                  Account Search adding in columns during detail search

                                                  After a saved Account Search is called up and the user opens multiple account details, the Account Search adds in all the columns that are not check marked for that search. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4867 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add warning when using PrincipalDX dropdown in TruCode™

                                                  The TruCode™ PrincipalDX dropdown button on the Compute button in Account list will open a blank screen if used on an outpatient account. This feature is only for inpatient accounts, so a new pop-up message will now occur if the user tries to use PrincipalDX on an outpatient account.

                                                  Info

                                                  For TruCode™ users only.

                                                  CACTWO-4885 (Important)

                                                  Birthweight not updating when entered in Solventum CRS

                                                  CAC2 will now capture the birth weight from Solventum CRS if it is provided from Solventum CRS. Note: The birth weight is only prompted in Solventum CRS on newborn accounts if an APR-DRG grouper is used.

                                                  Solventum CRS Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to Solventum CRS users.

                                                  V2.24 (Apr 2022)

                                                  V2.24.8129 Released 04/04/22

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-4838 (Enhancement)

                                                  Do not require date fields for Account Number searches

                                                  In Account Search, filters cannot be completed unless there is a date field included in the criteria. This has been changed so that if the user is searching on a particular account number, they will not be alerted to select a date field.

                                                  CACTWO-4857 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add columns to System Search

                                                  New columns have been added to the System Search page: Admit Date, Discharge Date, First Submitter and Facility. They will appear as the last columns and have the same sorting and filtering abilities as other columns on the page.

                                                  CACTWO-4867 (Enhancement)

                                                  Alert user for PrincipalDX usage on inpatient accounts

                                                  The PrincipalDX button on the Compute Dropdown is for use on TruCode™ encoder inpatient accounts only. If a user accidently deploys it on an outpatient account, the result is a blank screen. If a user does this, they will receive a message stating the PrincipalDX option is only for inpatient accounts.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.

                                                  CACTWO-4871 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Workgroup column to User Audit Trail report

                                                  The User Audit Trail report has a new column that will display the name of the workgroup the user opened the noted account from.

                                                  CACTWO-4872 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow TruCode™ to be opened from Anesthesia codes

                                                  The TruCode™ Encoder codebook can now be opened by clicking on an Anesthesia Code in the TruCode™ Research Panel. For TruCode™ Encoder users only.

                                                  CACTWO-4900 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow ‘Does Not Include’ to include a multi-string value

                                                  Currently in Validation Management Rules, using the operator ‘Does Not Include’, such as Diagnosis Codes – Does not Include – only allows for one property, such as R05.

                                                  This has been changed to allow for multiple properties. For Diagnosis Codes – Does not Include – R05, R06.02, I10, the rule will trigger if the account does not include all of those codes. If the account has one of those codes, the rule will not trigger.

                                                  CACTWO-4905 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Physician Coding Summary to the Navigation Tree

                                                  When a physician coder adds codes to an account, a coder working in that account will now see an Physician Coding Summary viewer listed in the Navigation Tree.

                                                  CACTWO-4913 (Important)

                                                  Editing a suggested PCS code is not defaulting the date and physician

                                                  The date and physicians that are populated on a document from an interface, then default onto PCS codes. When PCS codes are assigned, the defaulted data is held. But, if a user edits a code while it is still unassigned, the date and physician are not being defaulted in the Edit Code box. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4914 (Important)

                                                  The HCC viewer was not displaying correctly on multiple MRN accounts

                                                  When multiple accounts have the same MRN and the earliest account has an HCC status on a code, the later account is not creating a Previous HCC Overview viewer in the Navigation Tree. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4915 (Important)

                                                  Short Cut keys are not performing according to the menu

                                                  The Keyboard Shortcuts menu under the Help button was displaying incorrect data for some of the code assignment shortcuts. These have been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4916 (Important)

                                                  Workflow Categories not being deleted properly

                                                  If one of the five default workflow categories (Audit, Autoclose, Post Discharge, CDI/Concurrent, QA Review) is deleted when no workgroups are present, returning to Workflow reinstates that Category. This has been corrected so that empty categories remain deleted.

                                                  CACTWO-4920 (Important)

                                                  Receiving error when submitting accounts with codes on image

                                                  In some instances, when codes are added to an image file and the account is submitted while the user still had the image in their viewer, an error message was occuring. The underlying issue has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4921 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow all codes in TruCode™ Edit panel to be clickable

                                                  Any code that appears in the TruCode™ Edit Encoder panel can now be clicked to open the Codebook to that code. Please note that if the user has a pop-up blocker deployed, this can interfere, so it should be turned off . For TruCode™ Encoder users only.

                                                  CACTWO-4922 (Enhancement)

                                                  Remove ‘+’ sign when not necessary in the Transactions Viewer

                                                  In the Charge Transactions Viewer, the ‘+’ sign indicates multiple instances, and can be clicked to show them. This change will take the ‘+’ sign away from any transaction that has a single instance to prevent unnecessary clicking.

                                                  CACTWO-4924 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new Caution Column to Transactions and Charges viewers

                                                  A new Caution Column has been added to the Transactions and Charges viewers for TruCode™ users. This column will indicate a flag if TruCode reports an edit on a charge on an outpatient account.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.

                                                  CACTWO-4927 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Physician Coder criteria to Validation Management

                                                  New user level criteria has been added to Validation Management: Is Physician Coder, Is Not Physician Coder

                                                  CACTWO-4928 (Important)

                                                  PSI indicators not displaying if procedure code is a multiple

                                                  If a procedure code appeared twice on an account, but had different procedure dates, the PSI code was not being triggered. This has been corrected.

                                                  Quality Module Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to Quality Module users.

                                                  CACTWO-4929 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Engine Outcome per Coder report has been updated

                                                  New updates have been made to the Engine Outcome per Coder report.

                                                  • For each ‘Total For’ value, the result has been changed from an average to a sum.
                                                  • All subtotal values are now whole numbers.
                                                  • User Score and Engine Accuracy percentage show as whole numbers.

                                                  CACTWO-4931 (Important)

                                                  Create a warning if account is locked in use

                                                  A new warning will appear at the top of any document that has been updated while the account has been locked in use.

                                                  CACTWO-4935 (Enhancement)

                                                  New drilldown for Physician Coding added to Account Search

                                                  A new drilldown menu that will present data for Physician Coding Assigned Codes has been added to Account Search.

                                                  CACTWO-4936 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new column to Physician Code Summary viewer

                                                  A Physician Coder will now see an additional column in the account’s Code Summary viewer, identifiying any Diagnosis Codes that were attached to the Procedure Codes.

                                                  CACTWO-4939 (Important)

                                                  Account comments with emojis are not saving properly

                                                  If a user added a comment with an emoji to a note on an account, the account saved, but when later accessed, would not resave the account. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4943 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new operator to the Physician Roles field in Validation Management

                                                  A new operator of ‘More then Ten of’ has been add to the Physician Roles field in the Validation Management page. Using this will alert the user that there are more than 10 of a certain physician role on an account.

                                                  Single Path Coding Only

                                                  This feature requires the physician coder or single path coding module. Please contact SME Team at smeteam@dolbey.com if you want to learn more.

                                                  CACTWO-4944 (Important)

                                                  Blank procedure date not triggering validation rule

                                                  When a CPT code without a date was added to an account, the validation rule which looked for non-existing procedure dates was not triggered. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4947 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow HTML within text fields to not cause display issues

                                                  Previously, HTML was allowed in text fields, but some characters such as < / > = were causing a display issue. The update has been corrected to allow those characters to display correctly.

                                                  CACTWO-4949 (Enhancement)

                                                  New Query Template Volume by Discharge Date has been created

                                                  This report is close to the Query Template Volume Overview report except that it reports by discharge date, not query creation date. Only queries of discharged accounts will show on this report.

                                                  CACTWO-4950 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Workgroups and Criteria to use an ‘or’ statement

                                                  Workgroups and workgroup criteria within Workflow Mangement can now include an ‘or’ statement. When clicking on the criteria link, and the dropdown opens the user will now see an option to add an ‘or’ group:

                                                  Clicking on the “Add OR Group” results in a line that states ONE of the following with an “Add OR Criteria” link.

                                                  Example of OR Criteria

                                                  This is an example of an “OR” criteria. Essentially, at the end of each criteria you will add an ADD or an OR so it looks like the below. Based on this criteria, the chart will fall into the Inpatient Surgery worklist if the chart has a patient type of Inpatient AND the patient has been discharged and the patient has EITHER a hospital service of SUR OR the Documents must include an Operative Report or OP Note. The OR criteria is listed in blue to call attention.

                                                  CACTWO-4953 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow ability for Workflow to have quoted, comma separated values

                                                  When creating criteria in Workflow Management, the user can now use double quotes around a value that contains a comma to show it is all one value:

                                                  CACTWO-4959 (Important)

                                                  TruCode™ DRG Analysis tab is not populating

                                                  When a Primary Grouper is identified as a TruCode™ grouper and the Secondary Grouper is identified as a GPCS Grouper, the TruCode™ DRG Analysis tab is not displaying correct data if it is available. This has been corrected. For TruCode™ Encoder users only.

                                                  CACTWO-4960 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Validation Manager to support double quotes

                                                  In the instance of document names with commas, Validation Management reads the entry as two separate documents. Users can now use double quotes around a document with a comma in its name to prevent that split. As an example, if the user wanted to make a list search for a document called Admit, Covid19, they would write the rule as “Admit, Covid19” so that it is read as one document, not two.

                                                  CACTWO-4961 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow for double quoted documents in Account and System Search

                                                  Double quotes can now be used around document types that have commas inside them when searching using Account Search and System Search. In this case, the document type of Admit, Covid-19 would be written as “Admit, Covid- 19” so that the system reads it as one document, not two

                                                  CACTWO-4964 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add a column for Forced Autoload to User Management

                                                  A new column for Forced Autoload has been added to the User Management grid. To turn it on, access the ag-grid and check the box. The new column appears first in the grid after the Actions column, and can be moved anywhere on the grid.

                                                  CACTWO-4965 (Enhancement)

                                                  Autoset Exempt POA in realtime

                                                  The Exempt POA status will now be set in realtime for any POA-exempt diagnosis codes that are assigned. The issue occured when an account was originally outpatient when FAE results were received (no POA) and then the account was changed to inpatient or the code was originally not POA-exempt prior to a coding update and then the patient remained in-house after the coding update.

                                                  CACTWO-4968 (Enhancement)

                                                  Combine default and custom workgroups into new columns

                                                  New columns added to Grid Column Configuration “All Criteria Groups” and “All Workgroups”. These columns will show default and custom workgroups and criteria together, comma separated.

                                                  CACTWO-4972 (Important)

                                                  The hospital services field is not being saved correctly in reports

                                                  When creating a user report, if the Hospital Services field was filled and then saved, it looked like it saved. But exiting and re-entering that report showed the field as being blank. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4977 (Important)

                                                  Slowness in Account Search for very large results

                                                  A process improvement has been made to speed up the results for Account Search where the criteria search includes long periods of time for large amounts of data.

                                                  CACTWO-4978 (Important)

                                                  Scheduled report being triggered to save without changes made

                                                  When opening an older scheduled report, the user was receiving a ‘save’ prompt when closing. This was due to another field being added by the system behind the scenes. The save prompt will no longer show unless the user makes a change or selection.

                                                  CACTWO-4983 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new column to CDI Activity report

                                                  A new column called Time Spent has been added to the end of the CDI Activity report. This will show the time the CDI spent within the stated Category.

                                                  CACTWO-4984 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change Document Type Management to stop group removal

                                                  When right clicking on any field in the Document Type Management page, the user will no longer have the Tools option to remove grouping rows. Grouping rows must stay static.

                                                  CACTWO-4987 (Important)

                                                  Change conflict occuring on null fields

                                                  The change conflict feature is not treating null fields the same as empty fields, causing the box to pop when it shouldn’t. This has been changed so that null, undefined, and empty fields are all treated the same.

                                                  CACTWO-4988 (Important)

                                                  Transferred codes are not in the correct order

                                                  When using the Transfer Account Codes viewer, the codes that are selected are being copied over in reverse order. This has been changed so that the codes copied are in the same order as on the originating account.

                                                  CACTWO-4989 (Important)

                                                  HTML code is appearing the in TruCode™ encoder

                                                  When a user highlights words in a document and right clicks and selects Add Code from Encoder, sometimes HTML coding is appearing in the TruCode™ encoder. The system has been updated to interpret that code as a blank space.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.

                                                  CACTWO-4990 (Important)

                                                  Physician ID drop down is not readable at screen bottom

                                                  The Physician ID field drops down in the Physicians & Queries pane, but when the user is at the bottom of the screen, the results cannot be seen. This field has been changed so that it will drop up the list, instead of dropping the list down when at the bottom of the screen.

                                                  CACTWO-4992 (Important)

                                                  Account change window popping during document saves

                                                  When an account is opened that has an automatically added form, if the user saves without adding anything to the form, then adds to the form and saves again, the account change window was displaying. This has been corrected so that the window no longer displays.

                                                  CACTWO-4995 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create field for Alternate DRG

                                                  A new field has been created called Alternate Reconciled DRGs. This field can be added to grids using the Grid Column Management page. Once added, it will display manually recorded DRGs that have been added by a CDI Specialist in the Working CDI History viewer.

                                                  CACTWO-5000 (Important)

                                                  Forced Autoload user is not being advanced to their next account

                                                  If a Force Autoload user was working in an account while an administrator was changing the assigned workgroup limits on that user, the user was not advanced to the next assigned account upon submission of the current one. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5005 (Important)

                                                  Change CSV export view for transaction

                                                  When right clicking in the transactions viewer to export to CSV, the grouping row was showing up as a line in the report. If there were two transactions under Group 88888, it was showing in the CSV report as three rows, when it was only two. This has been corrected to no longer show the grouping row.

                                                  CACTWO-5054 (Important)

                                                  Prevent blank query when changing physician of responded query

                                                  If you click “Change Physician” on a physician query with a response, the new physician query will no longer be blank.


                                                  ER E/M Module

                                                  The ER E/M Viewer is an add-on module that was partially released within 2.23 for beta testing therefore the release notes below are changes made to this release. If you do not have this module, you can contact the SME Team (smeteam@dolbey.com) for more information

                                                  CACTWO-4877 (Enhancement)

                                                  Collapse options in the ER E/M Configuration page

                                                  The options in the ER E/M Configuration page (Trauma, No Charge, etc) can now be collapsed and expanded to allow proper focus when working in this page. Clicking ‘Add’ on any option will auto-expand the option panel.

                                                  CACTWO-4925 (Important)

                                                  Multiple issues with the new ER E/M Viewer

                                                  These items in ER E/M Viewer were corrected or changed:

                                                  • Send Charges Outbound is now a checkbox
                                                  • New Assigned CPT Codes section will appear above Summary
                                                  • A History section will list prior submitted E/M charges below Summary
                                                  • If a duration of critical care is entered, the following two questions (Criteria Met and Time Determined) must have an answer of Yes to suppress the E/M Level entry
                                                  • Modifier(s) can be added if a critical care charge is present
                                                  • The quantity for a charge indicating ‘initial’ can only be 0 or 1 Erroneous Conflict Check will no longer occur.

                                                  CACTWO-4937 (Enhancement)

                                                  ER E/M Coding added to Validation Management

                                                  The E/M Coding viewer can now be set as a navigation option in Validation Management. If the rule that is set with this navigation is triggered, the account will bring up that viewer. In this instance, if a procedure code exists but does not have a procedure date on it, the validation rule will trigger and will take the user to the account’s E/M Coding viewer.

                                                  CACTWO-4938 (Important)

                                                  E/M Coding viewer not showing as read-only

                                                  When an account is in read-only mode, the E/M Coding viewer was not. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-4945 (Enhancement)

                                                  Identify E/M Coding that has not been sent outbound

                                                  The E/M Coding Viewer has a button to send the coding outbound. The viewer name will now be colored red if the coding exists but has not been sent, to alert users. Once the coding is sent outbound, the color of the viewer name will change back to black.

                                                  CACTWO-4948 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add display for current E/M Coding charges in Code Summary

                                                  The bottom of the Code Summary viewer will now display the totals of the charges from the E/M Coding viewer.

                                                  CACTWO-4973 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add arrows to move columns in ER E/M Configuration

                                                  A new column called Move with up/down arrows have been added to drop down items in the Options section of the ER E/M Configuration page. This will allow users to arrange the order they want those items to display

                                                  V2.25 (Jun 2022)

                                                  V2.25.8210 Released 06/24/22

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-3976 (Enhancement)

                                                  Widen header banner in XLSX reports in User Reports

                                                  The columns in XLSX user reports have been widened to show the full name of the header to make it easier for users to understand where the data is coming from in User Reports. Prior to this change all fields required the user to expand each field to see the field name.

                                                  CACTWO-4847 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show run history of Scheduled User Report

                                                  Scheduled User Reports will now show the run history. If the user clicks on a report on the left side of the screen, the right side will now show a run history above the schedule data for the last three times the report ran, whether it was successful or errored.

                                                  CACTWO-4942 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow a report deleted in JSReports to be recreated

                                                  If a report in the Scheduled User Reports page is deleted in the JSReport Studio, an exclamation point will appear next to the report in Scheduled User Reports. Clicking on that report name will bring up a red toast message letting the user know the report was deleted in JsReports, and they should either delete it or save it again. If Saved, it will recopy to JsReport Studio

                                                  CACTWO-4996 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow ‘Or’ filters in Validation Manager

                                                  Validation Rule Editor can now be filtered using both ‘And’ and ‘Or’ filters. When adding an ‘Or’ filter, the user needs to make sure they are adding ‘Or’ criteria, not regular Add Criteria. ‘Or’ and ‘And’ criteria can both be used on the same validation rule.

                                                  CACTWO-5001 (Enhancement)

                                                  Alert user if scheduled Account Search report does not return any data

                                                  If a scheduled Account Search runs but no data is returned, it currently mails a blank report. This has been changed so that an email is no longer generated if a scheduled Account Search returns no data.

                                                  CACTWO-5006 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Specimen symbol to Flowsheet viewer

                                                  If a discrete value on the Flowsheet viewer has a specimen, it will now show as a beaker symbol in the Results column. Hovering over the symbol will provide the name and site of the specimen.

                                                  CACTWO-5012 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add dropdown to Flowsheet viewer

                                                  If multiple discrete values have the same major category but different categories, clicking on the major category will now show all the discrete values merged together. Clicking on a subcategory will show the user which discrete values are attached to which subcategory. This will allow you to trend data better so that all subcategories display together.

                                                  CACTWO-5013 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add the ability to use Or groups in Account Search

                                                  Or group functionality that was added to Workflow can now be used in Account Search. The user can now add an Or Group with multiple criteria under it as part of the filter and the search can be scheduled for reporting.

                                                  CACTWO-5024 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add focus for the cursor in the TruCode™ Codebook

                                                  When the TruCode™ CodeBook is opened via the Encoder button at the top of a document, the cursor will now automatically focus in the search box. Prior to this change the user had to place there cursor in the box.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.

                                                  CACTWO-5025 (Enhancement)

                                                  Remove case sensitivity from Flowsheet viewer

                                                  When performing a search in the Flowsheet viewer, the search will no longer be case sensitive.

                                                  CACTWO-5026 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow CDM manually in the EM E/R Configuration screen

                                                  In the EM E/R Configuration screen, after clicking Edit CDM Table, there will now be a new button to Add CDM. This will allow the user to manually record and save a CDM entry.

                                                  CACTWO-5047 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add minimize button to the “Shift Reasons for Physician Query” dialog box

                                                  When a physician query is closed the shift reasons viewer now has a mimumize button so you can view data behind the dialog box if needed..

                                                  Additional Update Steps Required

                                                  If you are upgrading, please contact Support for necessary update.

                                                  CACTWO-5066 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new columns to the Query Impact by Discharge Date report

                                                  Four new columns have been added to the Query Impact by Discharge Date report: Admit Date, Discharge Date, Financial Class and Payor.

                                                  CACTWO-5067 (Important)

                                                  Dashboard Prior Month Top 10 DRG is always blank

                                                  The Top 10 Final DRGs panel in the Administrative Dashboard were not calculating correctly for Prior Month. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5069 (Important)

                                                  Workgroup level criteria is not being considered in Audit Workflow

                                                  The Audit Category of Workflow was not considering workgroup based criteria. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5071 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow DX associated with CPT codes or charges to be sequenced by Physician

                                                  Coder Currently, DX associated with CPT codes or charges that were added by a Physician or Single Path coder are sorted alphabetically. This change will allow that user to decide on the sequence for the codes.

                                                  CACTWO-5085 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Suggested GMLOS for use in grids

                                                  The Suggested DRG module will display the Suggested GMLOS to the account for use in account grids. For Suggested DRG Module users only.

                                                  CACTWO-5087 (Important)

                                                  Exception occuring due to criteria issues in the Validation Editor

                                                  In Validation Rule Editor, if a criterion with the operator of ‘does not include’ is followed by a single numeric character, an exception is occuring in the Account that triggers that validation rule. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5096 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow TruCode™ to override an unspecified code edit

                                                  When a user receives an unspecified code edit in the TruCode™ edits tab which results in a DRG of 999, they will now be able to override that. When computing, if they receive the edit, the user can go to the Account Information viewer of the account and add a Billing note.

                                                  This note defaults to None. Selecting one of the other two options and clicking compute again will remove the edit and create a valid DRG.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users. This will require a change to the account information tab, please reach out to the support team if this needed.

                                                  CACTWO-5098 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new options to the Audit Schedule grouping

                                                  In Workflow’s category of Audit, the Audit Schedule will now allow a grouping for User ID fields. These are all fields that end with a User ID in their description.

                                                  CACTWO-5099 (Important)

                                                  Cancel button in Audit Schedule box is not working properly

                                                  If a user clicks an ‘x’ next to an option in the Audit Schedule box in an Audit Workflow criteria, then clicks the Cancel button, the option is still being removed. The Cancel button should be canceling the move. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5100 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Physician Coders to the online/offline count in Admin dashboard

                                                  The online/offline display in the Administrative dashboard has been updated to look at either user’s current role. These are Auditor, Coder, CDI Specialist, Physician Coder and Single Path

                                                  CACTWO-5102 (Enhancement)

                                                  Prevent starting inpatient audit without a DRG

                                                  A DRG will now be required on inpatient accounts before an audit can be started. If it is not present, a toast message will be presented to the auditor.

                                                  CACTWO-5104 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Solventum CRS to override an unspecified code edit

                                                  When computing a DRG and finding an unspecified code edit in the Solventum CRS for in inpatient account, the user can right click on the code under Diagnosis Code Details and choose ‘edit code properties’. Here the user will be able to chose one of 2 values and complete the DRG, which then avoides the DRG of 999. It the user reviews the Account Information viewer on the account, they will see the option they chose in the Billing Note, other than None. The user can also select the billing note before they compute to avoid the DRG of 999.

                                                  Solventum CRS Users Only

                                                  This feature only applies to Solventum CRS users. This will require a change to the account information tab, please reach out to the support team if this is needed.

                                                  CACTWO-5105 (Important)

                                                  Working DRG data is being removed from the Account History page

                                                  The Account Show History page has been updated with the following changes: If a Working DRG is deleted within a sesssion, an entry will now appear in the DRG timeline indicating this; the incorrect ‘Principal Diagnosis Code’ entry that was being seen has been removed.

                                                  CACTWO-5107 (Important)

                                                  Tooltip is incorrect in Account Search

                                                  When an Account Search filter is saved, the tooltip is not showing that user’s ID until the Account Search Page is left and re-accessed. Also, the date/time of the tool tip was showing the date/time the Account Search was loaded, not the date/time of the last change to that filter. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5109 (Important)

                                                  Account History is not showing role of the user

                                                  The Account Show History page has been corrected so that the role of the user is being properly shown in the View Changes list on the left side of the Account Show History page.

                                                  CACTWO-5111 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Hospital Service as a filter to the Coder Activity Report

                                                  The additional filter of Hospital Service has been added to reporting. Any Report, such as the Coder Activity Report, that can be filtered on Hospital Service will now show in that report’s filter.

                                                  CACTWO-5112 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow each transaction to be editable in the Transaction (Charges) viewer

                                                  The Transaction/Charges viewer will now allow each transaction to be edited by by physician coders: Diagnoses, Physician, Physician Modifiers. Prior to this change only the main charge could be editted rather each charge nested.

                                                  CACTWO-5114 & CACTWO-5169 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow EM E/R cofigurations to be copied to mutliple facilities

                                                  If a user has a Facility Mapping, the EM E/R Configurations can now be copied between the various facilities. If the user works has a Facility mapping, a new option will appear in the top right of the screen allowing selection of one of the facilities. Once a facility is chosen, that facilities levels will appear. A new Copy button will show at the top of the Levels section. Clicking it will open a dialog asking the user what facility to copy those current levels to. The levels will be presented in a dropdown. In this case, I am in Dolbey South – Cincinnati, and when I select the copy button, I have the option to pick another facility to copy those levels to:

                                                  This option will overwrite and copy the current levels that are onscreen to the facility that is selected. If the user does not have a Facility mapping, then these copy options will be hidden.

                                                  CACTWO-5115 (Important)

                                                  Scheduled user reports will no longer run if User is disabled

                                                  If a user creates a scheduled report and that user is then disabled, the report will no longer run. This has been corrected so that as long as that report is marked ‘shared’ it will continue to process if the user that created it is disabled.

                                                  CACTWO-5119 (Important)

                                                  Not all audits are being counted as completed in the Dashboard

                                                  The Audit Personal Dashboard was showing correct data for In Progress, but the audits were not showing as completed if they were completed by the coder instead of the Auditor. This has been corrected so that no matter how an audit is completed, the auditor will have the audit show as completed in their personal dashboard.

                                                  CACTWO-5123 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow an account to be editable when in audit

                                                  A new privilege has been added to Role Management called ‘Edit Account under Active Audit’. With this privilege assigned to a role, that role will now be able to work on accounts in an audit status, rather than be locked out.

                                                  CACTWO-5128 (Important)

                                                  Abnormal value flag is not showing in an exported flowsheet

                                                  If a flowsheet with an abnormal flag is exported to CSV, the flag was not showing on the output. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5136 (Important)

                                                  Engine Outcome per CDI report was not giving correct data

                                                  If the Engine Outcome per CDI report was run as pdf or html, it was not matching the data when run as xlsx. When run as xlsx, the report was exporting the data to the Coder report, not the CDI report. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5137 (Important)

                                                  Allow up to 5 CPT modifiers per CPT code for Solventum CRS users

                                                  When using Solventum CRS as the grouper, CPT codes will now allow up to 5 modifiers per code rather than 4.

                                                  Solventum CRS Encoder Users Only

                                                  This feature is only applicable to Solventum CRS encoder users.

                                                  CACTWO-5139 (Important)

                                                  PSI 04, 18 and 19 should not require a POA of N

                                                  These 3 PSI indicators will no longer take into consideration the POA designation when calculating the PSI.

                                                  Quality Module Required

                                                  If you don’t have the quality module you can contact the SME Team smeteam@dolbey.com for more details.

                                                  CACTWO-5141 (Important)

                                                  EM E/R Configuration not using correct dates on new lines

                                                  Adding new options in the EM E/R Configuration was taking the data of the oldest effective date entry instead of the latest. This was causing anything added after the oldest effective date entry to not be carried over to the new option. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5142 (Important)

                                                  Recent Suggested Working DRG report is missing a column

                                                  With accounts saved under very specific circumstances, when the Recent Suggested Working DRG report is run as an XLSX, the column is missing. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5143 (Important)

                                                  Physician Query signature is not being copied to the message

                                                  If a signature was added to a Physician Query and sent out, that signature was not appearing in certain outbound physician query interfaces. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5150 (Important)

                                                  Reports are not able to be stretched and are cut off

                                                  Due to mispositioning of several buttons, the user could no longer stretch a report and it was cut off with no scroll bars. The buttons have been moved to correct this issue.

                                                  CACTWO-5158 (Important)

                                                  Open queries are not being shown in query reports

                                                  If a physician query was initiated from an account-level physician that was imported via ADT, the physician query was being left off these reports:

                                                  • Outstanding Queries
                                                  • Query Overview
                                                  • Query Stats
                                                  • Query Template Volume Overview
                                                  • Query Template Volume by Discharge Date

                                                  This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5161 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add PHI disclaimer to scheduled account search

                                                  If a report schedule is set up for an Account Search filter, a new checkbox will show at the bottom of the schedule screen with a disclaimer for PHI. The user must check that box in order to save the schedule, and the box must be checked anytime the schedule is edited.

                                                  CACTWO-5163 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Query data to the Account Search drilldown

                                                  In Account Search, if the user selects a drilldown and they have a specific matching field that filters the same drilldown, then the grid results will automatically filter to the values in the criteria.

                                                  CACTWO-5164 (Important)

                                                  Scheduled account searches not showing some Working DRG information

                                                  properly Fields associated with Working DRG that were used in scheduled account searches were not showing correct totals. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5174 (Important)

                                                  Validation rule for ‘does not exist’ is not working properly

                                                  If a validation rule was set for ‘does not exist’, it would still trigger if the value equalled “0” or “00.” This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5180 (Important)

                                                  Correct the way pinned columns are displayed in schedule

                                                  If there are pinned columns in an account search that is scheduled, the emailed report is showing the columns in their original position instead of their pinned position. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5182 (Important)

                                                  Time Spent field is not picking up all time in the account

                                                  If a user did work in an account, saved, remained in the account to do more work and saved or submitted, the first time before the first save was not being counted. The ‘Time Spent’ field will now total all work done in an account before a save/submit and exit.

                                                  CACTWO-5187 (Important)

                                                  POA displays as ‘Y’ rather than ‘U’ in Code Summary viewer

                                                  In a case where an outpatient account is changed to an inpatient account, POAs of U were displayed as Y in the Code Summary viewer. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5191 (Important)

                                                  Case Mix Index by Attending Physician sometimes showing no difference

                                                  The Case Mix Index by Attending Physician report was using a Reconciled DRG as the Working DRG, resulting in a difference of zero. This has been corrected, along with the CDI Query Detail Report and Case Mix Index Comparison Trend.

                                                  V2.26 (Sep 2022)

                                                  V2.26.8297 Released 09/09/22

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-4888 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Discharge Not Final Coded panel to Admin dashboard

                                                  A new panel will appear in the middle column of the Admin dashboard to show ‘Discharge Not Final Coded’ statistics. This panel will show both the last month and current month statistics and will update during the script engine’s overnight run. The panel can be filtered by category and facility. Clicking the Add Goals (or Edit Goals after goals have been added) will allow users to add monetary goals for categories. The blue numbers provide a drill down to see the accounts behind the number of charts that are represented by the dollars holding.

                                                  CACTWO-5002 (Enhancement)

                                                  Added Support for Elixhauser Comorbility Index calculations

                                                  Elixhauser Comorbility Index calculations can now be seen in account details, if licensed. These are triggered by certain comorbidity diagnosis codes that are added as secondary on the account. If an account matches criteria for an Elixhauser calculations, two things will be displayed:

                                                  The banner bar will display QI. When hovering over the QI indicator it will show what those designations are

                                                  In the Code Summary viewer, the Algorithm for Quality Indicators will be displayed at the bottom, showing the codes that match the descriptions in the hover over of the QI tag.

                                                  Quality Indicators Module

                                                  Quality Indicators are an optional purchasable module. Please contact the SME team (smeteam@dolbey.com) to learn more about this feature.

                                                  CACTWO-5031 (Enhancement)

                                                  Background Color for Physician Query internal notes lightened

                                                  When an internal note is added to a physician query templete, it is a very bright color yellow. This has now been lightened so that the background is still yellow, just not overly bright.

                                                  CACTWO-5110 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow auditor to change coder of record

                                                  In the Audit Worksheet, the auditor now has the option to change the coder of record. The coder of record will appear beneath the Audit type entry, and will have a button to change:

                                                  If the record is changed, upon saving, the user will see the new coder of record along with the history of the previous coder of record:

                                                  CACTWO-5135 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow choice of where new Workgroup will appear in the list

                                                  A new checkbox has been added to the Create New Workgroup option in Workflow management. This will allow the creator to choose whether the new Workgroup is added to the top of the Category list, or if unchecked, the new Workgroup will go to the bottom of the category just like it currently does.

                                                  CACTWO-5144 (Enhancement)

                                                  Highlight assigned diagnosis codes after the 25th position

                                                  Any diagnosis code that is in the assigned code pane to an account will automatically be highlighted past the 25th position. This will help the coder/CDI know where the diagnosis needs to move to make it within the top 25.

                                                  CACTWO-5146 (Enhancement)

                                                  Do not retrigger criteria group, if already validated

                                                  If there are two different workgroups that have the same naming of criteria groupsand the CDI had already validated the criteria group within the matched critera viewer, it will not retrigger. ,

                                                  CACTWO-5147 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create new total active Criteria group field for columns

                                                  A new field called ‘Active Matched Criteria Groups’ has been added to Grid Configuration. When that has been added as a column through Grid Configuration, the user will see a count of how many unvalidated matched criteria groups also known as routed reasons there are on that account.

                                                  CACTWO-5152 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create an unspecified code field for use in Validation Rules

                                                  A new field has been created for the Diagnosis loop called ‘Is Unspecified Code’. An unspecificed Diagnosis code will trigger the validation rule warning when set to True.

                                                  CACTWO-5153 (Enhancement)

                                                  Identify validation rule triggered in warning message

                                                  The toast message that pops when an account is saved but has a validation rule trigger will now show the name of the Validation Rule(s) that caused the warning. If an account is submitted the validation box will now include a message of all validation rules that are still present/not resolved

                                                  CACTWO-5157 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add field for Sequence Number and Total to Validation Manager

                                                  The ability to add a validation rule for a sequence number for each code along with a total has been added.

                                                  CACTWO-5166 (Enhancement)

                                                  New report - CDI Metric Score Card

                                                  A new user report called CDI Metric Score Card has been created and will show CDI activity, specifically the number of initial and follow up reviews and query data.

                                                  CACTWO-5176 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Total line to Coder Activity Report

                                                  A grand total line has been added to the Coder Activity Report

                                                  CACTWO-5177 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Code tree to be sortable and filterable

                                                  The All Codes tree now has a search box to filter codes. Right clicking on a code in the tree will also show the addition of sorting codes or descriptions by a-z and z-a.

                                                  CACTWO-5181 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add warning when deleting in Code Editor

                                                  A new confirmation box will open when deleting a code in the Code Editor to allow the user to verify that they do want to delete.

                                                  CACTWO-5188 (Enhancement)

                                                  Remove procedure codes from unassigned if they are a multiple

                                                  If a procedure code appears on multipe documents and it is validated , it will no longer appear in the unassigned code pane. This should reduce the amount of procedure codes on inpatient charts.

                                                  CACTWO-5192 (Enhancement)

                                                  New Report - Case Mix Index per Month

                                                  A new user report has been created that shows Case Mix per Month. The case mix is the average DRG weight of submitted inpatient accounts, by Facility and then by Financial Class. A grand Total of All Facilities will show at the bottom of the report if data for more than one Facility occurs.

                                                  CACTWO-5198 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add warning statement to report description

                                                  The descriptions of Query Impact by Discharge Date and Query Impact Reports now includes a warning that the report should not be run as a PDF file, due to the number of columns.

                                                  CACTWO-5199 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Documents, Flowsheets and Medications to be hidden

                                                  This feature provides the ability to “hide” data up to the Go-Live date. The go- live date is a new column that has been added to the Facility in Mapping Configurations. This way, clients with multiple locations that are going live at different dates can be set.In Role Management, a new privilege can be assigned to any role, but the new role of MVP has been created specifically for this request.

                                                  Any user with this new privilege assigned will ONLY see the Admit Document and any document manually added to the account by a Coder or CDI via the +Add button. Regular documents that come in BEFORE the go-live date will be hidden. The Medications and Flowsheet viewers will also be hidden if they are before the go-live date.

                                                  This is for New Facility Staging

                                                  If you are live and not staging any additional facilities to added to your system you can skip testing this, its used to stage facilities into an already production system or to allow a site to go live without the document interfaces. If you need more information about this feature please contact the SME Team.

                                                  CACTWO-5215 (Enhancement)

                                                  Ignore starting or trailing blank spaces in Workflow Management

                                                  If a Workgroup Category or a Workgroup is created with leading or trailing blank spaces, Workflow will now automatically strip those.

                                                  CACTWO-5223 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Physician Coder to add Pending Reasons to charges

                                                  New optional functionality has been created to allow a Physician Coder to add a pending reason (and note) to charges in a Charge or Transaction viewer. This new column also will show in an Account Search with a drill down of Physician Coder pending reason. It can also be used in a Validation rule.

                                                  Physician Coder Module

                                                  Physician Coder is a optional add on feature. Please contact SME Team to learn more about how Dolbey supports professional coding.

                                                  CACTWO-5225 (Enhancement)

                                                  Turn off encoder for Physician Coders

                                                  Physician Coder can now have the encoder disabled through a new setting.

                                                  Physician Coder Module

                                                  Physician Coder is a optional add on feature. Please contact SME Team to learn more about how Dolbey supports professional coding.

                                                  CACTWO-5227 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add column to Pending Reasons report

                                                  If a Pending Reason has a physician, and that physician has a specialty field populated, a new column called Physician’s Speciality will show on the pending reasons report. If there are no physicians, or there are physicians without a specialty, the column will be hidden.

                                                  CACTWO-5228 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add the ability to put notes on a pending reason

                                                  When adding a Pending Reason, a new note icon will appear next to it. Clicking the icon will open a note field for that pending reason.

                                                  Data can be entered in that field, and if the note is no longer needed, clicking the note icon will reopen it, and the trashcan next to the word Note will delete it. This field has also been added to the Pending Reason drill down in Account Search.

                                                  CACTWO-5229 (Important)

                                                  Worksheets are duplicating

                                                  If a user adds a worksheet and saves the account but does not respond to the ‘Do you wish to exit the account’ pop up before the system times out, a duplicate worksheet is created. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5230 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Physician Specialty to Account Search

                                                  When using ‘Queries’ as a drill down in Account Search, a new column and field for Physician Specialty will be available for use.

                                                  CACTWO-5231 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add a ‘cosigner’ field to physician queries

                                                  With a new setting, a second physician field will show in the query window to allow for a cosigner on that query. This setting is not turned on by default since this will this field also requires an query interface change to allow this to go outbound as well as the receiving system must support co-signer providers.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact SME Team to enable this functionality.

                                                  CACTWO-5234 (Enhancement)

                                                  Turn off conflict message for incoming charges on inpatient accounts

                                                  If the account’s charges are updated on an inpatient account by an interface while the account is locked in use, when the user saves or submits the account, they will not be prompted to resolve the conflict check on the charges

                                                  CACTWO-5236 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow custom shift reasons created

                                                  A new dropdown will appear at the bottom right of the Shift Reasons screen if a mapping called ShiftReasons has been created.

                                                  CACTWO-5237 (Important)

                                                  Validation Rules not recognizing {Code}

                                                  When using {Code} in a validation rule message, the code was not being displayed. This happened when the rule originally had a loop which was subsequently deleted. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5238 (Enhancement)

                                                  New Report - Incentive Productivity

                                                  A new user report called Incentive Productivity has been created to calculate incentive points. In Mapping Configuration, the Category mapping now has a column in which an incentive multiplier can be added. The report will look at the first submitted accounts in each category, list the incentive amount, and then create the incentive points (incentive multiplier x amount of acct submitted in that category). If an incentive multiplier is left empty, it will be read as 1.

                                                  CACTWO-5242 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add checkboxes to the pre-audit section of the Audit viewer

                                                  Check boxes have been added to the Audit viewer and show at the start of every item in the pre-audit column. This allows the auditor to check off each code, drg and discharge disposition as it is audited.

                                                  CACTWO-5243 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new option to the Edit codes feature in Assigned Codes pane

                                                  If a diagnosis code has a match in these three areas, Principal, Visit Reason, Admit, then a new ‘Edit Only’ option will appear in the right click menu, allowing only that particular instance to be changed.

                                                  CACTWO-5245 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow pending reasons to be restricted by facility

                                                  A new column has been added to Pending Reason in Mapping Configuration. This allows each reason to be restricted by the facility of the account. Multiple facilities can be added per reason.

                                                  CACTWO-5246 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow pending reasons to be sorted in Mapping Configuration

                                                  In Mapping Configuration, Pending Reasons now has up/down arrows to allow for sorting.

                                                  CACTWO-5247 (Important)

                                                  Long error occurring when canceling out of an account

                                                  In certain incidents, if a timeout occurred and the user canceled out of an account before the timeout brought up the log in screen, a long red error was seen. This has been corrected so that if the user clicks cancel just as the timeout occurs, they will receive a much shorter time out message.

                                                  CACTWO-5251 (Important)

                                                  Document Type Management page not appearing correctly

                                                  The Document Type Management page was showing a number at the bottom that was not matching the amount of types displayed. This was caused when a Document Order field was populated. It has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5253 (Important)

                                                  Validation rule using a ‘false’ statement is not working properly

                                                  If a criterion in a validation rule used a statement checking for a ‘false’ or ‘is not true’, the criterion was not being evaluated correctly. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5255 (Important)

                                                  Workgroup is being cleared by Physician Coder submission

                                                  When a Physician Coder submits an account, the assigned workgroup is being cleared. A new field has been created to stop the workgroup from changing or clearing.

                                                  CACTWO-5265 (Important)

                                                  Validation loop is not working if it’s the last criteria edited

                                                  If a Validation rule is created with a loop along with other criteria, if the loop is changed after the initial save, it is not being respected. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5269 (Important)

                                                  Include autoclosed submissions in reports

                                                  Autoclosed submits will now be included in these reports:

                                                  • Coder Activity Report
                                                  • Global Productivity
                                                  • User Detail
                                                  • Weekly Coder Activity Report

                                                  CACTWO-5281 (Important)

                                                  Prevent pending reason from getting deleted during upload of document

                                                  Pending Reasons can be removed when late arriving documents come in that have been set for a cancellation of the reason. This should not be happening for pending reasons added by physician coders. If a document type is set up with a cancel pending reason, it will no longer remove the reason when it comes into the account if the reason was added by a physician coder.

                                                  CACTWO-5307 (Added)

                                                  filter to calendar view to filter on physician coders

                                                  On the calendar view you can filter the data based upon a “Physician Coder” type please note that the “Single Path” activity is also included the physician coder data and the “Inpatient” or “Outpatient” views because single path coders do facility coding at the same time.

                                                  V2.27 (Dec 2022)

                                                  V2.27.8378 Released 12/16/22

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-5149 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add permission role for Dolbey Community

                                                  A new privilege called ‘Hide Access to Dolbey Community’ has been added to Role Management. If checked, that user type will no longer have access to Dolbey Community in the Help menu. Dolbey Community is a new web-based community for customer management teams launching on January 10, 2023. Dolbey Community is intended to bring Fusion CAC users together to collaborate and discuss topics that are important to you. You will have the opportunity to:

                                                  • Ask questions and get answers from your peers.
                                                  • Share ideas and best practices that you’ve learned along the way.
                                                  • Learn tips and tricks — or pass along some of your own.
                                                  • Access resources like release notes, training videos, and marketing materials.
                                                  • Submit feature requests that may be incorporated into future releases.

                                                  If you would like a login for Dolbey Community, please reach out to the SMEteam@dolbey.com.

                                                  CACTWO-5171 (Enhancement)

                                                  Hide supporting evidence from documents

                                                  Supporting evidence will now be hidden from documents by default. If the supporting evidence dialog is open, clicking on the icon next to the code will reveal the secondary codes. This will now be hidden to reduce the white noise of codes on a chart; however, the evidence is still available. Upon opening the supporting evidence dialog you will see the evidence markers.

                                                  CACTWO-5224 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow TruCode™ edits while computing with any other encoder

                                                  If a site uses an encoder other than TruCode and wants to use the TruCode edits to supplement their existing encoder they can now do so to display MCE, OCE, and medical necessity edits (NCD/LCD).

                                                  TruCode Edits License Required

                                                  This feature requires a TruCode Edits License, please contact the SME Team for more information.

                                                  CACTWO-5256 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow physicians to be attached to pending reasons from Account Search

                                                  If a pending reason is added to an account from account search and is configured to have a physician attached, the user can now add that physician in Account Search. Either single or multiple accounts can be highlighted, then in the right click menu, after Add Pending Reason is selected, if the pending reason selected from the dropdown is set to trigger for physician, the physician entry box will be displayed.

                                                  Testing Steps

                                                  Testing Steps: In Mappings Configuration, make sure you have at least one pending reason that requires a physician. In Account Search, select one or more accounts, then right-click and choose “Add Pending Reason”. Note that if you select a pending reason that requires a physician, an additional physician drop down appears. If the pending reason requires a physician, the physician cannot be left blank. After selecting a physician reason and physician, load the account and examine the Code Summary viewer. The physician should be present with the newly added pending reason.

                                                  CACTWO-5257 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow mass removal of pending reasons in Account Search

                                                  If an account has multiple pending reasons, they will now all be removable using Account Search. In Account Search, the user will need to create a search using the Pending Reasons Drill Down Level. Highlighting one of the lines on the account (pending reasons each have their own lines) and right clicking to select Delete Pending Reasons will delete all reasons on the account without having to highlight each line.

                                                  Info

                                                  Testing Steps: Perform this action on selected accounts, then examine these accounts in Account Detail. Any accounts with pending reasons should have their pending reasons removed.

                                                  CACTWO-5264 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add number ordering for criteria groups

                                                  Using Grid Column Configuration, first add the columns Custom Criteria Sequence and Criteria Sequence. With these added to the Account List, users will be able to see the sequence of the criteria group. The sequence will also be viewable in Workflow Management, in front of each criterion. Re- arranging the criteria list will update the sequence number as needed.

                                                  Testing Steps

                                                  Testing Steps: In Grid Columns Management, add the column “Criteria Sequence” for default workgroups and the column “Custom Criteria Sequence” for custom workgroups. For both columns, make sure the “Account List” checkboxes are checked. (Note that these columns are not added automatically; not all sites will use this feature.)

                                                  The criteria group sequence number is now displayed in Workflow Management. When an account is assigned to a workgroup and criteria group, the criteria group sequence is now recorded with the workgroup assignment. The column “Criteria Sequence” will display the sequence number for default workflow and the column “Custom Criteria Sequence” will display the sequence number for custom workflow. Like with “Criteria Group”, these columns are swapped when examining a specific workgroup in the Account List page, depending on whether the workgroup is a default workgroup or a custom workgroup. The “Matched Criteria Groups” viewer will also display the sequence number for matched criteria.

                                                  Re-run Workflow to Update Existing Accounts

                                                  This feature is commonly used with CDI and this feature is not retroactive for existing accounts. Workflow must be rerun on existing accounts and the account’s workgroup, or criteria group must change to see the sequence number.

                                                  CACTWO-5283 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow chronological sort for documents

                                                  The user can now right click within the document tree and a new menu option ‘Show Chronologically’ will be there. When clicked, it will sort all the documents in chronological order. The order will be saved per user and can easily be changed back by right clicking for the menu, from where they can choose ‘Show Document Groups’.

                                                  CACTWO-5294 (Enhancement)

                                                  New capture rate report for CC/MCC

                                                  A new user report has been created called CC/MCC Capture rate. It will show the final result of CC/MC capture rates

                                                  CACTWO-5296 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show provider name on document

                                                  If a provider name is sent in the meta data of a document, it will now show in the Document tree, next to its document. The name is shown after a comma, and will be order by last name, first name.

                                                  CACTWO-5298 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add MDC fields columns

                                                  Grid Column Configuration will now allow the addition of 4 columns: Final MDC, Final MDC Description, Working MDC, and Working MDC Description.

                                                  CACTWO-5308 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add dropdown to hide coding in Document Management

                                                  A new column, Hide Coding, has been added to Document Types Management, allowing the user to choose to show suggested codes based on whether the account is inpatient or outpatient.

                                                  This will allow sites to hide codes, for example, on radiology reports or supporting documentation “non” physician documents for inpatient charts only.

                                                  CACTWO-5311 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new sort fields to workgroups

                                                  In Workflow Management, the fields below have been added to the Sort/Field Direction boxes for workgroups. When no other sort order has been set in Account list, this is the sort order that will be followed.

                                                  1. Active Matches Criteria Groups
                                                  2. Admit Date w/ Time
                                                  3. Age in Years
                                                  4. Billing Countdown
                                                  5. Discharge Date w/ Time
                                                  6. Late Document Count
                                                  7. Random Inclusion Factor
                                                  8. Total Documents

                                                  CACTWO-5312 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Financial Class filter to CDI Metric Scorecard

                                                  The CDI Metric Scorecard report is based on inpatient activity. A filter for Financial Class has been added. Other updates to the report include number of queries with a disagreement; percentage of queries with a disagreement; and DRG pre-bill and post bill match rates.

                                                  CACTWO-5313 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add ability to use document status for validation rules

                                                  If a document has been added as a for each loop in the Validation Management editor. Users can now create a validation rule that will look at each document status and report each instance of a matched validation rule on the Code Summary viewer.

                                                  Use Case Example

                                                  Use Case: Prevent coders from submitting the account when a document is in something other than signed status and notify them using validation rules to provide a hard or soft stop to add a pending reason. Common document status includes but are not limited to:

                                                  • D = draft
                                                  • P = preliminary
                                                  • F = final
                                                  • S = signed
                                                  • A = addendum
                                                  Document Status Flag Required

                                                  This feature requires a document interface that provides a document status flag. Check your interface before adopting this feature.

                                                  CACTWO-5314 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change expands all options to increase performance

                                                  To help with performance, some menus have been changed. The right click menu on the Document tree now has an Expand option that allows for collapse or expand of documents. There is no longer a code expansion, that is done by the plus sign only. On the Unassigned/All Codes tree, in the right click menu, the Expand option will allow users to expand Codes. This will show the codes, or collapse all to hide the codes and only show the headings.

                                                  CACTWO-5316 (Important)

                                                  Add facility filters to Administrative dashboards

                                                  Three dashboards will now have the ability to filter by facility: Audit Management, CDI Management and Administrative. The filters will apply to most dashboards, except for the Autoclose, Discharged Not Final Coded, and any panel displaying user counts. The top of the dashboard contains the filter, and once the user clicks to filter and selects the facilities desired, clicking the refresh button will refresh all the panels to only show the results for that facility or facilities.

                                                  CACTWO-5317 (Important)

                                                  User clicking ‘refresh’ during account load causes accounts to be removed

                                                  When an account list is in the process of being retrieved and a user clicks the refresh button, the beginning of the list is removed. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5318 (Important)

                                                  Validation Editor not evaluating criteria of Charge Codes exist correctly

                                                  If multiple charges exist on an account and one of them does not have a CPT code, a validation for Charges Exist does not work properly. This has been corrected.

                                                  Testing Steps

                                                  Testing Steps: You need an account with charges where at least one charge does not have a CPT Code. In Validation Editor, add a rule “Charge Codes –> Exists”. On that account, if at least one charge has a CPT Code, the rule should trigger even if another charge doesn’t have a CPT Code.

                                                  CACTWO-5321 (Important)

                                                  SOI/ROM values on banner bar do not match Audit Worksheet

                                                  If an Audit was opened on an account with SOI/ROM values, those values on the banner bar were not matching what was showing on the Audit worksheet. The Audit Viewer displays the ROM where the SOI should be displayed. The data on the account and the audit is correct; it’s just the display that is incorrect. This has been corrected.

                                                  Requires Audit Management

                                                  This feature requires Audit Management which is an additional module; please contact SME Team if you are interested in learning more. This also requires an APR- DRG license.

                                                  CACTWO-5322 (Enhancement)

                                                  Provider not showing in drop-down when last name entered contains a space

                                                  If a Physician has a last name containing a space, such as Van Hutton or De Graff, the physician is not found when searching on the Physicians & Queries page or on a procedure to add the provider by the first part of the last name. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5326 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show middle name in Solventum™ Coding and Reimbursement System (CRS)

                                                  encoder The Solventum CRS encoder was only showing the patient’s last name. This has been changed to show the patient’s first, middle and last name in the encoder.

                                                  Solventum CRS Users

                                                  This feature is for Solventum CRS users only

                                                  CACTWO-5327 (Important)

                                                  Changing query from Canceled to Wrong Provider doubles query

                                                  When using the “Change Physician” option on an open query a query is created as expected, but when reopening the query and changing the canceled reason to “Wrong Provider” a second query was resent. To prevent this, there is now a dropdown on the Change Physician button that will drop down the cancel reasons. Clicking Send New Query will send the query to the new physician and close the query to the incorrect one. If a user then reopens that canceled query and changes the cancel reason at the bottom, an additional query will not be sent.

                                                  CACTWO-5328 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change HCC Viewer to show friendly value

                                                  The HCC Viewer has been updated to show the mapped friendly value for the Category.

                                                  CACTWO-5331 (Important)

                                                  CDI Activity report is displaying 00:00:00 for some charts

                                                  On the CDI Activity report, any chart with a facility on it caused the records ‘Time Spent’ to zero out. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5332 (Enhancement)

                                                  New ‘Today’s Date’ fields created

                                                  In Grid Column Configuration, two new options have been added: Today’s Date and Today’s Date /w Time. These can be added to show the current date and time on any screen chosen as a column, including Scheduled Reports.

                                                  CACTWO-5334 (Important)

                                                  CDI Query reports percentages are not being computed correctly

                                                  The CDI Query Score Card and CDI Query Score Card by Admission Month reports were not calculating the DRG Pre-Bill and Post-Bill percentages correctly. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5336 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Modifier entry to code by using hyphen

                                                  In version 1, the software allowed you to enter a CPT Code followed by a dash and a modifier. The version 2 software now has this feature. When adding, editing, or mass editing a CPT code, the modifier can be added by adding a hyphen after the code, along with the modifier.

                                                  CACTWO-5338 (Important)

                                                  Prevent Out of Memory exceptions in Account list

                                                  If there are more than 5000 accounts in a workgroup when loading the account list, the user will now see an error message:

                                                  CACTWO-5340 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow for default POA other than Y

                                                  CAC now allows the installation to configure the default POA other than Y Contact Support to implement this option.

                                                  CACTWO-5341 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add columns and calculations for Audit Abstract Report

                                                  The Audit Abstract Report will display the calculation of modifier changes. The number of original modifiers, plus the number of new modifiers are added to the Pre Audit score. Several column names have been updated accordingly.

                                                  CACTWO-5343 (Important)

                                                  Using computed field in Account Search doesn’t return all results

                                                  If there were more than 1000 accounts that matched an Account Search that used a computed field, such as Age in Years, then all results were not being shown. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5344 (Enhancement)

                                                  Screen changes for the New Document Grouping page

                                                  Several updates to the New Document Grouping page have been made. The ‘delete all’ button has been removed, and the ‘save all’ button has been changed to ‘save all groups’ for clarity. A confirmation pop up will now occur when deleting a document group.

                                                  CACTWO-5348 (Enhancement)

                                                  Prevent “Account Changed” dialog when only images are redownloaded

                                                  When a change is made upstream to an image on an account while that account is opened, the Account Changed box pops. This has been changed so that only documents will cause the change box to open.

                                                  CACTWO-5350 (Enhancement)

                                                  Banner Bar is not showing Discharge Disposition title

                                                  The Discharge Disposition in the banner bar has been changed to now show the title from the Discharge Disposition mapping, instead of being hard coded.

                                                  CACTWO-5357 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add productivity count to top of screen so the coder does not have to return to

                                                  dashboard to know productivity When a user clicks on their user ID in the right corner of the screen, a new chart will appear showing the updated work count for the day. If the user is both CDI and Coder, the chart that appears will be based on the current profile This allows the user to see how charts were worked today without needing to return to the dashboard. In this instance, the user is a coder:

                                                  CACTWO-5360 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Solventum CRS facility to be populated in CAC2

                                                  Dolbey now supports the field available in Solventum CRS which is an account-level “EncoderFacility’ field.

                                                  Solventum CRS Users Only

                                                  This feature is for Solventum CRS users only.

                                                  CACTWO-5362 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add PSI data to the After Audit section of Audit worksheet

                                                  If an account has a PSI assignment, it shows on the Coder Outcome (Pre-Audit) side of the Audit Worksheet. The PSI assignment will now also show on the Auditor Outcome (Post-Audit) side after the Update Codes button is clicked

                                                  CACTWO-5366 (Important)

                                                  CDI Query Score Card reports should not count all accounts

                                                  The CDI Query Score Card and CDI Query Score Card by Admission Month should only count accounts with both Working and Final DRGs on the first Submit in the Pre-Bill Mismatch statistics. It was counting all first submit accounts. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5367 CACTWO-5366 (Important)

                                                  CDI Query Score Card reports should not count all accounts

                                                  The CDI Query Score Card and CDI Query Score Card by Admission Month should only count accounts with both Working and Final DRGs on the first Submit in the Post-Bill Mismatch statistics. It was counting all first submit accounts. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5370 (Important)

                                                  Visit Reasons being unassigned when assigning Admit or Principal Diagnosis

                                                  On an outpatient account, if a Diagnosis code was set as a Visit Reason, then subsequently right clicked on and added as Admit or Principal, the Visit Reason was being deleted. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5371 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Single Path user to switch between facility and professional charge

                                                  If facility charges and professional charges are received separately on an account, a single path user will be able to toggle between facility and professional charges. The toggle will appear in the upper left corner of the charges viewer.

                                                  CACTWO-5375 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add ROM/SOI indicators on more viewers

                                                  The Working CDI History viewer and the Final Code Summary viewer will now show columns for ROM/SOI and HAC/HCC per each code. The designation HAC will be shown in the CC/MCC column, when applicable.

                                                  CACTWO-5382 (Important)

                                                  Solventum CRS responses are doubling

                                                  Solventum CRS responses are doubling if the user is timed out of the app and then logs back in and reopens the account. This has been corrected. For Solventum CRS users only

                                                  CACTWO-5384 (Important)

                                                  Audit Worksheet checkboxes are being unchecked

                                                  If the Audit Management viewer is popped out to another tab and a checkbox in the Coder Outcome (Pre-Audit) is checked, adding a code on the main browser was clearing the checked box. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5385 (Enhancement)

                                                  Enable Alternate Length of Stay in Solventum CRS

                                                  The ability to provide Alternate Length of Stay to Solventum CRS to prevent prompting for it with specific groupers has been added. For Solventum CRS users only

                                                  CACTWO-5387 (Important)

                                                  Or groups in Validation Management are not working properly

                                                  If an Or group criteria is created in Validation Management and contains a looped result, that result was being ignored. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5388 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Hospital Service filter to the Weekly Coder Report

                                                  The Weekly Coder Activity report can now be filtered by Hospital Service. Hospital Service will not appear in the header of the report as a filter unless it is utilized.

                                                  CACTWO-5389 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add grand total line to CDI Activity Report

                                                  A grand total line has been added to the CDI Activity report.

                                                  CACTWO-5390 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add CDI codes added via Solventum CRS to All codes list for Coders

                                                  Currently, the All Codes list (when user is a Coder) will only show CDI codes that are added on a document. They can then be hidden by the Hide CDI codes list. Codes that are added by a CDI via the Solventum CRS encoder will now also appear in that list. For Solventum CRS users only

                                                  CACTWO-5392 (Important)

                                                  User Detail report is not showing AutoClose statistics

                                                  The User Detail report is not showing AutoClose statistics, or data for any account with no documents, or has documents with no codes, but direct coding via Solventum CRS has occurred. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5393 (Important)

                                                  Filtering results from account search does not update the displayed numbers in

                                                  the bottom left When a report pulled up via Account Search is subsequently filtered, the number of lines at the bottom of the page are not updating to show the filter. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5394 (Important)

                                                  Submit button is being grayed out when it shouldn’t be

                                                  The submit button on accounts will now be grayed out according to validation rules, rather than being hard coded for reasons of no principal diagnosis being assigned

                                                  CACTWO-5395 (Important)

                                                  Queries closed as No Opinion do not show in Account Search

                                                  If an Account Search report is created using the Queries Drill Down level, accounts that had queries closed as ‘No Opinion’ were showing as blank. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5397 (Enhancement)

                                                  Display physician coder data on Code Summary page

                                                  When a physician coder is in an account, they will now see ‘Physician Coding Last Saved’ and ‘Physician Coding Last Submitted’ data on the Code Summary page.

                                                  CACTWO-5398 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add looped field for E/M in Validation Management

                                                  User can now create a validation rule based on E/M loops in Validation Management.

                                                  CACTWO-5401 (Important)

                                                  Edit pending reasons in Workflow list not dropping or closing properly

                                                  If user edits a criteria group filter in workflow management and leaves the edit form open, then clicks on a filter to save, the edit form was staying open, and the Edit Pending Reason link was appearing. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5402 (Important)

                                                  Code designations are not showing correctly during recalculation

                                                  Codes that have been given a CC, MCC, or HAC designation are not updating properly when the code itself is moved into a different position in Solventum CRS or the Assigned codes pane. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5403 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow full column name to be displayed in Account and System Search

                                                  The Tools button in the Account and System Search pages will now display the full friendly name of the column when deployed.

                                                  CACTWO-5404 (Important)

                                                  Slow loading of Dashboard if more than 5000 accounts per workgroup

                                                  A new message will show to alert the user if there are more than 5000 accounts per workgroup in the dashboard. The limit of 5000 has been placed to prevent lockups.

                                                  CACTWO-5406 (Enhancement)

                                                  Remove ROM/SOI from Pre-DRG in queries

                                                  ROM/SOI will no longer show when the MS-DRG is grouped and APR is the secondary grouper within a physician query.

                                                  CACTWO-5407 (Enhancement)

                                                  Coder DRG Summary report has been created

                                                  A new user report called Coder DRG Summary report has been created. Accounts must be discharged and submitted to appear in this report. This report will show the breakdown per coder MS-DRG to show the total visits per DRG.

                                                  CACTWO-5408 (Important)

                                                  Cannot reassign codes in Edit All Codes page

                                                  With the Edit All Codes page open, changing a Secondary diagnosis to Principal changes the codes. But, if the user then tried to change the former Principal back to Principal, that option was not in the codes select dropdown. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5413 (Important)

                                                  Allow Solventum CRS to stay open past timeout

                                                  For sites with the Solventum CRS encoder, the timeout will now be advanced by 4 hours when using Solventum CRS as the encoder. If Solventum is open, the timeout will be held for 4 hours before activating. For Solventum CRS users only

                                                  CACTWO-5414 (Enhancement)

                                                  Disallow coders from changing charge physician

                                                  Coders can now be prevented from changing the physician on a charge. Please contact Support to enable this feature

                                                  CACTWO-5416 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Scheduled Reports to generate blank report for emails

                                                  In a previous release there was a feature that if an account search yielded no results, it would prevent a report from being generated. This feature is turned off by default. The system will not generate an email with blank results until it is enabled. Please contact Support to enable this feature

                                                  CACTWO-5418 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show full assigned username in Code Summary

                                                  The default Code Summary will now show the full username with the ID in parenthesis if an account is assigned to a user rather than a workgroup.

                                                  CACTWO-5419 CACTWO-5421 (Important)

                                                  Edit Pending Reason link missing in Workflow Management

                                                  When copying criteria from workflow management that has a Pending Reason, the copy is not showing the Edit Pending Reason link at the end of the criteria line. This has been corrected. If the workgroup is copied and another criterion is added to the Pending Reason criteria group, it was copying down that reason instead of showing a blank for whatever criteria was chosen. This is now corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5422 (Important)

                                                  Account Search not paging properly

                                                  If a filter in Account Search uses a computed field (such as Age), then the numbering of accounts per page did not show correctly. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5424 (Important)

                                                  Save Last Saver if Auditor saves/submits an account

                                                  Currently, an Auditor will only show as last saver if there has been a saver/submitter before. It did not show as a first saver. This has been corrected so that no matter what, the auditor’s name will show if last saved.

                                                  CACTWO-5427 (Important)

                                                  Alert user to not close browser when logging out to save an account

                                                  If the user is in an account, clicks on the Log Out menu option, and chooses “Save the account,” the user needs to be notified not to close the browser until the save is completed. There is no visual indicator to indicate that a save is in progress if the save takes a few seconds. Closing the browser early could prevent the account from saving completely.

                                                  CACTWO-5437 (Important)

                                                  Engine Results by CDI is not filtering correctly

                                                  When adding Users to the Users field in the Engine Outcome per CDI report, the results were not the same as if you ran the report without filtering to specific user. This has been corrected so that the user filter looks at the same columns a non-filtered report does.

                                                  V2.28 (Mar 2023)

                                                  V2.28.8497 Released 03/24/23

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-5369 (Enhancement)

                                                  Financial Class Outcome by Discharge Report

                                                  A New user report is created based on discharge date. The Financial Class Outcome by Discharge report is configured as a monthly report, with a maximum of 12 months per report. The accounts must be inpatient with a Final DRG. If no financial classes are filtered, there will be an ‘Overall’ section at the bottom of the report.

                                                  CACTWO-5410 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Charge viewer codes to be drag and dropped

                                                  Physician/Single Path coders will now be able to drag and drop diagnosis codes within the add codes list on the Charges Viewer.

                                                  CACTWO-5411 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow mass editing of Charge Viewer codes.

                                                  Physician/Single Path Coders can now select multiple lines in the Charges Viewer, and by clicking on the Edit code icon and selecting codes, apply those codes to all items in the selection.

                                                  CACTWO-5429 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow document updates to add or cancel pending reasons

                                                  If a document is set up to add or cancel pending reaons, those will now occur on document updates, not just document additions.

                                                  CACTWO-5431 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Working DRG History to Validator Editor.

                                                  When setting up a validation rule, the user can now select Working DRG History as a viewer to navigate to. When the validation rule occurs on the Code Summary page, clicking on it will take the user to the Working CDI History.

                                                  CACTWO-5434 (Enhancement)

                                                  CDI Codes on Submitted Charts report

                                                  A New user report CDI Codes on Submitted Charts report was created. Discharged submitted inpatient accounts with both a Final and Working DRG will appear on this report. The Working DRG displayed on this report is the last Working DRG computed before discharge. Because this report is so large, it should not be run as a PDF.

                                                  CACTWO-5453 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show diagnosis designations on Unassigned code tree

                                                  If a code in the Unassigned Code tree has the potential to be an MCC, CC or HCC code, itwill now show next to the code for inpatient accounts. The HCC is controlled by the HCC display flag on Category in Mapping Configuration. No HCC will display if the admit and discharge dates are in different years.

                                                  CACTWO-5465 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add columns for Query Responder

                                                  When a physician who was not the physician of record on a query answers the query, there is no way to mark that on the query. A new column for the data on the query responder has been added to the Physician and Queries viewer, and are also available in the Account Search drill down level for Query.

                                                  CACTWO-5466 (Enhancement)

                                                  AMA CPT Utilization Report

                                                  A new user report was created. This calculates the number of times a CPT code is touched with any action that assigns or edits a CPT code on an account. This is a report that Dolbey uses to report usage to the AMA per contract.

                                                  CACTWO-5475 (Enhancement)

                                                  Current Workgroup report

                                                  A new report, Current Workgroup, was created. This report ignores the data range and only reports on ‘today’s’ workgroup list. If no user is filtered for this report, the results will output the current workgroup statistics for all enabled workgroups that do not have a workgroup type of Purge, which is set in Workflow Management.

                                                  CACTWO-5480 (Important)

                                                  Change drilldowns for Dashboard

                                                  Drilldowns for dashboards will still allow a maximum of 5000 accounts to be retrieved, but they will now be displayed in pages like Account Search. This will help to improve performance.

                                                  CACTWO-5482 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow ‘Query For’ field in Physician Query to be a drop down

                                                  Mapping Configuration can have an entry added that will allow the Query For field to be a dropdown choice field.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this option.

                                                  CACTWO-5484 (Important)

                                                  Change drilldowns for Calendar

                                                  The calendar has been updated to show drilldowns that exceed 500 accounts to page them. This will help to improve performance.

                                                  CACTWO-5485 (Enhancement)

                                                  Force inactivity prompt for timeouts

                                                  A new setting will allow inactivity prompts to occur when an account is auto- saved due to a session timeout, regardless of the minimum and maximum minute setting.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this option.

                                                  CACTWO-5494 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow physician query response to be a dropdown

                                                  The physician query response of ‘no opinion’ can be changed to be ‘other opinion’ with a drop up selection.The response will now show in an ‘other opinion’ column on these user reports:

                                                  • CDI Metric Scorecard
                                                  • CDI Query Scorecard
                                                  • CDI Query Scorecard by Admission Month
                                                  • Query Stats
                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this option.

                                                  CACTWO-5497 (Enhancement)

                                                  Enhance color on codes that have been assigned multiple times on the

                                                  account If an account has multiples of one code, and the code is assigned from within the document, all other instances will show as italicized with a light green background. This will help alert the user that the code is already assigned elsewhere in the account. In this example, a diagnosis and a PCS code have been assigned on other documents

                                                  CACTWO-5498 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow comments to be added to codes in trees

                                                  A comment can now be added to a code on the document tree, or the Unassigned/Show All code tree. The comment will show as a green flag in the trees and on the code in the document. On the trees, the comment is readable via a hover over; in the document itself, the flag can be clicked to open the comment. The comment can be added to or deleted by erasing the text. The comment will show in its own section in the Notes and Bookmarks viewer, and can be edited or deleted there.

                                                  CACTWO-5499 (Enhancement)

                                                  Bold assigned codes in the Show All code tree

                                                  If there is a code that appears on multiple document types and one of those is assigned, it will now appear as BOLD in the Show All codes tree. In this example, the code was assigned on the Consultation document type.

                                                  Please note, this may not be retroactive..

                                                  CACTWO-5500 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show Autoload on the User Audit Trail report

                                                  A new autoload column has been added to the User Audit Trail Report, which will populate with TRUE for activites in which auto-load was enabled. This is NOT retroactive.

                                                  CACTWO-5501 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add columns to User Detail and User Session Log reports

                                                  Columns for Discharge Date were added to the User Detail and User Session Log reports. A column for Total Charges has also been added to the User Session Log report.

                                                  CACTWO-5507 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add sequencing column for Physician and Single Path Coders

                                                  A new column has been added to the Add Code dialog box within the charges viewer for Physician Coders. This way no matter how long the list is, the user can always see how many codes are in the list

                                                  CACTWO-5508 (Important)

                                                  Non-stop scrolling occurring in Account Search

                                                  If the down/up arrow is clicked when using ‘ Less than’ or ‘More than’ under date options in Account Search, the scrolling never stops. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5519 (Important)

                                                  Inpatient Coder Scorecard report not filtering user properly

                                                  When filtering by user, the report was not evaluating that user as the Audit coder of record; instead it was evaluating as the auditor that opened the audit. This has been corrected for both the Audit – Inpatient Coder Scorecard and the Audit- Outpatient Coder Scorecard.

                                                  CACTWO-5532 (Important)

                                                  Working History is duplicating

                                                  Working CDI History was duplicating the first baseline DRG. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5534 (Important)

                                                  Engine Outcome per CDI report needs a column change

                                                  The Totals column is actually based on averages, so the name of the column has been changed to Averages.

                                                  CACTWO-5535 (Important)

                                                  Caution codes should not be assignable

                                                  If a Document Type is set to have a caution code, it will now be unassignable. In this case, the Operative document called Operative Report is set to have Caution Coding for all patient types:

                                                  In the Unassigned Codes pane, any code attached to that document will show in a yellow background, and will not have the option to assign on the right click menu.

                                                  CACTWO-5536 (Important)

                                                  Data on worksheets is disappearing when printing then leaving viewer

                                                  If a worksheet with a multi-line text field is added to an account and filled in, printing it and then moving to another viewer, like Physicians and Queries, was blanking out the sheet data. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5549 (Enhancement)

                                                  Remove blue bar titles in a template with sections

                                                  For Physician Query templates that use sections, the blue bar will still show, the title or wording within that bar will no longer show. Blue bar remains so that section can still be moved around or deleted.

                                                  CACTWO-5556 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create new fields for Grid Configuration

                                                  New fields have been created in the Grid Configuration for addition to pages. Fields are Physician Coding First Coder and Physician Coding First Submitter. These fields are retroactive.

                                                  CACTWO-5562 (Important)

                                                  Scheduled Reports not opening if report is actively running

                                                  Several reports were not opening if they were being actively processed at the moment a user tried to open them. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5563 (Important)

                                                  CC/MCC Capture Rate report totals are not correct

                                                  Non-CC/MCC DRGS are being calculated in the totals of the CC/MCC Capture Rate report. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5565 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Working and Final Principal Diagnosis Code fields

                                                  New field options for setting up criteria for Final, Working and Physician coding. The new fields will start with Principal for final coding, Working Principal for CDI and Physician Coding Principal for Physician coding.

                                                  CACTWO-5566 (Important)

                                                  Charges attached to codes not included in encoder calculations

                                                  When calculating APC or EAPG for charge codes with the TruCode™ or Solventum™ encoders, the charge per unit was not included. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5567 (Important)

                                                  Lists with spaces and commas are not correctly triggering workflow

                                                  If a list in a workgroup criteria was created with a space or spaces before commas within the list, the criteria was not being triggered. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5570 (Important)

                                                  Names are being created with starting or ending spaces

                                                  User ID, first, middle and last name fields should not be able to be created in User Management if they start or end with spaces. This has been corrected and if a space is detected, a red error message will appear.

                                                  CACTWO-5589 (Important)

                                                  Display issues when toggling in Show History

                                                  When in Show History, if the user was toggling on and off the workflow button after selecting a record, display issues were occurring. This has been changed so that if a user makes a selection from the lefthand list and then toggles on and off either the User or Workflow buttons, the selection will clear.

                                                  CACTWO-5590 (Important)

                                                  TruCode™ Standalone not adding codes

                                                  When clicking the Pencil symbol next to a blank code field in TruCode Standalone encoder and selecting a code, the code was not being added to the field. This has been corrected.

                                                  Info

                                                  This feature is only applicable if you have the TruCode encoder.

                                                  CACTWO-5592 (Important)

                                                  TruCode™ Standalone not editing codes properly

                                                  When editing a code in the TruCode™ Standalone feature, instead of replacing the old code with the new one selected from the Code Book, it was keeping the old code and adding the new one on its own line. This has been corrected.

                                                  Info

                                                  This feature is only applicable if you have the TruCode encoder.

                                                  CACTWO-5596 (Important)

                                                  Workgroup not appearing in Account List dropdown

                                                  If a Workgroup contains more than 5000 accounts, it is not appearing in the Account List dropdown. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5604 (Important)

                                                  Prevent Change Conflict message for custom workflow flags

                                                  If a site has custom workflow flags implemented, they will now be able to prevent the change conflict dialog from appearing when saving or submitting an account.

                                                  Info

                                                  Please contact Support to implement this feature.

                                                  V2.51 (Jul 2023)

                                                  V2.51.8581 Released 07/07/23

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-5202 CACTWO-5648 (Enhancement)

                                                  Added the ability to see APR-DRG in Principal Dx Analyzer for TruCode

                                                  When a TruCode user clicks the Principal Dx option on the Compute button, they will now see data columns for APR-DRG (if they are set up with an APR- DRG Grouper). If an account is not configured to use an APR-DRG grouper, they will only see the usual MS-DRG data.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This feature only applies to TruCode™ users.

                                                  CACTWO-5921 (Enhancement)

                                                  New Page Display for Workflow Management

                                                  The new workflow management page display offers new capabilities including:

                                                  • Enhanced Vertical Viewing Space for Workgroups - This display provides an improved vertical viewing space, allowing workgroups to access and manage their workflows more efficiently.
                                                  • Side-by-Side Comparison of Workgroups - This will allow users to compare and analyze workgroups with a side-by-side comparison.
                                                  • Filtering Ability to Search Workgroups by Specific Fields - This feature allows you to filter on all workgroups that has a specific field
                                                  • Cleaner/Sleeker Look and Feel

                                                  We understand the importance of ensuring a smooth transition. To accommodate your preferences, we have implemented a convenient option to switch between the classic view and the new page display. To facilitate the adoption of this new view, we will be maintaining the classic workflow management for a few releases. This way, you can transition gradually and comfortably, choosing the workflow management that suits your immediate needs. To simplify the transition process further, we have imported all your existing workflows into the new workflow management system. This means you can make changes in either of the pages and it updates the other.

                                                  This will allow you to become familiar with the enhanced features and maximize the benefits they offer.

                                                  CACTWO-5244 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow filtering in Workflow Configuration workgroups

                                                  Users can now filter Workgroups by a variety of fields in the new workflow managment. At the top of the new Workgroup column there is a filter icon.

                                                  Clicking on the filter icon will open a gray box from where the user can add filter, and then Apply it to whittle down the workgroups to only the ones the user wants to review.

                                                  After the Apply Filters link is clicked, the workgroups will filter to only show accounts that match the filter. The filter symbol turns green to alert the user that they are working within a filter.

                                                  When the filter is no longer necessary, the user can click the green filter icon to open the filters. A little garbage can will show to the right of the filter, allowing it to be deleted.

                                                  CACTWO-5488 (Enhancement)

                                                  Support Pediatric Quality Indicators

                                                  The application now supports PDI – Pediatric Quality Indicators . This feature is included in the Quality Module, please contact support to enable. If you do not have the Quality Module this is an additional cost.

                                                  CACTWO-5597 (Enhancement)

                                                  Assigned users in workgroups will show both name and ID number

                                                  The new Workflow Management will now display both the name and login ID of the assigned users. In the new Workflow Management, the assigned users will now show both their login ID and their name.

                                                  CACTWO-5633 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Flowsheet comments to pop out

                                                  If a Discrete Value comes in with data in the comment field, the user can now right click and choose ‘View Result in Window’ in order to see the full comment.

                                                  CACTWO-5666 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Charges viewer to auto-refresh

                                                  It will now refresh the Charges viewer if it is open when an account change conflict occurs.

                                                  CACTWO-5672 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add time to procedure dates in Account Search

                                                  If the user wants to see time along with the dates assigned to procedure codes, they can have a script run to add that. Then, when drilling down in Account Search and selecting procedure code options that have dates, the time will also display.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  CACTWO-5698 (Enhancement)

                                                  Check DRG weight to determine if there is DRG Reconciliation mismatch

                                                  During Reconciliation of the CDI DRG and Coder DRG, the weight of those DRGs will also be compared.With APR-DRG you have the same DRG with a different DRG Weight due to the ROM/SOI that drives the DRG weight.

                                                  CACTWO-5714 (Important)

                                                  Not receiving timeout reminder

                                                  When timing out of CAC while in a physician query, when logging back in, the user is not receiving the timeout reminder letting them know the account was not completed. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5754 (Important)

                                                  Shorten date/time fields in Form Designer

                                                  The date and datetime fields in Form Designer takes up the whole line, which doesn’t allow for additional data to be added next to the date or datetime. These fields have now have a shortened max width.

                                                  CACTWO-5756 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow sharing of worksheets

                                                  A new section in Form Designer has been created called Shared Worksheets. Worksheets added here will be visible and editable by both CDI and Coders. With the help of Support, worksheets that are currently CDI OR Coder can be changed to Shared.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to change existing worksheets to Shared.

                                                  CACTWO-5761 (Important)

                                                  Account List sort order is not being retained

                                                  If a user had no accounts in his ‘You’ folder, but does have accounts in other workgroups, then a sort order that is created is not being retained when moving back and forth to the Recent Views screen. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5767 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add a Physician Charges drill down for Account Search and Validation Editor

                                                  A new drill down in account search was created for Physician Charges and within Validation Editor.

                                                  Physician Coding Users Only

                                                  This feature only applies to Physician Coding users.

                                                  CACTWO-5771 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow mappings to be dragged and dropped

                                                  Mappings can now be dragged and dropped within the list to other positions, rather than using up and down arrows. The drag must be done from any whitespace on that line, you cannot drag from within the input boxes or buttons.

                                                  CACTWO-5775 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Workflow Audits to be done in monthly schedules

                                                  When setting up an Audit workflow criteria, clicking on the line to create the audit will now allow the user to schedule monthly and restrict the months – numerically – that the audit occurs. In this instance, the Restrict Months box is checkmarked and it is set to run on the first, second and fourth month of the year.

                                                  CACTWO-5778 (Enhancement)

                                                  Remove several columns in the Physician Coding Assigned Codes drill down

                                                  Several columns have been removed from the Physician Assigned Codes drill down in the account search as they are not useful.

                                                  • Physician Coding Episode
                                                  • POA Exempt Code
                                                  • Is Principal
                                                  • POA
                                                  • PPC

                                                  CACTWO-5787 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow reports with PHI to be scheduled

                                                  Currently, user reports that include PHI cannot be scheduled. That has been changed so that all reports can be scheduled. Reports with PHI will show a disclaimer message when they are chosen. The disclaimer must be checkmarked in order for the schedule to be saved.

                                                  CACTWO-5795 (Important)

                                                  Single Path and Physician coders are handling code validation differently

                                                  Code validity was in question since Single Path follow Discharge Date and Physician Coders follow Admit date. When an accounts dates crossed a quarter, codes were not validation properly. This has been updated so that both Single Path and Physician coders follow the Discharge date.

                                                  CACTWO-5800 (Important)

                                                  Drag and drop in the Edit All Codes table is stopping the scroll bar

                                                  When clicking on a code in the Edit All Codes table to drag and drop, the scroll bar no longer works. This has been updated so that to drag and drop, the user must drag and drop in white space on that line, or from the POA, Date or Physician boxes.

                                                  CACTWO-5805 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add a query type column in the Queries drill down in Account Search

                                                  A new Query Type column is now available in the Queries drill down in Account Search. Retrospective will show in the column if the Query was created after the Discharge Date. All other accounts will show as Concurrent.

                                                  CACTWO-5814 (Important)

                                                  Validation rules based on Physicians assigned to Procedures do not work

                                                  Validation rules that included a filter of Procedure Physicians was not reading the field when looping through multiple Procedures. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5825 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show Physician Specialty in Charges and Transactions viewer

                                                  Physician Coders can now see the specialty of the Physician assigned to a procedure code in the Charges/Transactions viewer if the opt-in script has been run.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to activate this option.

                                                  CACTWO-5829 (Important)

                                                  Navigation Tree is showing Physician Queries when there aren’t any open

                                                  If the user was reviewing their accounts using Autoload and pinned the Navigation Tree so that it was open, the Navigation Tree was showing a color alert for Physician Query, indicating there is an open query, even when there was not. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5874 (Important)

                                                  Solventum™ date fields are grayed out in the Encoder

                                                  When Solventum™ is launched via the Encoder menu and the user changes to APCFinder or DRGFinder, the Admit and Discharge date fields are locked. This has been corrected.

                                                  Solventum™ Users Only.

                                                  This fix only applies to Solventum™ users.

                                                  CACTWO-5895 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add today into the last 7 days calculation on the CDI Management

                                                  Dashboard In the CDI Management Dashboard, ‘today’ work was not being included in the last 7 days calculation for intial cases reviewed and cases re-reviewed. Today’s work will now be included.

                                                  V2.52 (Sep 2023)

                                                  V2.52.8658 Released 09/22/23

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-5428 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow an alt-click to open code editor

                                                  In the Assigned code tree, the user can now alt-click to get a partial code editor that is based on that assigned code. In the Unassigned code tree, an alt-click will open a full code editor, since no action has been assigned yet to that code.

                                                  CACTWO-5504 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add verification prompt to Cancel button

                                                  A new message box will prompt when a user cancels out of an account after making a change and not saving.

                                                  CACTWO-5533 (Enhancement)

                                                  Improve support for copying and pasting queries

                                                  Some customers create a physcian query from within form designer and then copy and paste it into a different system, they were finding that the signature block could not be copied and was indented and wanted it to be left aligned. Additionally, any input fields where the user typed information into was bold and they requested non-bolding. This enhancement covers these three items:

                                                  1. Signatures will no longer be indented
                                                  2. After the query is created, the query contents and the signature can now be copied together.
                                                  3. Text entered into field will no longer display in bold
                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to activate the non-bold text option. The bolding was intially added as an option for those sites to be able to tell what was keyed in by the end user appart from the template.

                                                  CACTWO-5539 (Enhancement)

                                                  Warn user if no shift reasons selected

                                                  If a user closes a query and does not make a valid selection in the manual shift reason box, a warning will alert them that no selections have been made, and they can either ok that or cancel it and make a selection.

                                                  CACTWO-5588 (Enhancement)

                                                  Added ‘starts with’ to be used as an operator in some criteria

                                                  The ability to use ‘starts with’ in criteria has been added in these pages for all fields that provide a list of string values, such as codes and document types:

                                                  • Account Search
                                                  • Workflow Management
                                                  • Validation Management

                                                  An example of how you would use this would be if you want to run an account search to look for procedures with a range. For example, any procedure code that begins with 021 or 02Y. You would write the logic like the below.

                                                  Assigned Procedure Codes –> Starts With –> 021,02Y

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  If you wish to use this operator with AutoClose, you must contact Support for updated AutoClose script.

                                                  CACTWO-5602 (Enhancement)

                                                  Remove ‘hover’ from the Navigation Tree

                                                  The Navigation Tree will no longer expand when hovered over. The user will now have to specifically click the arrow to open it. The system will remember this preference between accounts.

                                                  CACTWO-5618 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Elixhauser code description to tag

                                                  If a code has a tag after it, which identifies an Elixhauser code, hovering over the tag will now give the Elixhauser definition previously it only displayed the abbreviations it now displays the friendly name as well. This can be seen across all appropriate viewers in an accounts Navigation Tree.

                                                  CACTWO-5681 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add notes to Audit worksheet for the outcome columns

                                                  In the Audit Management viewer, the Coder and Auditor outcome columns now have a conversation bubble added to the right of each column heading, to be used for general audit notes.

                                                  CACTWO-5764 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add patient fields to the sort order in Workflow Management

                                                  The sort on a workgorup in Workflow Management will now allow sorting by patient fields, such as patient last name.

                                                  CACTWO-5798 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow text changes in Audit viewer for Training Recommendations

                                                  The Auditor can now format the text in the Training Recommentations box within the audit viewer. To do this highlight the words and the format menu will be presented like other areas in the software.

                                                  CACTWO-5799 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add CPT Modifiers as part of the CPT code errors

                                                  The Audit Management viewer will now include totals for modifiers, including modifiers that were added or removed, CPT Score and Error rate.

                                                  CACTWO-5827 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow criteria to use a specific code and POA value

                                                  There is now the ability to create account search and workflow criteria with a criteria of ‘Assigned Diagnosis Code of a specific code with POA of N. Note this is a new field “Assigned Diagnosis Codes with a POA of N “ For example, a user may want to review any patient that has a diagnosis code for acute kidney failure with a POA of N.

                                                  CACTWO-5861 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add the ability to check a box on shift reasons dialog next to the code that caused the shift

                                                  When a physician query is closed that creates Shift Reasons, if you have manual shift reasons turned on you will now see a check box next to the codes that allows you to check the box next to each code that was the reason for the shift.

                                                  If the user checks a box, that code will appear in the shift reason description on the closed query.

                                                  CACTWO-5891 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Document Date to Account Changed warning box

                                                  A new column for Document Date has been added to the Account Changed warning box. Now when a document is added to an account from an outside feed and the account is saved aftere that, the warning box will now show the date of the added document.

                                                  CACTWO-5893 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create a collapse/expand menu option in Flowsheet

                                                  In the Flowsheet viewer, a right click in the Major Category column will show a menu allowing the user to expand or collapse all categories.

                                                  CACTWO-5899 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow clicking on white space to update Flowsheet

                                                  In the Flowsheet viewer, Major Category column, when you moused over the major categories the whole section would highlight in blue and the mouse becomes a hand with a finger to indicate you can click it. However, the actual click is only registered if you were to click on the major category. This has been updated so that if the user clicks on the white space next to the subject, the Flowsheet viewer will update to show that subject’s data.

                                                  CACTWO-5911 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Final Code Summary to pop out to a new tab

                                                  The Final Code Summary viewer now has the ability to pop out into another browser tab. Please contact Support to enable this option.

                                                  CACTWO-5927 (Enhancement)

                                                  Automatically un-filter when deleting filters in new Workflow Management

                                                  page If a filter is created on the new Workflow Management previously, if you clicked the garbage can icon and didn’t click “apply filters again it didn’t unfilter. Now by clicking on the filter, it turns green once the parameters are set, and filters accordingly. But if you click on the filter again and then the garbage can, the workgroups that had been filtered out are not coming back without having to click extra keys. This has been corrected so that when a filter is deleted, all the workgroups return.

                                                  CACTWO-5930 (Enhancement)

                                                  Make the disabled workflow criteria coloring more obvious

                                                  Currently, when disabling criteria in the new Workflow Management page, the criteria is struck out with red hyphens. To make this more noticeable, the entire square the has the criteria will be surrounded by a red hyphenated line.

                                                  CACTWO-5931 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add tag on categories in new Workflow Management for active numbers

                                                  A gray oval tab has been added next to each Category in the the new Workflow Management page to show the number of active workgroups.

                                                  CACTWO-5939 (Enhancement)

                                                  Prevent Autosave during timeout if another save/submit occurred

                                                  If an account is opened in two different browsers and one of them is saved before an auto timeout occurs, the account will ‘read’ that the account was updated in another browser, and when timing out, will not autosave the account. This is so that work done and saved in a second browser is not overwritten by the first browsers time out.

                                                  CACTWO-5945 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add ablility to copy rows in Flowsheet

                                                  In the Flowsheet viewer, the user can now right click on a row and select to copy the row.

                                                  When pasted, the Name column and the Date/Results column will appear; the reference column will not. For example

                                                  Name03/27/2023 12:20:0803/27/2023 20:12:43
                                                  Base Excess Art (mmol/L)6.96.6 3.1

                                                  CACTWO-5948 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Total Auditor Drafts to the Dashboard

                                                  In the Open Queries panel of the Dashboard, Total Auditor Drafts have been added for consistency.

                                                  CACTWO-5967 (Important)

                                                  PPC code is not being retained when leaving and re-entering an account

                                                  When computing a DRG, PPC codes are sometimes added to the account. If the user saved the account, left, and reopened later, the PPC was no longer showing. This has been corrected so that PPC codes remain in the banner bar and on the Code Summary viewer.

                                                  CACTWO-5968 (Important)

                                                  Friendly name change causing issues with pulling up worksheets

                                                  If the friendly name of a worksheet is changed in Document Types Management, users adding that worksheet designed in form designer on an account would not get the correct worksheet. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5970 (Important)

                                                  Shared Minor category not showing proper data in Flowsheet

                                                  If a Flowsheet viewer has a minor category that shares its name with other minor categories clicking on one was showing the data for all, which it should not do. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5974 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create select all button next to the code type section in Audit Management viewer

                                                  Auditors will now see a checkbox on the Audit Worksheet on each code type heading, ie, Diagnosis. Clicking on that box will select all codes under that heading. This allows the auditor to check off the codes they reviewed as part of there audit, if needed.

                                                  CACTWO-5978 (Important)

                                                  Add Random Inclusion Factor as a sort column in workflow management

                                                  In workflow management, random inclusion factor field was not available. This feature adds this as a sort option.

                                                  CACTWO-5982 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add an ‘Add All’ button to charges viewer for physician coders

                                                  When a physician coder is working in a charge viewer, they can add all diagnosis that have been added to the assigned code tree by clicking on the ‘Add All’ button will add all diagnosis codes assigned to the account, up to 12 codes.

                                                  CACTWO-5983 (Important)

                                                  Procedure PPCs are not being counted in the Final PPC Total field

                                                  Previously, only Diagnosis PPCs were counted in the Final PPC Total field. This has been corrected so if the Final PPC Total column has been added to the grid, it will count both Diagnosis and Procedure PPCs.

                                                  CACTWO-5987 (Important)

                                                  Manual assignment of custom categories not being applied

                                                  When manually assigning an account to a custom workflow category from account search, it was not displaying on show history. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-5989 (Enhancement)

                                                  Update PSI and PDI Quality indicators

                                                  The PSI and PDI Quality Indicators have been updated to AHRQ v2023

                                                  CACTWO-6004 (Enhancement)

                                                  Move the Add/Edit Code Comment option in the right click menu

                                                  Add/Edit Code Comment has been moved below the Edit Code option in the right click menu found in the document code tree and the Show All Code tree. This was requested by a few customers as the users were familiar with where the assign secondary fields were and it was causing them to scroll and accidently click the wrong action. This field has been moved down since its not used as much as these other fields

                                                  CACTWO-6032 (Important)

                                                  Unable to copy and paste a list in Workflow Management

                                                  If a user wants to copy all or part of a list contained in a criteria in the new workflow management page, they are able to highlight, but it does not copy. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-6056 (Important)

                                                  Unable to see full name of Workgroup in new Workflow page

                                                  A long Workgroup name is not being displayed properly in the new workflow management page. The view has been changed to show as much of the name as possible followed by ellipsis. Workgroups also now have a hover over which will show the full name of the group.

                                                  CACTWO-6059 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Validation Management to filter for code comments

                                                  In Validation Management, the user can select the ‘for each’ checkbox and see a new option of Code Comments. Also added to the Navigation dropdown is Notes & Bookmarks. This will take the user to the Notes & Bookmarks viewer when the validation rule in Code Summary is clicked on.

                                                  V2.53 (Dec 2023)

                                                  V2.53.8745 Released 12/15/23

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  New Module (Enhancement)

                                                  Add CDI/Clinical Alerts Module

                                                  The software has a feature called CDI/Clinical Alerts which are automated messages generated by the software that can be used to prioritize your CDI workflow. CDI/Clinical Alerts are used to detect potential inaccuracies, inconsistencies and or discrepancies in clinical documentation. These Alerts help CDI teams to prioritize the charts based on potential query opportunities available.

                                                  The software provides real-time Alerts when potential query opportunities are identified. Which will then allow CDI staff to prioritize charts based upon those potential opportunities.

                                                  CDI/Clinical Alerts can also be used by coding and auditing charts where CDI did not review the chart.

                                                  Contact SME for more information

                                                  If you are upgrading, please contact Dolbey’s SME Team for more information on purchasing and enabling this feature.

                                                  CACTWO-5378 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow multiple Denials to be added to a single account

                                                  The Denial Management viewer will now allow multiple sheets to be created. Sheets can also be deleted via a red X to the right of each Denial heading. When reporting in Account Search, a new Denials drilldown is available, but it will only report on the first Denial on each account.

                                                  CACTWO-5423 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Pending Reasons to Discharge Not Final Coded user report

                                                  A new column for pending reasons has been added to the Discharge Not Final Coded user report. If there are multiple pending reasons, they will be separated by a comma.

                                                  CACTWO-5446 (Important)

                                                  Recalculate query counts when saving an account

                                                  Currently, if a user was in an account that had an open physician query, and an external interface closed that query, the count on the Account List for the Query Total would still show the query open. This has been changed so that the query total on the account is updated upon closing the account.

                                                  CACTWO-5481 (Enhancement)

                                                  Users with multiple roles would like column orders to be maintained

                                                  Currently, if a user has multiple roles (e.g., Coder, Auditor, CDI Specialist), when the columns are changed for one role, the other roles are automatically set to match. This has been changed so that column changes for Account List, Charges and Transaction Viewers, and Medication viewers can now all be unique to each role.

                                                  CACTWO-5537 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow physician field when embedded on physician query to display

                                                  automatically A new field option has been added to Form Designer under the +Add Field selection.. If the Physician field is added to a Physician Query, then the physician that is assigned will automatically show in that field.

                                                  CACTWO-5667 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Auditor to ‘run for’ on Scheduled Reports

                                                  The ‘run for’ field in Scheduled Reports will now show an ‘Auditor Only’ option for these reports:

                                                  • Outstanding Queries
                                                  • Query Impact Report
                                                  • Query Impact by Discharge Date
                                                  • Query TAT by Author Report
                                                  • Query Template Volume Overview
                                                  • Query Template Volume by Discharge Date
                                                  • User Session Log

                                                  CACTWO-5873 (Enhancement)

                                                  Display the document author in hover over on Documents pane

                                                  A hover over will now display on the documents pane to provide the author of the document if it is sent from the interface.

                                                  CACTWO-5955 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Validation Rule to add a Pending Reason

                                                  In Validation Management, a new field has been added to the rules that are created called Pending Reason. This field will have a dropdown with all available pending reasons. If a rule is triggered on an account and it has a pending reason attached, then the pending reason will be added and the user will be able to see the number of the rule. Pending reasons that have a physician or date requirement will NOT be available in this list. The only way to remove a pending reason that was added by a rule is to have that rule cleared.

                                                  CACTWO-5964 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Document Search box to be resized

                                                  In an account, when the Document Search is opened, the box can now be resized by grabbing and pulling the lower right corner.

                                                  CACTWO-5972 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add zoom in and out ability to text based documents

                                                  The ability to zoom in and out has been added as a right click option in documents, both on the main page and a pop out. This new zoom feature will work for Chrome and Edge users. When a user selects a zoom level, that level will be retained for all documents and the last zoom used before log out is the zoom level the user will get when they sign back in.

                                                  CACTWO-6041 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Provider Name and Date to the document viewer header

                                                  If there is a physician name and date of service that is sent on the interface for a document, the physician name and date will now show in the document viewer header, on the popout, and in the Ctrl+ click of the header.

                                                  CACTWO-6098 (Enhancement)

                                                  Highlight Navigation Tree if Query draft exists

                                                  The Physicians & Queries viewer on the Navigation Tree will now show with an amber highlight if there is a Query Draft. When the draft is either updated and sent or deleted, the amber color will go away.

                                                  CACTWO-6107 (Enhancement)

                                                  On HCC codes, display HCC version to support V24 and v28

                                                  A code that is followed by an HCC indicator in account detail will now display the version of HCC for calendar year 2023 (retroactively) and 2024 when the user hovers over the H in the Assigned Codes panel. On the Final Code Summary and the Working CDI History viewer, the code’s HCC designation will show the HCC number and its version.

                                                  CACTWO-6108 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow history on changes in Form Designer

                                                  Form Designer will now create a history for changes made in Form Designer. Once a change is made on a form and saved, a Show History button will show in the top right of the worksheet. Clicking on it will bring up a notes box allowing for the end user to make a note as to the change, this function like the Workflow Management viewer notes.

                                                  CACTWO-6115 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add more fields to Denial Management viewer

                                                  Additional fields for a 3rd appeal and extra DRG information have been added to the Denial Management viewer. These fields can also be added to Grid Maintenance.

                                                  CACTWO-6117 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow all stratums for PSI 04 quality indicators to show in Code Summary

                                                  In the Algorithm for Quality Indicators section of the Code Summary viewer, only the first PSI 04 indicator is displaying. This has been updated to show all 5 of the indicators.

                                                  CACTWO-6118 (Important)

                                                  CDI Activity Report grand total line is incorrect if users are filtered

                                                  If the CDI Activity Report is being filtered to just one user, the Grand Total line is showing the total for all users instead of just the one filtered. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-6120 (Important)

                                                  OR groups are not showing in new Workflow Management page

                                                  If an OR group is added to workgroup level criteria, it is not appearing within each criteria group. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-6122 (Important)

                                                  Audit Management error rate not being reported correctly in reports

                                                  The following reports were not calculating the Audit Management error rate correctly. They have been corrected.

                                                  • Audit Executive Summary
                                                  • Inpatient Auditor Productivity
                                                  • Inpatient Coder Scorecard
                                                  • Outpatient Audit Scorecard
                                                  • Outpatient Auditor Productivity
                                                  • Outpatient Coder Scorecard

                                                  CACTWO-6125 (Important)

                                                  CDI Activity Report is not reporting Reconciliation correctly

                                                  The CDI Activity Report was reporting a DRG Reconciliation if an account set for DRG Reconciliation was opened, but then canceled out. This has been corrected so that accts canceled will no longer be included.

                                                  CACTWO-6126 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Users to be excluded from the Inactivity prompt

                                                  New funcitonality has been added so that Role Management now contains an option to exclude a role type from being triggered.

                                                  CACTWO-6135 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Flowsheet to save the collapse function

                                                  If a user collapses or uncollapses a major category on the Flowsheet viewer, that configuration will remain for all accounts that have the Flowsheet viewer. Note that if a user collapses/uncollapses a major category in the pop out, it will not be seen on the main page until the user moves to a different viewer and back.

                                                  CACTWO-6136 (Important)

                                                  Auditor Physician Query Draft line is not showing on Dashboard

                                                  If an auditor, CDI specialist, or coder has at least one query draft but no sent queries, the total drafts count will now appear for the role with the open queries, unanswered, and answer counts displaying as zero on the dashboard.

                                                  CACTWO-6144 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show friendly values in Workflow dropdowns

                                                  Currently the new Workflow Management page is not showing the friendly value for criteria of a property with a mapping. This has been changed to show the friendly value, just like the classic Workflow Management page.

                                                  CACTWO-6146 (Important)

                                                  Solventum is opening another instance when opening a dashboard drilldown

                                                  If a user opens a dashboard drilldown, another window with Solventum is opened. This has been corrected so that there is only ever one Solventum open.

                                                  Solventum Web Component Users Only

                                                  This fix is only applicable for Solventum Web Component users.

                                                  CACTWO-6147 (Enhancement)

                                                  Hide Visit reason fields if there are none on the account

                                                  The Audit Management Worksheet viewer will no longer show all of the Visit Reason fields if there are no visit reasons on the account left by the coder or the auditor. If a visit reason is added by the auditor during the audit process, the Visit Reason fields will open up when the auditor clicks the Update Codes button.

                                                  CACTWO-6150 (Important)

                                                  Reports are not properly counting intial reviews of accounts

                                                  If a CDI Specialist creates a Baseline DRG (the first Working DRG), then edits the account further causing the Working DRG to be cleared, and then saves the account without computing a new Working DRG, the creation of the Baseline DRG now counts as an initial review.

                                                  CACTWO-6181 (Important)

                                                  New Workflow Management page is holding Note text when it should clear

                                                  Adding text into the Note field in a workgroup was resulting in that same text appearing in every subsequent workflow This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-6188 (Important)

                                                  Adding workflow is changing the workflow order in User Maintenance

                                                  If new workflow is added to the new Workflow Management page, the users attached to that workflow are having their order in the User Management profile change. This has been corrected so that any newly added workflow will go to the end of the list in the new Workflow Management page and the User Management profile.

                                                  CACTWO-6195 (Important)

                                                  Reporting is not calculating manually added codes properly

                                                  Two user reports (Coder Suggestion Use by Coder and Engine Results by Documents) were not calculating codes added manually. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-6201 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Query to be created and closed in one step

                                                  For customers who do not have a physician query interface and do not createa physician query until a response is received, a query can now be created and not sent. When enabled, a physician query will show a “Continue” button in place of “Send”. Clicking the ‘Continue’ button will refresh the query to open the physician response fields so that the query can then be closed. This is common for Epic EHR customers.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  CACTWO-6202 (Important)

                                                  Improve performance of encoder calculations with several codes

                                                  When a user performs an encoder computation, the red bar showing that an encoder is open was taking a few seconds to disappear over the Compute/Save/Submit buttons. This has been corrected so that it disappers sooner.

                                                  CACTWO-6204 (Enhancement)

                                                  Update Audit reports to show blank for accuracy

                                                  For the Inpatient Coder Scorecard and the Outpatient Coder Scorecard if there are no CPT or PCS codes, the CPT Codes and PCS Codes accuracy columns will now display as blank, rather than 100%.

                                                  CACTWO-6205 (Enhancement)

                                                  Make Accuracy rates stand out in the Audit Worksheet

                                                  To make the accuracy rate lines stand out in the Audit Worksheet, the backgrounds have been changed to show as light blue.

                                                  CACTWO-6217 (Important)

                                                  Field in worksheet showing as ‘Select an item’ when printed

                                                  On worksheets, dropdowns prompting users to select an item were not displaying the selection when that worksheet was printed. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-6224 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow DRG Reconcilation to compare DRG weight

                                                  A new setting has been created that, when set to true, will compare DRG weights as well as the DRG during reconciliation. By default, the comparing of DRG Weights will be disabled.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to implement this change.

                                                  CACTWO-6225 (Important)

                                                  Account Search not using ‘only contains’ properly with “Assigned Diagnosis with POA N” field

                                                  Account Search will now correctly use the Only Contains criterion.

                                                  CACTWO-6239 (Important)

                                                  Code Suggestion by Coder report is not calculating correctly

                                                  When a code is being added via Solventum to an account that is then being submitted, that code is not showing up in the Direct column of the From Other Sources section of the Code Suggestion Use by Coder report. This has been corrected.

                                                  V2.54 (Apr 2024)

                                                  V2.54.8854 Released 04/05/2024

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  CACTWO-5598 (Enhancement)

                                                  Include new accounts when autoloading

                                                  A new database setting has been created to allow a change to how auto- loading works.

                                                  When set to true, if an account is added to a workgroup currently being worked by a user with auto-load enabled and that new account has a discharge date before the date of the account being worked, the next account to autoload will be that new account, rather than the next account in the workgroup list.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact CAC Support to enable this feature.

                                                  CACTWO-5823 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create symbols to identify Auditor code changes on Audit Worksheet

                                                  The Audit Worksheet will display new symbols next to codes that were changed between the Coder and Auditor.

                                                  • A green ‘plus’ sign indicates the code was added.
                                                  • A red ‘minus’ sign indicates the code was deleted.
                                                  • A orange up or down ‘arrow’ sign indicates the code location has been changed (ex. a primary and secondary are swapped.)

                                                  CACTWO-5865 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Audit Subtypes to be context sensitive based upon what audit type was selected

                                                  A new column has been added to Mapping Configuration for the Auidt Type mapping. This new Audit Subtype column will allow Administration to limit the subtypes available for each Audit Type.

                                                  When an auditor then selects that Audit type in the Audit Worksheet, instead of getting the full list of subtypes, the user will only see the subtypes allowed.

                                                  In this example, the Audit Type CC/MCC only has a subtype of Coder available, so that is all that will show in the dropdown selection.

                                                  CACTWO-6030 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add a section for Rebills to the Audit Worksheet

                                                  The end of the Audit Worksheet has been changed to allow for an Auditor to ask if the audit requires a rebill.

                                                  When answered ‘Yes,’ the Auditor can additional record a date for a rebill.

                                                  CACTWO-6033 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow auditor to submit and route to coder post audit

                                                  An Auditor can now submit an account and either 1) submit and close the audit, or 2) complete an audit on a chart, submit it as the auditor and then route it back to the coder without the need to go back into the chart and route it to the coder. This new box will appear when submitting an audit if the audit isn’t closed yet and when doing so, will receive this new query box:

                                                  CACTWO-6060 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Audit worksheet to be printed

                                                  A new print button at the top right of an audit worksheet will allow the worksheet to be printed.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact CAC Support to enable printing

                                                  CACTWO-6074 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change the way Forced Autoload works

                                                  Several changes have been made to how Forced Autoload lists to-do accounts for the user.

                                                  • When a Forced Autoload user logs off (and does or does not close the browser) and logs back in during the same calendar the application will remember where the user left off and start the autoload feed there.
                                                  Additional Configuration May Be Required

                                                  If you would like this changed back to the original ‘start from beginning upon launch of ‘Go To Next Autoload’; please contact Support.

                                                  • If a user has a chart assigned directly to them while they are working on an assigned list, that chart will be next in the autoload process. When completed, the user will be taken back to where they left off within the list they were working.
                                                  • If a support personnel re-assigns a chart to a workgroup that is currently being worked by a forced autoload user and the chart’s discharge date is older than the one the forced user is currently in, when the user cancels/saves the account, the earlier chart wll be next in the list. After the chart is completed, the list will resume where the user left of

                                                  CACTWO-6116 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Privilege in Role Management to allow a user to add an account note or bookmark and worksheet

                                                  A new privilege, Edit Only Account Notes, Bookmarks, and Worksheets has been created in Role Management to disallow any code work. When this privilege, is checked, the role will be able to only add a Note or Bookmark to a document, add and edit new worksheets, and add a comment on an unassigned code. No coding work can be done.

                                                  CACTWO-6168 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow lists to be attached to keys in Mapping Configuration

                                                  A new Mapping Configuration has been created called CriteriaFindAndReplace. Once that mapping is created, keys attached to lists of items can be added. In Account Search,Workflow, and Scheduled Account Searche, the key can be used after the operator of ‘In List’ or ‘Includes Any Of’ as applicable when creating criteria. The key will allow all items attached to it to be considered in the equation.

                                                  For example, if a user wants to create a key for Elixhauser to be used for the diagnosis codes within a group, they would add a key of Elixhuaser categories, with the description being the comma separated list of each of the different categories for example:

                                                  Then, in Account Search, Scheduled Account Search, or Workflow, the user would use a criteria as shown below. CAC2 will look at ‘ELIX_HF` and apply the criteria to all of the numbers listed in the Mapping description in the equation.

                                                  If an account had a diagnosis code of I50.20, this criteria would pick it up, since that code is associated with the key of ELIX_HF.

                                                  Case Sensitive

                                                  This field is case sensitive. Criteria must match the case of the key in Mappings.

                                                  Elixhauser Mappings

                                                  For Elixhauser users, having the Elixhauser coding updated will automatically create keys and descriptions for all Diagnosis Codes associated with Elixhauser in this new mapping.

                                                  CACTWO-6170 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow filtering of multiple documents in the Documents Viewer

                                                  On an account, the user can now select multiple documents from the Documents pane by using Shift+Left Click or Ctrl+ LeftClick, then right-clicking to choose ‘Filter Selected’.

                                                  This will hide all unselected documents. A filter button will show in the panel title showing the total number of documents along with what have been filtered. In the below example, the account had 14 documents and was filtered so that only 3 showed. When the filter button is clicked, hidden documents will reappear. The filter can also be canceled by clicking on any code in the Unassigned/All Code trees.

                                                  CACTWO-6203 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create error message when computing Solventum with dates prior to Oct 1 2015

                                                  Currently, TruCode™ displays a red error message if a user tries to compute a DRG when an account has an Admit date, Discharge date, or Procedure Date before October 1, 2015. This error has been extended to include computations using Solventum™.

                                                  Solventum™ Users Only

                                                  This feature applies to Solventum Users Only

                                                  CACTWO-6219 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow banner bar to be customizeable for printing

                                                  The banner bar that is printed on the top of each of the document and/or forms can now be customized.. Your site must allow for printing.

                                                  Additional Configuration May Be Required

                                                  Contact CAC Support for customized banner-print.html

                                                  CACTWO-6231 (Enhancement)

                                                  Change size of checkbox in Form Designer

                                                  When Checkbox is chosen as a field in a form in the Form Designer page, the checkbox will now appear much larger in the document or query.

                                                  CACTWO-6248 (Enhancement)

                                                  Do not show Trauma section if not configured in the E&M Config within the E&M viewer

                                                  If the “Trauma” section of E&M Configuration is configured with 0 or 1 options, then the Trauma section will not appear in the E&M Viewer for an account where “IsEmergencyRoomVisit” is set to true.

                                                  CACTWO-6251 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new CDI fields to be used for Workgroup Management sorting

                                                  First and Last CDI Saver fields have been addedto the sort field options in workflow management per workgroup. These will now show in the dropdown of the Sort Field, under Properties of a Workgroup. This will allow for that column to be sorted ascending or descending.

                                                  CACTWO-6292 (Enhancement)

                                                  Create new columns for query draft totals

                                                  Three new fields have been created to show totals for queries in draft status. Users can add the fields via Grid Column Configuration as needed.

                                                  • Physician Query Drafts
                                                  • CDI Physician Query Drafts
                                                  • Coder Physician Query Drafts

                                                  CACTWO-6325 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Physician Query to be quick closed with manual entry

                                                  A new button has been added to the Physician Query viewer. After adding a manual query response, a user can click Quick Complete, to complete without having to send the query to the Physician.

                                                  CACTWO-6333 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow mass editing of modifiers

                                                  When multiple CPT codes are selected in the mass edit window and all the CPT codes have a common modifier, it will now display in the modifier box so that it can be removed, if necessary, from all CPT codes.

                                                  CACTWO-6340 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Custom Workgroup to be retained upon reassignment

                                                  The Mapping Configuration ‘Workgroup Types’ now has a column called Used By. This column lists user types, which, when added to a workgroup type in a custom workgroup, will cause the workgroup to be retained IF the user that is assigning an account has a profile that matches what is contained in the Use By column.

                                                  As an example, for Workgroup ‘Cardiology Physician’, the Workgroup Type is set as Physician Coding. In Mapping, Workgroup Type, I have set the Used By column to Retain Always. If a user is a Hospital Coder and assigns an account to another user and that chart was also assigned to the Cardiology Physician Workgroup, it will be retained.

                                                  If the user is a Physicain Coder and assigns that account to another user, then the custom workgroup Cardiology Physician will be removed along with any other workgroup on that account.

                                                  To configure, examine the mapping for WorkGroupType in Mappings Configuration. A new column, “Used By,” is present.

                                                  Retain Always

                                                  An option of Retain Always can be set in the Use By column of the WorkgroupType in Mappings, which will cause the Custom Workgroup using that type to always be retained when an account is reassigned.

                                                  CACTWO-6343 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Solventum™ to save position on second monitor

                                                  The software will now remember where you last placed the Solventum Coding and Reimbursement window(s) on your screen. When you reopen these windows, they will appear in the same position as before.

                                                  This new feature works by using the Windows Management API. The first time you log in after the update, you’ll see a message asking you to give permission for this API to run. It’s important that all users agree to this, no matter how many monitors you have or whether you use this feature right now. Saying yes will help us use this technology for more improvements in the future.

                                                  CACTWO-6350 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Auditor Activity to several coder reports

                                                  The following user reports will now automatically contain auditor activity in addition to the coder activity:

                                                  • Coder Activity
                                                  • Global Productivity
                                                  • User Detail
                                                  • Weekly Coder Activity

                                                  CACTWO-6351 (Important)

                                                  Prevent the Search Document window from shrinking

                                                  When a Document Search window is used continually, each time the window is getting smaller. This has been corrected.

                                                  CACTWO-6378 (Important)

                                                  Prevent multiple pop up boxes from resizing themselves

                                                  If more than one pop box is open at once, like a Document Search box and a Physician Query box, when one is resized, the other is automatically resizing.

                                                  This has been corrected so that the second box is not resized.

                                                  CACTWO-6392 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Physician Query to show differences

                                                  A new button will now show under a physician (or manual) recorded answer of a Physician Query, allowing the user to see anything that was added to the query by the physician that received it.

                                                  Clicking the Show Diff button will show any additions or subtractions made to the query in the response in blue or red highlights.

                                                  In this example, the physician has marked a line and added text after it, and the Show Diff button now shows as Hide Diff since it was deployed to view the response:

                                                  CACTWO-6399 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Total Charges to Validation Manager

                                                  The field Total Charges has been added to Validation Management as an account field.

                                                  CACTWO-6410 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add Calculated Date/Time as a field

                                                  A new field, Calculated Date/Time, has been added. This field shows the last time the encoder was run. If it’s blank, the encoder needs to be run. This can help the user find accounts that should have an APC, DRG, or if a coder clicked on the encode to run edits.

                                                  CACTWO-6422 (Important)

                                                  Send proper cancel message rather than blank HL7 to Epic FEWS

                                                  For Epic customers who switched from COM integration to FEWS, an issue that was causing errors in Epic has been corrected. Previously in the COM integration, when someone clicked “cancel” in Fusion CAC, an empty message was sent to Epic to close the communication. With FEWS these same blank messages cause errors. Now, canceling a chart in the latest version won’t lead to these errors in Epic for those using FEWS integration.

                                                  CACTWO-6458 (Important)

                                                  Update to Elixahuser codes

                                                  There has been an update to use Elixhauser v2024 for Elixhauser coding.

                                                  V2.55 (Jun 2024)

                                                  V2.55.8945 Released 06/28/2024

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  Security - Create Two Factor Authentication

                                                  CACTWO-4974 (Enhancement)

                                                  Fusion CAC now allows organizations to use two factor authentication. When enabled, the first time a user logs in after activation, a new panel will appear on the login screen with a QR code or setup key to scan/enter into an authenticator app. In the user’s authentication app, they will see

                                                  Fusion CAC [the environmentName appSetting] : [User's Login ID]

                                                  When logging in, the user will add the code after their password.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  Add Metrics to CDI Query Scorecard Reports

                                                  CACTWO-5677 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new section called CDI Team Metrics has been added to the CDI Query Scorecard/Scorecard by Admission date reports. This lists the accounts and reviews per month. The review counts are determined by the discharge date for CDI Query Scorecard.

                                                  Add Additional Abstracting Questions to the Audit Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-5677 (Enhancement)

                                                  Several new bullet point style questions can be added to the top of the Abstracting section of an Audit worksheet. By default, there is no change to the Audit Management viewer. However, a site can request additional prompts to be added to the Abstraction section of the Audit Management viewer.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  Allow Workflow to Retain Collapse State in Memory

                                                  CACTWO-6051 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Workflow Magement page will now save how each users collapse/expand criteria settings. After collapsing or expanding criteria throughout the page, the user will see that remain when there is movement between pages, or a signoff/signon action. This is automatically retained; the user does not have to click the Save Workflow button.

                                                  Allow to Copy a Row as a Single Line

                                                  CACTWO-6190 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new right click menu option has been added to the Flowsheet Viewer. This will allow the user to highlight a row and choose ‘Copy Row as a Single Line’ to paste it into a text style editor.

                                                  Allow User to Copy Sections of an HTML Document to Clipboard

                                                  CACTWO-6214 (Enhancement)

                                                  lose format When copying an HTML document into an a text field, forms or Physician Query, the format was being lost. This has been corrected so that the HTML will hold its format, while removing code suggestions and extra blank lines.

                                                  Create Coder Detailed Activity Report

                                                  CACTWO-6271 (Enhancement)

                                                  The new report Coder Detailed Activity Report is similar to the Coder Activity Report, but has 2 new columns. Chart Touches will count the number of unique times an account was touched, and the times for submitting and for saving have been split.

                                                  Add New Column to the Query Impact Reports

                                                  CACTWO-6321 (Enhancement)

                                                  Both the Query Impact and the Query Impact by Discharge Date report will now have a new column; Query Reason.

                                                  Add More Columns to the Pending Reason Report

                                                  CACTWO-6345 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Pending Reason report will now have two additional columns; Attending Provider (first if there are multiple), and Discharge date.

                                                  Add Last/Prior Login Date to User Profile

                                                  CACTWO-6377 (Enhancement)

                                                  There are now two dates that can be seen in User Profile. It wil show the Last Login (which is the last, or in some cases current time the user was logged in) and Prior Login, which is the date previous to the current or last login.

                                                  Note that the first time a user logs in after the upgrade that enables this tracking, there will be no Prior Date. Administrators can open the profiles of other users from User Management and see their last and prior login date/times.

                                                  Add Auditor Options to the Validation Manager

                                                  CACTWO-6393 (Enhancement)

                                                  Validation Manager now has two new user options; Is Auditor, and Is Not Auditor. Please note that for profiles that have multiple roles, using these will only trigger on an account if the current role is Auditor.

                                                  Create a way to Collapse all Categories in Workflow Management

                                                  CACTWO-6398 (Enhancement)

                                                  A button has been added to the top of the left side Workflow list in Workflow Management. Clicking this button will perform either a Collapse all or Expand all Categories as needed.

                                                  Changes Have Been Made to Denial Management

                                                  CACTWO-6451 (Enhancement)

                                                  The “Comments” box in the Denial Management viewer will now wrap text and auto-expand as needed. Alsoif you highligh overtop of the text it will now bring up the text edit styling box.

                                                  Allow TruCode to Compute a DRG Without Sequencing Codes

                                                  CACTWO-6460 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new option has been added for TruCode encoder users to the Compute button’s right side dropdown called ‘Compute w/o Resequence’. This will compute the DRG without ordering DX codes according to quality indicators.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.

                                                  Add Ability to Reconcile all DRGs, not Just the Primary

                                                  CACTWO-6479 (Enhancement)

                                                  With a new setting that support can enable you can now add the ability for sites to trigger DRG Reconciliation if any DRGs or DRG Weights.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  Create a DRG Reconciliation Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6480 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new DRG Reconciliation viewer has been created. This will be available for Inpatient accounts that have been reconciled and submitted by a coder. It is for view only, and will display the Working DRG on the left, Final DRG on the right. Symbols will be next to all codes indicating if they have been added, removed, or moved to a different position.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  Add ‘Exclude’ on Report Filters on Most CDI Reports

                                                  CACTWO-6482 (Enhancement)

                                                  These five filters that can be found on CDI user reports will now give the user the option to filter as ‘ include’ or ‘exclude’. The filters are: Category, Facility, Financial Class, Hospital Service and Pending Reason.

                                                  If the filters are left blank, then Include stands for ‘All’ and Exclude stands for ‘None’. These are the reports it was added to:

                                                  • CDI Activity Report
                                                  • CDI Executive Summary
                                                  • CDI Financial Benefit
                                                  • CDI Metric Score Card
                                                  • CDI Productivity - Admission Month
                                                  • CDI Productivity by Review Type
                                                  • CDI Query Detail Report
                                                  • CDI Query Score Card
                                                  • CDI Query Score Card - Admission Month
                                                  • Inpatient Audit Score Card (Audit Management only)
                                                  • Inpatient Auditor Productivity (Audit Management only)
                                                  • Inpatient Coder Score Card (Audit Management only)
                                                  • Outpatient Audit Score Card (Audit Management only)
                                                  • Outpatient Auditor Productivity (Audit Management only)
                                                  • Outpatient Coder Score Card (Audit Management only)

                                                  CPT Error Rate is not Refreshing Properly in Audit Management

                                                  CACTWO-6494 (Important)

                                                  In Audit Management, when there is a change to ‘Total Modifiers Added’ or ‘Total Modifiers Removed’, the CPT error rate is not refreshing. This has been corrected to update the CPT error rate immediately.

                                                  Some Patient Birth Dates are Showing as 1 Day Earlier in Account Grids

                                                  CACTWO-6499 (Important)

                                                  Due to how certain dates are evaluated in Daylight Savings Time, some birth dates of patients were appearing off by one day between various grids. This has been corrected.

                                                  Allow Admin Users to Have Access to Create/Edit Documentation Review Without the Need for Privilages to be Added

                                                  CACTWO-6522 (Enhancement)

                                                  Administrators will now be able to create or edit documentation reviews without having the explicit privilege ‘Create/Edit Documentation Reviews”. It is uncommon to use documenation reviews for CDI users.

                                                  Incorrect Document is Staying in Focus

                                                  CACTWO-6525 (Important)

                                                  If a code from the Show All Codes tree is assigned to more than one document, and the user clicks on one of those documents, it opens in the document viewer. But if the user then clicks on a different document and adds a code to it, the former document shows in the viewer instead of the currrently opened one. This has been corrected.

                                                  Allow Collapses and Expands to Auto Save in new Workflow Management

                                                  CACTWO-6522 (Enhancement)

                                                  Upon opening up the Workflow Mangement page after updating, all workgroups will be in a collapsed state. From that point on, Workflow will save any collapse or expand that the user does without having to click the save button.

                                                  Add Duplicate Code Icon for Solventum™ Users

                                                  CACTWO-6535 (Enhancement)

                                                  When a code is added via Solventum™, but is already in the unassigned code tree, the unassigned code will no longer be visible, but clicking on the Show All Codes tree will show the code with a duplicate icon.

                                                  Solventum™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to Solventum Users.

                                                  Valid Value Error Occuring in Some Account Search Filters

                                                  CACTWO-6547 (Important)

                                                  An error message asking for a valid value was occuring during some Account Search filters that used the ‘=’ sign. This was occuring when fields had a mapping that did not include a blank key. This has been corrected. An example was if you had Stage = Unbilled then switched the equal to not equal it would give you the error. Previously you would have to click on unbilled switch off of it then back on it in the drop down for it to take effect. This has been corrected.

                                                  Allow Audit Reports to Filter by Audit Type

                                                  CACTWO-6548 (Enhancement)

                                                  Audit Type is now an Include/Exclude filter on all Audit reports

                                                  Add Ability to Remove Quick Complete Button from Physician Query

                                                  CACTWO-6560 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new setting has been created that will allow you to remove the quick complete button on the Physician queries dialog box. If the setting is set as false, the user will see a Quick Complete button and the Send button will say Send to Physician. If the setting is set as true, the Send button will only say Send.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  Create Physician Coder Activity Report

                                                  CACTWO-6562 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new report called Physician Coding Activity has been created to report on data for Physician Coder and Single Path coder activity.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to add this report with a Physician Coding interface.

                                                  Forced Autoload Limits are Being Ignored

                                                  CACTWO-6566 (Important)

                                                  When a forced autoload user has limits on their workgroups, and they are on the last account of a limit, if an account is manually assigned to them, the limit restarts. This has been corrected so that the limit amount is never changed during a manual assignment.

                                                  Add HCC Designation in Charges Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  When a code with an HCC icon is added to the charges viewer by an Physician Coder, it will now show the designation just like the Assigned Codes tree

                                                  CACTWO-6573 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Denials drilldown in Account Search will now show a Comments field.

                                                  CACTWO-6576 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  Multiple changes have been made to this report:

                                                  • Name changed to Engine Outcome Summary by Coder
                                                  • New column Total Codes Assigned added
                                                  • The column Added has been split into Added Text and Added Non- Text (which includes worksheet)
                                                  • The column Direct will contain codes added via Solventum™, but also suggested by FAE
                                                  • The column Image has been split into Image (duplicate) and Image (non-duplicate)
                                                  • The column Worksheet has been removed
                                                  • The calulation of the column Score(now called Usage Score)
                                                    • Score is (Accepted +Edited + Added Text + Image non-duplicate) / Total Codes Assigned.

                                                  CACTWO-6577 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Engine Outcome per Coder (or per CDI) have been changed to Engine Outcome Detail per Coder (or per CDI). The other changes made are:

                                                  • Duplicate codes added to the top of text documents are now counted in the Added Non-Text rather than Added Text
                                                  • Added Non-Text will now include codes added via Solventum™ but also suggested by FAE
                                                  • The column Duplicate is now Added Duplicate
                                                    • It additionally counts codes duplicated on images and worksheets
                                                  • The column Duplicate Codes now includes codes duplicated on images and worksheets
                                                  • The calculation of User Score is now 1.0 – ((Added Duplicate + Added Nontext) / Total assigned).
                                                  • The calculation of Engine Accuracy is now 1.0 – (Added Text / Total Assigned).

                                                  These changes are retroactive except the ‘Added Non-text” column calculatoin. This column will retroactively include codes assigned directly within Solventum™ that were not suggested by FAE

                                                  CACTWO-6584 (Important)

                                                  CACTWO-6566 (Important)

                                                  The Elixhauser mapping comes with a bunch of default prefixes. The prefix of ELIX_ has been added.

                                                  CACTWO-6585 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Query Impact and Query Impact by Discharge Date reports now have GMLOS columns under the Before Query, After Query and Difference portions of the report.

                                                  CACTWO-6586 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  Previously, once an account has been submitted, CDI Specialists could no longer change the baseline DRG. This has been changed so that the baseline can also be changed after submission of the account.

                                                  CACTWO-6605 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  Previously, once a Forced Autoload coder submitted an account that had directly assigned, if it was manually assigned back it would not appear in that coder’s list until the next day. This has been changed so that if a manually assigned account was submitted and then assigned back to the same coder, they will receive it as their next forced autoload account instead of waiting one day.

                                                  CACTWO-6627 (Important)

                                                  CACTWO-6566 (Important)

                                                  When running the CDI Metric Score Card report, the report description does not identify what date range is acceptable. This has been added to the description.

                                                  CACTWO-6638 (Important)

                                                  CACTWO-6566 (Important)

                                                  In the Audit Management viewer, the “Abstraction Pre-Audit” calculation is incorrect, although user reports correctly displayed the accurate calculation in releases v2.53 and v2.54. In these releases, the calculation omitted the procedure codes for which users had recorded a procedure date or physician. This issue affected only the display in the audit viewer, not the Audit user reports.

                                                  CACTWO-6463 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  If a discrete value’s name appears in more than one category within the discrete data viewer within a major category when it is linked from the CDI Alerts viewer, the entire major category will be highlighted in the Flowsheet viewer. Otherwise, the original functionality of just highlighting its single category applies.

                                                  CACTWO-6532 (Enhancement)

                                                  CACTWO-6568 (Enhancement)

                                                  Previously, all CDI/Clinical Alerts were expanded making it hard to view all alerts. This requests was to initially be collapsed when the account is loaded.

                                                  Add Other Choice With Drop Down on the Close CDI/Clinical Alert Dialog Box

                                                  CACTWO-6578 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add new option of Other with the ability to add drop down box on the Close CDI/Clinical Alert Dialog Box. This allows the user to Close an Alert because it did not require a query to be sent and not because the Alert was wrong. They state occasionally even though an Alert triggered appropriately; after reviewing a query is not needed, they do not want to count it negatively as the alert did what it was supposed to.

                                                  It will only appear if a mapping with the ID “DrillDownMatchedCriteriaGroups_OtherOutcome” is created in Mappings Configuration with additional alternate outcomes. The alternate outcomes will be displayed in the Closed CDI Alert.

                                                  Add Line Spacing to Evidence

                                                  CACTWO-6580 (Enhancement)

                                                  Previously, the spacing was condensed; this adjustment provides more vertical spacing, making the alert evidence easier to read.

                                                  V2.56 (Sep 2024)

                                                  V2.56.9036.0 Released 09/27/2024

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  Allow Multiple Audits on a Single Account

                                                  CACTWO-5379 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Multiple Audits on a single account Users of Audit Management can now be updated to allow for multiple audits on a single account. At the top of the Audit viewer, a new button has been added called ‘Add Audit’. Clicking that will open an empty audit form. The accounts can have many audits added to it with this change.

                                                  For Audit Module users only.


                                                  Display Physician Coder Diagnosis Changes to Charges in Show History

                                                  CACTWO-5527 (Enhancement)

                                                  Display Physician Coder diagnosis changes to Charges in Show History If a Physician Coder or Single Path coder makes a change to diagnosis codes in a charge, that will now show in the Visual Difference Column of the Show History tab.


                                                  Display Changes to Physicians in Show History

                                                  CACTWO-5591 (Enhancement)

                                                  Any changes made to account level physicians will now show in the Visual Difference column of the Show History tab.


                                                  Show More Audit Data in the Show History and User Audit Trail Report

                                                  CACTWO-5680 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show more audit data in the Show History and User Audit Trail report The Show History tab of an account will now show Auditor work in the Visual Differences column.

                                                  The Audit Trail user report will also show several Audit actions in the report: Audit open, Audit Closed, Audit Reopened, Audit Rebutted, Audit Closed and Audit Printed.

                                                  For Audit Management users only.


                                                  Ability to Copy Validation Management Rules

                                                  CACTWO-6065 (Enhancement)

                                                  Ability to copy Validation Management rules Validation Management Rules now have a copy button to the right of the directional buttons. When clicked, a duplicate of the rule and its criteria will appear at the bottom of the rule list, ready for editing.


                                                  Add Root Cause Field for Denial Management

                                                  CACTWO-6182 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add root cause field for Denial Management Denial Management viewer wll now have the ability to select multiple entries for each denial, as needed. The field is located above the Code(s) in Question entry. Clicking into the Root Cause field will display a dropdown with default choices.To note if you would like to change these values you can add a mapping the ID is DenialRootCauses.

                                                  For Denials Management users only.


                                                  Allow Validation Rule to Report on Audit Status

                                                  CACTWO-6323 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Validation Rule to report on Audit status In Validation Rules a new ‘for each’ option of Audits has been added so that a validation rules can be created for audit options.

                                                  For Audit Management users only.


                                                  Display in Show History Phsycian and Modifier Changes to Charges for Physician Coder

                                                  CACTWO-6403 (Enhancement)

                                                  Display in Show History physician and modifier changes to charges for Physician Coder If a Physician Coder makes any changes to a physician or code modifier, those will now show in the Visual Difference column of the Show History tab.


                                                  Allow Physician Coders to Select Multiple Codes

                                                  CACTWO-6427 (Enhancement)

                                                  Allow Physician Coders to select multiple codes Within the charge viewer allow physician coders to select multiple diganosis codes to associate to a charge by clicking control and selecting codes. This way multiple codes can be added as needed.

                                                  For Physician Coding or Outpatient CDI users only.


                                                  Add and Move Some Identifiers in Show History Chart

                                                  CACTWO-6444 (Enhancement)

                                                  In the Show History tab, the Location and Patient Type sections have been removed and those identifiers have been added to the Event section. New identifiers have been added to the Events section: Payor, Financial Class, Admit Source, Admit Type and Discharge Disposition. By clicking on the ledgend to the top right it color cods the events for easy viewing.


                                                  Add a Rebill Checkbox to Denial Management Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6452 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new checkbox to indicate a rebill is needed has been added to the Denial Management viewer. It appears after the Denial Complete checkbox.

                                                  For Denials Management users only.


                                                  Auto Populate Coder With First Submitted, but Allow Users to Edit

                                                  CACTWO-6453 (Enhancement)

                                                  Auto populate Coder with First Submitted but, allow users to change it if its incorrect.The ‘Coder’ field in the Denial Management worksheet will now be defaulted to the first Submitter.

                                                  For Denials Management users only.


                                                  CACTWO-6454 (Enhancement)

                                                  t Allow linking of related queries to a Denial A new field has been added to the Denial Management viewer for related queries. It is located after ‘Code(s) in Question, and if there are any closed, non-canceled physician queries, they will appear in a dropdown when the field is clicked. For Denial Management users only.


                                                  Show Roles in the Summary of User Actions

                                                  CACTWO-6455 (Enhancement)

                                                  On the Code Summary viewer, each user listed in the Summary of User Actions will now also display that users current role.

                                                  To Note: This feature is not retroactive.


                                                  Allow the Created by User on a Physician Query to be Editable

                                                  CACTWO-6481 (Enhancement)

                                                  Once a physician query is saved, the Created By field will show. This is now changeable, whether or not the query is closed or still open. A Save button at the bottom of the query will save the change.


                                                  Allow Quantity to be Modified Under Charges Viewer by Physcian Coder

                                                  CACTWO-6524 (Enhancement)

                                                  A physician Coder will now see the edit symbol on the Quantity line in the Charges Viewer. The Quantity can be changed and saved. For Physician Coding or Outpatient CDI users only.


                                                  Solventum™ not Closing Properly When User Changes Roles

                                                  CACTWO-6558 (Important)

                                                  When using Solventum™, if a user changed his role to a role that had a disabled encoder, Solventum™ would not close or reopen properly when the user changed back to his role that had the encoder enabled. This has been fixed.

                                                  Solventum™ Users Only

                                                  This change only applies to Solventum Users.


                                                  Add ‘Primary’ to Add Diagnosis Codes Window in Charges Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6565 (Enhancement)

                                                  If a user goes into the codes in a Charges Viewer and moves the codes around, the top code will always become the primary code.


                                                  Display Multiple DRGs in the Shift Reason Dialog Window

                                                  CACTWO-6570 (Enhancement)

                                                  If there are multiple DRGs on an account, when a query is closed and presents the Shift Reason window, all DRGs will show, with the first one expanded and the other collapsed. Both DRGs are expandable/collapsible.


                                                  Add Field Onto Denials Viewer for Letter Received by Facility

                                                  CACTWO-6574 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new field has been added to the Denial Management Viewer in addition this field has been added into the drilldown in Account Search. For Denial Management users only.


                                                  Add Columns to the CDI Activity Report

                                                  CACTWO-6608 (Enhancement)

                                                  In the CDI Activity user report, reviews and queries are now counted under new columns of either Concurrent or Retrospective. Queries created during DRG reconciliation are counted under Retrospective. With the additional columns, the report will now show in landscape when PDF is chosen.


                                                  Add Columns to the CDI Financial Benefit Report

                                                  CACTWO-6611 (Enhancement)

                                                  Add columns to the CDI Financial Benefit report Columns for First CDI Saver and First Submitter columns have been added to the CDI Financial Benefit user report.


                                                  Add new Section to the DRG Comparison Report

                                                  CACTWO-6612 (Enhancement)

                                                  This user report has two DRG sections: one for Baseline and one for Final. A new section for Working DRG has been added. This DRG is the last Working DRG figured before the account was submitted.


                                                  Add More Fields to Workflow Management

                                                  CACTWO-6623 (Enhancement)

                                                  Several new fields have been added to Workflow Management to allow criteria to detect a user’s assigned roles:

                                                  • First CDI Owner Roles Last CDI Owner Roles
                                                  • First CDI Saver Roles Last CDI Saver Roles
                                                  • First Coder Roles Last Saver Roles
                                                  • First Submitter Roles Last Submitter Roles
                                                  • Owner Roles Last Viewer Roles

                                                  Allow Audit Rebuttal to Always Show on the Audit Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6634 (Enhancement)

                                                  Currently, a rebuttal on an audit viewer will be hidden once the coder clicks the Agree button. Going forward, the rebuttal will continue to show, even after the coder agrees.

                                                  For Audit Management users only.


                                                  Allow Coder to Save a Review of a Finished Audit

                                                  CACTWO-6672 (Enhancement)

                                                  When an auditor marks an audit as finished and the account is manually routed to a coder, the coder will now see a “Save Account as Reviewed” button at the bottom of the audit if it’s their first time reviewing it. This button marks the audit as “Saved Review” and records this action in both the account’s Show History and the User Audit Trail report. The “Save Account as Reviewed” button will appear under these conditions:

                                                  • The audit has been closed.
                                                  • The account is routed to the coder’s personal queue.
                                                  • The coder is viewing the closed audit.
                                                  • The coder has not previously reviewed the audit. When the coder clicks “Save Account as Reviewed,” an “Are you sure?” dialog will appear. A new audit event will be logged to show that the coder reviewed the completed audit, and this will be visible in both the Show History and the User Audit Trail.

                                                  For Audit Management users only.


                                                  Add MRN Lookup to Transfer Account Code Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6676 (Enhancement)

                                                  The account number and MRN now appear with radio buttons on the Transfer Account Codes viewer. When the user selects the MRN radio button, the MRN of the currently opened account will automatically be populated.


                                                  Add the Ability to Add a Summary Field to Saved Account Searches

                                                  CACTWO-6681 (Enhancement)

                                                  When saving a search in Account Search, a new field labeled “Filter Summary” will appear in the save box. If this field is completed, the summary will be displayed in the search banner.

                                                  It will show next to the Drill-Down Level.


                                                  Add Conditional Triggers for PSI/PDI Based on Exclusion Code Position

                                                  CACTWO-6682 (Enhancement)

                                                  PSI and PDI indicators originally did not trigger if a code that caused an exclusion for that indicator was within the the top 25 codes (or limit that customer has set). This has been changed so that if that happens, the PSI/PDI will still show in the banner bar, with an asterisk next to it, to indicate the PSI was conditionally applied. The algorithm at the bottom of the Code Summary viewer will show the reason why.

                                                  For Quality Module users only.


                                                  Add Filters to Grid Colum Configuration

                                                  CACTWO-6684 (Enhancement)

                                                  Filters now appear at the top of the location columns in the Grid Column Configuration. Clicking on a filter will reorder the column, displaying all assigned columns either at the top or bottom.


                                                  Add Weight Breakdown for Elixhauser

                                                  CACTWO-6695 (Enhancement)

                                                  When Elixhauser coding is applicable, a new table under the Elixhauser section of the Code Summary sheet will appear, showing weight totals for each item that triggers.

                                                  For Elixhauser users only.


                                                  Add ROM/SOI Information Field on Diagnosis Section

                                                  CACTWO-6699 (Enhancement)

                                                  The SOI/ROM will now show in the Audit Worksheet, next to each code and then in the Codes section of the sheet, it will show numbers matching whether there was a change in those numbers, 1 increase or decrease for each change.

                                                  For Audit Management users only.


                                                  CACTWO-6703 (Important)

                                                  Print button is missing in User Reports The updated PDF viewer in a previous release within user reports removed the Print button, but it has now been modified to restore any missing buttons. Users can print or download PDF reports from the User Reports page.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  If you wish to restrict this setting, please contact CAC Support.


                                                  Account Search Drilldown Erroring When Searching Large List

                                                  CACTWO-6705 (Important)

                                                  The Account Search drilldown was creating an error when a right click ‘View Account Detail’ was done on an account from a large list of accounts.


                                                  Change all Verification Window Buttons to Yes or No

                                                  CACTWO-6707 (Enhancement)

                                                  For any pop-up window that begins with the question “Are you sure…” has been updated. The buttons that previously displayed as “Cancel” and “OK” will now appear as “Yes” and “No.”


                                                  Add Vertical Scroll bar to Account Search Criteria if Criteria is Very Long

                                                  CACTWO-6711 (Important)

                                                  In Account Search, criteria that has a lot of data causing a lot of vertical space to be used extending beyond the viewing screen, making the grid unreadable. A new vertical scroll bar has been added to ensure users can access and view all data without losing information beyond the filter’s edges.


                                                  Add red tag Next to Applied PSI/PDI for Improved Visibility

                                                  CACTWO-6712 (Enhancement)

                                                  When a PSI/PDI is applied to an account, it was previously difficult to identify in the algorithm section of the Code Summary viewer. A new red tag has been added to enhance visibility, making it easier for users to quickly locate the PSI/PDI algorithm that was applied.

                                                  For Quality Module users only.


                                                  Unable to Remove a Matched Criteria Template in Workflow

                                                  CACTWO-6726 (Important)

                                                  A ‘Matched Criteria Query Template’ dropdown only appears in Workflow if a criterion with the field ‘Evaluation Script’ which is used by CDI/Clinical Alerts is present. When copying and pasting that criterion, the user has no way to remove that template to choose another. A small gray ‘x’ has been added to the box to allow removal of the template after pasting.


                                                  Allow ‘Frequency Edits’ for TruCode ™

                                                  CACTWO-6730 (Enhancement)

                                                  TruCode™ has an option to include frequency edits among the medical necessity edits returned by TruCode. This has now been enabled.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.


                                                  Increase Filter Length and Labels for Improved Usability

                                                  CACTWO-6732 (Enhancement)

                                                  The filter dropdown length has been extended in account search to display more of the filter name, reducing the need to click the down arrow, especially for filters with similar names. The field for the account search name is now longer, and the “Delete Filter” option has been replaced with a garbage can icon to save space allowing for room for the increased length. Additionally, the “Tools” button has been renamed “Columns” for better clarity.


                                                  CACTWO-6734 (Important)

                                                  When using the Queries drilldown in a filter in Account Search that resulted in a large amount of accounts returned, a red toast error message to contact Dolbey Support was happening. This has been corrected.


                                                  Update PSI/PDI Algorithms

                                                  CACTWO-6737 (Enhancement)

                                                  PSI/PDI algorithms have been updated to AHRQ v 2024.


                                                  Code Dropdown Does not Reflect Date of Service in Denial Management Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6740 (Important)

                                                  The codes that were reflected in the codes dropdown of the Denial Management viewer was displaying current day codes vs date of service relavant codes. This was corrected to use the accounts Admit date for outpatient or Discharge Date for inpatient to determine which codes to display.

                                                  For Denials Management users only.


                                                  Error Occuring When Closing Physician Query/Shift Reason Window

                                                  CACTWO-6742 (Important)

                                                  When closing a Physician Query or Shift Reason dialog box when the Physicians & Queries viewer was not visible, a console error was occurring. This has been corrected.


                                                  Hide ‘Route to’ Buttons in Audit Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6745 (Enhancement)

                                                  The ‘Route to Auditor’ and ‘Route to Coder’ buttons in the Audit Worksheet can now be hidden with a new site-configuration setting.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Allow Readmission Viewer to Show Multiple Accounts

                                                  CACTWO-6746 (Enhancement)

                                                  If an account has multiple re-admissions, they will now all show if they are in the default time of 30 days. A new setting has been added to allow the number of days to be changed. If the setting is updated to an amount other than 30, that new amount will show in the Re-admission Viewer AND in the red tag in the banner.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Clicking on Code From Unassigned Code Tree Doesn’t Scroll to the Position in the Document Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6749 (Important)

                                                  If a user has a zoom on their document viewer, and they click on an unassigned code in the unassigned tree, the document in the viewer will scroll towards it, but leave the highlighted code offscreen. This has been corrected so that even with a zoom in place, the viewer will scroll to make the highlighted code viewable.


                                                  Improve Copy to Clipboard Functionality Adding Intential Line Breaks

                                                  CACTWO-6746 (Enhancement)

                                                  There are some issues around intentional line breaks. The functionality has been improved to alleviate those issues.


                                                  Add Copy Single Line and Copy to Table was Added to the Flowsheet Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6746 (Enhancement)

                                                  When using the Flowsheet viewer, two changes have been made to the right click menu:

                                                  • Copy Row as a Single Line has been renamed Copy Row as Text, and now copies each result value to its own line. Copy Row to Clipboard has been renamed Copy Row as Table for clarity.

                                                  DRG Reconciliation Tooltip is Displaying Incorrect Data

                                                  CACTWO-6754 (Important)

                                                  The tooltip in the DRG Reconciliation viewer was not giving correct information. These changes have been instituted: The tooltip on the left side for deleted codes will now say ‘Deleted in Final DRG’. The tooltip on the right for a resequened code will say ‘Higher in sequence than in Working DRG’. The tooltip of the corresponding code on the left side will say ‘Lower in Sequence in Final DRG’.


                                                  Changes to Procedure Details Were Applying Even if Canceled

                                                  CACTWO-6756 (Important)

                                                  If changes to procedure codes were made using Edit Procedure Details, the changes were saving even if the user clicked Cancel. This has been corrected.


                                                  Change Display of SOI and ROM in all Viewers

                                                  CACTWO-6760 (Enhancement)

                                                  Currently this is displayed as ROM then SOI. The order has been corrected to show as SOI, then ROM in all viewers.


                                                  Charts With Answered Queries had HTML Code in Their View Diff Viewers

                                                  CACTWO-6763 (Important)

                                                  If an account had an answered query and the View Diff viewer was deployed, HTML code showed throughout the viewer. This has been corrected.


                                                  CACTWO-6769 (Important)

                                                  If a user opens a Physician Query and then makes the box smaller by pulling up from the corner of the dialog box, the footer was overlapping the Buttons at the bottom of the query. A scroll bar has been added, and now the bottom buttons remain outside of the data inside the query.


                                                  Query Reports Erroring When Displaying Large Amount of Data

                                                  CACTWO-6771 (Important)

                                                  The Query Impact and Query Impact by Discharge reports have been corrected for an error that was occurring if these reports were run over a long time period.


                                                  Add Summary to System Search Filter

                                                  CACTWO-6773 (Enhancement)

                                                  When saving a filter in System Search, the Save box will now have the added field ‘Filter Summary’ for addition of a note or comment. This will then show above the filter criteria:


                                                  SOI and ROM Calculations are not Matching in Physician Query Pre/Post DRG and Shift Reason

                                                  CACTWO-6776 (Important)

                                                  The SOI and ROM values in a Physician Query were sometimes not matching the ROM and SOI values of the Shift Reason screen. If the site is using Solventum and an account has both an APR for a primary grouper and an additional APR as a secondary or tertiary, the values will always match the SOI and ROM calculations of the primary APR instead of the latter APR.


                                                  Physician Coder Submitting an Account is Closing an Audit

                                                  CACTWO-6784 (Important)

                                                  A physician coders submit now prevents a closing an open audit. Only a facility coder can close an audit.


                                                  Update CAC Technical Support Page

                                                  CACTWO-6790 (Enhancement)

                                                  The CAC Technical Support page found under the above the banner bar has been updated.


                                                  Copy to CDI/Clinical Alerts Function is not Appearing for Caution Code Documents

                                                  CACTWO-6798 (Important)

                                                  When a user highlights text and right clicks from a caution code document, the funtion Copy to CDI/Clinical Alert does not appear. This has been corrected.


                                                  View Differences Viewer Showing HTML Tags

                                                  CACTWO-6805 (Important)

                                                  If a user attempts to ‘View Diff’ on documents that contain ‘html’ and ‘body’ tags, HTML code was showing in the viewer. This has been corrected.


                                                  Personal Stats Dashboard is not Loading for Some Users

                                                  CACTWO-6806 (Important)

                                                  If a large amount of accounts were assigned by a user in Account Search, if the user then tried to look at their personal Dashboard, it would not load. This has been corrected.


                                                  Add Patient’s Current Age to the Banner Bar

                                                  CACTWO-6812 (Enhancement)

                                                  A patients current age or discharge age will now be shown in the banner bar if it is different than their admit age. If the account is not discharged, the age will be the current day’s age. If it has been discharged, it will show the discharge age. If the Admit and current/discharge date age are the same, only the admit age will show, as usual.


                                                  Solventum™ is not Alerting User That the Encoder is Already Open

                                                  CACTWO-6815 (Important)

                                                  In the case of a Solventum™ encoder being open, with the user then opening a physician query and attempting to compute a DRG, the user was not being warned that the encoder was already open. The user closed the query and was then stuck in the acount. This has been corrected. A blue warning box will now occur if the Compute button in a physician query is clicked while the encoder is already open.

                                                  Solventum™ Users Only

                                                  This change only applies to Solventum Users.


                                                  CDI Activity Report is not Displaying ‘Friendly Name’ in Facility Column

                                                  CACTWO-6816 (Important)

                                                  All reports show the ‘friendly’ name, but this one was showing the key of the mapping instead. This has been corrected to now show the ‘friendly’ name if the mapping is set up for that Facility.


                                                  Rename the Encoder tab on the Main Menu List

                                                  CACTWO-6820 (Enhancement)

                                                  Since Encoder can be taken to mean that clicking on it will open the regular Encoder, a request came in to make that say Standalone Encoder. A new setting has been created to change that name.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Prevent POA From Changing When Editing Codes Using Code Lookup

                                                  CACTWO-6822 (Important)

                                                  If the user launches and returns the Solventum or TruCode codebook from the Code Editor dialog when editing a diagnosis code, the POA will reset to its default value. This has been corrected.


                                                  Last Auditor to Save an Account is now Recorded as the Last Saver

                                                  CACTWO-6827 (Important)

                                                  If an auditor saves or submits an account, the Last Saver on the account was not updated. This has been corrected. Additionally, a new set of “Last Auditor” fields have been added to account grids, account search, and workflow to determine the last auditor to save an account.s

                                                  V2.57 (Jan 2025)

                                                  V2.57.9116.0 Released 01/08/25

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.


                                                  Allow PCS/CPT Codes to be Configured per Category

                                                  CACTWO-4897 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new configuration will allow outpatient accounts to show PCS codes along with CPT, and inpatient accounts to show CPT codes along with PCS, for specific account categories.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Allow Users to be Assigned to Managers

                                                  CACTWO-5140 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new field will display within User Management that can be used by administrators and managers to assign users to a manager. The manager field is a dropdown that will only display for users with a manager role. Clicking the blue button next to the field will allow you to associate users to a manager. When a manager has users assigned when that manager runs User Reports, they will only see the users that are assigned to them. A new manager column has been added to the User Management grid.

                                                  Assign Users to Manager Assign Users to Manager


                                                  Add the Ability to Bulk add Columns in Grid Column Configuration

                                                  CACTWO-5520 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new button has been added to Grid Column Configuration that will enable the user to bulk add columns. When the button is clicked, a box will open showing only available columns. User can check as many columns as needed and click OK to have them added to Grid Column Configuration.

                                                  Bulk Add Columns Bulk Add Columns


                                                  CACTWO-5678 (Enhancement)

                                                  In Account Search, for drilldowns other than Accounts, administrators and users with the privilege will see an edit button next to the drilldown field.

                                                  Edit Drilldowns Button Edit Drilldowns Button

                                                  Clicking the edit button will bring up an edit pane, listing all columns associated with that drilldown. The user can then change the name in the ‘new name’ column.

                                                  Edited Drilldown Column Names Edited Drilldown Column Names

                                                  Please note that any changes made will be seen in ALL searches that use that drilldown.


                                                  Split Form Designer: Worksheet & Query Designer to Accommodate Separate Queries for CDI vs Coding

                                                  CACTWO-6400 (Enhancement)

                                                  Form Designer has been split into two menu items: Worksheet Designer and Query Designer. This will allow query templates to be split up by user type, just like worksheets. Current queries will initially be in the Shared Query folder, but can be changed via the Type field at the top right of the query. Users can be assigned a new set of privileges within role management for creating/editing templates as needed. When creating a query in an account, the user will only see the templates that are assigned to them by their profile type, with the ability to have access to more templates by setting the above privileges.


                                                  Lock Down Certain Sections of a Shared Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6363 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new dropdown has been added to the Add Field box in Worksheet Designer. displayed as “Editable”, it allows the creator of the worksheet to set what type of user can edit that particular field. It defaults to All Users. If a field is set as Coders Only, then a CDI or Auditor looking at that worksheet will not be able to alter that field. This will appear in Shared Worksheets only.

                                                  Filed Editable By Filed Editable By


                                                  Create new Worksheets for Auditor Only

                                                  CACTWO-6364 (Enhancement)

                                                  Worksheet Designer now has a pane for Auditor worksheets. These worksheets, once created, will only appear in an auditor’s worksheet drop down when the Add button in the Navigation Tree is clicked. Only auditors, admins and managers can create a form in Worksheet Designer for Auditors. A new privilege has been created in Role Management to assign that ability to other types of users.


                                                  New Fields Added to the Account Fields List in Worksheet Designer

                                                  CACTWO-6387 (Enhancement)

                                                  New field options have been added to the Worksheet Designer when using Account Fields. These fields will be ‘stamped’ onto the form so that they do not change even if changes occur on the account details.


                                                  Add Coder Scorecard to Coder Personal Dashboard

                                                  CACTWO-6389 (Enhancement)

                                                  If enabled, the Coder Personal Dashboard will display the Coder Scorecard report at the bottom of the dashboard screen. The data can be drilled down by clicking on any number other than 0 in the Open Audits and Closed Audits columns.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Allow User to Change the ‘Reason’ Once the Query has Been Sent or Closed

                                                  CACTWO-6404 (Enhancement)

                                                  The reason field on a physician query can now be changed after being sent or closed. If a user makes a change in that field, a Save Edit button will appear at the bottom to save the change.

                                                  Physician Query Reasons Physician Query Reasons


                                                  Add Charge CPT Code Section to Audit Viewer for Certain Revenue Codes

                                                  CACTWO-6440 (Enhancement)

                                                  CAC now has the ability to audit Charge CPT/HCPCS codes from the Charges Viewer will now be added to the Pre/Post Outcome section of the audit. A new Audited Charges section will show beneath the Pre and Post Outcome sections of the Audit. At the bottom of the list will be an Add button for the auditor to add a hard charge if needed. The charge CPT codes will will show in the the Pre and Post Outcome lists. Further down the Audit, a section called Charge Codes will be showing beneath the CPT codes section and will show all of the totals and error rates. To enable this feature contact CAC support and provide a list of revenue codes you wish to audit.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Add an Escalation Section for Audit Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6441 (Enhancement)

                                                  If a coder chooses to rebuttal an audit and the auditor does not agree, a new section line for escalation will open in the audit. If an escalation is marked as requested, the auditor can add his details, and manually assign the acct to another auditor. Workflow can also be used to assign to another auditor who has escalation privileges.


                                                  Add APC Changes for CPT Codes to Audit Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6443 (Enhancement)

                                                  Auditors can audit APC changes on outpatient accounts, which are automatically created upon Computing an APC. In Account Search, the Audits drilldown will now have 3 more columns; APC Changes, APC Error Rate, APC Accuracy. APC columns have also been added to the Outpatient user reports.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Allow When Recording a ‘Physician Response’ on a Query to Expand

                                                  CACTWO-6486 (Enhancement)

                                                  In a physician query, the physician response field block was static. It has been fixed so that it can become larger as more text is added.


                                                  Create a Return to Query Button in the Shift Reason Window

                                                  CACTWO-6487 (Enhancement)

                                                  A ‘Return to Query’ button has been added to the bottom right of the Shift Reason window. When clicked, user will be taken back to the query to make any change necessary, including recomputing a drg. Clicking the cancel button at this point will remove any work done on that query. Selecting a closing reason will again pop the Shift Reason window, where the query can be updated and closed.


                                                  Allow for Tertiary Grouper in Audit, With a Billing tag on Inpatient Accounts

                                                  CACTWO-6516 (Enhancement)

                                                  If a tertiary grouper is present on an inpatient account, then all 3 DRGs will be presented in the Pre and Post Outcome panels of the Audit Worksheet. If a billing grouper is indicated, the billing grouper will receive a Billing tag.


                                                  Allow Billing Grouper Data in the CDI Metric Scorecard Report

                                                  CACTWO-6609 (Enhancement)

                                                  If an account has a billing grouper with anof APR-DRG, the CDI Metric Score Card report will separate reviews and case mix index between MS-DRG and APR-DRG.


                                                  Update Denial Management to act Like Audit Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6795 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Denial Management viewer has been changed to match how Audit Worksheet is opened. Upon opening Denial Management, the user will see a button called Add Denial. Clicking this will open the Denial worksheet, and will allow for multiple worksheets to be open. Each Denial will open from its own button, with the original Denial date.

                                                  Denial Management Buttons Denial Management Buttons


                                                  Add Setting to Control Mandating a Pre Query DRG on Queries

                                                  CACTWO-6818 (Enhancement)

                                                  This update addresses challenges encountered with pre-query DRGs during the query process. Initially, a pre-query DRG is determined based on existing diagnosis codes.

                                                  However, as new diagnoses are added before closing the query, the post query DRG may not accurately reflect these updates. This discrepancy often requires manual adjustments by removing or modifying diagnoses to capture the intended impact accurately. Additionally, updates to the pre-query DRG can inadvertently change the account-level DRG instead of just the query DRG, leading to further manual corrections to re-enter the accurate account information. To streamline this process, we are introducing four configuration settings for the “PreDrgQueryRequirement” site configuration, which can be adjusted by CAC Support as needed.

                                                  1. Default Behavior: The current system behavior continues, where the pre-query DRG is automatically populated from the account and required when sending a physician query. If the pre-query DRG is not included, a validation error will prompt correction before proceeding.
                                                  2. Open: When a query is opened, the pre-query DRG is automatically populated from the account (similarly for the post-query DRG, which will initially match the pre-query DRG). Both DRGs must be edited and confirmed by the user before the query can be closed.
                                                  3. Manual: This setting gives full control to the user by not auto populating the pre-query DRG, but it remains a required field to close the query. This option suits sites preferring complete manual entry of both pre and post-query DRGs without auto-population.
                                                  4. Never: Neither the pre-query nor post-query DRG is auto-populated under this setting, and neither is required to close the query. This setting is suitable for sites that do not require tracking of pre and post-query DRG calculations. (Uncommon) These new settings are designed to reduce the manual workload and improve accuracy in DRG documentation during the query process.
                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Add a PCS to CPT Crosswalk to TruCode™

                                                  CACTWO-6829 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new section will appear in the Research tab of the TruCode™ reference tab called CPT to PCS Crosswalk if a CPT code is clicked, or PCS to CPT Crosswalk if a PCS code is clicked.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.


                                                  Allow Pending Accounts to be Hidden for Autoload Users

                                                  CACTWO-6838 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new configuration setting will hide the Pending Accounts grid for all forced autoload dashboard page.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Retain Highlighting of Text When Using ‘Add Code’

                                                  CACTWO-6841 (Enhancement)

                                                  When a user highlights text and chooses either Add Code or Add Code From Encoder from the right click menu, the text will remain highlighted while the dialog is open, previously there was no highlight.


                                                  Add Ability to Edit Codes for Query Pre/Post DRG Without Changing Account Level DRG

                                                  CACTWO-6861 (Enhancement)

                                                  In a query, a new dialog will open if the Compute button is clicked for the Pre or Post DRG. In the dialog, the user can change the codes to compute for a new DRG by clicking on the plus sign it will add the code from assigned codes to either the pre/post query DRG codes the x button will remove them and to add all codes from assigned code tree you can click on the button “Overwrite All Codes”, but the main account DRG will not be updated.


                                                  Add New Columns to the Audit Report

                                                  CACTWO-6862 (Enhancement)

                                                  Two new columns, Principal Diagnosis Error and Accuracy Rate have been added to 4 Audit user reports: • Inpatient Auditor ProductivityOutpatient Audit ScorecardOutpatient Auditor ProductivityOutpatient Coder Scorecard


                                                  Create New Workgroup Assignment Report

                                                  CACTWO-6864 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new user report called Current Workgroup Assignment per User has been created. This will display the workflow assignment for each active user from the user’s profile. Only active users with at least one assigned workgroup appear on this report. A Forced Autoload user will show an asterisk to the right of the workgroup name if autoload was launched on that day.


                                                  Allow Customization to Medical Necessity in TruCode™

                                                  CACTWO-6867 (Enhancement)

                                                  This feature adds a configuration setting “SendChargesToEncoder” is set to false to prevent charges from importing into Solventum CRS, but their new custom “charges-filter.js” will inject the charges into the input packet for TruCode’s medical necessity calculations.

                                                  Note

                                                  This fix only applies to sites using Solventum CRS with TruCode Medical Necessity Edits.


                                                  Error Occurring With use of Short Token Highlight

                                                  CACTWO-6869 (Important)

                                                  When text that is only a couple characters long is selected for adding a code, an error was occurring if that text occurred in the HTML style attributes earlier in the document. This has been corrected.


                                                  Created by Dropdown in Physician Query has Been Updated

                                                  CACTWO-6883 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Created By dropdown in a physician query showed all available users in the list. This has been changed so that only administrators or users with the privilege from role mangement to create/edit physician queries are listed.


                                                  Add Comment Fields in Denial Management Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6884 (Enhancement)

                                                  A comment field has been added to each of the three appeals in the Denial Management viewer.


                                                  Change the Coder of Record Dropdown to Only Allow Coders on the Audit Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6890 (Important)

                                                  The drop down for ‘coder of record’ in the Audit Worksheet viewer had all users show up. CDI should not be included in this dropdown, so this has been corrected to only show Coders and Auditors.


                                                  Prevent ‘Coder of Record’ on a new Audit From Being a CDI Specialist

                                                  CACTWO-6890 (Important)

                                                  Previously, the Audit Worksheet was applying the last user to save the account to the Coder of Record field. This could include a CDI, which it shouldn’t. Now, the coder of record will be decided by this process:

                                                  1. If the account was submitted, default the “Coder of Record” to the last submitter. Otherwise…
                                                  2. If the account’s Owner is not a CDI Specialist, default the “Coder of Record” to the owner. Otherwise…
                                                  3. If the account’s Last Saver is not a CDI Specialist, default the “Coder of Record” to the last saver. Otherwise…
                                                  4. Leave the “Coder of Record” blank for the user to fill in.

                                                  Display Issue is Happening When a Physiciain Query Form Uses Sections

                                                  CACTWO-6903 (Important)

                                                  Using a physician query form with dynmaic sections, if sections were removed via the red X on the form, they were scaling in green across the screen horizontally instead of vertically. This has been corrected.


                                                  Add Comments to Shift Reason Panel

                                                  CACTWO-6905 (Enhancement)

                                                  In a physician query, when a query is closed, a shift reason panel is presented. A new comment box has been added to the panel. This field is available in account search. Even if no shift reasons are selected, the comment will still show back in the query.

                                                  A new column for shift reason comments can be added to the Physician Queries grid.

                                                  For any shift reasons created prior to this upgrade, the column will appear blank.


                                                  Create an Impact Queries Viewer

                                                  CACTWO-6908 (Enhancement)

                                                  An Impact Queries viewer will show in the Navigation Tree whenever a billed account has a CDI created query in place. This will give the CDI a quick look at impacts among queries without opening each one. Clicking on the envelope will open that specific query for investigation. The field for Assigned Impact % is manually filled in by the CDI, and the total of all fields should not be more than 100%. To ensure that doesn’t happen, a validation rule should be implemented. Three new columns and fields have been added to Grid Maintenance, Validation Manager, Account Search and Workflow: • CDI Query Impact Dollars • CDI Query Impact Percent • CDI Query Impact Weight

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Buttons not Working if Audit Worksheet is Popped Out

                                                  CACTWO-6910 (Important)

                                                  Several button options have been enabled to work from a popped out audit worksheet: Route to Coder, Return to Auditor and Mark as Reviewed.

                                                  1. “Route to Coder,” when logged in as an auditor to forward an open audit to the Coder of Record
                                                  2. “Return to Auditor,” when the coder rebuts the open audit assigned from the auditor
                                                  3. “Mark as Reviewed,” when the coder is assigned an account with a closed audit and hasn’t marked the audit as reviewed previously

                                                  Force Autoload is Skipping an Account Assigned to the Workgroup

                                                  CACTWO-6917 (Important)

                                                  An account that was being added to a workgroup that was being worked on by a forced autoload user was not being triggered. This corrects the following problem: If an account was skipped in the forced autoload process due to various reasons (locked in use, reassigned to a different user or workgroup, has an open audit for a different coder), it does not appear for the forced autoload later if the account appears again in the forced autoload user’s workgroup.This has been corrected.


                                                  Add Strength Fields to Each Appeal on Denial Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6919 (Enhancement)

                                                  In Denial Management, strength fields have been added to each of the appeals in the Denial Management. Strengths are low, medium and high. These are also now showing as columns in the Denials drilldown in Account Search.


                                                  ‘Encoder Not Detected’ pops up Sporadically in Solventum™

                                                  CACTWO-6921 (Important)

                                                  If a user was accessing Solventum™ but not via the website, the ‘Core Encoder not detected’ message was popping up in various places. This has been fixed.


                                                  Created ‘CDI Activity Detailed Report’

                                                  CACTWO-6923 (Enhancement)

                                                  New user report ‘CDI Activity Detailed Report’ has been created. Its similar to the CDI Activity Report but, adds account numbers.


                                                  Ignore new Codes Added by Coder Post Audit

                                                  CACTWO-6927 (Important)

                                                  If an auditor submits an account with an open audit, the “post-audit” codes will change to reflect what the auditor submitted. If any other user submits an account with an open audit, the “post-audit” codes will not change.


                                                  Add Audited by Field to Denials Management

                                                  CACTWO-6935 (Enhancement)

                                                  An ‘Audited By’ field has been added to every denial in Denial Management. This field will also show as a column in the Denials drilldown in Account Search.


                                                  Audit and Denial Worksheets Should Verify Deletions

                                                  CACTWO-6936 (Enhancement)

                                                  When deleting an audit or a Denial Management, an ‘are you sure you want to delete’ window will pop to verify the user wishes to delete.


                                                  Allow Secondary DRG to be Expanded by Default on Shift Reasons Dialog

                                                  CACTWO-6944 (Enhancement)

                                                  By default, the first DRG on the Shift Reason dialog is always expanded. If a customer wants a secondary DRG to also auto expand, an updated shift-reason-calculator.js will be needed.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Popped out Audit Worksheet is Losing Fields and Minimizing

                                                  CACTWO-6945 (Important)

                                                  In some circumstances, a popped out Audit Worksheet will be minimized and may lose the Recommendations box when changes are being made on the main account detail page. This has been corrected.


                                                  Edit Procedure Details in not Allowing Deletion of Modifiers

                                                  CACTWO-6946 (Important)

                                                  On the assigned codes tree, if you right click on a CPT code and select Edit Procedure Details, the modifier could not be removed. This has been corrected.


                                                  Allow Physician Coders to Edit and Delete Code Suggestions

                                                  CACTWO-6952 (Enhancement)

                                                  Physician coders can now edit and delete code suggestions from documents.


                                                  Calculations on CDI Query Detail Report are Incorrect

                                                  CACTWO-6957 (Important)

                                                  The calculation of the two ‘chart impact’ columns in the CDI Query Detail report were comparing Working DRGs with Final DRGs, which it should have been comparing Baseline DRGs with Final DRGs. This has been corrected.


                                                  Correct CDI Review Counts in two CDI Reports

                                                  CACTWO-6966 (Important)

                                                  In both the CDI Activity and the CDI Activity Detail reports, a reconciled account was showing as both a followup and a Recon touch causing a discrepancy between the CDI Dashboard and the reports. This has been changed so that a reconciled account will only show in the Recon touch columns.


                                                  Workflow is not Moving Charts if the Stage is X for Physician Coders

                                                  CACTWO-6978 (Important)

                                                  Workflow will now process accounts with a Stage of X and a physician coding stage that is other than X.


                                                  Discharge Disposition Data in Audit Reports are Incorrect

                                                  CACTWO-7001 (Important)

                                                  Two of the audit user reports, Audit Abstract Report and Inpatient Auditor Productivity were reporting the opposite result for Disposition changes. This has been corrected.

                                                  V2.58 (Mar 2025)

                                                  V2.58.9204.0 Released 03/14/25

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  Create a Notifications Manager

                                                  CACTWO-5877 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new page called Notifications Management has been added to the Tools dropdown. Here, notifications can be created that can be seen either on the CAC2 login screen, the Dashboard, or both. The notification has a field for a Title and a Description, a start and end date for the notification, a color and the location it will appear.

                                                  Notifications Manager Notifications Manager


                                                  Move the Productivity Panel From the User Drop Down

                                                  CACTWO-5990 (Enhancement)

                                                  In order to make room for more columns, the Today’s Productivity panel that was originally found when dropping down the arrow next to the user ID at the top of the page has been moved to its own icon. The icon is found to the left of the question mark next to the user ID.

                                                  User Profile Productivity User Profile Productivity

                                                  When clicked, it will open a window box that will show a more robust productivity panel

                                                  Today’s Productivity Dialog Today’s Productivity Dialog


                                                  Allow Notes to be Identified by Role

                                                  CACTWO-6424 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new column has been added to the Notes & Bookmarks viewer that will show the role of the user. All columns are now sortable from ascending to descending.

                                                  Notes and Bookmarks Roles Notes and Bookmarks Roles


                                                  Prevent the Auto-Hiding of the Custom Workgroups column

                                                  CACTWO-6493 (Enhancement)

                                                  When a user selects a workgroup that is not custom from the worklist, if there was a custom workgroup column in the account list it was automatically being hidden. This will no longer happened.


                                                  Change how Date Sorting is Done in the Document Tree

                                                  CACTWO-6549 (Enhancement)

                                                  If a document was assigned an order number in Document Types Management, then when sorting by date that document was not obeying the new date sort. This has been changed so that an assigned number is not taken into consideration when sorting by date.


                                                  Show Inactivity Logout in the User Audit Trail Report

                                                  CACTWO-6758 (Enhancement)

                                                  New events have been added as triggers for the User Audit Trail report. If a user is logged out due to inactivity, a new line will now show in the report.


                                                  Add new Operator for Validation Management Only

                                                  CACTWO-6781 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new operator of ‘Does not Start With’ has been added to Validation Management.


                                                  Update how the Coder is Defaulted in Denial Management

                                                  CACTWO-6912 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Coder field of Denial Management will default to the Owner of the account (as long as it is not a CDI). If there is no Owner, the field will be left blank for user input. Otherwise, if there is no Coder but a Submitter, the field will default to the Submitter.


                                                  Allow CDI Permission to View the Audit Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-6913 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Audit Worksheet viewer can now be seen by a CDI Specialist, if desired. The CDI would only have the option to view and print. Editing, creating, routing and deleting abilities are not available.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Incorrect Number of days Worked in CDI Query Scorecard

                                                  CACTWO-6948 (Important)

                                                  The ‘Number of Days Worked’ in the CDI Query Score Card and Score Card by Admission Month were not showing a correct total. This has been corrected so that the calculation is now the total number of unique day/user combinations, rather than counting every touch per day per user.


                                                  Remove Principal Dx From Outpatient Accounts

                                                  CACTWO-6982 (Enhancement)

                                                  The dropdown next to the Compute button in an account will now only show the Principal DX option if the account is an inpatient account.

                                                  This is only relevant to TruCode Encoder.

                                                  Add Pre and Post Columns to the Audit Drilldown in Account Search

                                                  CACTWO-6984 (Enhancement)

                                                  8 new columns have been added to Account Search when the Drilldown of Audits is used:

                                                  • Pre-Audit GMLOS & Post-Audit GMLOS
                                                  • Pre-Audit DRG & Post-Audit DRG
                                                  • Pre-Audit ROM & Post-Audit ROM
                                                  • Pre-Audit SOI & Post-Audit SOI

                                                  Remove Workflow Management Classic

                                                  CACTWO-7017 (Enhancement)

                                                  Workflow Management (classic) has been removed from the Tools menu.


                                                  Do not Allow Fields in Workflow to be Saved Without Adding Operator and Value

                                                  CACTWO-7020 (Important)

                                                  Workflow was allowing fields to be saved without operator and/or the value. This has been corrected so that unless the operator doesn’t require a value, the value field must be filled in before the user can save.


                                                  Accounts are not being routed correctly on time-out

                                                  CACTWO-7023 (Important)

                                                  If an account’s Workflow assignment changes while the user is in the account, and the user’s session times out, the account’s workflow was being reverted to the workflow when the account was first loaded. This has been corrected.


                                                  Add columns to the DRG Comparison Report

                                                  CACTWO-7032 (Enhancement)

                                                  Two columns have been added to the DRG Comparison Report

                                                  • Discharge Disposition
                                                  • Payor

                                                  DRG Comparison Report DRG Comparison Report


                                                  Allow Criteria to be edited

                                                  CACTWO-7034 (Important)

                                                  Criteria group names can now be edited in Workflow Management. The use of brackets in the name will now be rejected by a red toast message stating that brackets are not available for use, along with the name of the workgroup and criteria.


                                                  Multiple PCS occurrences are not showing correctly in Audit

                                                  CACTWO-7039 (Important)

                                                  If an Audit Worksheet is created on an account that has multiple occurrences of a procedure code, the editing arrows are not showing properly in the audit. This has been corrected.


                                                  DRG error occurring when Audit Worksheet viewer is popped-out

                                                  CACTWO-7041 (Important)

                                                  If an Audit Worksheet is popped-out to its own tab and the user then computes a DRG, while the DRG shows on the main screen, the pop-out continues to show a ‘DRG Required’ error message. This has been corrected.


                                                  Moving between viewers is erasing the audit subtype matches

                                                  CACTWO-7050 (Important)

                                                  When an Audit Worksheet is opened and the audit type is selected, the approved subtypes for that audit are in the subtype popdown. But if the auditor moves from the audit viewer to another viewer, like code summary, when the audit is reopened, the audit subtype list shows all subtypes, not just the filtered list for that audit type. This has been corrected.


                                                  Add state column to mappings for Medicare

                                                  CACTWO-7054 (Enhancement)

                                                  In Mapping Configuration, for the mapping MedicareProviderNumber, a new column has been added so that states can be assigned to each number. This is for sites with multiple facities across multiple states that use the TruCode Encoder. In order for sites to update their facilities without interface script changes, a “State” column should be added to the “MedicareProviderNumber’ mapping to indicate the geographic state of the facility. This field will be passed into TruCode if populated so that the state’s appropriate medical necessity edits are returned.

                                                  This is only relevant to TruCode Encoder.

                                                  Audit were being routed when other viewers were open

                                                  CACTWO-7061 (Important)

                                                  Audits were being routed without being saved when other viewers were opened. This has been corrected so that if a physician query or an encoder are open, an audit cannot be routed until those windows have been closed.


                                                  Allow users to be assigned to Physician Coder Managers

                                                  CACTWO-7068 (Enhancement)

                                                  New roles that contain the word ‘Manager’ such as Physician Coder Managers will now have the ability to have users assigned to them by an Administrator.


                                                  Show History legend has been updated with new fields

                                                  CACTWO-7063 (Important)

                                                  The legend window in a Show History viewer has been updated with more colors and indicators. There are now indicators for Payor, Financial Class, Admit Source, Admit Type and Discharge Disposition.

                                                  Show History Legend Show History Legend


                                                  Rebuttal is not showing if the Coder has not routed to Auditor

                                                  CACTWO-7070 (Important)

                                                  If a Coder has rebutted an Audits, but has not sent that audit back to the Auditor, the rebuttal is not being seen by the Coder when they go back into the audit. This has been corrected. Rebuttal should always be seen whether or not the audit has been routed back to the Auditor.


                                                  Discrete value is copying over to CDI Alert query

                                                  CACTWO-7073 (Important)

                                                  This issue has now been prevented by only removing ICD-10 and CPT codes from evidence text that is linked to a document when the text is copied to a physician query.


                                                  Add Status Indicator (SI) to Code Summary and Charge viewer

                                                  CACTWO-7076 (Enhancement)

                                                  The Status Indicator has been add to the Code Summary viewer and will appear next to a CPT code that has resulted from an APC Computation. The indicator will also show in the Charges or Transactions viewers when the Status Indicator column has been added.

                                                  Code Summary Status Indicator Code Summary Status Indicator


                                                  Allow Query reasons to be separated by role

                                                  CACTWO-7077 (Enhancement)

                                                  In Mapping Configuration, the mapping of PhysicianQueryReasons now has a column called roles, which will allow the user to assign reasons to specified roles.

                                                  PhysicianQueryReasons PhysicianQueryReasons


                                                  TruCode™ standalone is not applying groupers by facility

                                                  CACTWO-7097 (Important)

                                                  If facilities have groupers assigned to them, the TruCode™ standalone is not applying that facility’s grouper when computing the DRG. This has been corrected.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.


                                                  CDI Alerts query template is not being selected

                                                  CACTWO-7112 (Important)

                                                  If a physician query is opened from CDI/Clinical Alerts and the user has created a signature in their user profile, a chosen query template was showing as blank. This has been corrected.


                                                  Audit Subtype values is not being retained on multiple audits

                                                  CACTWO-7114 (Important)

                                                  If an Auditor selects an audit subtype on the latest Audit, then moves to another viewer, upon going back to audits, older audits no longer show an audit subtype. This has been corrected.


                                                  Physician Coder submits are removing account from Coder’s worklist

                                                  CACTWO-7130 (Important)

                                                  If an account routed to a coder by an Auditor is subsequently submitted by a Physician Coder, the account is being removed from the routed Coder’s worklist. This has been corrected.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Workgroup Assigned Data criteria needs additional functionality

                                                  CACTWO-7140 (Important)

                                                  In Workflow Management, the criteria Workgroup Assigned Data is missing an additional field that would allow the entry of the Workgroup name to send the account to. This has been added.


                                                  Edit Procedure Details is not allowing deletion of units

                                                  CACTWO-7147 (Important)

                                                  When using Edit Procedure Details and deleting the number of units, the units were not saving blank. This has been corrected.


                                                  Missing Workgroup information in Audits

                                                  CACTWO-7150 (Important)

                                                  When creating an Audit, the Workgroup data was no longer showing in the header. This has been corrected.


                                                  Autoload is copying TruCode™ edits to no code accounts

                                                  CACTWO-7151 (Important)

                                                  If Auto-load is turned on and an account with no codes is opened after an account with TruCode™ edits, those edits are not clearing and are showing for the account with no codes. This has been corrected.

                                                  TruCode™ Users Only

                                                  This fix only applies to TruCode™ users.


                                                  Text change needed for PSI-08 algorithm output

                                                  CACTWO-7152 (Important)

                                                  The text in the PSI-08 algorithm shows ‘hip fracture’. This has been corrected to show as ‘other fracture’ when the code table is FXID instead of HIPFXID.


                                                  Fusion CAC Help has been renamed in the help menu

                                                  CACTWO-7153 (Enhancement)

                                                  In CAC 2, the help menu item of Fusion CAC Help has been renamed to Fusion CAC User Guide. The guide has been changed to a web page, rather than a pdf.


                                                  ‘Exists’ operator is not working for Assigned Dx Codes

                                                  CACTWO-7180 (Important)

                                                  When using a criteria of ‘Assigned Diagnosis Codes with POA of N’ with the “Exists” operator, the criteria was not working. This has been corrected.


                                                  Multiple Audits were not showing proper color in Navigation pane

                                                  CACTWO-7181 (Important)

                                                  Completed audit changes the color in the Navigation pane from red to a brownish yellow. If another audit is added, the color is not changing to red to indicate an open audit; it is remaining in the completed color. This has been corrected.


                                                  Document Pane Scroll bar jumps when loading new documents

                                                  CACTWO-7202 (Important)

                                                  When an account has a large number of documents, if the user clicks on an unopened document further down the roll, the scroll bar was jumping back up the document pane. This has been corrected.


                                                  Coder Scorecard was showing audits prior to last month

                                                  CACTWO-7203 (Important)

                                                  In the Coder Scorecard section of the Coder Personal Dashboard, audits were displayed that were opened or closed prior to last month. This has been corrected.


                                                  Drilldown columns are not showing in Scheduled Report

                                                  CACTWO-7216 (Important)

                                                  If a Scheduled report is created in Account Search using a search that includes a drilldown, the drilldown is not showing in the report when it is sent. This has been corrected.


                                                  DRG changes not showing in Audit Management

                                                  CACTWO-7218 (Important)

                                                  Changes to the MS-DRG and the MS-DRG Reimbursement were not being detected in an audit. This has been corrected.


                                                  V2.59 (Jun 2025)

                                                  V2.59.9302 Released 06/20/25

                                                  The notes below indicate changes and additions to the software. Please review these release notes carefully when deciding to apply a software update to an installation.

                                                  Each note is related to an issue tracking assignment number (starting with CACTWO) in the heading. Please refer to the change with this tracking assignment number when communicating questions or issues.

                                                  The heading also contains a parenthesized "Change Type", indicating the severity or importance of the change. The severities used are:

                                                  • Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions.
                                                  • Conditionally Critical - Recommended that this application be upgraded as soon as possible at all sites running previous versions matching the stated conditions.
                                                  • Important - Recommended upgrading the application if the customer is experiencing the issue denoted or currently applying a work-around for a specific non-functional feature.
                                                  • Enhancement - Recommended upgrading only if the specific functionality is desired.

                                                  Allow Validation Rules for Query Details

                                                  CACTWO-6102 (Enhancement)

                                                  A Validation Rule can now be created to trigger based on physician query details. The option of ‘Queries’ has been added in the For Each selection to allow this to be possible.

                                                  Create Query Rule Create Query Rule


                                                  Add Column to Tuning Dashboard Code drill down

                                                  CACTWO-6508 (Enhancement)

                                                  In the Tuning Dashboard, clicking on a code to open it will now display a new column ‘Submitted By’, with the submitter’s full name.

                                                  Submitted By Tuning Drill Down Submitted By Tuning Drill Down


                                                  Add Document Date to hover over

                                                  CACTWO-6777 (Enhancement)

                                                  In the Document tree, the hover over on the document name provides a physician’s name if it exists. The date of the document will now also show in the hover over if it exists.

                                                  Document Hover Over Document Hover Over


                                                  Change Mapping Values to Descriptions in Show History

                                                  CACTWO-6987 (Enhancement)

                                                  Show History shows the mapping value (key) in the Visual Difference column. This has been changed to use the description of the mapping (friendly name) so that the change is more easily understood.

                                                  Mapping Value in Show History Mapping Value in Show History


                                                  Add Active CDI/Clinical Alerts as Selectable Criteria

                                                  CACTWO-7024 (Enhancement)

                                                  Active Alerts has been added as a Grid Column, and has been added to Workflow Criteria so that workflow can be created using Active Alerts as a property.


                                                  Add an Option to Factor in Estimated Reimbursement Differences During the DRG Reconciliation Process.

                                                  CACTWO-7055 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new configuration setting is now available that can require DRG Reconciliation when there is a discrepancy in the estimated reimbursement between the Working DRG and the Final DRG. When a CDI performs reconciliation, a prompt appears allowing them to select which DRG to accept. A new “Reimb.” column has been added to display the estimated reimbursement amounts, assisting in the decision-making process.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  CACTWO-7058 (Enhancement)

                                                  Two new columns have been added to the Denial drill down in the Account Search menu:

                                                  • Denial – Created Date
                                                  • Denial – Closed Date
                                                    • will only populate if the “Denial Complete?” box is checked in the denial

                                                  Denial Closed and Created Date Columns Denial Closed and Created Date Columns


                                                  Allow Workgroups with a ‘0’ Count to Show in Account List

                                                  CACTWO-7118 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new setting has been created for those users that want to see their assigned workgroups that have a ‘0’ count in their Assigned To dropdown list.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Remove CPT Codes on Inpatient Accounts With LOS >= 5 days

                                                  CACTWO-7127 (Enhancement)

                                                  If an inpatient account has a length of stay equal to or greater than 5 days, suggested CPT codes will be automatically removed. The only CPT codes that will show in documents will be those manually added by a user.


                                                  Add Shift Reason column to Account Search Criteria

                                                  CACTWO-7134 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new option has been added to the dropdown list when adding criteria for an Account Search: Query Shift Reasons. This will show all shift reasons per query, including ‘other’ reasons that are based on a Mapping Configuration setting.

                                                  Query - Shift Reasons Column Query - Shift Reasons Column


                                                  Add Field for Appeal Received Date to the Denial Worksheet

                                                  CACTWO-7154 (Enhancement)

                                                  In Denial Management in the Navigation tree of an account, a new field has been added called “Decision Letter Received Date” to each denial appeal indicated. The name of this field will change depending on if it is the First, Second, or Third appeal.

                                                  First Appeal Letter Date Field First Appeal Letter Date Field


                                                  General TruCode™ Edits are now Accessible in Custom Rules Scripts

                                                  CACTWO-7158 (Enhancement)

                                                  General edits from TruCode™ can now be provided to validation rule scripts.

                                                  This is only relevant to the TruCode Encoder.

                                                  Add Detail to the Hover Over of a Grayed out Submit Button

                                                  CACTWO-7160 (Enhancement)

                                                  When the submit button on an account is grayed out, hovering over gives data on that disabling; Errors exist on account. Added to that is that statement: Check Code Summary for Validation Results.


                                                  Add Columns to the Transfer Codes viewer

                                                  CACTWO-7191 (Enhancement)

                                                  Additional columns can been added to the Transfer Codes viewer when searching by MRN. If a user searches for an MRN and more than two accounts share that MRN, the MRN selection box will appear, now displaying the newly added columns.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.

                                                  MRN Columns Transfer Codes Viewer MRN Columns Transfer Codes Viewer


                                                  Audit and Denial Workflow Criteria Does not Work for Multiple Instances

                                                  CACTWO-7193 (Important)

                                                  Audits and Denials workflow criteria previously did not support multiple worksheet instances. While multiple Audit and Denial worksheets could exist, the workflow criteria only evaluated the first worksheet, ignoring subsequent ones. As a result, if the first worksheet was closed and a newer one was open, the workflow would incorrectly interpret the status as closed. This has been corrected—workflow criteria will now evaluate the most recent worksheet when multiple instances are present.


                                                  TruCode™ Real-Time Edits Were not Using ASC Groupers When Applicable

                                                  CACTWO-7238 (Important)

                                                  Outpatient accounts using a primary grouper of ASC were not computing real-time edits. This has been corrected.

                                                  This is only relevant to the TruCode Encoder.

                                                  Audit Management Dashboard is not Allowing Facility Filter

                                                  CACTWO-7230 (Important)

                                                  The Audit Management Dashboard was showing as blank or as spinning circles when using the Facility Filter at the top of the page. This has been corrected.


                                                  Audits Were Missing from the Audit Dashboards

                                                  CACTWO-7231 (Important)

                                                  The Audit Management and Aduit Personal dashboards were not taking multiple audits into consideration in some instances. Secondary audits were only considered if the secondary audit occurred within 30 days of the first audit. This has been changed to a default of 6 months.


                                                  Incorrect Values Showing in Timeline of Show History

                                                  CACTWO-7234 (Important)

                                                  If certain fields were changed by the user, the timeline hover-overs in Show History was not showing the update value, instead showing the previous value. This has been corrected for the following fields: Admit Source, Admit Type, Discharge Disposition, Financial Class, Patient Type, and Payor.


                                                  Force Autoload is not Providing new Accounts After a Workgroup Change

                                                  CACTWO-7244 (Important)

                                                  If a workgroup assignment was changed for a Forced Autoload user while they were working their list, when they clicked ‘Get Next Account’, there was a chance that autoload was not finding anything. This has been corrected.


                                                  Add Coder ID to the Recurring Account Productivity Report

                                                  CACTWO-7251 (Enhancement)

                                                  A column to display the Coder ID has been added to the Recurring Account Productivity Report when it is exported as an XLSX.


                                                  Error Assigning Account to a Workgroup

                                                  CACTWO-7257 (Important)

                                                  When in Account Search and assigning an account to a workgroup, if the account did not have any prior workflow assignment, an error could occur. This has been corrected.


                                                  Visual Difference Column is Showing Coding Data

                                                  CACTWO-7261 (Important)

                                                  In Show History, if a workgroup name had a change after the 50th character, it would show in the Visual Difference column with coding data in it. This has been corrected.


                                                  Display Issues with Mappings Configuration and Scheduled reports

                                                  CACTWO-7268 (Important)

                                                  In smaller monitor resolutions, the delete buttons of mappings and scheduled user reports could overlap text. This has been corrected.


                                                  Edit All Codes not Displaying Admit Diagnosis Change

                                                  CACTWO-7277 (Important)

                                                  When in the Edit All Codes window, if the user edited the Admit Diagnosis by clicking the pencil to open the encoder’s code book, the change was not displaying correctly within the window. This has been corrected.


                                                  Prevent Coder From Closing Account With TruCode™ Codebook Open

                                                  CACTWO-7281 (Important)

                                                  To stop the possibility of a lockup, if a user tries to close out of an account when the TruCode™ code book is open, they will see the same red bar alert over the Cancel, Save, Release buttons that they would see if the encoder was open.

                                                  Close Encoder Error Close Encoder Error

                                                  This is only relevant to the TruCode Encoder.

                                                  Audit Worksheet Leaving Escalation box Open When Audit is Closed

                                                  CACTWO-7282 (Important)

                                                  Once an audit is closed, all fields should be read-only. The escalation response box was not following that rule, remaining open to the addition of text. This has been corrected.


                                                  Days not Showing for Schedules That are Hourly

                                                  CACTWO-7287 (Important)

                                                  When creating a scheduled report, if it was set as hourly and days were chosen, the days were not showing in the report data on the left. This has been corrected. Because there are 2 days that start with T and S, Thursday shows as R and Sunday shows as U.

                                                  Scheduled Hourly Report Scheduled Hourly Report


                                                  Scheduled Report Timing Changes Were not Displaying Properly

                                                  CACTWO-7288, CACTWO-7299 (Important)

                                                  After making a change to the timing of a scheduled report, the change was not showing on the report itself. This was happening whether the change was made via Account Search, or in the Scheduled Report page. This has been corrected.


                                                  Validation Rules are Showing Multiple Times When They Shouldn’t

                                                  CACTWO-7300 (Important)

                                                  A validation rule can show multiple times if it has a ‘For Each’ criteria in the rule. But when that For Each criteria was removed and the Validation Rule saved, it was still showing up multiple times in the Account. This has been corrected.


                                                  Correct Retrospective Followup Reviews Calculation

                                                  CACTWO-7301 (Important)

                                                  CDI reviews performed after a first submit when the DRGs match after reconciliation as retrospective follow up reviews on the CDI Activity and Detailed Activity reports were not being counted. This has been corrected so that they are now included in those calculations.


                                                  Show a Tertiary DRG if Applicable

                                                  CACTWO-7302 (Enhancement)

                                                  If there are 3 DRG’s on an account, all three will now show when printing the Code Summary page.


                                                  CACTWO-7303 (Enhancement)

                                                  In Account Search, additional columns can be added to Account Search to provide information on Baseline Working DRG computations.

                                                  Additional Configuration Required

                                                  Please contact Support to enable this feature.


                                                  Improved Performance Processing Responses From Solventum™ CRS on Large Accounts

                                                  CACTWO-7307 (Important)

                                                  To improve application performance, the calculation of validation rules will no longer happen during the processing of a response from Solventum™. Validation rule computations will resume after the response is fully processed.

                                                  Note

                                                  This fix only applies to sites using the Solventum encoder.


                                                  Medication evidence from CDI Alerts may not linking correctly.

                                                  CACTWO-7308 (Important)

                                                  Medication evidence, when clicked on from the Clinical Alerts viewer, may not show the medication in the Medications viewer. This has been corrected.


                                                  Add new Column to the CDI Financial Benefit Report

                                                  CACTWO-7312 (Enhancement)

                                                  A new column for ‘CDI Queries’ has been added just before the Baseline DRG Data block in the CDI Financial Benefit report.

                                                  CDI Queries Column CDI Financial Benefit Report CDI Queries Column CDI Financial Benefit Report


                                                  Audit is Able to be Saved Without a Coder of Record

                                                  CACTWO-7320 (Important)

                                                  In the case of a CDI being the last user in and the owner of an account before it is audited, the Coder of Record was blank. The audit should not be saveable if a coder is not selected. This has been corrected so that if an Auditor attempts to save or route an audit without a coder of record, a red error message will occur stating the coder of record needs to be set.

                                                  Coder of Record Needed Error Coder of Record Needed Error


                                                  Description change for the Coder DRG Summary report

                                                  CACTWO-7322 (Enhancement)

                                                  The description for the Coder DRG Summary report has been changed to read:

                                                  Coder DRG Summary Coder DRG Summary


                                                  Display codes only present in physician queries in the Unassigned codes tree

                                                  CACTWO-7327 (Enhancement)

                                                  Codes that are added via the Pre and Post DRG computation within a Physician Query will now show in the Unassigned Codes Tree if the codes are not present elsewhere on the account. The codes will be identified with a question mark in front of them, and cannot be edited unless assigned to the account or added to a document.

                                                  Note

                                                  This fix only applies to sites using the Solventum encoder.s


                                                  User is unable to unassign account without the Router role

                                                  CACTWO-7330 (Important)

                                                  A user could not unassign an account if the user was not granted the privilege to route accounts from Roles Management. This has been corrected.


                                                  Dashboard experiencing slowness due to retrieval query

                                                  CACTWO-7332 (Important)

                                                  When the Admin Dashboard loaded, its performance was being slowed down due to how the discharged pended accounts data was retrieved. This has been updated for faster performance.


                                                  Number of discharged accounts is incorrect on CDI Query Scorecard reports

                                                  CACTWO-7334 (Important)

                                                  If multiple queries on an account fell in the same month, the number of the discharged accounts was being counted more than once. This has been corrected.


                                                  Update the description of the Physician Coding Activity report

                                                  CACTWO-7337 (Important)

                                                  The phrase “then the total number of Queries created” has been removed, since this report does not include the number of queries created by physician coders.

                                                  Physician Coding Activity Description Physician Coding Activity Description


                                                  Default Search Field in Transfer Codes Viewer Updated to MRN#

                                                  CACTWO-7342 (Enhancement)

                                                  The default search field in the Transfer Codes viewer when accessed from the Navigation Pane within an account—has been updated to use the MRN# instead of the Account Number. If you prefer to revert the default back to Account Number, please contact Support to request a custom ticket.


                                                  Query Shift Reasons Now Display Mapping Friendly Descriptions

                                                  CACTWO-7343 (Enhancement)

                                                  Account Search, previously, when Query Shift Reasons were based on a mapping, the system displayed the mapping key instead of the user-friendly description. This has been updated so that the description from the mapping is now shown, improving clarity for users.


                                                  Audit Executive Summary Report is not Calculating Correctly

                                                  CACTWO-7348 (Important)

                                                  The number of Total Eligible Cases in the Audit Executive Summary report was being under counted. This has been corrected.


                                                  Physician Coder Manager Needs Access to the User Session Log report

                                                  CACTWO-7358 (Important)

                                                  The User Session Log has been updated to allow access to the physician coder manager as long as the privilege is checked in Role Management.


                                                  Denial Management is not Correctly Assigning the Coder Field

                                                  CACTWO-7365 (Important)

                                                  On a Denial, the coder field was not defaulting to the first submitting coder, or leaving as blank if not submitted. This has been corrected.


                                                  CDI Today’s Productivity Time in Chart Calculation

                                                  CACTWO-7371 (Important)

                                                  The time in the chart should be showing all the time spent, even if a working DRG is not calculated. It was not calculating time in chart that was worked and saved without a DRG. This has been corrected.


                                                  Change of Admit Source Should Clear DRGs

                                                  CACTWO-7386 (Important)

                                                  If a DRG is calculated and afterwards the Admit Source is changed, the DRGs should clear. This was not happening and has been fixed.


                                                  Physician Query Recipient is Being Overwritten by Responding Physician

                                                  CACTWO-7390 (Important)

                                                  When a different physician is set as the responder on a query, it was temporarily overwriting the recipient physician on the query. When saved, it was showing correctly in the physician query viewer, so the correct Physicians were being recorded. The appearance of the overwrite within the query has been corrected.


                                                  Changing Audit Type was not Clearing the Audit Subtype

                                                  CACTWO-7396 (Important)

                                                  With subtypes being attached to Audit Types through mappings, the subtype should be clearing in the audit if the type is changed. This was not happening and has now been corrected.


                                                  Pending Reason Historical Report is not Showing Correct Submitter

                                                  CACTWO-7392 (Important)

                                                  The Pending Reason Historical Report was showing the user that created the pending reason as the last submitter. This has been corrected.


                                                  Grid Column not Forcing a Save if a Title was Changed

                                                  CACTWO-7402 (Important)

                                                  If a user clicked in the Title field and made a change to the names, trying to move to another menu like Account List was not causing the ‘Do You Want to Save’ message to pop. This has been corrected.


                                                  The ‘Query For’ Checkbox is not Being Saved on the Template

                                                  CACTWO-7404 (Important)

                                                  When the ‘Query For’ box is checked on a query template worksheet, saving gave a green message, but if you went back into the template the checkbox was unchecked. This has been corrected.


                                                  Copy Row function for Flowsheet have ability to Copy to CDI/Clinical Alert

                                                  CACTWO-6767 (Enhancement)

                                                  Fusion CAC now supports copying an entire row of a discrete value from flowsheet viewer into CDI/Clinical Alerts, as outlined in the comment above. Any hidden columns will be excluded from the CDI/Clinical Alert evidence, enabling more precise control over which data is transferred.


                                                  Strike through Evidence if Document Code is no Longer Present

                                                  CACTWO-7132 (Enhancement)

                                                  Fusion CAC now enhances the CDI/Clinical Alerts experience by displaying evidence with a strike through in the viewer if the originally abstracted evidence is no longer present in the document. This typically occurs when a document has been amended and the evidence previously identified has been removed.


                                                  Use Friendly Document Name in Copy to CDI/Clinical Alerts Function

                                                  CACTWO-7241 (Enhancement)

                                                  When evidence is copied to a CDI/Clinical Alert from a document, the document type’s friendly name will be displayed instead of its interface name. Previously it was using interface name.


                                                  TruCode

                                                  While Fusion CAC is encoder agnostic, some organizations choose to use the TruCode Encoder Essentials embedded in the application.

                                                  TruCode Encoder Essentials is comprised of three controls: the CodeBooks control, the Research control, and the References control.

                                                  • CodeBooks – The CodeBooks control is used to search for ICD-9-CM, ICD-10-CM, ICD-10-PCS, CPT, and HCPCS codes. You can search the code books by terms or code.
                                                  • Research – The Research control is composed of four panes:
                                                    • DRG Analysis – This pane suggests alternate DRGs for an encounter based upon the current DRG, codes present in the encounter, and the patient status.
                                                    • ICD-10 – This pane lists ICD-10 equivalent codes for ICD-9 codes and ICD-9 equivalent codes for ICD-10 codes for educational purposes.
                                                    • Research – This pane lists references for a given code, as well as coding advice, crosswalk (a linking between ICD-9-CM procedure codes and CPT codes), and anesthesia crosswalk (a linking between surgical CPT and anesthesia CPT codes).
                                                    • Edits – This pane shows edits for a coded encounter.
                                                  • References – The References control contains the following references which can be searched, and some of which can also be browsed.
                                                    • AHA Coding Handbook
                                                    • Coders’ Desk Reference for Procedures
                                                    • Coding Clinic® (ICD-9-CM, HCPCS, and ICD-10-CM/PCS)
                                                    • CPT® Assistant
                                                    • Drug Data (Micromedex)
                                                    • Interventional Radiology
                                                    • Medical Dictionary (Dorland)
                                                    • Merck Manual Professional
                                                    • Official Guidelines (ICD-9-CM and ICD-10-CM/PCS)

                                                  Subsections of TruCode

                                                  CodeBooks

                                                  The CodeBooks control is used to search for codes by terms or code. You can use the code books to locate codes and post them to encounters, or simply to view a code with its surrounding notes and codes in a code book. The following code books are included in the CodeBooks control:

                                                  • ICD-10-CM Diagnosis and External Cause – These books consist of an alphabetic index where you can look up terms and a tabular of codes which includes all instructional notes.
                                                  • ICD-10-PCS Procedure – This book consists of an alphabetic index where you can look up terms and a table where you choose the specifics of the procedure to construct the ICD-10-PCS procedure code.
                                                  • ICD-9-CM Diagnosis, E Code, and Procedure – These books consist of an alphabetic index where you can look up terms and a tabular of codes including all instructional notes.
                                                  • CPT and HCPCS – In these books, both the index and tabular are searched simultaneously and tabular results are displayed based upon the search.

                                                  About the Indexes

                                                  When searching a code book by terms (except for the CPT and HCPCS books), the alphabetic index is searched and appears in the control. The following elements are shown:

                                                  • Search Results pane – This pane displays all index entries from the alphabetic index that match the search terms.
                                                  • Context bar – This bar shows the alphabetic index location of the index entry selected in the Detail pane. The Context bar changes when you focus on a different entry in the Detail pane.
                                                  • Detail pane – This pane displays the alphabetic index for the index entry selected in the Search Results pane.

                                                  TruCode CodeBook Search TruCode CodeBook Search

                                                  The display includes the following features:

                                                  • Backward and forward navigation – Click to move back and to move forward through the codes you have viewed.
                                                  • Subterm search – A subterm search searches through the subterms of a selected term. This is useful when there is a long list of subterms, you can use the subterm search rather than scrolling through the long list to find the subterm for which you are searching.
                                                  • Shortcuts – Keyboard shortcuts are available for some actions in the encoder. For example, you can press Ctrl + ↑ and Ctrl + ↓ to move the cursor though the fields and panes. For a complete listing for keyboard shortcuts, see Keyboard Shortcuts on page 23.
                                                  • Find All search – A Find All search looks for terms outside of the structure of the index. The search results display all occurrences of the terms in the code book that is searched. See Searching for All Occurrences of a Term on page 22 for more information.
                                                  • Table search – You can search the Hypertension table, Neoplasm table, and the Table of Drugs and Chemicals.
                                                    • Hypertension table – In the ICD-9-CM diagnosis code book, this table lists diseases due to hypertension.
                                                    • Neoplasm table – In the ICD-9-CM and ICD-10-CM diagnosis code books, this table lists anatomical sites alphabetically, with columns to indicate the code for each behavior type, such as primary, secondary, benign, etc.
                                                    • Table of Drugs and Chemicals – In the ICD-9-CM and ICD-10-CM diagnosis code books, this table contains a classification of drugs and chemicals to identify poisoning states and external causes of adverse effects.
                                                  • See and See Also cross-references – The indexes include See and See also instructions which are cross-references to other areas of the index.
                                                  • Synonym search – Synonyms are acronyms, abbreviations and shortcuts you can use to search the alphabetic index. Performing a search using a Synonym is the same as a search using terms. The Synonyms list contains a list of Synonyms that can be used in a search.
                                                  • Custom index lines – Custom index lines are alphabetic index entries that have been added to the official ICD-9-CM indexes. These entries are noted with the symbol before the alphabetic index line.
                                                  Note

                                                  The source of the custom index line is noted in parentheses.

                                                  • E code search – The E code index (external cause of injury index) functions the same as the other indexes. Like the other indexes, you access it from the code book drop-down list. Within the structure of ICD-9-CM and ICD-10-CM, there are many E codes with subterms of one or two words, such as by, with, due to, and from. You do not need to enter such terms in the encoder search.
                                                  Note

                                                  ICD-10-CM external cause of morbidity codes do not begin with an E. They begin with the characters V, W, and X.

                                                  • - icon – In the ICD-10-CM index, a - follows codes that require additional characters. To view the additional characters, click on the code to proceed to the tabular.

                                                  TruCode Blue Hyphen TruCode Blue Hyphen

                                                  About the Tabulars

                                                  The tabulars include all instructional notes, such as Includes, Excludes, Chapter, and Category notes. Codes included in the instructional notes, as well as in the tabular, are links that can be accessed.

                                                  The tabulars include the following features:

                                                  • Instructional notes – If a code has an instructional note, the symbol appears to the left of the code when the code is highlighted. Instructional notes contain Includes, Excludes, and Notes from the chapter, section, and category levels. To view the note, click on the symbol
                                                  • and – Click to move backward and forward through the codes you have viewed or move back to the index.
                                                  • Crosswalk – Crosswalk is a mapping between ICD-9-CM procedure codes and associated CPT codes. Using crosswalk you can gather ICD-9-CM and CPT codes simultaneously. For information on using crosswalk, see Using Crosswalk on page 31.
                                                  • Anesthesia Crosswalk – Anesthesia Crosswalk is a mapping between CPT surgical codes and CPT anesthesia codes. Using anesthesia crosswalk you can gather CPT surgical and anesthesia codes simultaneously. For more information on using anesthesia, see Using Anesthesia Crosswalk on page 32.
                                                  • Symbols – Symbols are used in the tabular to provide additional information. For most symbols, when you rest your mouse pointer on it, a description of the symbol appears.
                                                  • - In the ICD-10-CM tabulars, click following a code to expand the seventh character list, or click following a code to collapse the seventh character list.
                                                  • HCCs – Category numbers (example, ) for Hierarchical Condition Categories (HCCs) are shown by ICD-10-CM codes that are part of the HCC model. HCCs are used to risk-adjust population data for Medicare Managed Care programs. CMS is using two versions of the HCC model, versions 24 and 28. Both versions are in use and appear in the tabular until version 28 is fully implemented in 2026. You can view HCC details and the HCC version by resting your mouse pointer on a category number.
                                                  • ShortcutsKeyboard shortcuts are available for some actions in the code books. For example:
                                                    • In the ICD-10-CM tabular, you can press the right → key to expand the seventh character list and the ← key to collapse the list.
                                                    • Press Ctrl + ↓ to move forwards or press Ctrl + ↑ to move backward through the panes and resizers, and place the focus as appropriate.
                                                  • Research pane – The Research pane displays information about the selected code.

                                                  TruCode Tabular Parts TruCode Tabular Parts

                                                  Keyboard Shortcuts

                                                  The following shortcuts can be used in the CodeBooks control:

                                                  ShortcutLocationDescription
                                                  ← →ICD-10-CM TabularsWith the focus on a code with a seventh character, press to expand or collapse the seventh character list.
                                                  ← →ICD-10-PCS indexPress to move between term and code in a see or see also note. Press Enter to then move to the new index location or the table.
                                                  ← →ICD-10-PCS tablePress to move between the columns in the table.
                                                  ← →ICD-9-CM and ICD-10-CM indexesWith the focus on a row in the Neoplasm table, Hypertension table, or Table of Drugs and Chemicals; press to move through the columns.
                                                  ← →Vertical splitter barWith the focus on the splitter bar, press to resize the panes. Press Enter to confirm the new size.
                                                  ↑ ↓Indexes and tabularsPress to move backwards or forwards through the panes and resizers.
                                                  ↑ ↓ICD-10-PCS tablePress to move up and down through the items in a column.
                                                  ↑ ↓Horizontal splitter barWith the focus on the splitter bar, press to resize the panes. Press Enter to confirm the new size.
                                                  Ctrl + ↑, Ctrl + ↓Indexes and tabularsPress to move backwards or forwards through the panes and resizers.
                                                  FICD-9 or ICD-10 indexPress to start a subterm search.
                                                  EscSubterm search fieldPress to hide the subterm search field.
                                                  BackspaceICD-10-PCS tablePress to move back a column.
                                                  Designated KeyICD-10-PCS tablePress the letter or number key for the item in the highlighted column that you would like to select.
                                                  EnterIndexes and tabularsWith the focus in the search bar, press to perform a search.
                                                  EnterTabularsPress to post the highlighted code.
                                                  EnterICD-10-PCS tablePress to select the highlighted item in a column and move to the next column, or to post a completed code.
                                                  EnterSplitter barWhen resizing a pane using keyboard shortcuts, press to confirm the change.

                                                  Searching for an ICD-10-CM Code

                                                  1. Enter a term, terms, or code in the Search For field
                                                  Tip

                                                  The terms can be shortened to the first 3 or 4 letters and can be entered in any order. For a code, enter as little as the first 3 digits.

                                                  There are many E codes with subterms of 1 or 2 words (by, with, due, to, from, etc.). These terms do not need to be entered in the search.

                                                  1. Choose the Diagnosis, ICD-10-CM or External Cause, ICD-10-CM code book from the code book list.
                                                  2. Click Search to view the search results. The Search Results pane displays the results. Several results may be shown due to the search terms being found in multiple places in the alphabetic index.
                                                  Note

                                                  If you searched by a code you are taken directly to the tabular

                                                  Search for ICD-10-CM Code Search for ICD-10-CM Code

                                                  1. If there are additional secondary results that you want to view, click the Show all x search results link
                                                  Tip

                                                  The first results are the best results based upon the search terms uses. The secondary results are particularly helpful when you are unsure of the terms to enter for a disease.

                                                  1. To view the detail for a term in the Search Results pane, click on it

                                                  Search Results Search Results

                                                  1. If a cross-reference (see or see also note) is listed and you want to view it, click the link to view the related term.
                                                  Tip

                                                  For conditions that involve more than one code, the additional codes are listed in brackets. To view the first code in the tabular, press Enter. Then press Enter again to view the second code in the tabular. If there is a third code, press Enter again to view the third code. When you press Enter one more time, the codes are posted. More Than One Code More Than One Code

                                                  1. To select a code and open the tabular, click on the code in either the Search Results or the Detail pane.
                                                  Note

                                                  ICD-10-CM external cause of morbidity codes do not begin with an E. They begin with the characters V,W, or X.

                                                  1. In the tabular, check any instructional notes. To do so, click on the symbol to the left of the code to open the instructional notes. Access to Instructional Note Access to Instructional Note

                                                  Instructional Notes Example Instructional Notes Example

                                                  1. Perform any needed research.

                                                  2. The code may require a seventh character, a character that provides additional information about the diagnosis and the encounter. If this is the case, a appears to the left of the code. Do the following to select the seventh character for the code:

                                                    • Click to expand the list of seventh characters.
                                                    Tip

                                                    To expand a list of 7th characters, click the arrow to the left of the code, or when the code for which you want to view the 7th characters is highlighted, press the right arrow key.

                                                    Note

                                                    Some codes that require a 7th character do not contain six characters. When that is the case, an X fills and missing characters.

                                                    • Locate the applicable 7th character for the code Applicable 7th Character Applicable 7th Character
                                                  3. If the code book was accessed from an encounter, click on a code to post it

                                                  Tip

                                                  When the code is highlighted, you can press Enter to post the code.

                                                  Searching for an ICD-10-PCS Procedure Code

                                                  1. Enter the term, terms, or code in the Search for field.
                                                  Tip

                                                  Multiple terms can be entered in the Search for field. Terms can be shortened and entered in any order. For a code, you can enter as little as the first digit of the code.

                                                  1. Choose the Procedure, ICD-10-PCS code book from the code book list.
                                                  Tip

                                                  With the focus on the code book list, you can press the down arrow to scroll through the list of books.

                                                  1. Click Search or press Enter to view the search results. The Search Results pane displays the results. Several results may be shown due to the search terms being found in multiple places in the alphabetic index.
                                                  Note

                                                  If you search by a code, you are taken directly to the ICD-10-PCS table. If your search could be the start of either a code or a term, search results appear for both the partial code match and the index entries. PCS Search Results PCS Search Results

                                                  Searching for PCS Codes Searching for PCS Codes

                                                  1. If there are additional secondary results that you want to view, click the Show all x search results link.
                                                  Tip

                                                  The first results are the best results based upon the search terms used. The secondary results are particularly helpful when you are unsure of the terms to enter.

                                                  1. To view the detail for an index entry in the Search Results pane, click on it.
                                                  2. If a cross-reference (see or see also note) is listed and you want to view it, click the link to view the related term.
                                                  3. To select a code and open the ICD-10-PCS table, click on the code in either the Search Results or the Detail pane.
                                                  4. Perform any needed research.

                                                  Search Results for ICD-10-PCS Search Results for ICD-10-PCS

                                                  1. In the Body Part column of the ICD-10-PCS table, verify that the correct body part on which the procedure was performed is selected. If needed, click on a different body part.
                                                  Tip

                                                  Notice that the beginning of the code, the part selected in the index, appears in the Search Results pane.

                                                  1. In the Approach column, the procedure approaches for the selected body part, if any, are now listed.
                                                  Note

                                                  The column headings may be different than the ones listed in this example, depending upon the procedure.

                                                  1. Choose an approach.
                                                    • In the Device column, the devices for the selected approach, if any, are now listed.
                                                  Tip

                                                  To make changes to the Section, Body System, or Operation dor the code click the back arrow in the Body Part column heading or with the Body Part column selected, press the left arrow key. To move back to the last four columns in the table, click on the forward arrow in the Body Part column heading or with the Body Part column selected, press the right arrow key.

                                                  1. Choose a device.

                                                    • In the Qualifier column, the qualifiers for the procedure, if any, are now listed.
                                                  2. Choose a qualifier.

                                                  3. When you are finished selecting the aspects of the code, press Enter, or click Add Code in the Code Description pane or the 7th character column to post the code.

                                                  Searching for a CPT or HCPCS Code

                                                  The CPT and HCPCS index search uses both the index and tabular books simultaneously and displays tabular results based upon that search.

                                                  1. Enter terms or a code in the Search for field
                                                  Tip

                                                  The terms can be shortened to the first 3 or 4 letters and can be entered in any order. For a code, you can enter as little as the first two digits of the code.

                                                  1. Choose the CPT Tabular or HCPCS Tabular from the list of code books.
                                                  Tip

                                                  You can tab to the code book field and press C to select the CPT tabular or H to select the HCPCS tabular.

                                                  1. If you want anesthesia codes to be included in the search results, click the Include Anesthesia Codes check box.
                                                  2. Click Search to view the search results in the Search Results pane. The best matches are listed first.
                                                  Tip

                                                  The first results are the best results based upon the search terms used. The secondary results are particularly helpful when you are unsure of the terms to enter for a disease.

                                                  Search Results Pane Search Results Pane

                                                  1. To view the CPT and HCPCS modifiers with long descriptions, click the Modifiers link.

                                                  Long Descriptions Long Descriptions

                                                  1. Check any instructional notes. To do so, click on the symbol to the left of the code.

                                                  Access to Instructional Note Access to Instructional Note

                                                  1. Perform any needed research. If there are additional crosswalk results and you want to view them:
                                                    • Click the View all crosswalk results link in the Crosswalk section of the Research pane to view all crosswalk results.
                                                    • To view a code in the tabular, click on it.

                                                  View Code in Tabular View Code in Tabular - If you accessed the code book from an encounter, press Enter to post both the CPT code and the ICD-9-CM procedure code.

                                                  1. If you accessed the code book from an encounter, click on a code to post it.
                                                  Tip

                                                  When the code you want to add is highlighted, you can press Enter to post it.

                                                  Searching the Neoplasm, Drug, or Hypertension Table

                                                  1. To access a table, do one of the following:
                                                    • To access the Neoplasm table, enter the term Neoplasm or a shortened version of neoplasm, such as Neop, and the site of the neoplasm in the Search for field.
                                                    • To access the Table of Drugs and Chemicals, enter the term Table and the drug name or partial name in the Search for field.
                                                    • To access the Hypertension table, enter the term hypertension or htn and a term in the Search for field.
                                                  Note

                                                  The Hypertension table is only in the ICD-9-CM Diagnosis code book

                                                  1. Select Diagnosis, ICD-9-CM or Diagnosis, ICD-10-CM from the code book list.
                                                  2. Click Search to view the search results.
                                                  3. If there are additional secondary results that you want to view, click the Show all x search results link.
                                                  Tip

                                                  The first results are the best results based upon the search terms used. The secondary results are particularly helpful when you are unsure of the terms to enter.

                                                  1. To view the detail for a term in the Search Results pane, click on it.
                                                  Tip

                                                  If you scroll through a table, the column headers follow so you always see the description of the columns.

                                                  Search Results Search Results

                                                  1. To move through the columns, press → or ← key. The selected code is red.
                                                  2. If a cross-reference (see or see also note) is listed and you want to view it, click the link to view the related term.
                                                  Tip

                                                  In the ICD-9-CM Table of Drugs and Chemicals, when appropriate, the poisoning code is highlighted in red as well as the external cause code. This indicates that both of the codes are required to fully code the condition. When you press Enter both of these codes are posted. Note that this does not apply to the ICD-10-CM Table of Drugs and Chemicals; only a single code is needed to fully identify both the agent and the circumstances. Poisoning Code Highlighted Poisoning Code Highlighted

                                                  1. To select a code and open the tabular, click on the code in either the Search Results or the detail pane.
                                                  2. In the tabular, check any instructional notes. To do so, click on the symbol to the left of the code to open the instructional notes.

                                                  Access to Instructional Note Access to Instructional Note

                                                  1. Perform any needed research.
                                                  2. If you accessed the code book from an encounter, click on a code to post it.

                                                  Searching for All Occurrences of a Term

                                                  The Find All search provides the ability to search for terms outside of the structure of the ICD-9-CM or ICD-10-CM /PCS index. The search results display all occurrences of the terms in the code book that is searched, no matter where in the code book the terms are found.

                                                  1. Enter the term or terms in the Search for field.
                                                  Tip

                                                  The term can be shortened to the first three or four letters and can be entered in any order.

                                                  1. If you need to change code books, select the book from the list.
                                                  2. Click the Find All check box to select it.
                                                  3. Click Search to view the search results. In the Search Results pane, all index entries containing the terms are shown.
                                                  Note

                                                  Find All remains active until you remove the check from the Find All check box.

                                                  1. If there are additional secondary results that you want to view, click the Show all x search results link.
                                                  Tip

                                                  The first results are the best results based upon the search terms used. The secondary results are particularly helpful when you are unsure of the terms to enter.

                                                  1. Proceed with your search as usual. See the steps for the specific code book you are searching for additional information.

                                                  Searching for a Subterm

                                                  The Subterm search provides the ability to search for the subterm of a selected term in an ICD-9-CM and ICD-10-CM/PCS index (this type of search does not apply to the CPT or HCPCS code books). The subterm search is particularly useful when a term has many subterms.

                                                  1. Click the icon or press the F key.

                                                  Search Icon in TruCode Search Icon in TruCode

                                                  1. Enter the subterm in the Search subterms field and press Enter or click the up or down arrow.

                                                  Search Subterms Search Subterms

                                                  1. To continue searching for the subterm, press Enter or click the up or down arrow again.
                                                  2. Click the x to close the subterm search.
                                                  3. Proceed with your search as usual. See the steps for the specific code book you are searching for additional information.

                                                  Codebook Symbols

                                                  The following symbols appear in the CodeBooks control. For most symbols, when you rest your mouse pointer on the symbol, a description appears.

                                                  IconLocationDescription
                                                  Access to Instructional Note Access to Instructional NoteAll tabularsClick to access Instructional Note
                                                  New Code New CodeAll tabularsNew code
                                                  Modified Code Modified CodeAll tabularsModified code
                                                  Modified Note Modified NoteAll tabularsModified note
                                                  MCC MCCICD Diagnosis tabularsMajor Complication / Comorbid Condition
                                                  CC CCICD Diagnosis tabularsComplication / Comorbid Condition
                                                  MA MAICD Diagnosis tabularsMajor Complication / Comorbid Condition, Patient Discharged Alive
                                                  HCC HCCICD-10 Diagnosis tabularHierarchical Condition Category (HCC)
                                                  Access 7th Character Access 7th CharacterICD-10-CM tabularAccess the seventh character of a code (click the to expand or collapse the list)
                                                  Click to View Click to ViewCPTClick to view the image
                                                  Out of Num Order Out of Num OrderCPTCode appearing out of numerical order
                                                  Modifier 51 Exempt Modifier 51 ExemptCPTModifier 51 exempt
                                                  Conscious Sedation Conscious SedationCPTConscious sedation
                                                  Add-on Code Add-on CodeCPTAdd-on code
                                                  Pending FDA Approval Pending FDA ApprovalCPTPending FDA Approval
                                                  Telemedicine Service Telemedicine ServiceCPTTelemedicine Service
                                                  PLA Code PLA CodeCPTProprietary Laboratory Analyses (PLA) code
                                                  Satisfies Cat 1 Criteria Satisfies Cat 1 CriteriaCPTSatisfies Category 1 Criteria
                                                  Audio Only w/Modifer 93 Audio Only w/Modifer 93CPTCode may be used for reporting audio-only services when appended with modifier 93
                                                  Custom TC Content Custom TC ContentICD indexesCustom TruCode content (view the tooltip for details about the type of custom content)
                                                  Code has 7th Character Code has 7th CharacterICD-10-CM indexCode has a seventh character
                                                  Best Match Best MatchCrosswalkBest match (most common match or major topic)
                                                  Other Match Other MatchCrosswalkOther match (less common match or minor topic)

                                                  Research

                                                  The Research control consists of the following panes:

                                                  • DRG Analysis – This pane displays alternate DRGs based upon the current DRG, codes present in the encounter, and the patient status.
                                                  • ICD-10 –This pane displays equivalent ICD-10-CM / PCS codes for a selected ICD-9-CM code.
                                                  • Research –This pane contains reference and coding information applicable to a selected code.
                                                  • Edits – This pane displays edits for an encounter.

                                                  Using the DRG Analysis Pane

                                                  This tool suggests alternate DRGs based upon the current DRG, codes present in the encounter, and the patient status. The list of possible alternate DRGs includes the requirements that would need to be met and the applicable codes to add to the encounter if the documentation supports these changes.

                                                  1. Code the encounter.
                                                  2. Click on the DRG Analysis tab.

                                                  DRG Analysis Tab DRG Analysis Tab

                                                  1. To show all of the applicable codes for the suggested DRG and requirements, click the Show all codes… link at the end of the Codes list.
                                                  2. If you want to view more information about a code, click on the code to view it in the code book.

                                                  Using the ICD-10 Pane

                                                  The ICD-10 pane displays equivalent ICD-10-CM / PCS codes for a selected ICD-9-CM code, and equivalent ICD-9-CM codes for a selected ICD-10-CM / PCS code. ICD-10-CM / PCS will replace ICD-9-CM under CMS mandate; to help you familiarize yourself with the new ICD-10 codes, you can view code equivalents in the ICD-10 pane. Because of the differences in the ICD-9 and ICD-10 classifications, there are only a few instances where a one-to-one code match occurs. There are also times when there is no code equivalent, and sometimes there is a choice of one of many codes, or one of many of several groups of codes. Read the instructions provided in each message in the ICD-10 pane for detailed information.

                                                  1. Click on a code in an encounter to select it.
                                                  2. Click on the ICD-10 tab to display equivalent codes for the selected code.

                                                  Example of ICD-10-CM / PCS equivalents for a selected ICD-9-CM code: ICD-10 Tab ICD-10 Tab

                                                  Using the Research Pane

                                                  The Research pane contains information applicable to the selected code. The following information is shown in the Research pane as applicable:

                                                  • AHA Coding Handbook – AHA ICD-10-CM and ICD-10-PCS Coding Handbook is a guide to ICD-10-CM and ICD-10-PCS coding.
                                                  • Anesthesia Crosswalk – Anesthesia Crosswalk is a mapping between surgical CPT and HCPCS codes and anesthesia CPT and HCPCS codes. Using anesthesia crosswalk you can gather surgical and anesthesia CPT or HCPCS codes simultaneously.
                                                  • Coders’ Desk Reference – Optum Coders’ Desk Reference for Procedures provides descriptions of CPT codes.
                                                  • Coding Advice – Coding Advice is additional coding instructions, authored by TruCode and based on official sources.
                                                  • Coding Clinic – American Hospital Association (AHA) Coding Clinic for ICD-9-CM, Coding Clinic for HCPCS, and Coding Clinic for ICD-10-CM / PCS provide coding advice. The articles related to the selected code appear in reverse chronological order.
                                                  • CPT Assistant® – American Medical Association (AMA) CPT Assistant® provides CPT and HCPCS coding guidance. The articles related to the selected code appear in reverse chronological order.
                                                  • Crosswalk – Crosswalk is a mapping between ICD-9-CM procedure codes and associated CPT codes. Using crosswalk you can gather ICD-9-CM and CPT codes simultaneously.
                                                  • Interventional Radiology – MedLearn Interventional Radiology provides CPT and HCPCS procedure coding information. The articles related to the selected CPT or HCPCS code are shown. The articles related to the selected code appear in reverse chronological order.
                                                  • Official Guidelines – Guidelines for ICD-9-CM and ICD-10-CM coding approved by the cooperating parties: the American Hospital Association, the American Health Information Management Association, the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, and the National Center for Health Statistics. The articles related to the selected code appear in reverse chronological order.
                                                  • Merck Manual Professional – Merck Manual Professional provides detailed information to enhance ICD-10-CM and ICD-9-CM coding, including descriptions, etiologies, classifications, signs and symptoms, diagnoses, prognoses, and treatment information. The material is presented in articles, tables, videos, audio, 3D models, calculators, images, lab tests, and sidebars.
                                                  Note

                                                  Merck Manual Professional opens in the Merck manuals web site.

                                                  • Additional References – Other references, such as Dorland Medical Dictionary and Micromedex Drug Data. Also, references that do not pertain to the selected code appear here. For example, when an ICD-10-CM code is selected, Coders’ Desk Reference, Coding Clinic for HCPCS, Coding Clinic for ICD-9-CM, CPT Assistant, ICD-9-CM Official Guidelines, and Interventional Radiology appear in the additional references since they do not pertain to an ICD-10-CM code.

                                                  Using the References in the Research Pane

                                                  1. In the Research pane, review any reference information that appears for a code.
                                                  2. To read an article, click on the title to open the References control.
                                                  Note

                                                  Merck Manual Professional opens in the Merck manuals web site.

                                                  Research Pane Research Pane

                                                  1. To view a reference that contains no articles for the selected code (greyed out reference), expand the reference and click the link to open the References control.

                                                  Click Reference Pane Link Click Reference Pane Link

                                                  1. To view other reference information, click on the title of the reference in the Additional References section to open the References control and access the reference.

                                                  Additional References Additional References

                                                  Note

                                                  The ICD-10-PCS Definitions, Keys and Tables and ICD-10-PCS Reference Manual are PDF files and open in a browser window rather than in the References control. The MS-DRG Definitions Manuals, Merck Manual Professional, and Reference Library Archive link to websites and also open in your browser.

                                                  Using Coding Advice

                                                  1. In the Research pane, review the advice in the Coding Advice section. This advice pertains to the selected code in the code book or an encounter.
                                                  2. If the advice includes links to codes, click on the code to view it in the code book.

                                                  Research Coding Advice Research Coding Advice

                                                  1. From the code book, press Enter to post the code.

                                                  Using Crosswalk

                                                  1. With a CPT code or an ICD-9-CM procedure code highlighted in the code book or in an encounter, notice that any potential code matches appear in the Crosswalk section of the Research pane.

                                                  Crosswalk for an ICD-9-CM procedure code:

                                                  Research Crosswalk Research Crosswalk

                                                  1. Click on a code in the Crosswalk section of the Research pane to view that code in the tabular. If you accessed the code book from an encounter, press Enter to post both the CPT code and the ICD-9-CM procedure code.
                                                  2. If there are additional crosswalk results and you want to view them, click the View all crosswalk results link in the Crosswalk section of the Research pane to view all of the crosswalk results.

                                                  Using Anesthesia Crosswalk

                                                  If a surgical CPT code has potential corresponding anesthesia CPT codes, the codes appear in the Anesthesia Crosswalk section of the Research pane.

                                                  1. With a CPT code highlighted in the code book or in an encounter, notice that any potential anesthesia CPT code matches appear in the Anesthesia Crosswalk section of the Research pane.
                                                  2. Click on a code in the Anesthesia Crosswalk section of the Research pane to view that code in the code book. If you accessed the encoder from an encounter, press Enter to post both the surgical CPT code and the anesthesia CPT code.

                                                  Anesthesia Crosswalk Anesthesia Crosswalk

                                                  Using the Edits Pane

                                                  Edits for an encounter are shown on the Edits pane and are separated into the following categories:

                                                  • Medicare code edits – These edits are developed by CMS for inpatient encounters.

                                                  • Outpatient code edits – These edits are developed by CMS for outpatient encounters. Either the Outpatient Prospective Payment System (OPPS) or non-OPPS version of the Outpatient Code Editor (OCE) is used to generate these edits. By default the OPPS edits display here.

                                                  • TruCode edits – These edits include proprietary edits developed by TruCode as well as edits provided by regulatory and other agencies.

                                                  • Medical Necessity Edits – These are LCD / NCD (Local Coverage Determination and National Coverage Determination) edits.

                                                  • RAC Alert! – Information appears here to alert you that a CMS approved audit issue, in your facility’s recovery audit contractor (RAC) region, has been identified on the patient record. The RAC information shown is based on the facility MPN. The following types of CMS approved RAC targets are included:

                                                    • DRG validation
                                                    • HCPCS code vulnerability
                                                    • Inpatient medical necessity As the RACs expand their targets, the RAC targets will be updated accordingly.
                                                  • Validation – These are edits related to the general validity of field values in the encounter. This includes edits for invalid and out-of-range numbers and dates.

                                                  The following information is included for each edit:

                                                  • Edit message – A brief description of the edit.
                                                  • Source – For TruCode edits, the official source of the edit is listed, such as Coding Clinic, the CPT book, etc.
                                                  • Details link – When clicked, additional information about the edit is shown.
                                                  1. Click on the Edits tab to view the edits for the encounter.
                                                  2. To view edit details, click the details link.
                                                  3. To view a code in the code book, click a code link in an edit message.

                                                  Edits Pane Edits Pane

                                                  If the encounter has Medical Necessity Edits, you can also view the policy by clicking the policy link.

                                                  Medical Necessity Edits Medical Necessity Edits

                                                  Research Keyboard Shortcuts and Symbols

                                                  The following shortcuts can be used in the Research control:

                                                  ShortcutLocationDescription
                                                  ← →Tabs of Research controlWhen the focus is on the tabs, press to switch between the tabs (DRG Analysis, ICD-10, Research, and Edits).
                                                  EnterResearch panePress to collapse or expand a section.
                                                  ↑ ↓Research panePress to move between sections.

                                                  The following symbols appear in the Research control:

                                                  ShortcutLocationDescription
                                                  Edits Icon Edits IconEditsRecovery audit contractor (RAC) region alert
                                                  Coding Advice Icon Coding Advice IconCoding Advice, EditsCustom coding advice or custom edit

                                                  References

                                                  The References control contains the following references and features:

                                                  ReferenceDescription
                                                  AHA Coding HandbookAHA ICD-10-CM and ICD-10-PCS Coding Handbook is a guide to ICD-10-CM and ICD-10-PCS coding.
                                                  Coders’ Desk ReferenceOptum Coders’ Desk Reference for Procedures provides descriptions of CPT codes.
                                                  Coding ClinicAmerican Hospital Association (AHA) Coding Clinic for ICD-9-CM, Coding Clinic for HCPCS, and Coding Clinic for ICD-10-CM / PCS provide coding advice.
                                                  CPT Assistant®AMA CPT Assistant® provides CPT and HCPCS coding guidance.
                                                  Drug Data (Micromedex)Micromedex Drug Database contains brand name and generic drug information.
                                                  Official GuidelinesGuidelines for ICD-9-CM and ICD-10 coding approved by the cooperating parties: the American Hospital Association, the American Health Information Management Association, the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, and the National Center for Health Statistics.
                                                  Interventional RadiologyMedLearn Interventional Radiology provides CPT and HCPCS procedure coding information.
                                                  Medical Dictionary (Dorland)Dorland Illustrated Medical Dictionary contains definitions of medical terms and illustrations.
                                                  Search for fieldTo perform a new search, enter search terms or a code in this field.
                                                  References listChoose the reference you want to search from this list.
                                                  SearchWhen you are ready to perform a search, click Search.
                                                  Browse reference library listClick to choose a reference to browse in its entirety from the list.
                                                  Browse Issue linkClick this link to display the complete list of articles in the same issue as the currently-shown article.
                                                  Search Results paneLists the matches for your search. Click on a match to view it in the article pane.
                                                  Best Match Icon Best Match IconBest match results are identified with a green bullet point. A best match result is an article for which the searched-for code or term is a major topic of the article.
                                                  Other Match Icon Other Match IconOther results are identified with a black bullet point. These results are similar to the results of a Find All search; the code or term is found in the article, but is not the major topic of the article.
                                                  Article panePane that displays the selected article.
                                                  ← and →Click to move backward and forward through the articles you have viewed.
                                                  Previous Term Previous TermNext Term Next TermClick to view the next or previous term or code in the article that matches the search criteria. These buttons are active when the Highlight matched terms check box is selected.
                                                  Highlight matched terms check boxRemove the check from this box to view the article without highlighting the terms or code that match the search criteria. Check this box to highlight the terms or code that match the search criteria and to use the Previous Term and Next Term buttons.
                                                  Notes paneSome articles include a Notes pane below the article which contains information about superseded advice, corrected advice, and code updates.
                                                  Note

                                                  The last used reference is remembered. The next time the Reference control is visited the most recently used reference is automatically selected in the references list.

                                                  Reference Search Reference Search

                                                  Searching the References

                                                  1. From the References control, enter search terms or a code in the Search for field using the guidelines below:
                                                    • For AHA Coding Handbook, Coding Clinic, CPT Assistant, Interventional Radiology, or Official Guidelines, enter terms or a code.
                                                    • For the Drug Data reference, enter terms, drug name (generic or brand name), or an indication.
                                                    • For the Coders’ Desk Reference, enter a CPT code.
                                                    • For the Medical Dictionary, enter terms.
                                                  Note

                                                  You can also access the References control from the Research control. To do so, click on an article title in the Research control, or click on a reference in the Additional References list.

                                                  1. Choose a reference from the list.

                                                  Choose a Reference Choose a Reference

                                                  1. Then click Search. The search results appear with the article for the first result displaying in the Article pane.
                                                  Note

                                                  If you opened the References control by clicking on an article title in the Research pane, the article you selected displays in the Article pane; you do not need to search for it.

                                                  References Seach Pane References Seach Pane

                                                  1. To view a different article, click on the article in the Search Results pane to display it in the Article pane.
                                                  2. In Drug Data, do the following to view a drug listed in the indications:
                                                    • Click the next to an indication to expand it.
                                                    • Then click on a drug name to view that drug.

                                                  Click to View Drug Name Click to View Drug Name

                                                  1. In Interventional Radiology, click on an image in an article to view it larger.

                                                  Click to View Larger Image Click to View Larger Image

                                                  1. In the AHA Coding Handbook, you can show or hide answers to exercises:
                                                    • To show a specific answer in the exercise, rest your moue pointer on the ? icon for the question.
                                                    • To show all answers for the exercise, click show all.

                                                  AHA Coding Handbook AHA Coding Handbook

                                                  1. When viewing an article in the AHA Coding Handbook, Coding Clinic, CPT Assistant, Official Guidelines, or Interventional Radiology reference, you can browse the other articles in the issue:

                                                    • Click Browse Issue to display the articles in the issue in the Search Results pane. Browse Issue Browse Issue
                                                    • Click on an article title to view it or choose a different year and issue in the Search Results pane. Click on an Article Title Click on an Article Title
                                                  Note

                                                  Browsing an issue is only available when you have searched for a code or term before selecting an article. It is not available when you are already browsing.

                                                  1. To browse the AHA Coding Handbook, Coding Clinic, CPT Assistant, Official Guidelines, or Interventional Radiology reference:
                                                    • Click Browse and choose a reference to browse from the list. Browse Reference From the List Browse Reference From the List
                                                    • In the Search Results pane, click on the year for the issue you want to browse.
                                                    • Then click on the issue you want to browse.
                                                    • Click on an article title to view it. View Article by Clicking Title View Article by Clicking Title

                                                  Reference Keyboard Shortcuts and Symbols

                                                  The following shortcuts can be used in the References control:

                                                  ShortcutLocationDescription
                                                  ← →Splitter barWith the focus on a splitter bar, changes the size of a pane. Press Enter to confirm the size change.
                                                  ← →Search Results paneExpands or collapse Drug Data indications and issues you are browsing.
                                                  ↑ ↓Search Results paneMove up or down through the list of entries. Press Enter to view an entry in the Article pane.
                                                  ↑ ↓Article paneMove up or down through the article.
                                                  EnterSearch Results paneWhen the focus is on an article title in the Search Results pan, press to view the entry in the Article pane.
                                                  EnterSplitter barWhen resizing a pane using keyboard shortcuts, press to confirm the change.
                                                  Ctrl + ↑References controlPress to move backwards or forwards through the panes and resizers, and place the focus as appropriate.
                                                  Ctrl + ↓References controlPress to move backwards or forwards through the panes and resizers, and place the focus as appropriate.

                                                  The following symbols appear in the References control:

                                                  SymbolLocationDescription
                                                  Best Match Icon Best Match IconSearch Results paneBest match results are identified with a green bullet point. A best match result is an article for which the searched-for code or term is a major topic of the article.
                                                  Other Match Icon Other Match IconSearch Results paneOther results are identified with a black bullet point. These results are similar to the results of a find all search; the code or term is found in the article, but is not the major topic of the article.
                                                  View an Exercise Answer View an Exercise AnswerArticle paneRest your mouse pointer on this icon to view an exercise answer.